Fanuc Super Cap I M Operator

GE Fanuc Automation Europe
Computer Numerical Controls
Super Cap i M
Operators Manual
B-63294EN/02
TECHNOLOGY AND MORE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When using a machine equipped with FANUC Super CAPi M, the following safety precautions must be observed.
s1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B63294EN/02
WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damege to the machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety. Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine. Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being dameged if the approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being dameged, if the approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Cation.
` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s2
B63294EN/02
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
WARNING
1 Before attempting to use a conversational function (such as the creation/editing/run of machining programs, machining simulation, and the measurement of tool compensation), close the doors of the machine, and apply any other safety measures deemed necessary. Failure to apply the necessary safety precautions may result in the serious injury, or even death, of the user or bystanders. 2. Before proceeding to the next step of a procedure, check the display on the screen carefully to ensure that the data has been entered exactly as intended. If the machine is operated with incorrect data, the tool may collide with the machine and/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. 3. When the tool compensation function is being used before starting the machine, check the direction and amount of compensation so that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine. If the tool collides with the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be damaged, plus there is the danger of injury to the user or bystanders. 4. After you create a machining program using a conversational function, do not operate the machine using that program immediately. Instead, perform a machining simulation to ensure that the tool path and machining operation are satisfactory and that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine (including the jig). If the tool collides with the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be damaged, plus there is the danger of injury to the user or bystanders. 5. After you convert a machining program, created using a conversational function, to NC program format, do not operate the machine using that program immediately. Instead, confirm every step of the NC program, and ensure that the tool path and machining operation are satisfactory and that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine (including the jig). Before starting production machining, operate the machine without a workpiece mounted to ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece (were it to be mounted) or the machine (including the jig). If the tool collides with the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be damaged, plus there is the danger of injury to the user or bystanders. 6. Before starting to create a machining program using a conversational function, first check that all required data within the tool file, cutting condition file, and pretool list, and all parameters required for the conversational function, is set correctly. If any of the required data is not set correctly, the cutting conditions will not be set correctly, possibly resulting in damage to the tool, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
s3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B63294EN/02
WARNING
7. When you operate the machine using a machining program created using a conversational function or a machining program generated by converting another machining program to NC program format, be particularly careful to use the correct tool compensation data. If the machine is used with incorrect data, the tool may collide with the machine and/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.The method of measuring the tool compensation amount varies depending on the machine tool builder. Before starting measurement, therefore, users must read and become totally familiar with the relevant manual(s), supplied by the machine tool builder. 8. After pressing the power ON button, do not touch any key on the keyboard until the screen display appears. Some keys are allocated to maintenance or other special operations. Pressing any of these keys may result in the machine not behaving as expected.
s4
B63294EN/02
Table of contents
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1
1. WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s2 2. GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s3
I. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. MANUAL OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. SYMBOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. GENERAL PROCEDURE FROM PROGRAMMING TO EXECUTION . . . . . . . . . 4. OPERATING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool Offset Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
3 4 5 7
7 7 7 7
II. Super CAPi M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 1.2 1.3 Work Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Machining Program [Basic Menu 1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing a Machining Program [Basic Menu 1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 Modify function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delete function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimal process editing function (automatic alteration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimal process editing algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimal process editing function (manual alteration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool path drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Animated simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machining time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background drawing (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the screen display colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes on drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC statement output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms raised during NC statement output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings related to the reader/punch interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial value file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
11
11 12 29
30 32 34 37 40
1.4
Machining Program Optimization [Basic Menu 2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3
42
44 46 48
1.5
Machining Program Check [Basic Menu 3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6
50
50 57 62 63 66 68
1.6
NC Statement Output Function [Basic Menu 4] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3
69
69 72 73
1.7
Conversational Data Setting and Reference [Basic Menu 8] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.7.1 1.7.2
74
76 78
c1
Table of contents
1.7.3 1.7.4 1.7.5 1.7.6 1.7.7 1.7.8 1.7.9 1.7.10 1.7.11
B63294EN/02
79 80 81 83 84 85 86 93 94
Tool list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pretool list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categorized tool directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting condition file A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cutting condition file B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Offset file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC statement conversion comment file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arithmetic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Embedding tool management numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8
Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3
96
96 100 101
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

2.1 2.2 Types of Machining Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 2.2.6 2.2.7 2.2.8 2.2.9 2.2.10 2.2.11 Initial setting (ZI01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . End of program (ZI02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B axis rotation (ZI03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC language preparation (ZI04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All copy (Random) (ZI05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All copy (Pattern) (ZI06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group copy (Random) (ZI07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group copy (Pattern) (ZI08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group copy (Turn) (ZI09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All copy mirror (ZI10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group copy mirror (ZI11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drilling (ZH01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peck drilling (ZH02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boring (ZH03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fine boring (ZH04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backboring (ZH05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapping (ZH06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaming (ZH07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spot facing (Circle cut) (ZH08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Group of points (ZL01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line (Same space) (ZL02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line (Differ SPC) (ZL03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid (ZL04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parallelogram (ZL05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolt hole circle (ZL06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc (Same space) (ZL07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc (Differ space) (ZL08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (Random) (ZL09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (Pattern) (ZL10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facing prepare (ZF01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square (unidir) (ZF02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square bidir (ZF03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circle unidir (ZF04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circle bidir (ZF05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square (Ring) (ZF06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102 104
106 108 109 110 112 114 116 117 119 121 123
2.3
Hole Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 2.3.4 2.3.5 2.3.6 2.3.7 2.3.8
125
126 131 133 135 137 139 141 143
2.4
Hole Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.4.9 2.4.10
145
147 148 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157
2.5
Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.5.5 2.5.6
159
160 164 167 169 170 171
c2
B63294EN/02
2.5.7 2.5.8 2.5.9
Table of contents
Circular surface (Ring) (ZF07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (Random) (ZF08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (Pattern) (ZF09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side preparation (ZS01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square outside (ZS02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square inside (ZS03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circle outside cutting (ZS04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circle inside (ZS05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track outside (ZS06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track inside (ZS07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One side (ZS08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour prepare (ZS09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (Random) (ZS10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (Pattern) (ZS11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pocketting prep. (ZP01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Square pocket (ZP02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circle pocket (ZP03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Track pocket (ZP04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygonal pocket (ZP05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polygonal pokt (with radius) (ZP06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grooving (ZP07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cont pocket prep (ZP08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour grooving preparation (ZP09) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (random) (ZP10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (pattern) (ZP11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning (ZN01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line (ZN02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc (ZN03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program stop/end (ZN04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feed rate (ZN05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coolant (ZN06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spindle (ZN07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NC language (ZN08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 + 1/2 Convex cut prep. (ZV01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVX QUAD PR (ZV02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVX hemisphere (ZV03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVX half CYL L (ZV04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CVX HLF CYL ring (ZV05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (random) (ZV06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (pattern) (ZV07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 + 1/2 Concave cut prep. (ZC01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCV QUAD PR with Corner Rounding (ZC02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCV hemisphere (ZC03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCV half CYL L (ZC04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CCV HLF CYL ring (ZC05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (random) (ZC06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy (pattern) (ZC07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour side cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour pocketing A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 173 173
2.6
Side Cutting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.6.6 2.6.7 2.6.8 2.6.9 2.6.10 2.6.11
174
176 185 193 195 196 197 198 199 202 203 203
2.7
Pocketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.7.6 2.7.7 2.7.8 2.7.9 2.7.10 2.7.11
204
206 212 215 216 217 221 222 225 231 234 234
2.8
NC Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8.1 2.8.2 2.8.3 2.8.4 2.8.5 2.8.6 2.8.7 2.8.8
235
236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243
2.9
2 + 1/2 Convex Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9.1 2.9.2 2.9.3 2.9.4 2.9.5 2.9.6 2.9.7 2.10.1 2.10.2 2.10.3 2.10.4 2.10.5 2.10.6 2.10.7 2.11.1 2.11.2
244
245 249 256 258 260 260 260
2.10 2 + 1/2 Concave Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
261
262 269 274 275 276 276 276
2.11 Contour Cutting Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
277
277 294
c3
Table of contents
2.11.3 2.11.4 2.11.5 2.11.6 2.11.7 2.11.8 2.11.9 2.11.10 2.12.1 2.12.2 2.12.3 2.12.4 2.12.5 2.12.6 2.13.1 2.13.2 2.13.3 2.14.1 2.14.2 2.14.3
B63294EN/02
300 305 308 326 332 333 335 337
Contour pocketing B (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculating a contour figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour repetition function (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour figure window function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions and rules on calculating the contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uaxis machining menu items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and editing a Uaxis machining program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking a Uaxis machining program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uaxis machining program NC statement output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tool file for Uaxis machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restrictions imposed on Uaxis machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screen configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Program restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.12 Uaxis Machining (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
343
343 345 371 373 376 379
2.13 Setup Guidance Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
382
382 383 397
2.14 Direct Operation of C.A.P. Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
400
400 400 406
III. PARAMETERS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

1. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Parameters Related to Graphic Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Executor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAP Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAP File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Workpiece Material Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VGA Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 417 418 424 429 432 438 440
2. ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
2.1 2.2 Alarms Related to Machining Other than Contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarms Related to Contouring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 442
IV. GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

1. GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
c4
I. OVERVIEW
B63294EN/02
1. MANUAL OVERVIEW
1. MANUAL OVERVIEW
This manual describes the functions of FANUC Super CAPi M. For the other functions, refer to the operators manual describing the NC of the FANUC Series 16/18/21. The specifications and use of FANUC Super CAPi M depend on the specifications of the machine operators manual. Be sure to refer to the manual written by the machine tool builder. The functions of a CNC machine tool system are determined not only by the CNC but also by the combination of the machine, power magnetics circuit, servo system, CNC, operators panel, and other units. It is impossible to explain the functions, programming, and operations for each of the combinations. This manual describes the conversational input functions of the CNC. For the functions of each CNC machine tool, refer to the manual written by the machine tool builder. FANUC Super CAPi M are compatible with the following models. These model names are abbreviated in this manual.
Product name
FANUC Series 16iMA FANUC Series 18iMA FANUC Series 21iMA FANUC Series 16iMB FANUC Series 18iMB FANUC Series 21iMB
Abbreviation
16iMA 18iMA 21iMA 16iMB 18iMB 21iMB
FANUC Super CAPi M consist of custom macro programs. In addition to standard custom macro instructions, many conversational macro instructions (for example, a macro instruction for drawing) are provided. FANUC separately provides the FANUC standard program, a conversational automatic programming function created from custom macro programs by FANUC. (The FANUC standard program can be purchased as a ROM module.) By adding to and modifying the custom macro program of the FANUC standard program, and each machine tool builder can create his own conversational automatic programming function incorporating the machining knowhow. This manual describes the conversational automatic programming function provided by FANUC. The specifications depend on each machine tool builder. Ask the machine tool builder beforehand whether they have added to or modified the standard function. The description in the manual written by the machine tool builder has priority over that in this manual. This manual gives a lot of information to the reader. It, however, cannot detail all the operations that must not be attempted or cannot be executed. The system can execute only functions that are explicitly said to be possible in this manual. Notes in this manual describe particular conditions in minute detail. The note may include terms which have not yet been explained. If such terms are found, skip the note and read the remaining part of the manual. Then, read the note again.
1. MANUAL OVERVIEW
B63294EN/02
2. SYMBOLS
This manual indicates key operations by using the following symbols: (1) An MDI key (on which alphanumeric characters or symbols are marked) is enclosed in a pair of angle brackets (<>). Example <PROG> <OFFSET> (2) A soft key (shown at the bottom of the screen) is enclosed in a pair of square brackets ([]). Example [C.A.P.] [EXEC] (3) Cursor keys are represented as follows: (4) Page keys are represented as follows
B63294EN/02
1. MANUAL OVERVIEW
3. GENERAL PROCEDURE FROM PROGRAMMING TO EXECUTION

The flowchart below shows a general procedure from programming to machining with the conversational automatic programming function.
Start
Creation and editing of a program by the conversational automatic programming function
See Sections 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, and 1.7 of Chapter II. (EDIT and back ground edit modes)
Optimization of the machining program
See Section 1.4 of Chapter II. (EDIT and back ground edit modes)
Program check by drawing
See Section 1.5 of Chapter II. (MEMORY mode)
NC program conversion
See Section 1.6 of Chapter II. (MEMORY mode)
Machining
(MEMORY mode)
End
1. MANUAL OVERVIEW
B63294EN/02
WARNING
WARNING
Before starting to create a machining program using a conversational function, first check that all required data within the tool file, cutting condition file, and pretool list, is set correctly. If any of the required data is not set correctly, the cutting conditions will not be set correctly, possibly causing damage to the tool, or even injury to the user or bystanders. Before proceeding to the next step of a procedure, carefully check the contents of the screen display to ensure that the data has been entered exactly as intended. If the machine is operated with incorrect data, the tool may collide with the machine and/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
B63294EN/02
1. MANUAL OVERVIEW
4. OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
4.1 Input Data
(1) On the conversational data input screen, enter lengths and coordinates in millimeters (metric mode) or inches (inch mode). (2) Usually, entries with an asterisk (*) need not be specified in the FANUC standard macro. Specify them only when required. Data cannot be set in entries marked with J. Those entries are set automatically according to the settings of options and parameters. (3) This system is not applicable to machines operating in ISC (0.1 um) mode. (4) This system is not applicable to sets 48 and 300 of the workpiece coordinate system.
4.2 Background Editing

The following operations cannot be executed during background editing: (1) Drawing of the machining profile, animated simulation (Can be executed if the optional background drawing function is provided.) (2) NC statement output function (3) Setting and changing the tool offset value in the list of tools to be used (4) Setting and changing a tool file
4.3 Tool Offset Number

When contour side cutting or contour pocket cutting is carried out, the offset data in parameter No. 9404 is automatically overwritten. The offset number and offset data cannot be used. When 0 is set in that parameter, the following offset data is used instead. (1) Data No. 32 when 32 sets of tool offset are specified (2) Data No. 64 when 64 sets of tool offset are specified (3) Data No. 99 when 99 sets of tool offset are specified (4) Data No. 200 when 200 sets of tool offset are specified
4.4 Parameters
Be sure to set the following parameter bits to 0. (1) SGD (bit 0) of parameter No. 3112 = 0 (servo waveform display) (2) LVK (bit 6) of parameter No. 5003 = 0 (cancellation of tool length compensation) (3) OIM (bit 0) of parameter No. 5006 = 0 (switching of tool compensation between inch and metric modes)
II. Super CAPi M
B63294EN/02
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M

1.1 Work Overview
Conversational automatic programming is a technique for creating machining programs by entering the dimensions of drawings and other data on the CRT screen. To use the conversational automatic programming function, press the <PROG> key on the MDI panel, then press the soft key [C.A.P.]. (The [C.A.P.] key is displayed on the screen only when the NC unit is in the EDIT or BGEDIT mode.) The menu screen shown below (basic menu screen) is displayed. Conversational programming begins with the basic menu screen.
In general conversational programming, select menus 1 to 4 in that order. Menu 8 is used to reference or set a conversational file or to input or output data from or to external equipment. Select menu 8 only when required. Before using the following menu, set the NC unit in the corresponding mode: [1] Creating and editing a machining program : EDIT or BGEDIT mode [2] Optimizing a machining program [3] Checking a machining program [4] NC program conversion [8] Conversational data : EDIT or BGEDIT mode : AUTO mode : AUTO mode : The mode of the NC unit does not matter.
The following sections describe each menu with examples.
11
B63294EN/02
1.2 Creating a Machining Program [Basic Menu 1]

A machining program is created by the following procedure:
Start
1 2 3 4
> INPUT PROGRAM NO. Program creation screen Automatic

PROG. SELECT
Title input
Enter a program name.
Initial setting
Enter the initial data (workpiece material, coolant, reference coordinate system) required for machining. Select a desired machining menu.
HOLE
Selection of a machining menu
FACING SIDE POCKET NC CUTING /GROOV LANGUAGE
2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY
PROGRM END
Specification of the machining data
In response to messages displayed on the screen, (1) Specify a machining method. Position on the Zaxis, tool (preparation menu) (2) Specify the figure data. Positions on the X and Yaxes (figure menu)
Automatic
Program end
(3) Specify the process end. Repeat these steps until all machining data is speci fied. Select [PROGRM END].
End
2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY
PROGRM END
12
B63294EN/02
First, the operator selects a machining menu, then enters the type of machining, figure of product, and other data in response to inquiries on the screen. The operator repeats this process to generate a machining program.
*1
The machining data is specified in the following procedures. The menu of (1) below is automatically displayed only once immediately after the machining menu is selected. (1) Preparation menu (2) Figure menu Hole position This step can be repeated. (3) Process end Process end
Drilling
Facing start menu
Corresponding facing menu This step can be repeated.
Process end
. Side cutting start menu
Corresponding side cutting menu This step can be repeated.
Process end
. Contouring start menu
Corresponding contouring menu
Contour end
. Pocketing start menu
Corresponding pocket cutting menu This step can be repeated.
Process end
Contour pocket / grooving start menu
Corresponding contouring menu
Contour end
NC language
2 +1/2 start
Corresponding 2 +1/2 menu This step can be repeated.
Process end
Auxiliary
A single machining process has the machining data of the [START MENU], [FIGURE MENU], and [PROCES END]. The system checks whether the machining data consists of the above three elements and prevents the operator from creating a machining program which cannot be executed.
13

*2
B63294EN/02
The screen on which the machining data is specified is basically configured as shown below. The A, B, and C windows show different data.
Ten soft keys Return key Next key
A B C
: Program screen that is always displayed. The data in the B and C windows depend on the data input. The A window always lists the existing programs. : Guide screen that displays the data of the C window with a drawing or tool file. The cursor is placed on the corresponding parameter in the C window. : Data input screen. Basically, the data (parameter) is displayed and specified in this window. The data which cannot be displayed in this window (data to be determined automatically,cuting conditions, etc.) is displayed and specified in the B window.
Return key : Displays the previous screen. When the return key can be used, [<] is indicated here. Next key : Displays the next part of the currently displayed sof keys. When the next key can be used, [+] is indicated here.
14
B63294EN/02
Examples are given below: WARNING
The machining programs presented in the following examples differ from those used for actual machining. Actual data will vary from one machine model to another. Refer to the relevant manual(s), supplied by the machine tool builder, for details. If the set data is incompatible with the characteristics of a specific machine, a machining program created using the conversational function will not be able to operate as intended. If a machining program fails to operate correctly, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. 1. Select [1] on the basic menu screen. The following program list screen is displayed: (For details of the program list, see Subsec. 1.8.1.)
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 PROGRAM NO. USED: MEMORY AREA USED: NO. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 TYPE CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP NAME TEST1 TEST2 TEST3 TEST4 TEST5 TEST6 TEST7 EDIT 99 3704 SIZE 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
7 FREE: 560 FREE:
DEMO SUS304 FCD45 SKD11 SUS41 ALUME SPECIAL
CREATE DATA 941006 11:47 941006 11:49 941006 11:50 941006 11:51 941006 11:52 941006 11:53 941006 11:56
INPUT PROGRAM NO.

< PROG. SELECT PROG. COPY
>_
PROG. MODIFY LIDELETE TITLE BRARY
2. Enter program number 1000 and press the [PROG. SELECT] key. (When the program is present, the editing screen is displayed. See the next section.) A program can also be created by entering a program number and pressing the <INPUT> key in MDI. When a new program is to be created, the name input screen is automatically displayed in the bottom window. On this screen, specify a desired program name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters, entered using the MDI keys. Then, press the [INPUT TITLE] key. The program name is registered in part program storage. The program name can also be registered by pressing the MDI <INPUT> key. To abandon the registration, press the [CANCEL] key.
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 PROGRAM NO. USED: MEMORY AREA USED: NO. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 1000 TYPE CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP NC NAME TEST1 TEST2 TEST3 TEST4 TEST5 TEST6 TEST7 CREATE 99 3696 SIZE 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
8 FREE: 640 FREE:
DEMO SUS304 FCD45 SKD11 SUS41 ALUME SPECIAL
CREATE DATA 941006 11:47 941006 11:49 941006 11:50 941006 11:51 941006 11:52 941006 11:53 941006 11:56
TITLE INPUT : 1 PROG. TITLE : =MANUAL1_
INPUT PROGRAM TITLE.(WITHIN 16 CHAR)

< INPUT TITLE CANCEL
15
B63294EN/02
3. When the [INPUT TITLE] key is pressed, the initial setting screen is automatically displayed in the lower window, as shown below: When the cursor is positioned to an entry in window C, a message relating to the entry is displayed above the soft keys. The operator usually enters necessary data, as instructed by the message. On the guidance in window B, the second cursor blinks at the position corresponding to the current entry. Being able to see both cursors enables the easy input of data.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE O1000(MANUAL1) PROCESS PAGE :01/ CREATING
MATERIAL,COOLANT AND Z SEFTY LMT ARE SURE TO INPUT. TOOL NAME Y Y Y WORK CO 1 (G54) X WORK CO 2 (G55) X WORK CO 3 (G56) ... X
MACHINE ZERO POINT I Y Z SAFETY LMT
X WORK COORDINATES X= Y= Z= B= * * * *
AUXILIARY MATERIAL COOLANT Z SAFTY LMT COORDINATES
:INITAL SETING : Q= : M= : I= : W= WORK CO 1
X Y Z B
AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
1/2 : : : :
WORK SHAPE : C= MAT X COORD :YA= MAT Y COORD :YB= MAT Z COORD :YC=
* * * *
<
GRAY CAST
DCTIL CAST
LOLED CARBON ALLOY STL STL STL
STAINL ALMIESS NUM
SPECIAL
GUIDAN INPUT CE END
WARNING
After completing input of the initial setting data, ensure that all required data is set correctly. If any data is not set correctly, machining will be performed under abnormal cutting conditions, such that the workpiece may be damaged or the tool may collide with the machine and/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. The soft keys that are displayed depends on the position of the cursor. In the example below, the soft key indicated by is selected: When the cursor is on [Q: MATERIAL]
GRAY CAST
DCTIL LOLED CARBON ALLOY CAST CAST STL STL
STAINL ALMIESS NUM
SPECIAL
GUIDANCE
INPUT END
When the cursor is on [M: COOLANT]
COOLNT COOLNT OFF M7 M8 M9
GUIDANCE
INPUT END
When the cursor is on [W: COORDINATES]
WOK WORK CO SET CO 1
WORK CO 2
WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
GUIDANCE
INPUT END
16
B63294EN/02
4. Of the following soft keys select the [GUIDANCE] key:
The guidance in the B window disappears and the screen shown below is displayed. After the guidance is turned off, screens displayed later on do not contain the guidance. Operators familiar with this system can enter the data only with messages, without the guidance. When the soft key [GUIDANCE] is pressed again, the guidance is turned on (the soft key display is reversed; that is, reverse video). In this data, the screens displayed later contain the guidance.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME PAGE :01/ CREATING TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL
PROGRAM DIR. : MATERIAL : COOLANT : Z SAFTY LMT : COORDINATES :
1 Q= M= I= W=
GRAY CAST COOLNT M7 20 WORK CO 1
X Y Z B
AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
: : : :
X= Y= Z= B=
* * * *
MM OR INCH
: A=G21 MM
INPUT THE Z COORD WHICH DO NOT INTERFERE WITH WORKPIECE AND JIG.
< GUIDAN INPUT CE END
5. After entering all desired data, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The system automatically checks the input data. If the system finds an invalid value among the input data, the cursor is placed on that data and an alarm message is displayed. If all the input data is correct, the program creation screen is displayed again. The process of initial setting is incorporated into the following screen: NOTE If the <INPUT> key is pressed, the cursor is moved to the next option. Only pressing the <INPUT> key does not change the current option. If the <INPUT> key is pressed after a value is specified, the value is entered as the data. If the <INPUT> key is pressed without specifying a value, the cursor moves to the next option and no data is entered. If the <CAN> and <INPUT> key combination is pressed, blank data can be input.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PROCESS INITAL TOOL NAME PAGE :01/ CREATING TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< HOLE FACING SIDE C POCKET NC LAN UTING TING GUAGE 2+1/2 CVX 2+1/2 AUXILI CCV ARY PROGRM END
17
B63294EN/02
6. Select a desired machining menu. When the soft key [FACING] is selected, for example, the following screen is displayed:
PROGRAM O1000 01 SQUARE UNIDIR PAGE :01/ CREATING 03 CIRCLE UNIDIR
02 SQUARE BIDIR
04 CIRCLE BIDIR
05 SQUAREFRING
06 CIRCLE DRING
07 COPY RANDOM
08 COPY PATTRN
WHEN COPYING EACH MENU,SELECT EITHER ONE IN ADVANCE. SELECT SOFTKEY.

< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES END CE
7. When the soft key [GUIDANCE] is pressed, the following screen is displayed. The numeric values indicated on the soft keys are changed to characters.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING PAGE :01/ CREATING TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< SQUARE SQUARE CIRCLE CIRCLE SQUARE UNIDI BIDIR UNIDI BIDIR FRING CIRCLE COPY COPY GUIDAN PROCES END DRING RANDOM PATTRN CE
8. Select a detailed menu required for facing. When the soft key [SQUARE BIDIR] is selected, for example, the facing start menu (tool data input) is automatically displayed in the bottom window, C, and the right window, B.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING PAGE :01/ CREATING
MAX NUM.OF TOOLS2 T E*2D
J V Y
Z U
FACING GROUP COPY Z POINT REMOVAL PITCH
:FACING PREP. :YB= UNUSED FINISHING : Y= : Z= THICKNESS : U= : V= TOOL ID NO. : T= : J=
0.
INPUT THE Z COORD OF THE FINAL MACHINED SURFACE.

< F.S. AUTO PROCES WINDOW TOOL GUIDAN INPUT INFORM CE END
18
B63294EN/02

9. Enter desired data, responding to messages and checking the guidance. When the system asks about the tool ID number, enter the ID number of the last tool (the tool to be used last in that machining, excluding chamfering tools). If required, press the soft key [TOOL INFORM]. The system displays the following screen, on which the required tool ID number can be easily checked and specified. NOTE After the soft key [TOOL INFORM] is pressed, the soft key [DIVIDE TOLDIR] is always displayed. The tool types are specified in parameters Nos. 9304 to 9343. On that screen, the other tool information (pretool list, tool file, tool list) can be specified and referenced.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 DIVIDE TOLDIR: 1 PRO TOOL NAME FACE MILL NDIA. INITOOL NO. 1 71 30.000 2 72 40.000 3 73 50.000 4 74 60.000 5 75 80.000 6 76 80.000 7 77 100.000 8 78 120.000 9 79 150.000 10 80 200.000 PAGE :01/ CREATING
MATERIAL HIGHSPEED SPECIAL CARBIDE HIGHSPEED SPECIAL CARBIDE HIGHSPEED SPECIAL CARBIDE HIGHSPEED
TCODE 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
DCODE 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80
:FACING PREP. :YB= UNUSED FINISHING : Y= : Z= THICKNESS : U= : V= TOOL ID NO. : T= : J=
0.

< WINDOW CHANGE TOOL DIVIDE TOOL DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE PRE TOOL
10. After specifying the tool ID number, press the <INPUT> key. The automatic tool selection function (Note 1) and automatic cutting condition function (Note 2) are executed. The cutting conditions automatically selected by the two functions are indicated at the right corner of the screen.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000
TOOL ID NO. PRO TOOL NAME INI
PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS 2 PROCESS 1 T= 72. 72. Q= FACE MILL FACE MILL PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 172. 172. D OFFSET NO. D= 72. 72. COOLANT M=COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 SPINDL SPEED S= 1431. 1431. FEED RATE F= 773. 773. CUT WIDTH(%) E= 70. 70. ZESCAPE K= 3. 3.
:FACING :YB= : Z= : V= : J=
UNUSED FINISHING : Y= 0. THICKNESS : U= 20. TOOL ID NO. : T= 5.
2. 100. 72.
INPUT THE TOOL ID NUMBER OF THE TOOL TO BE USED.

< NEXT TOOL F.S. AUTO WINDOW CHANGE TOOL GUIDAN INPUT INFORM CE END
In the case of a final tool with several different pretool setting, you can search next pretool by pressing the softkey [NEXT TOOL].
19
B63294EN/02
NOTE 1 Automatic tool selection function: After the ID number of the last tool (72, in this example) is entered, the function automatically selects the pretools required for facing (roughing tool 71, in this example). It also displays the ID numbers of the pretools. When a tap is specified as the last tool in tapping, for example, a center drilling tool to make a prepared hole, drilling tool, and chamfering tool are automatically selected.
Tap
Automatic tool selection
Center drilling tool
Drilling tool
Chamfering tool
Tap
WARNING
The pretools to be used are selected based on the data specified in the pretool list. When the automatic tool selection function is used to select pretools, be sure to specify the pretool data in the pretool list before starting the program. (See the description of the pretool list in Section 1.7.4) If no data is specified in the pretool list, the last tool is also automatically selected as a pretool. When a machining program is created using the automatic tool selection function, ensure that the generated machining sequence and the tools to be used are satisfactory. If the machining sequence or a tool to be used is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
20
B63294EN/02

NOTE 2 Automatic cutting condition function: Automatically selects and displays the name, nominal diameter, and other data of each tool selected by the automatic tool selection function.
Tool ID number
Automatic cutting condition
Tool name
Nominal diameter
Compensation number
Coolant
Spindle speed
Feedrate
WARNING
The function determines the tool name, nominal diameter, and tool length compensation number according to the data specified in the tool file. It determines the spindle speed, feedrate, and other cutting conditions according to the data specified in the cutting conditions file and the work material specified on the initial setting menu. It can correctly select the tool name and other data only when the correct data is specified in the tool file, cutting conditions file, and the initial setting menu. (See the descriptions of the tool file and cutting conditions file in Section 1.7.) The cutting conditions are determined automatically according to the selected machining type and tools. The user must check that the automatically determined data is satisfactory. If any of the cutting condition data or a tool to be used is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
21
B63294EN/02
11. To change the machining conditions selected by the automatic tool selection function and automatic cutting condition function, press the soft key [WINDOW CHANGE]. The cursor is moved to the machining condition screen. Place the cursor on the data to be changed and enter desired data. To change the tool ID number and automatically specify it, press the soft key [F.S.AUTO]. The automatic cutting condition function is executed for the tool and the corresponding cutting conditions are displayed. To return the cursor to the C window, press the soft key [WINDOW CHANGE].
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000
PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS 2 PROCESS 1 T= 73. 72. Q= FACE MILL FACE MILL PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 173. 172. D OFFSET NO. D= 73. 72. COOLANT M=COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 SPINDL SPEED S= 572. 1431. FEED RATE F= 309. 773. CUT WIDTH(%) E= 70. 70. ZESCAPE K= 3. 3.
:FACING PREP. :YB= UNUSED FINISHING : Y= : Z= 0. THICKNESS : U= : V= 20. TOOL ID NO. : T= : J= 5.
2. 100. 72.

< F.S. AUTO WINDOW CHANGE TOOL GUIDAN INPUT INFORM CE END
12. After checking that all data is correctly entered, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The system automatically checks all the input data. If all the data is correct, the facing start process is incorporated into the program and menu of [SQUARE BIDIR] is automatically displayed in the window.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL (1) FACING PREP. FACE MILL
V (3)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

U YD (2)
( X,Y) (4)
YC
FACING COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD U LENGTH
:SQUARE BIDIR : W= * : X= : Y= : U=
V LENGTH ANGLE START POINT APPROACH
: V= : A= : B= :YC=
ESCAPE 0. (4) 5.
:YD=
5.
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE QUADRANGLE.

WARNING
After figure data has been entered, check that the specified figure can actually be machined using the selected machining type and tools. If the figure is not specified correctly, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
22
B63294EN/02

13. Enter desired machining data and press the soft key [INPUT END]. The system automatically checks the input data. If all the data is correct, the square twoway facing process is incorporated into the program. The detailed menu screen for facing is displayed again.
PROGRAM O1000 01 SQUARE UNIDIR PAGE :01/ CREATING 03 CIRCLE UNIDIR
02 SQUARE BIDIR
04 CIRCLE BIDIR
05 SQUAREFRING
06 CIRCLE DRING
07 COPY RANDOM
08 COPY PATTRN
WHEN COPYING EACH MENU,SELECT EITHER ONE IN ADVANCE. SELECT SOFTKEY.

NOTE
If the return key, [<], at the bottom left corner of the screen is pressed instead of the soft key [INPUT END], the following message appears on the screen: MAKING PROCESS IS LOST, O.K.? (YES > [<], NO > [CAN]). When the [<] key is pressed again, the start menu for the preceding process is deleted. This prevents the creation of a machining process which does not consist of a start menu, figure menu, and process end. If the start menu of such a preceding process remains, there is danger that the resultant machining program cannot be executed. 14. To terminate the facing menu, press the soft key [PROCES END]. The first screen is displayed again. The terminated process is incorporated in the program screen.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END PAGE :01/ CREATING TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
72. 40.000 73. 50.000
<
HOLE
FACING SIDE C POCKET NC LAN UTING TING GUAGE
2+1/2 2+1/2 CVX CCV
AUXILI ARY
PROGRM END
23
B63294EN/02
Repeat these steps to select another machining menu and enter desired data until a desired machining program is created. In the example below, drilling is selected: 1. Press the soft key [HOLE]. The following screen is displayed.
PROGRAM 01 DRILLING O1000 02 PECK DRILING PAGE :01/ CREATING 03 BORING
04 FINE BORING
05 BACK BORING
06 TAPPING
07 REAMING
08 FACING
SELECT SOFTKEY.
2. Select a detailed menu required for drilling. For example, press the soft key [TAPPING]. The following screen is displayed.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END PAGE :01/ CREATING
MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10 J T
C R B YE
V Z
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURFACE TAP DEPTH CHAMFER DIA
:TAPPING :YB= UNUSED RETURN POINT : I= : B= FEEDRATE CHG :YC= : V= KIND OF TAP : A= : C= * TOOL ID NO. : T=
* UNCHANGE NORMAL
INPUT THE Z COORD OF THE UPPER SURFACE OF THE WORKPIECE.

3. Enter desired data, responding to messages and checking the guidance. When the system asks about the tool ID number, press the soft key [TOOL INFORM]. The following screen is displayed. On this screen, the desired tool ID number can be easily checked and specified.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000 PAGE :01/ CREATING DIVIDE TOLDIR: 1 PRO TOOL NAME TAP INITOOL NO. NDIA. MATERIAL TCODE DCODE FAC 1 21 SPECIAL 21 21 3.000 FAC 2 22 5.000 CARBIDE 22 22 PRO 3 23 7.000 HIGHSPEED 23 23 4 24 9.000 SPECIAL 24 24 5 25 10.000 CARBIDE 25 25 6 26 13.000 HIGHSPEED 26 26 7 27 16.000 SPECIAL 27 27 8 28 20.000 CARBIDE 28 28 9 29 22.000 HIGHSPEED 29 29 28.000 10 30 SPECIALK 30 30
:TAPPING :YB= UNUSED RETURN POINT : I= : B= FEEDRATE CHG :YC= : V= KING OF TAP : A= : C= * TOOL ID NO. : T=
* UNCHANGE NORMAL

< WINDOW CHANGE TOOL DIVIDE TOOL DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE PRE TOOL
24
B63294EN/02

4. On the screen, other information (pretool list, tool file, tool list) can be referenced and specified. For example, press the soft key [PRETOOL]. The pretool list appears in the right window. (The display of the soft key [PRETOOL] is reversed (reverse video) to indicate that the key is effective.) To change the data of the pretool list or add data to it, press the soft key [WINDOW CHANGE]. The cursor moves to the pretool list screen. Place the cursor at a desired position, then enter the desired data.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000
LIST PRETOOL: 1 AUX TOOL 87 CHAMFER 15.000 87 CHAMFER 15.000 FINL TOOL 25 TAP 10.000 15 PRE TOOL1 14 DRILL 8.000 3 PRE TOOL2 12 DRILL 4.000
PAGE :01/ CREATING
PRO 1 TOOL NO. INI TOOL NAME FACING NOMINAL DIA. FACING 2 TOOL NO. SQU PRO TOOL NAME
NOMINAL DIA. 3 TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NOMINAL DIA. 4 TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NOMINAL DIA.
DRILL CENT.DRILL 10.000 3.000
3 2 CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL 3.000 2.000 87 64 64 CHAMFER END MILL END MILL 15.000 8.000 8.000
65 END MILL 10.000
:TAPPING :YB= UNUSED RETURN POINT : I= : B= FEEDRATE CHG :YC= : V= KIND OF TAP : A= : C= * TOOL ID NO. : T=
* UNCHANGE NORMAL

< WINDOW CHANGE TOOL DIVIDE TOOL DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE PRETOOL
5. After specifying a desired tool ID number, press the <INPUT> key. The automatic tool selection function and automatic cutting condition function are executed. The cutting conditions that have been automatically selected are indicated at the right corner of the screen.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000 PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/2 PROCESS4 PROCESS3 PROCESS2 PROCESS1 25. TOOL ID NO. T= 14. 12. 3. PRO TOOL NAME Q= TAP DRILL DRILL CENT.DRILL INI FACING TOOL DIA. E= 10. 8. 4. 3. H OFFSET NO. H= 125. 114. 112. 103. FACING R POINT R= 10. 3. 3. 3. SQE PRO Z POINT Z= 20. 29.6 24.8 3. DWELL D= 0. 0. 0. 0. COOLANT M=COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 SPINDL SPEED S= 254. 3180. 5000. 4240. FEED RATE F= 280. 318. 50. 42. SPEED OFFST% YD= * * * * SPEED CHG PT YE= * * * * PITCH J= 1.1 * * *
HOLE :TAPPING GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED RETURN POINT : I= WORK SURFACE : B= 0. FEEDRATE CHG :YC= TAP DEPTH : V= 20. KIND OF TAP : A= CHAMFER DIA : C= * TOOL ID NO. : T=
* UNCHANGE NORMAL 25.

25
B63294EN/02
6. After checking that all data is correctly entered, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The system automatically checks all the input data. When all the input data is correct, the drilling process is incorporated into the program, and the hole position menu is automatically displayed on the screen.
PROGRAM 01 POINTS O1000 02 LINE SAM.SP PAGE :01/ CREATING 03 LINE DIF.SP
04 GRID
05 PARALLELOGRM
06 BOLT HOL CIR
07 ARC SAME SP
08 ARC DIFF SP TO BE CONTINUE NEXT PAGE.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES END CE +
7. Press the soft key [PARALLEL DGRM], for example. The following screen is displayed. Enter the desired data. (The data of the point to be omitted can also be specified.)
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE O1000 PAGE :01/ CREATING
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL E SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL TAPPING DRILL V 2 TAPPING DRILL TAPPING TAP
1 1 X,Y 2
C 3
HOLE PATERN COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD U LENGTH
:PARALLELOGRM : W= * : X= 0. : Y= 0. : U= 75.
V LENGTH U NUMBER V NUNBER XU ANGLE
: : : :
V= D= E= A=
75. 3. 2. 0.
OV ANGLE : C= OMIT POINT 1:YF= OMITPOINT 2 :YG= OMIT=POINT 3 :YH=
90. * * *
INPUT THE Z COORD WHICH DO NOT INTERFERE WITH WORKPIEOE AND JIG.
< CHECK GUIDAN INPUT CE END
8. After entering all the desired data, press the soft key [CHECK]. According to the input data, the hole position is drawn in the right window. The input data can be easily checked in the window.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE O1000 PAGE :01/ CREATING
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING TAP
:PARALLELOGRM : W= * : X= 0. : Y= 0. : U= 75.
V LENGTH U NUMBER V NUNBER XU ANGLE
: : : :
V= D= E= A=
75. 3. 2. 0.
OV ANGLE : C= OMIT POINT 1:YF= OMITPOINT 2 :YG= OMIT=POINT 3 :YH=
90. * * *
<
RETURN
26
B63294EN/02

9. After checking that all the data is correctly entered, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The parallel diagram process is incorporated into the program. The hole position menu screen is displayed again.
PROGRAM 01 POINTS O1000 02 LINE SAM.SP PAGE :01/ CREATING 03 LINE DIF.SP
04 GRID
05 PARALLELOGRM
06 BOLT HOL CIR
07 ARC SAME SP
08 ARC DIFF SP TO BE CONTINUE NEXT PAGE.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES + END CE
10. To select another hole position menu, follow the same steps as when the parallel diagram menu is selected. To terminate drilling, press the soft key [PROCES END]. The original program screen is displayed again.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000 PAGE :01/ CREATING FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. 40.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. 50.000 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. 3.000 TAPPING DRILL 12. 4.000 TAPPING DRILL 14. 8.000 TAPPING TAP 25. 10.000 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< HOLE FACING SIDE C POCKET NC LAN UTING TING GUAGE 2+1/2 CVX 2+1/2 CCV AUXILI ARY PROGRM END
Repeat these steps to select another machining menu and enter desired data until a desired machining program is created.
27

11. To terminate a program, press soft key [PROGRAMEND].
B63294EN/02
When the [PROGRAMEND] key is pressed, the following end setting menu is displayed:
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000(MANUAL1) PAGE :01/ CREATING
M30:RESET AND REWIND
PROCESS TOOL NAMEM20:RESET INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL TOOL ID NO. IS SURE TO INPUT. SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING TAP HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END
AUXILIARY :PROGRAM END PROGRAM END : C= M30 TOOL ID NO. : T= 0.
<
GUIDAN INPUT END CE
After entering the necessary data, press the [INPUT END] key. This completes the creation of a new machining program. The screen is automatically cleared and the basic menu screen appears. WARNING No check is made to determine whether the machining sequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you program tapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishing without first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attempt to execute the programmed machining sequence. For this reason, therefore, when using a conversational function to create a machining program, always confirm that the machining is performed in a logical sequence. If the machining sequence is logically incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
28
B63294EN/02
1.3 Editing a Machining Program [Basic Menu 1]

An existing program can be edited (the data can be modified, inserted, moved, copied, and deleted). To execute the editing function, first select basic menu [1]. Move the cursor to the desired program and press [PROGRAM SELECTION]. Or, enter the number of the program to select. The editing screen shown below appears.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. 40.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. 50.000 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. 3.000 TAPPING DRILL 12. 4.000 TAPPING DRILL 14. 8.000 TAPPING TAP 25. 10.000 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
To edit a process incorporated in a machining program which is being created, press the cursor key, or .The system automatically enters the edit mode and the screen shown above is displayed. CAUTION While a process is being specified (for example, after the start menu is created) after the machining menu is selected, the cursor keys, and , do not work. This prevents the operator from creating a machining program which cannot be executed.
29
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.3.1 Modify function

The modify function modifies a process.
B63294EN/02
1. Move the cursor to the process to be modified. For example, place the cursor on a facing process. The cursor can be placed on a desired option on the machining menu.
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
2. Press the soft key [ALTER]. The data entered last is displayed in the window as shown below. Move the cursor to the option to be modified and enter the desired data. Then, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The new data is incorporated into the program.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING
TOOL ID NO. PRO TOOL NAME INI FACING PROCESS H OFFSET NO. FACING D OFFSET NO. FACING SQU PRO COOLANT 003 HOLE TAP SPINDL SPEED TAP FEED RATE TAP CUT WIDTH(%) TAP ZESCAPE HOLE PATERN PAR PRO 004 AUXILIARY END FACING GROUP COPY Z POINT REMOVAL PITCH
CUTTING DATA1/1PROCESS 2 PROCESS 1 T= 73. 72. Q= FACE MILL FACE MILL B= FINISHING ROUGHING H= 173. 172. D= 73. 72. M=COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 S= 572. 1431. F= 309. 773. E= 70. 70. K= 3. 3.
:FACING PREP. :YB= UNUSED FINISHING : Y= 0. THICKNESS : Z= : U= : V= 20. TOOL ID NO. : T= : J= 5.
2. 100. 73.

< F.S. AUTO WINDOW CHANGE NEXT TOOL GUIDAN INPUT ALTER INFORM CE END
NOTE
After the data is modified, be sure to press the soft key [INPUT END]. If the return key at the bottom left corner of the screen is pressed instead, the new data is not incorporated into the program.
30
B63294EN/02
3. To check the data of the next process, press the soft key [NEXT ALTER]. The screen shown below is displayed. (In this example, the next process is the figure menu of the square twoway facing.) When the soft key [NEXT ALTER] is pressed, the input data can be checked without moving the cursor and pressing the soft key [ALTER].
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING
U
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING YD FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL(1) FACING SQUARE BIDIR V PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL (3) TAPPING DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING TAP HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
FACING COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD U LENGTH :SQUARE BIDIR : W= * V LENGTH : X= 0. ANGLE : Y= 0. START POINT : U= 100. APPROACH
(2)
(X ,Y) (4)
YC
: V= : A= : B= :YC=
80. ESCAPE 0. (4) 5.
:YD=
5.

< NEXT ALTER GUIDAN INPUT CE END
NOTE 1 The process end cannot be changed NOTE 2 Pressing the soft key [NEXT ALTER] does not change the data of the program. After specifying new data, be sure to press the soft key [INPUT END]. When editing a machining program, confirm that the changes are correct. Any errors made durWARNING ing editing must be corrected, because there is not copy of the program as it existed prior to the start of editing. If the machining program contains any errors, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. When a machining program is edited, the cutting condition data may be changed automatically WARNING such that it ultimately differs from the manually entered data, depending on the changes made. In such a case, check that the automatically made changes are as intended. Any data that is not exactly as intended must be corrected. If the cutting condition data is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
31
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.3.2 Insert function
B63294EN/02
The insert function inserts a new machining process between machining processes or adds it after a machining process. 1. Place the cursor on the process after which a new process is to be added. For example, move the cursor to a facing process.
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
2. Press the soft key [INSERT]. Processes that can be inserted are automatically selected according to the position of the cursor. When the cursor is placed on INITAL SETING or PROCESS END as shown above, any machining menu can be inserted. When the cursor is placed on the start menu or figure menu of a machining menu, only the figure menu of the corresponding machining can be inserted.
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< HOLE FACING SIDE C POCKET NC LAN UTING TING GUAGE 2+1/2 CVX 2+1/2 CCV AUXILI ARY PROGRM END
32
B63294EN/02
3. Select a desired machining menu and enter the machining data. The new process is added after the process at which the cursor is currently placed. When a side cutting process is inserted, for example, the following screen is displayed:
NOTE 1 Usually, the process end need not be inserted. When a figure menu is inserted as shown below, the soft key [PROCES END] is not displayed. The soft key [INSERT END] is displayed instead. The process end is not inserted by pressing the soft key [INSERT END].
PROGRAM O1000 01 SQUARE UNIDIR PAGE :01/ EDITING 03 CIRCLE UNIDIR
02 SQUARE BIDIR
04 CIRCLE BIDIR
05 SQUAREFRING
06 CIRCLE DRING
07 COPY RANDOM
08 COPY PATTRN
WHEN COPYING EACH MENU,SELECT EITHER ONE IN ADVANCE.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES CE END
NOTE 2 If the program end is inserted, the program may contain two program ends, causing a contradiction. In this case, the system indicates the following alarm message and does not insert the program end: END OF PROGRAM ALREADY EXISTS. Whenever you insert a process, ensure that a logical machining sequence is maintained. If inWARNING serting a process produces a nonlogical sequence, the sequence must be reedited, because there is no copy of the sequence as it existed prior to insertion of the process. If the machining sequence is logically incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
33
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.3.3 Move function
B63294EN/02
The move function moves a machining process to a desired position. In the example below, a side cutting process is moved to follow a drilling process. 1. Place the cursor at the beginning of the machining process to be moved. For example, move the cursor to the start menu for a side cutting process.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING NDIA 40.000 50.000 FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 SIDE CUTING SIDE PREP. END MILL 65. SIDE PREP. END MILL 66. SIDE CUTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END 004 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. TAPPING DRILL 12. TAPPING DRILL 14. TAPPING TAP 25. HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 005 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
<
MOVE
EXEC
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
2. Press the soft key [MOVE]. The following screen is displayed: 3. Place the cursor at the end of the machining process to be moved. (At this time, you must define the range of the machining processes to be moved.) When the cursor is moved, the display of the range of machining processes to be moved is reversed (reverse video). If the range of the machining processes to be moved is not specified (the cursor is not moved), the system assumes that only the machining process at which the cursor is currently placed is selected.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING NDIA 40.000 50.000 MOVE
FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
MOVE CURSOR TO END POINT OF EXEC PROCESS

< DECIDE CANCEL
34
B63294EN/02
4. Press the soft key [DECIDE]. The range of machining processes to be moved is selected and its display is reversed (reverse video) in a different color. 5. Specify the position to which the selected range of machining processes is to be moved. Move the cursor to the specified position. For example, place the cursor at the process end of drilling.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING NDIA 40.000 50.000 MOVE
FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
MOVE CURSOR TO MOVE POINT. PUSH EXEC

EXEC CANCEL
6. Press the soft key [EXEC]. The selected range of machining processes is moved to follow the machining process on which the cursor is currently placed. The original screen is displayed again.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. TAPPING DRILL 12. TAPPING DRILL 14. TAPPING TAP 25. HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 SIDE CUTING SIDE PREP. END MILL 65. SIDE PREP. END MILL 66. SIDE CUTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END 005 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
NOTE
The system checks the editing range selected during program editing. It prohibits editing if it detects the possibility of a contradiction occurring in the resulting program. The following limitations are imposed on the move function: 1. When the first block of the selected range is a start menu 1. The range can be moved only when the last block of the selected range is the process end or a menu without figure data (for example, the NC language menu). Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 2. The range can be moved only when the destination is after the process end or a menu without figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: IT WILL BE INCORRECT PROGRAM AFTER EDIT. 2. When the first block of the selected range is a figure menu 1. The range can be moved only when the last block of the selected range is figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 2. The range can be moved only when the machining menu of the first block agrees with that of the last block. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM.
35
B63294EN/02
3. The range can be moved only when the block before the first block or after the last block of the selected range is figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: IT WILL BE INCORRECT PROGRAM AFTER EDIT. 4. The range can be moved only when the move destination is before or after the figure data of an identical menu. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: IT WILL BE INCORRECT PROGRAM AFTER EDIT. 3. When the first block of the selected range is the process end The following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 4. When the first block of the selected range is a menu without figure data 1. The range can be moved only when the last block of the selected range is the process end or a menu without figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 2. The range can be moved only when the move destination is after the process end or a menu without figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: IT WILL BE INCORRECT PROGRAM AFTER EDIT. WARNING Whenever you move a process, ensure that a logical machining sequence is maintained. If moving a process produces a nonlogical sequence, the sequence must be reedited, because there is no copy of the sequence as it existed prior to the process being moved. If the machining sequence is logically incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
36
B63294EN/02 1.3.4 Copy function
The copy function copies a machining process to a desired position. In the example below, a side cutting process is copied and placed after a drilling process. 1. Place the cursor on the first block of the range of machining process to be copied. For example, place the cursor on the start menu for a side cutting process.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
2. Press the soft key [COPY]. The following screen is displayed: 3. Place the cursor on the last block of the range of machining processes to be copied. (At this time, you must select the range of machining processes to be copied.) When the cursor is moved, the display of the range of machining processes to be copied is reversed (reverse video). When the range is not selected (the cursor is not moved), the system assumes that only the machining process at which the cursor is currently placed is selected.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING NDIA 40.000 50.000 COPY
FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.

< DECIDE CANCEL
4. Press the soft key [DECIDE]. The selected range of machining processes is selected and its display is reversed (reverse video) in a different color.
37
B63294EN/02
5. Specify the position at which the selected range of machining processes is to be copied. Move the cursor to the specified position. For example, move the cursor to the process end of drilling.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING NDIA 40.000 50.000 COPY
FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
10.000 12.00
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
MOVE CURSOR TO COPY POINT. PUSH EXEC

EXEC CANCEL
6. Press the soft key [EXEC]. The selected range of machining processes is copied and placed after the machining process at which the cursor is currently placed. The original screen is displayed again.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 SIDE CUTING SIDE CUTING 004 HOLE O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING NDIA 40.000 50.000 FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
HOLE PATERN 005 SIDE CUTING SIDE CUTING
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END SIDE PREP. END MILL 65. SIDE PREP. END MILL 66. SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. TAPPING DRILL 12. TAPPING DRILL 14. TAPPING TAP 25. PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END SIDE PREP. END MILL 65. SIDE PREP. END MILL 66. SQUARE OSIDE
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
NOTE
The system checks the editing range selected during program editing. It prohibits editing if it detects the possibility of a contradiction occurring in the resulting program. The following limitations are imposed on the copy function: 1. When the first block of the selected range is a start menu 1. The range can be copied only when the last block of the selected range is the process end or a menu without figure data (for example, the NC language menu). Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 2. The range can be copied only when the copy destination is after the process end or a menu without figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: IT WILL BE INCORRECT PROGRAM AFTER EDIT. 2. When the first block of the selected range is a figure menu 1. The range can be copied only when the last block of the selected range is figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 2. The range can be copied only when the machining menu of the first block of the range agrees with that of the last block. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 3. The range can be copied only when the copy destination is before or after the figure data of an identical menu. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: IT WILL BE INCORRECT PROGRAM AFTER EDIT.
38
B63294EN/02

3. When the first block of the selected range is the process end The following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 4. When the first block of the selected range is a menu without figure data 1. The range can be copied only when the last block of the range is the process end or a menu without figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: THE EXTENT OF SELECT PROGRAM. 2. The range can be copied only when the copy destination is after the process end or a menu without figure data. Otherwise, the following alarm message is indicated: IT WILL BE INCORRECT PROGRAM AFTER EDIT.
WARNING
Whenever you copy a process, ensure that a logical machining sequence is maintained. If copying a process produces a nonlogical sequence, the sequence must be reedited, because there is no copy of the sequence as it existed prior to the process being copied. If the machining sequence is logically incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
39
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.3.5 Delete function
B63294EN/02
The delete function deletes a desired machining process. In the example below, a drilling process is deleted. 1. Place the cursor on the first block of the range of machining processes to be deleted. For example, move the cursor to a drilling process.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
2. Press the soft key [DELETE]. The following screen is displayed: 3. Place the cursor on the last block of the range of machining processes to be deleted. (At this time, you must select the range of machining processes to be deleted.) when the cursor is moved, the display of the range of machining processes to be deleted is reversed (reverse video). If the range of machining processes is not selected (the cursor is not moved), the system assumes that only the machining process at which the cursor is currently placed is selected.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING NDIA 40.000 50.000 DELETE
FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
10.000 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.

DECIDE CANCEL
4. Press the soft key [DECIDE]. The range of machining processes to be deleted is selected and its display is reversed (reverse video) in a different color.
40
B63294EN/02
5. Press the soft key [EXEC]. The selected range of machining processes is deleted. The original screen is displayed again.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ EDITING TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 SIDE CUTING SIDE PREP. END MILL SIDE PREP. END MILL SIDE CUTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
72. 40.000 73. 50.000
65. 10.000 66. 12.000
229. 572.
1272. 2120.
<
MOVE
COPY
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
NOTE
The system makes an editing range check. The system checks an editing range selected when a program is edited. If a conflict exists in the edited program, the warning The edited program may contain an error. Do you delete the program? is displayed. Press [CONTINUE] to delete the selected range. In this case, however, the program may be incorrect.
41
B63294EN/02
1.4 Machining Program Optimization [Basic Menu 2]

A machining program created using the conversational automatic programming function can be edited to create a new machining program by automatically changing the machining sequence as described below. (This function is referred to as the optimal process editing function.) (1) Optimizing the number of tool change operations Processes that use the same tool can be performed in succession to minimize the number of tool change operations, thus reducing the machining time. For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes a function that allows processes to be alternated automatically. This concept is shown below. Process (1) 5 center drilling 10 drilling
Optimized program Automatic process alteration 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 10 drilling of 6.8 drilling of M8 tapping of 7 drilling of process (1) process (2) process (3) process (1) process (2) process (2) process (3)
Process (2) 5 center drilling 6.8 drilling M8 tapping Process (3) 5 center drilling 7 drilling
[EXEC]
(2) Optimizing the machining sequence The machining sequence of processes automatically determined by the conversational automatic programming function can be changed so that finishing is performed at the end, thus preventing machining precision degradation due to heat distortion. For this purpose, the optimal process editing function includes a function that allows processes to be alternated manually. This concept is shown below. Process (1) 5 center drilling 10 drilling Sequence specification 1. 4.
Optimized program 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 5 center drilling of 10 drilling of 7 drilling of 6.8 drilling of M8 tapping of process (1) process (2) process (3) process (1) process (3) process (2) process (2)
Process (2) 5 center drilling 6.8 drilling M8 tapping Process (3) 5 center drilling 7 drilling 3. 5. 2. 6. 7.
Manual process alteration
[EXEC]
42
B63294EN/02
Below is a detailed description using an example. WARNING
Even when the optimal process editing function is used, no check is made to determine whether the machining sequence is satisfactory. For example, even if you program tapping without first preparing a hole, or perform finishing without first roughing, the machine will nevertheless attempt to execute the programmed machining sequence. For this reason, therefore, when using a conversational function to create a machining program, always confirm that the machining is performed in a logical sequence. If the machining sequence is logical incorrect, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
43
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.4.1 Optimal process editing function (automatic alteration)
1. Press [2] of the basic menu screen. The following program screen appears:
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O6000 PAGE :01/ OPTINUM FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
B63294EN/02
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. 40.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. 50.000 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE DRILLING CENTER DRILL 7. 7.000 DRILLING DRILL 14. 8.000 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 7. 7.000 TAPPING DRILL 14. 8.000 TAPPING TAP 24. 9.000 HOLE PATERN LINE SAM.SP PROCESS END 005 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
91. 318.
909. 3180.
91. 318. 509.
909. 3180. 565.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< AUTO MANUAL
2. Press [AUTO]. The following soft keys appear:
INPUT PROGRAM NO. EXEC
>
3. Enter the number of the program to create using the optimal process editing function (2000 in this case), then press [EXEC]. The following soft keys appear:
MOVE CURSOR TO START POINT WHEN PART SELECTION PART ALL SELECT SELECT
An editing function (move, copy, or deletion) can be specified together with the range to be edited (for partial range specification). When [ALL SELECT] is selected, the entire program is used as the editing range. NOTE 1 Only one range can be specified for each partial range setting operation. For multiple ranges, perform separate setting operations for each range. NOTE 2 An editing range cannot extend from the main program to a subprogram. If a subprogram is called in a specified range, the subprogram is not subject to sequence alteration. 4. Here, as an example, only the drilling processes are optimized. Move the cursor to the start of the drilling processes, then press [PART SELECT]. The screen remains unchanged, but the following soft keys appear:
MOVE CURSOR TO END POINT WHEN PART SELECTION DECIDE
44
B63294EN/02
5. When the cursor is moved to the end of the desired range, the range is displayed in reverse video to indicate that the range is selected. In this example, move the cursor to the end of the drilling processes, then press [DECIDE].
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O6000 PAGE :01/ OPTINUM FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. 40.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. 50.000 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE DRILLING CENTER DRILL 7. 7.000 DRILLING DRILL 14. 8.000 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 7. 7.000 TAPPING DRILL 14. 8.000 TAPPING TAP 24. 9.000 HOLE PATERN LINE SAM.SP PROCESS END 005 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
91. 318.
909. 3180.
91. 318. 509.
909. 3180. 565.
OPTIMIZE SPECIFIED RANGE. PUSH EXEC

< EXEC
6. Press [EXEC]. The selected range of machining processes (only the drilling processes in this example) is rearranged automatically by the system algorithm to change the machining sequence.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 011 AUXITAL 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE HOLE PATERN 004 HOLE HOLE PATERN 005 HOLE HOLE PATERN 006 HOLE HOLE PATERN 007 HOLE SELECT SOFTKEY.
AUTO MANUAL
O6003(AUTO
06000)
PAGE :01/ OPTINUM FEED SPINDL 773. 309. 1431. 572.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. 40.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. 50.000 SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END DRILLING CENTER DRILL 7. 7.000 DRILLING DRILL 14. 8.000 PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL 7. 7.000 LINE SAM.SP PROCESS END DRILLING DRILL 14. 8.000 PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END TAPPING DRILL 14. 8.000 LINE SAM.SP PROCESS END TAPPING TAP 24. 9.000
91. 318.
909. 3180.
91.
909.
318.
3180.
318.
3180.
509.
565.
45
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.4.2 Optimal process editing algorithm

Optimal process editing is shown as follows:
B63294EN/02
Drilling
Drill 1 Drill 2 Hole position A Process end
Drilling Drill 1 Hole position A Process end
Rules
Drilling Drill 1 Hole position A Process end Drilling Drill 1 Hole position B Process end Drilling Drill 2 Hole position A Process end
Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end Step I
Drilling Drill 2 Hole position A Process end Drilling Drill 1 Hole position B Process end
Step II
Drilling Drill 3 Hole position B Process end
Drilling Drill 3 Hole position B Process end
When [EXEC] is pressed, a new program is created by the following internal processing steps: Step I: Internally creates a program where all tools in the editing range are resolved on a processbyprocess basis. (This step is also used in manual alteration described in the next section.) Step II:Rearranges the processes of such a resolved program according to the rules shown below to create a new program. (1) The execution sequence of the processes in the same machining menu must not be changed. (2) Processes should be chosen in the order of ma chining menu creation where possible. (3) Processes that use the same tool should be chosen in succession where possible.
Rules
Rule (1) must always be satisfied. Rule (2) has higher priority than rule (3); rules (2) and (3) may be ignored when these rules cannot be satisfied. NOTE 1 The optimal process editing function changes the sequence of processes by referencing only the tools used in the program. Therefore, when using the optimal process editing function for a program, be especially careful when the program includes a process or NC statement that reverses the sequential relationship. When the optimal process editing function is used, the following commands must not be included in the editing range: Rotation around the B axis Plane selection Coordinate system rotation Absolute/incremental command Workpiece coordinate system setting Scaling Inch/metric conversion
46
B63294EN/02

When optimal process editing is applied to a program including any of these processes and NC statements, the partial range setting capability of the optimal process editing function must be used. After checking for any processes whose execution timing must not be changed, the operator can then apply optimal process editing to processes whose sequences may be rearranged. Similarly, be careful not to change the sequence of machining menus that cannot be reversed.
Drilling
Drill 1 Drill 2 Hole position A Process end Set a partial range for this section. Drilling Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end Rotation around the B axis
Drilling
Drill 1 Drill 3 Hole position B Process end
Set another partial range for this section.
NOTE 2 The complete range setting can be used on programs for which the sequence of machining menus can be reversed. NOTE 3 When the system determines that optimization is impossible (for example, when a process for rotation about the B axis is included in a partial setting range), the system does not perform optimal process editing, but instead outputs the alarm message NOT SUITABLE COMBINE PROGRAM.
47
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.4.3 Optimal process editing function (manual alteration)
1. Press [2] of the basic menu screen. The following program screen appears:
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE O1234 PAGE :01/ OPTIMUM NDIA 40.000 40.000 FEED SPINDL 773. 773. 1431. 1431.
B63294EN/02
HOLE PATERN 004 HOLE HOLE PATERN 005 SIDE CUTING SIDE CUTING SELECT SOFTKEY.
< AUTO MANUAL
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. TAPPING DRILL 12. TAPPING DRILL 14. TAPPING TAP 25. PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END DRILLING CENTER DRILL 3. DRILLING DRILL 14. BOLT HOL CIR PROCESS END SIDE PREP. END MILL 66. SIDE PREP. END MILL 65. SQUARE OSIDE
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
3.000 8.000
42. 318.
4240. 3180.
12.000 10.000
572. 229.
2120. 1272.
2. Press [MANUAL]. The following soft keys appear: 3. Enter the number of the program to be created using the optimal process editing function (3000 in this case), then press [EXEC]. The program is renumbered, and the following screen appears.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE AUXILIARY 001 FACING 002 FACING 003 HOLE 004 005 006 HOLE PATERN 007 HOLE 008 HOLE PATERN 009 SIDE CUTING 010 SIDE CUTING O3000(MANUAL O1234) PAGE :01/ OPTIMUM NDIA 40.000 40.000 FEED SPINDL 773. 773. 1431. 1431.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
3.000 8.000
42. 318.
4240. 3180.
12.000 10.000
229. 572. >_
1272. 2120.
MOVE CURSOR TO CHANGE NUMBER. PUSHED SOFTKEY EXEC

< NUMBER
SETEND
NOTE 1 No number is assigned to processes for the initial setting, figure menu, NC language menu, and other items that need not be rearranged.
48
B63294EN/02
4. Move the cursor to the number of the item to change, then enter a new sequence number. After entering the number, press [NUMBER]. The entered number appears by the number item. At the same time, the other numbers are changed. (When a number is changed to a unique number, other numbers are changed automatically.) As an example, 3 and 4 are assigned to side face end milling.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE AUXILIARY 001 FACING 002 FACING 005 HOLE 006 007 008 HOLE PATERN 009 HOLE 010 HOLE PATERN 003 SIDE CUTING 004 SIDE CUTING O3000(MANUAL O1234) PAGE :01/ OPTIMUM NDIA 40.000 40.000 FEED SPINDL 773. 773. 1431. 1431.
3.000 4.000 8.000 10.000
42. 50. 318. 280.
4240. 5000. 3180. 254.
3.000 8.000
42. 318.
4240. 3180.
12.000 10.000
229. 572. >_
1272. 2120.
MOVE CURSOR TO CHANGE NUMBER. PUSHED SOFTKEY NUMBER

< NUMBER
SETEND
NOTE 2 The system performs a check to prevent the execution sequence of processes in the same machining menu from being changed. If an invalid sequence number is entered, the system does not perform the renumbering operation, but instead outputs the alarm message UNJUST NUMBER. 5. Upon completion of sequence number input, press [SET END]. The screen remains unchanged, but the following soft keys appear:
CHANGE PROCESS OREER. PUSHED SOFTKEY MOVE. MOVE
6. Press [MOVE]. A machining program is created according to the entered sequence number.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 FACING FACING 004 SIDE CUTING SIDE CUTING 005 SIDE CUTING SIDE CUTING 006 HOLE HOLE PATERN 007 HOLE HOLE PATERN SELECT SOFTKEY.
< AUTO MANUAL
O3000(MANUAL
O1234)
PAGE :01/ OPTIMUM NDIA 40.000 FEED SPINDL 773. 1431.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END SIDE PREP. END MILL 66. SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END SIDE PREP. END MILL 65. SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3. BOLT HOL CIR PROCESS END TAPPING DRILL 12. PARALLELOGRM
40.000
773.
1431.
12.000
229.
1272.
10.000
572.
2120.
3.000
42.
4240.
4.000
50.
5000.
49
B63294EN/02
1.5 Machining Program Check [Basic Menu 3]

This function is used to check a created machining program by drawing it. Two functions are available. (1) Tool path drawing (wireframe): The tool path, machining profile, tool figure, etc. are drawn with lines in three dimensions. The machining program can be checked closely using this drawing. (2) Animated simulation (solid): A threedimensional profile subject to machining is drawn using surfaces. The machining program can be easily understood by viewing this simulation.
1.5.1 Tool path drawing

1. Tool path drawing execution screen Press [3] of the basic menu screen. The graphic screen shown below appears. After the power is turned on, the tool path drawing screen is displayed, then previously selected screen appears. NOTE 1 Before entering this menu, select the machining program to be checked and set the mode to AUTO.
PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION)
01234 NO1234
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
0.0
MEM **** *** *** 17:44:23

< SOLID GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SOALE TOOL POS. ERASE SCALIN SINGLE G ON OFF DRAW START
NOTE 2 Press [SOLID GRAPH] to display the animated simulation screen (solid). A soft key can be used to switch between tool path drawing and animated simulation. Even after tool path drawing has been used to ensure that the programmed tool path is satisfacWARNING tory, if the actually entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine (including the jig), possibly causing damage to the tool and/ or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. For this reason, before starting actual machining, ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine, for example, by executing the machining program at an extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the machine. The meanings of each soft key are indicated below. Soft key SOLID GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SCALE TOOL POS. ERASE SCALING ON/OFF SINGLE ON/OFF Meaning Switches to the animated simulation screen (solid). Press to change drawing parameters. Enlarges or reduces a part of the drawn figure. Displays the current tool center position with a mark. Erases all figures drawn up until this soft key is pressed. Indicates whether to use scaling before drawing. Press this soft key to toggle the display of [SCALING ON] and [SCALING OFF]. Sets the single block mode when the characters of this soft key are diplayed in reverse video. When this soft key is pressed in this state, the characters are displayed normally; the single block mode is released. Starts drawing after erase and head search operation. If scale value setting is incomplete, automatic scaling is performed before drawing is started.
DRAW START
50
B63294EN/02
NOTE

The soft keys [SCALING ON/OFF] and [SINGLE BLOCK] indicate drawing execution conditions. Pressing these soft keys does not start operation. fAdditional information on [SCALING ON/OFF] Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SCALING ON] switches to [SCALING OFF], or vice versa. Usually, the [SCALING OFF] mode is set. If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING OFF] is displayed, drawing is startedusing the current scale value data. If [DRAW START] is pressed when [SCALING ON] is displayed, automatic scaling is peformed before drawing is started. Scaling is performed according to the table below. When the machining profile diplay is provided by the drawing parameter setting Program created in the conversational mode Ordinary NC program Scaling is performed based on the machining profile. Scaling time is shorter(*1). Scaling is performed based on the tool path. Scaling time is longer. When the machining profile diplay is not provided by the drawing parameter setting Scaling is performed based on the tool path. Scaling time is longer. Scaling is performed based on the tool path. Scaling time is longer.
*1 When biplane drawing is selected, scaling is performed based on the machining profile and the tool path. After the results of scaling are set in the maximum value and minimum value drawing parameters, drawing is started. The tool path drawing is then displayed in the proper scale on the screen. In addition, when a program number is changed, the [SCALING ON] mode can be set automatically by specifying the below parameter. #7 9106 SCL: #6 SCL When the previous program number differs from the current program number on the graphic screen: 0: The [SCALING OFF] soft key is displayed. 1: The [SCALING ON] soft key is displayed. #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
After drawing is performed in the [SCALING ON] mode, the mode is automatically switched to the [SCALING OFF] mode. If scaling takes too long, drawing can be started earlier as described below. 1. Stop scaling by using soft key [STOP]. The maximum and minimum values obtained by this time are set. 2. Press [DRAW START]. A slightly inaccurate scale value is used, but drawing can be performed by reducing the time for scaling. f Additional information about [SINGLE ON/OFF] Each time this soft key is pressed, the display of [SINGLE ON] switches to [SINGLE OFF], or vice versa. The display of [SINGLE ON] represents the single block mode. When [SINGLE OFF] is displayed, continuous drawing is performed. 2. Start of tool path drawing Press [DRAW START] to start drawing.
O0030 NO0030
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 F 280.000 S 254 T 25
MACHINING TIME 00:07:33
35.9
MEM **** *** *** 15:09:21

< SOLID GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SOALE TOOL POS. ERASE SCALIN SINGLE G OFF OFF DRAW START
51

Soft key SINGLE ON/OFF Meaning
B63294EN/02
Sets the single block mode when the characters of this soft key are displayed in reverse video. When this soft key is pressed in this state, the characters are displayed normally; the single block mode is released. Terminates drawing forcibly. Performs drawing blockbyblock in the single block mode.
STOP 1 BLOCK EXEC.
When the [SINGLE ON] state is set during drawing, the single block mode is set. By pressing [1 BLOCK EXEC.] in this state, blockbyblock drawing can be performed. When the [SINGLE OFF] state is set, operation switches to continuous drawing. When end of program (M02/M30) is executed, drawing is terminated, and the soft key display automatically returns to that of the original execution screen. The generated tool path drawing is preserved until the power is turned off, unless a drawing parameter is changed or a new drawing operation is started. 3. Drawing enlargement and reduction A part of a drawing can be enlarged or reduced. Press [SCALE].
PATH GRAPHIC (SCALE)
O0030 N00030
SCALE= 1.00
35.9
MEM **** *** *** 15:10:44

CENTER CENTER CENTER CENTER SCALE UP SCALE DOWN SET END
Soft key CENTER SCALE UP/DOWN SET END
Meaning Moves the cursor representing the center of drawing. Increases or decreases the drawing scale factor. Press when setting is completed.
Select the center of a section to be enlarged or reduced, by using soft keys [CENTER ], [CENTER], [CENTER ], and [CENTER ]. Then, set a relative scale factor by pressing [SCALE UP] or [SCALE DOWN]. The relative scale factor changes in steps of 0.1. The scale factor can be set to as large as 100 times the actual size. NOTE A biplane drawing can be neither enlarged nor reduced.
52
B63294EN/02

After setting a center and relative scale factor, press [SET END], then [DRAW START]. Drawing of the section to enlarge or reduce begins.
O0030 N00030
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 F 280.000 S 254 T 25
17.9
MEM **** *** *** 15:14:05

< SOLID GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SCALE TOOL POS. ERASE SCALIN SINGLE G OFF OFF DRAW START
4. Mark indication of the current tool position On the tool path drawing execution screen, press [TOOL POS.]. The current tool center position is displayed with a blinking mark on the tool path drawing already generated.
PATH GRAPHIC (POSITION)
O0030 N00030
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 F 280.000 S 254 T 25
17.9
MEM **** *** *** 15:14:52

POS. END
This mark blinks at shorter time intervals when the tool is stopped, and blinks at longer time intervals when the tool is moving. On a biplane drawing, the tool position mark is displayed on the XY plane. CAUTION To display the current tool position correctly on a tool path drawing, all setting data items and switches related to machine operation must match the operation state of the tool path drawing operation.
53

5. Drawing parameters
B63294EN/02
Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the tool path drawing parameters. The following drawing parameter screen appears:
PATH GRAPHIC PARAMETER AXES ROTATION ANGLE TILTING ANGLE SCALE MAX.(CENTER) = = = = X= Y= Z= I= J= K= XYZ 0 0 0.65 3.154 8.654 7.731 0.000 0.000 0.000 START SEQ. NO. END SEQ. NO. TOOL RADIOS COMP. PART FIGURE DISP. TOOL FIGURE DISP. COLOR PATH AUTO CHANGE TOOL FIG. TOOL POS. = = = = = = = = = 0 0 ON OFF OFF WHITE OFF WHITE WHITE
MIN.
>_
XY YZ ZY XZ XYZ ZXY XYZZ SET END
After setting required parameters, press [SET END]. The screen display returns to the original execution screen. The meanings of each parameter are described below. (1) Drawing screens Seven types of drawing screens are available for selection.
XY plane Y Z
YZ plane Y
ZY plane
XZ plane Z
Isometric projection drawing (XYZ) Z
Isometric projection drawing (ZXY) Y
Biplane (XY, XZ) Y
X Z X
54
B63294EN/02
(2) Horizontal rotation angle
This parameter specifies an angle of rotation (180_ to +180_ ) around the vertical axis in degrees.
(3) Vertical rotation angle This parameter specifies a tilt angle (180_ to +180_ ) with respect to the vertical axis.
(4) Scale factor A value from 0.01 to 100.00 can be specified. When 1.0 is set, an actualsize drawing is generated. When 0 is set, a scale factor is automatically determined. (Usually, a scale factor is automatically determined so that this parameter need not be set.) (5) Maximum value (center)/minimum value The coordinates (X,Y,Z) of a drawing center, or maximum drawing coordinates (X,Y,Z)/minimum drawing coordinates (I,J,K) are set. These settings depend on the value of the drawing scale factor as indicated below. Drawing scale factor value Value other than 0 0 Setting Addresses X, Y, and Z Drawing center coordinates on the X, Ignored Y, and Z axes Maximum drawing coordinates on the X, Y, and Z axes Minimum drawing coordinates on the X, Y, and Z axes Addresses I, J, and K
(Usually, the scale factor parameter and maximum value (center)/minimum value parameter are automatically determined so that these parameters need not be set.)
55

(6) Start sequence number This parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked.
B63294EN/02
This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block with a fourdigit number. When 0 is set, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. Specify an end sequence number. To check a program created in conversational mode, specify 0. (7) End sequence number This parameter is used only when an NC program is to be checked. This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block with a fourdigit number. When 0 is set, drawing is performed until the end of the program is reached. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. To check a program created in conversational mode, specify 0. (8) Tool compensation This parameter specifies whether to use the tool compensation functions (tool length compensation and cutter compensation) in tool path drawing. (9) Color specification Seven colors (white, red, green, yellow, blue, purple, and light blue) are available for selection. Path Tool position : Specify the color for drawing the tool path. : Specify the color of the mark used to indicate the current tool position.
Automatic change : Specify this item when the color of the tool path is to be automatically changed by a T command. Yes : Changes the color of a tool path automatically. No : Does not change the color of a tool path automatically. When Yes is specified, the color of the tool path changes in the order described above each time a T code is specified; when light blue is used, the next color is white. Tool : Specify the color for drawing a tool. (This item is valid only when tool figure display is provided.)
(10) Machining profile display A machining profile drawing program needs to be registered beforehand. When a machining program not created in the conversational mode is subject to drawing, its machining profile cannot be drawn. In this case, specify No in this parameter. (11) Tool figure display When the tool path of a machining program created in the conversational mode is drawn to check the program, the tool figure is drawn as a column (whose height is 0, according to the FANUC standard specification) at the start of each block. If the machining program was not created in conversational mode, the tool figure is not drawn.
56
B63294EN/02 1.5.2 Animated simulation

1. Animated simulation execution screen Press [SOLID GRAPH]. The following screen appears:
NOTE 1 Before entering this menu, select the machining program to be checked and set the mode to AUTO mode.
01234 N00008
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
MEM **** *** ***

< PATH GRAPH GRAPH PARAM ROTA TION 3PLAN TOP VIEW SECT. PLAN
08:53:50
DRAW START
NOTE 2 To switch to tool path drawing (wireframe), press [PATH GRAPH]. A soft key can be used to switch between tool path drawing and animated simulation. NOTE 3 To draw a blank, specify the drawing parameters for blank dimensions, color, and so forth appropriately. NOTE 4 The programmed workpiece coordinate system is ignored. NOTE 5 Only one blank figure can be defined, so the copy menus (ZI05 to ZI11) are drawn using the same coordinates. The meanings of each soft key are indicated below. Soft key PATH GRAPH GRAPH PARAM ROTATION 3PLAN TOP VIEW SECT.PLAN DRAW START WARNING Meaning Switches to the tool path drawing screen (wireframe). Press to change drawing parameters. Rotates a generated drawing. Generates a triplane drawing from a drawn machining profile. Draws the top view of a generated machining profile. Draws the crosssectional view of a generated machining profile. Starts drawing after drawing a blank and performing the head search operation.
Even after animated simulation has been used to ensure that the programmed machining operation is satisfactory, if the actually entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine (including the jig), possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. For this reason, before starting actual machining, ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine, for example, by executing the machining program at an extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the machine.
57
B63294EN/02
2. Execution of drawing Press [DRAW START] to execute animated simulation. During execution, only soft key [STOP] can be used.
01234 N01000
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
Y X 16:16:05
DRAW START
MEM **** *** ***

< PATH GRAPH GRAPH PARAM ROTA TION 3PLAN TOP VIEW SECT. PLAN
Soft key STOP Terminates drawing forcibly.
Meaning
When drawing is terminated forcibly using this soft key, it may take a short time before drawing terminates completely. When end of program (M02/M30) is executed, drawing is terminated, and the soft key display automatically returns to that of the original execution screen. A generated animated simulation drawing is preserved until the power is turned off unless a drawing parameter is changed or a new drawing operation is started. 3. Drawing rotation A drawing can be rotated by pressing [ROTATION].
PATH GRAPHIC (ROTATION)
01234 N01000
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
Y X 16:16:56
SET END
MEM **** *** ***
Soft key
Meaning Rotates a blank in the counterclockwise direction around the vertical axis. Rotates a blank in the clockwise direction around the vertical axis.
SET END
Pressed after setting is completed.
58
B63294EN/02
4. Triplane drawing A triplane drawing is generated. Press [3PLAN].
PATH GRAPHIC (3PLANE)
01234 N00008
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
MEM **** *** ***

DRAWNG ROTATE
10:15:43
SET END
Soft key
Meaning Moves the cross section position of a left or right side face left [ ] or right [ ]. Moves the cross section position of a top or bottom side face upward [ ] or downward [ ]. Selects a side view of a drawing. Returns to the original screen. , , , , or representing the cross section
DRAWNG ROTATE SET END
To move the cross section position of a side face, move mark with soft keys [ ], [ ],[ ], and [ ]. Press [SET END] to return to the original screen. 5. Top view drawing A top view is drawn. Press [TOP VIEW].
01234 N00008
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000
MEM **** *** ***

PATH GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SOLID GRAPH
10:15:43
DRAW START
Soft key DRAW START SOLID GRAPH
Meaning Starts drawing after head search operation. Returns to the original solid graph.
59

6. CrossSectional View
B63294EN/02
To display a crosssectional view of a workpiece, press the [SECT.PLAN] soft key on the animated simulation screen. The following soft keys appear:
Soft key +SIDE+ +SIDE SIDE+ SIDE XAXIS SECT. YAXIS SECT. ZAXIS SECT. SET END
Meaning Moves a plane in the positive direction when it is on the positive side of the selected plane. Moves a plane in the negative direction when it is on the positive side of the selected plane. Moves a plane in the positive direction when it is on the negative side of the selected plane. Moves a plane in the negative direction when it is on the negative side of the selected plane. Selects a plane perpendicular to the Xaxis (YZ plane). Selects a plane perpendicular to the Yaxis (ZX plane). Selects a plane perpendicular to the Zaxis (XY plane). Returns to the original screen.
The units in which the cross section is moved can be specified with parameter No. 6515. 7. Animated simulation drawing parameters Press [GRAPH PARAM] to change the animated simulation drawing parameters.The following drawing parameter screen appears:
SOLID GRAPHIC PARAMETER BLANK FORM BLANK POSITION = X= Y= Z= I= J= K= = = = 0 75.000 50.000 30.000 150.000 100.000 53.000 +2 5.000 0.000 COLOR VERTICAL SIDE RIDGE START SEQ. NO. END SEQ. NO. ANIME SPEED VERTCAL AXIS = BLUE = SKY BLUE = YELLOW = 0 = 0 = 0 = 2 AXIS
BLANK DIMENSION
TOOL ATTACHMENT TOOL RADIUS TOOL LENGTH
>_
< RECT. PARA. COLUM COLUM COLUM ZPARA XPARA YPARA SET END
After setting required parameters, press [SET END]. The screen display returns to the original execution screen. Each parameter has the meaning described below. 60
B63294EN/02
(1) Blank figures Up to two types of blank figures can be set: Rectangular parallelepiped Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis) (2) Blank origin (X,Y,Z)
This parameter sets the coordinates (X,Y,Z) of the reference position of a blank in the workpiece coordinate system. When the blank is a rectangular parallelepiped, its reference position is the corner facing the negative direction along each axis. When the blank is a column or cylinder, its reference position is the center of the base. (3) Blank dimensions (I,J,K) This parameter sets the dimensions of a blank. Rectangular parallelepiped Z Y J K (X,Y,Z) X I
Column/cylinder (parallel to the Z axis)
I Y
X (X,Y,Z)
(4) Tool radius This parameter sets the tool radius. Usually, this parameter is determined automatically and need not be set for a machining program created in the conversational mode. Note that this parameter applies only when the tool figure is a cylinder. (5) Tool tip distance This parameter sets the distance (usually 0) between the programmed point and the tool tip. Usually, this parameter is determined automatically and need not be set for a machining program created in the conversational mode.
61
B63294EN/02
Programmed point K Tool tip
(6) Start sequence number This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing start block. When 0 is set, drawing starts at the beginning of the program. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. When checking a conversational program, set 0. (7) End sequence number This parameter sets the sequence number of a drawing end block. When 0 is set, drawing is performed until the end of the program is reached. A sequence number check is made with the main program and subprograms as well. When checking a conversational program, set 0. (8) Animated simulation speed This parameter sets the interval (0 to 255) used in animated simulation drawing. A new drawing is displayed each time the machining of a specified number of blocks has been completed. When 0 is specified, a drawing is generated for each block.
1.5.3 Machining time display

During drawing or NC statement output, the logical machining time is calculated from the specified NC statements and displayed in the bottomleft corner of the screen. The time is displayed in hours:minutes:seconds format.
O0030 N00030
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 F 280.000 S 254 T 25
35.9
MEM **** *** *** 15:17:31

The machining time is calculated as follows: 1. At the start of drawing, the displayed machining time is automatically reset to 0. 2. During drawing, the machining time incurred by each block is calculated and added to the total. 3. In the calculation, the override is always assumed to be 100%.
62
B63294EN/02
4. When calculating the time required to execute a rapid traverse block, the time incurred by motion along each axis is obtained from the corresponding parameters for travel distance, rapid traverse rate, and acceleration/deceleration. The longest time incurred by such motion is regarded as being the execution time for the block. 5. The time required to execute a cutting feed block in feedperminute mode is obtained from the corresponding parameters for travel distance, feed amount, and acceleration/deceleration time. 6. The time required to execute a cutting feed block in feedperrotation mode is obtained from the corresponding parameters for travel distance, feed amount, spindle speed, and acceleration/deceleration time. 7. The time required to execute a dwell block is the dwell time. 8. The average execution times for the miscellaneous function, spindlespeed function, and tool function must be specified beforehand in separate parameters so that the time required to execute a miscellaneous function block can be calculated. Desired execution times can be set for three different miscellaneous functions. If two or more miscellaneous functions are specified in a single block, the longest of the specified times is regarded as being the time required to execute that block. NOTE 1 Only the Xaxis, Yaxis, and Zaxis are supported. NOTE 2 If the machining time exceeds 18 hours, the displayed time is reset to 0. NOTE 3 Parameters 9121 to 9129 relate to the machining time display. For details, see the parameter list.
1.5.4 Background drawing (optional)

(1) Overview The background drawing function generates a drawing of a program while machining is being executed according to another program. This is an optional function of Super CAPi M. (2) Features The background drawing function analyzes a program and generates a corresponding drawing, independently of NC machining. This function enables a program to be checked, by viewing the generated drawing, while other machining is being performed. If this optional function is provided, the program list screen can be displayed, a program can be selected and, of course, the standard drawing function can be executed on the drawing screen. (3) Specifications Program selection When background drawing is started, the mostrecently edited program is automatically selected. Alternatively, a desired program can be selected by using the program selection function. If no program is selected for background editing, the program number is set to 0. Because the number of the program to be drawn is not specified in this case, drawing cannot be started immediately. Select a program number, then start drawing of that program. Tool offset value Tool offset values for machining and background drawing are provided separately in this system. When drawing is started or when a program is selected from the drawing screen, the tool offset value for machining is copied to be used as tool offset value for background drawing. If the G10 command, used to rewrite the offset, is specified during machining or drawing, the rewritten value does not affect the other offset value. S Tool offset value setting in list of tools to be used If an offset value is entered using the tool list screen during background editing, the entered value is used to modify the tool offset value for background drawing. The tool offset value for machining remains as is, however, so that machining is not affected. If a program is selected after that displayed on the drawing screen, the tool offset value for machining is copied as tool offset value for drawing. The value set using the tool list screen thus does not become effective. S Parameters The same parameters are used for both background drawing and actual machining.
63

S Workpiece origin offset value
B63294EN/02
The workpiece origin offset value constitutes part of a parameter. The offset values for machining and background drawing offset value are specified separately. When a program is selected using the drawing screen, the workpiece origin offset value for machining is copied to be used as the data for background drawing. If the G10 command, used to rewrite the workpiece origin offset value, is specified during machining or drawing, the rewritten offset value does not affect the other offset values. S Clearing alarms If background drawing is stopped due to an alarm being issued, the contents of the alarm are displayed at the bottomleft corner of the screen. To clear the alarm, press the [STOP] soft key. If the RESET key is pressed while machining is being performed in the foreground, the machining will stop. (4) Operation Starting background drawing Select 3 PROGRAM CHECK from the conversational basic menu screen. The background drawing screen is displayed.
O0031 N00031
X Y Z F S T 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0
MACHINING TIME 00:00:00 >_
35.9
16:28:13
FG SOLID << GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SCALE ERASE
BG GRP
SCALIN SINGLE PROG. DRAW G OFF OFF SELECT START
Selecting the program With the input buffer empty, press the [PROG.SELECT] key. Programs are listed in the bottom right window of the screen and the [PROG.SELECT] soft key is displayed in reverse video. To clear the program list window, press the [PROG.SELECT] key again. Enter a number into the input buffer, then press the [PROG.SELECT] soft key, regardless of whether the program list is displayed. The specified program number is selected. The selected program number is displayed in the topright corner of the screen.
O0031 N00031
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 PROGRAM DIR. : 1 O0001 O0002 O0003 O0004 O0005 O0006 O0007 O1000 O0010 O0011 O1002 O1003 O2000 O0020 O0030 O0031
MACHINING TIME 00:00:00 >_ INPUT PROGRAM NO.

FG SOLID << GRAPH GRAPH PARAM
16:31:02
BG GRP
ERASE SCALIN SINGLE PROG. DRAW G OFF OFF SELECT START
64
B63294EN/02
Starting drawing
Press the [DRAW START] key. The selected program is drawn. Press the leftmost return soft key. The screen is returned to the conversational basic menu screen.
O0030 N00030
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 F 280.000 S 254 T 25
MACHINING TIME 00:07:33 >_
35.9
16:37:28
FG SOLID << GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SCALE ERASE
BG GRP
SCALIN SINGLE PROG. DRAW G OFF OFF SELECT START
NOTE 1 If the user switches to another display screen with a function key during drawing, the drawing temporarily stops. When the user returns to the drawing screen, the single stop state is set. By pressing [DRAW RESTART], drawing restarts from halfway. If the user switches between tool path drawing and animated simulation, the single stop state is not held, and drawing is not restarted. NOTE 2 If a system equipped with the background drawing function cannot be activated, turn off the power then hold down the CAN and 2 keys on the MDI and turn the power backon (this causes the subRAM area to be cleared). NOTE 3 To use background drawing, set bit 7 of NC parameter No. 8100 to 1 (if it is set to 0, reset processing cannot be terminated). NOTE 4 Setting bit 0 (RST) of parameter No. 8100 ensures that pressing the RESET key during drawing does not affect the foreground.
65
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.5.5 Changing the screen display colors
B63294EN/02
The colors used to display the conversational program screen and animated simulation screen can be set as desired. The second page of the drawing parameter screen for animated simulation is used to set the display colors.
1. Setting the Display Colors The top half of the screen is used to set the colors of the blank figure (top, front, and side) as displayed by animated simulation. The bottom half of the screen is used to set the colors displayed on the conversational screen. 16 colors, selected from a range of 4096, can be displayed simultaneously. Each color can be set by combining 16 levels of red, blue, and green. On the conversational screen, the numbers displayed for the colors correspond to the numbers assigned to the parts of the screen. The screen colors can be set by comparing the sample screen, shown on the left, with the color numbers shown on the right. Set the colors as follows: Position the cursor to the number of the color to be set, using the arrow keys on the keyboard. Select the color component to be adjusted by pressing the [RED], [BLUE], or [GREEN] soft key. The pressed soft key is displayed in reverse video, and adjustment of the corresponding color component is enabled. Use the [BRIGHT] and [DARK] soft keys to adjust the brightness. Each time the [BRIGHT] or [DARK] soft key is pressed, the brightness is adjusted by one level. Once the brightness of the selected component has been set as desired, the color displayed under the selected number changes accordingly. Simultaneously, on the sample screen, the color of the parts corresponding to that color number is also changed. The following table lists the correspondence between the color numbers and the parts of the conversational screen:
66
B63294EN/02
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 B.G.COL. Alarm display Corresponding part

Default Red Green Yellow Blue Purple Light blue White Blue Light blue Light yellow Light gray Light gray Light gray Dark gray Gray
Background of mode display, and soft key characters Top title bar Soft key characters and characters in the text of prompt messages Soft key characters Not used Highlighted cursor and button soft keys Selected window bar Unselected window bar Message bar and keyin buffer Background of text display Guidance and figure drawings Background of data in process list Shades of button soft keys and windows Background of conversational screen
2. Storing and Calling Display Color Data The set color data can be stored into and called from the parameter area or RAM area. Pressing the [+] soft key displays the following soft keys:
Color data can be stored into the following four areas: COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 COLOR4 Storing color data Select the area into which the color data is to be stored, using the [COLOR1] to [COLOR4] soft keys. Then, press the [MEMORY] soft key. After confirming the operation, press the [EXEC] soft key. The color data currently set on the screen is stored (written) into the selected storage area. Calling color data Select the area from which the color data is to be called, using the [COLOR1] to [COLOR4] soft keys. Then, press the [RECALL] soft key. After confirming the operation, press the [EXEC] soft key. The color data in the selected storage area is called and set. : Stores data into the parameter area (parameters No. 9701 to 9730). : Stores data into RAM area 1. : Stores data into RAM area 2. : Stores data into RAM area 3.
67
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.5.6 Notes on drawing

f f
B63294EN/02
A program subject to drawing must be stored in memory. Programs that are not stored in memory can not be drawn. All programs subject to drawing must end with M02 or M30. A drawing can be generated only when the machine is ready. Drawing cannot be performed when the machine is being operated. The table below lists the setting data items and switches that must be set before drawing. Setting data/switch Tool compensation value Single block Optional block skip Feedforward Dryrun State Set when a drawing is generated with tool compensation. Off Set Off Off
During drawing, machine control signals (including those for miscellaneous functions) are not output. However, control signals such as OP, STL, SPL, RST, and AL are output. In addition, the drawingin progress signal CKGRP as indicated below is output when drawing is performed. #7 F062 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CKGRP When control signals output during drawing affect machine control, the PMC ladder needs to be modi fied using CKGRP so that these control signals can be ignored. f The machine lock state is automatically set during drawing. The drawing path for a command (such as G28, G30, or G31) that changes a movement depending on the machine position at the time of program execution is the same as the path of a movement in the machine lock state. Drawing is performed only along axes parallel to the X, Y, and Z axes. Drawing cannot be performed along a rotation axis, additional axis, or PMC axis. For detailed information about drawingrelated parameters No. 6500 to No.6515, see the list of pa rameters. When the drawing function is executed, the X, Y, and Z axes must be the first, second, and third axes, respectively. If the relationship is changed, the function will not be able to generate a drawing correctly.
f f f
68
B63294EN/02
1.6 NC Statement Output Function [Basic Menu 4]

1.6.1 NC statement output function
A machining program created in the conversational mode can be directly executed without modification. Such a program can also be converted to an NC statement program for execution or modification. An NC statement program created by such conversion can be stored in an NC part program storage area or can be punched out on an external storage unit via the reader/punch interface. This function is optional. While this type of conversion is in progress, other operations such as background editing, manual movement, and data setting using the MDI cannot be performed. 1. Press [4] of the basic menu. The following program screen appears:
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1234 PAGE :01/ CONVERT
NOTE
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 72. 40.000 773. 1431. FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73. 50.000 309. 572. FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END PROGRAM DIR. : 1 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER 01234 O0001 O2000 O3000 TAPPING DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING TAP HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
SELECT OUTPUT MEDIA

< PUNCH MEMORY
2. Specify the destination to which NC statements after conversion are to be output. [PUNCH] : Outputs the program created by conversion to an external storage unit via the reader/ punch interface.
[MEMORY] : Stores the program created by conversion in an NC part program storage area. In this case, memory protection must be released. Press one of the soft keys. Here, [MEMORY] is pressed as an example. 3. Enter the number of the machining program to be converted, then press [SELECT]. Pressing [SELECT] without first entering a program number causes the currently selected machining program to be converted.
SELECT ALTERED PROGRAM SELECT CANCEL
>
69
B63294EN/02
4. When [DECIDE] is pressed, the graphic screen below appears. Then press [DRAW START]. NC statement output is executed as well as tool path drawing. (Tool path drawing is always performed after scaling is executed.)
PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) CONVERT NC FORMAT
01234 N00007
X 50.000 Y 0.000 Z 10.000
50.4
PRESS RETURN SOFTKEY

RETURN
MEM STRT *** ***
10:44:33 DRAWING
When tool path drawing is started and NC commands are executed, the selected machining program is converted to an NC statement program blockbyblock for storage in a part program storage area or for output to an external storage unit. NOTE 1 If an NC statement program number specified for conversion is already registered in the NC statement program storage area, P/S alarm 73 is always raised regardless of parameter setting. In such a case, change the program number, or delete the existing program with the same program number before starting conversion processing. NOTE 2 If the following bit is set, the converted NC statements can be displayed in the tool path drawing. #7 9133 CDD #6 #5 CSB #4 #3 #2 CDD #1 #0
FANUC standard settings
: Determines whether the converted NC statements are displayed on the screen. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
CSB
: Determines whether the converted NC statements are displayed one block by one block. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
PATH GRAPHIC (EXECUTION) CONVERT NC FORMAT O0030 O0033 X65.Y40.; G52X0.Y0.Z0.; G52X0.Y0.Z0.; X37.5Y29.; X9.919Y8.961; X20.454Y23.461; X54.546Y23.461; X65.081Y8.961; G52X0.Y0.Z0.; M30; X
O0030 N00030
X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 F 280.000 S 254 T 25
35.9
MEM **** *** *** 16:44:27
70
B63294EN/02
NOTE

By setting the parameter below, a process name, tool name, and nominal diameter can be output as a comment in an NC statement program after conversion. For the method of comment setting, see Section 1.7.11. #6 #5 #4 #3 NCC #2 #1 #0
#7 9140 NCC
0 : Does not output a comment. 1 : Outputs a comment. Example of output: G90 G43 Z200. H1 ; : (POCKETTING, END MILL, 70.000 ) G0 Z3. ; : A comment is output at the start of each process. For example, a comment is output when the following are executed: 1) Each preparation menu block 2) Hole machining menu block 3) Auxiliary block
71
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.6.2 Alarms raised during NC statement output
B63294EN/02
When a machining program is converted to an NC statement program, it is also executed at the same time for machining operation or drawing. Therefore, a P/S alarm may be raised, depending on the contents of the machining program or operation started. When a P/S alarm is raised, correct the machining program by referring to the NC operators manual. If a P/S alarm is raised during conversion, the NC statement program created thus far by conversion is stored in a part program storage area. To convert the machining program again, first correct the machining program, and delete the stored incomplete NC statement program. Then restart conversion operation from the beginning. The table below lists the alarms that may be raised during conversion. Alarm No. 070 Cause Action Description Memory is insufficient for part program storage. Take action as described below. 1. When other NC statement programs are already stored, and the remaining memory size is insufficient for the program being created by conversion: Save the other programs to an external storage unit via the reader/punch interface, delete these programs, then restart the conversion operation from the beginning. 2. When the entire NC statement program storage area allocated is still insufficient for the program being created by conversion: As described in the next section, output the NC program created by conversion to an external storage unit. When the NC program created by conversion is to be executed, use the DNC operation via the reader/punch interface. The NC statement program storage area can be expanded by parameter setting. This method, however, reduces the area for conversational programs, and also clears all data temporarily. Therefore, this method should be used only when absolutely necessary. The number of registered programs exceeded 63, 125, 200, 400, or 1000 (option). Save some of the NC statement programs already registered to an external storage unit via the reader/punch interface, then delete these programs. Restart conversion from the beginning, or output programs created by conversion to an external storage unit via the reader/ punch interface as described in the next section. An attempt was made to register a program number that is already registered. Delete the existing NC statement program with the same program number, or change the program number of the new program specified in conversion operation to a unique number, then restart conversion from the beginning.
072
Cause Action
073
Cause Action
72
B63294EN/02 1.6.3 Settings related to the reader/punch interface
A machining program converted to an NC statement program is externally punched out via the reader/punch interface. For this and other punchout operations, the settings described below are required. (1) Selection of channel 1 or 2 On the setting data screen, set the channel to use for punchout in the I/O channel item. Channel 3 cannot be used. When channel 1 or 2 is used, note that options are required. For detailed information on setting data and operation, refer to the description on setting data in the NC operators manual. (2) Setting the baud rate on a selected channel and other settings Set necessary parameters for the channel selected in (1) above. Channel 1: Parameter No. 101 to No. 103 Channel 2: Parameter No. 111 to No. 113 Channel 2: Parameter No. 121 to No. 123 For detailed information on setting data, refer to the description on parameter setting in the NC operators manual.
73
B63294EN/02
1.7 Conversational Data Setting and Reference [Basic Menu 8]

Press [8] of the basic menu screen. The conversational data screen below appears. Soft keys are displayed which represent various files required to create a program in the conversational mode.
C.A.P. DATA DATA INPUT OR OUTPUT OF DATA I/O PRE SET DATA OF PRETOOLS BEFORE C.A.P. PROGRAMMING TOOL
TOOL DISPLAY AND SET VARIOUS FILE DATA OF TOOLS REGISTERED
TOOL DISPLAY THE DIRECTORY OF DRCTRY TOOLS IN TOOL FILE DEF. DISPLAY DEFAULT DATA FILE DIVIDE DISPLAY THE DIRECTORY OF TOLDIR DIVIDE TOOLS IN TOOL FILE F.S. DISPLAY AND SET DATA OF FILE CUTTING CONDITION
TOOL DISPLAY A LIST OF TOOL USED SET TORDER FOR TORDER CHANGE USED SELECT SOFTKEY.
< DATA I/O DEF. FILE TOOL USED
PRE TOOL
TOOL FILE
TOOL DIVIDE F.S. DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
Meaning of each soft key (1) DATA I/O This soft key reads or punches a file via the reader/punch interface. NOTE This function is incompatible with a memory card interface. No conversational data can, therefore, be input to or output from a memory card. (2) DEF. FILE This file is used to display default values for the inquiries of the data input screen. Data displayed on the data input screen can be modified by changing the data in the file. Usually, this soft key is not used. (3) TOOL USED This soft key displays a list of tools used in a program. (4) PRETOOL This soft key is used to set and display pretool data required for automatic tool determination. (5) TOOLFILE This soft key is used to set and display various data items related to managed tools. (6) TOOL DRCTRY This soft key displays a directory of managed tools. (7) DIVIDE TOLDIR This soft key displays tool directories classified by tool name and nominal diameter. (8) F.S. FILE A This soft key is used to set and display various data items required for automatic cutting condition determination. Usually, this soft key is not used. (9) F.S. FILE B This soft key is used to set and display various data items required for automatic determination of cutting conditions for CAP I. Usually, this soft key is not used. (10)OFFSET FILE This soft key is used to set and display a position offset value for each workpiece used when All Copy Pattern (ZI06) is specified. (11)NC STATEMENT CONVERSION COMMENT This file is used to output a comment on each process in NC program conversion. By modifying data in this file, comments to be output can be changed. NOTE Each file is locked with the data protection key (KEY2). Before setting or changing data in a file, unlock the file using this key.
74
B63294EN/02

Before attempting to use a conversational function to create a machining program, ensure that all required data in the tool file, cutting condition file, and pretool list is set correctly. If any of the required data is not set correctly, the cutting conditions will not be set correctly, possibly resulting in damage to the tool, or even injury to the user or bystanders. The initial value file, pretool list, tool file, and cutting condition file presented in the following examples differ from those used for actual machining. Actual data will vary from one machine model to another. Refer to the relevant manual(s), supplied by the machine tool builder, for details. If the set data is incompatible with the characteristics of a specific machine, a machining program created using the conversational function will not be able to operate as intended. If a machining program fails to operate correctly, the tool may collide with the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
WARNING
WARNING
75
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.7.1 Data I/O
B63294EN/02
Various conversational data items can be saved and read to and from an external storage unit (reader or punch). Before using this function, connect an external I/O device and set necessary parameters including that for device selection. (For detailed information, refer to the description on setting parameters in the NC operators manual.) Press [DATA I/O]. The following screen appears:
DATA I/O
READ PUNCH
DATA I/O PARA GUIDE READ EXEC OR I/O CHANNEL I/O DEVICE NO. = = 0 3
ALL CAP DATA DEFAULT DATA PRETOOL LIST TOOL FILE CUT.COND.FILE
PUNCH EXEC
SELECT FROM SOFTKEYS.

< FLOPPY READ DIR PUNCH ALL DATA DEF. FILE PRE TOOL TOOL FILE F.S. FILE
(1) To punch out conversational data Press [PUNCH]. The following soft keys appear:
SELECT SOFTKEY READ PUNCH ALL DATA DEF. TOOL PRE TOOL TOOL FILE F.S. FILE
Press the soft key for the file to be punched out. If the [ALL DATA] soft key is pressed, for example, it is displayed in reverse video. (With [ALL DATA], conversational data can be punched out in a batch.)
SELECT SOFTKEY READ PUNCH EXEC ALL DATA DEF. TOOL PRE TOOL TOOL FILE F.S. FILE
Press [PUNCH EXEC]. The specified file is punched out. (2) To read conversational data Press [READ]. The following soft keys appear: The [PUNCH] soft key is displayed in reverse video.
SELECT SOFTKEY READ PUNCH ALL DATA DEF. TOOL PRE TOOL
> TOOL FILE F.S. FILE
Press the soft key for the file to be read. If the [ALL DATA] soft key is pressed, for example, it is displayed in reverse video. (With [ALL DATA], conversational data can be read in a batch.)
76
B63294EN/02

Here, enter the file number of the medium (such as a floppy disk) that contains the data.
READ FILE NO.= PUNCH READ EXEC ALL DATA DEF. TOOL PRE TOOL
> 1 2 3 4 TOOL FILE F.S. FILE
Press [READ EXEC]. The specified file is read. NOTE When RS232C is specified in I/O device setting (parameter Nos. 102, 112, 122, 132), no file number needs to be entered. Just press [READ EXEC].
77
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.7.2 Initial value file
B63294EN/02
Press the [DEF. FILE]. The initial value file screen appears as shown below. Default data for the inquiries can be set and displayed on this screen. The initial value file contains a total of 100 data items. Each data item can be set using a real number from 0 to +99999.999. To set a data item, move the cursor to the item with the cursor keys ( , , , ) and page keys ( , ), and type a numeric value. Then press <INPUT> at the MDI keyboard.
DEFAULT FILE NO. #6101 #6102 #6103 #6104 #6105 #6106 #6107 #6108 #6109 #6110 #6111 #6112 #6113 #6114 #6115 #6116 DATA 2.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.000 2.000 2.000 3.000 0.000 1.000 1.000 90.000 4.000 5.000 5.000 1.000 : 1 NO. #6117 #6118 #6119 #6120 #6121 #6122 #6123 #6124 #6125 #6126 #6127 #6128 #6129 #6130 #6131 #6132 DATA 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 1.000 0.000 1.000 2.000 8.000 6.000 1.000 70.000 NO. #6133 #6134 #6135 #6136 #6137 #6138 #6139 #6140 #6141 #6142 #6143 #6144 #6145 #6146 #6147 #6148 DATA 1.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 NO. #6149 #6150 #6151 #6152 #6153 #6154 #6155 #6156 #6157 #6158 #6159 #6160 #6161 #6162 #6163 #6164 DATA 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
>_
< NO. SEARCH DEF. FILE TOOL USED PRE TOOL TOOL FILE TOOL DIVIDE F.S. DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
78
B63294EN/02 1.7.3 Tool list

Press [TOOL USED]. The following screen appears:
USED TOOL : 1
PROGRAM NUMBER 1234 ORDR TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NDIA. TCODE 1 72 FACE MILL 40.000 72 2 73 FACE MILL 50.000 73 3 3CENT.DRILL 3.000 3 4 12 DRILL 4.000 12 5 14 DRILL 8.000 14 6 25 TAP 10.000 25 7 0 ?????? RADIUS COMP. LENGTH COMP. D OFFSET H OFFSET 72 20.000 172 0.000 73 25.000 173 0.000 3 1.000 103 0.000 12 0.000 112 0.000 14 0.000 114 0.000 25 0.000 125 0.000
>_
< LIST ING DEF. FILE TOOL USED PRE TOOL TOOL FILE TOOL DIVIDE F.S. DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
The tool list displays all tools used in the program currently selected. The user can use this list to determine the tools to prepare and set in the magazine for machining with the program. On the screen, the user can also set cutter compensation data, tool length compensation data for the tools used with the program. Before machining, be sure to create and display a tool list to set and confirm the tools and compensation data. One screen can display 16 tools, and up to four pages can be displayed. To set an item, move the cursor to the item with the cursor keys ( , , , ) and page keys ( , ), and type a numeric value. Then press <INPUT> at the MDI keyboard. To create a tool list, first enter a program number through the MDI keyboard, then press [LISTING]. A tool list is created and displayed for the entered program number. When [LISTING] is pressed without entering a program number, a tool list is created and displayed for the program currently selected. When a tool list is created, the machining program is searched for address T (tool management numbers). Tool management numbers are searched for in the tool file to display various data items. When the tool file does not contain a particular tool management number, ???? is displayed in the tool name item. When no data is set, **** is displayed. NOTE 1 If the same tool is used more than once, the tool list displays the tool for the first use only. NOTE 2 A tool list can display up to 64 tools. When a program uses more than 64 tools, the tool list does not display any tools beyond the first 64 tools. NOTE 3 When a tool list is created, the program is searched for address T. This search operation covers only the main program; the subprograms and macro programs called from the main program are not searched. In conversational programming, be sure to specified address T (tool management number) in the main program only. NOTE 4 If a search of the data for the machining program is performed to create a list of tools to be used, T, D, and H, used in the program, are all displayed in the tool list. Care must be taken if T, D, or H are used for other than the T, D, or H codes. (See the description of parameter No. 9216.) NOTE 5 Cutter compensation data and tool length compensation data can be set on the tool list screen. These data items can also be set on the OFFSET screen. However, the tool list screen allows compensation data to be set for each tool management number. NOTE 6 A tool list can be created during background editing. However, if cutter compensation data and tool length compensation data is set, the compensation data in the program being used for machining in the foreground may be altered. Therefore, the setting of compensation data and the modification of T and D codes are disabled. Before starting operation using a machining program that has been created using a conversaWARNING tional function, create a list of the tools to be used, to ensure that the geometry compensation data is correctly set for each of the tools to be used. If any incorrect data is found, correct it on the USED TOOL screen. If the machine is used with incorrectly specified data, the tool may collide with the machine and/or workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
79
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.7.4 Pretool list

Press [PRETOOL]. The following screen appears:
LIST PRETOOL : 1
FINL TOOL 25 TAP 10.000 PRE TOOL1 PRE TOOL5 14 DRILL 0.000 PRE TOOL2 PRE TOOL3 PRE TOOL6 PRE TOOL7 12 3 DRILL CENT.DRILL 4.000 3.000 PRE TOOL4 PRE TOOL8
B63294EN/02
AUX TOOL 1TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NOMINAL DIA. 2TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NOMINAL DIA. 3TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NOMINAL DIA. 4TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NOMINAL DIA. 07 CHAMFER 15.000 87 00 CHAMFER 15.000
15 3 DRILL CENT.DRILL 10.000 3.000
>_
< NO. SEARCH DEF. FILE TOOL USED PRETOOL TOOL FILE TOOL DIVIDE F.S. DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
A pretool list is used to set pretool data required for automatic tool selection. When automatic tool selection is not performed, or tools are automatically selected by other means, no data needs to be set in the pretool list. Automatic tool selection performed with the FANUC standard program is based on this pretool list. Tools are not selected according to an algorithm directly from the radius and effective depth of a hole to be tapped. Instead, the machining knowhow of the operator or plant is given priority; tools are selected before a program is developed, and their usage sequence is set in this pretool list. he pretools included in a pretool list are represented by the tool management numbers of tools that are used before a tool is used (for example, in a process for tapping or boring). (1) In a pretool list, a group of tools ranging from the first pretool, second pretool, and so on to the last pre tool used before the final tool is registered as a pattern. In addition, auxiliary tools, such as a chamfer tool, can be registered. When specifying a tap, however, set it not as an auxiliary tool but as a pretool. (2) For one pattern, up to 10 tools can be registered. Four patterns can be registered on one screen, and a total of up to 80 patterns can be registered. (3) To set a management number, move the cursor to the management number item with the cursor keys , ( , , , ) type a numeric value, then press <INPUT> on the MDI keyboard. (4) The tool name and nominal diameter corresponding to the entered tool management number are found in the tool file and are automatically displayed. If the tool file does not contain the tool management number, **** is displayed. If data is not set for the number, no data is displayed. (5) To cancel an entered tool management number, press <0> then <INPUT>, or press <CAN> then <INPUT> as the tool management number. (6) Type a pattern number on the MDI keyboard, then press [NO. SEARCH]. The pretools for the pattern number are displayed.
80
B63294EN/02 1.7.5 Tool file

Press [TOOL FILE]. The following tool file screen appears:
TOOL FILE : 1
1 1 CENT.DRILL 1.000 CARBIDE 1 1 101 0.000 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 2 2 CENT.DRILL 2.000 HIGHSPEED 2 2 102 0.000 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 3 3 CENT.DRILL 3.000 SPECIL 3 3 103 0.000 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 4 4 CENT.DRILL 4.000 CARBIDE 4 4 104 0.000 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
NO. TOOL NO. TOOL NAME NOMINAL DIA. MATERIAL TCODE DCODE HCODE SDIA./PITCH NO. OF TOOTH ANGL/DPTH SET LENGTH OF CUT COMPENSATION CORNERR
5 5 CENT.DRILL 5.000 HIGHSPEED 5 5 105 0.105 0 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
>_
On this tool file screen, various data items for up to 160 tools can be set and displayed. One screen can display data for five tools, and 32 pages (for 160 tools) are available. To set an item, move the cursor to the item with the cursor keys ( , , , ) and page keys ( , ). To set the tool name item or material item, just press the soft key displaying the desired data. To set other items, type a numeric value, then press <INPUT> on the MDI keyboard. To specify the serial number of a tool to be displayed, enter the serial number through the MDI keyboard, then press [NO. SEARCH]. Description of each tool file data item (1) NO. : Tool serial number. Various data items for up to 160 tools can be set and displayed.The cursor does not move to this item. (2) TOOL NO. : Tool management number. This number is used as a tool number entered on the conversational program data input screen. The number of digits used to enter a management number can be changed using parameter No. 9216 (TND (bit 7)). #7 9216 TND #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TND = 0: Management number of up to eight digits TND = 1: Management number of up to four digits A management number of up to eight digits can be set. Tool number embedding is not performed (see 1.8.3). A management number of up to four digits can be set. Tool number embedding is performed. If a management number longer than four digits is found, **** is displayed in red, and the message MISS FOR TOOLNUMBER SELECT SOFTKEY is output. (3) TOOL NAME : Select a tool name, such as a face mill or end mill, by pressing the corresponding soft key. When the cursor is placed on this item, tool names are displayed on the soft keys as shown below. A tool name can be set by pressing the corre sponding soft key.
CENTER DRILL TAP DRILL
REAMER BORE
BACK BORE
END MILL
FACE MILL
81

(4) NOMINAL DIA. (5) MATERIAL : Set the tool diameter.
B63294EN/02
: Select the tool material by pressing the corresponding soft key. When the cursor is placed on this item, materials are displayed on the soft keys as shown below. A material can be set by pressing the soft key.
CARBI HIGH SPECI DE SPEED AL
(6) TCODE (7) DCODE (8) HCODE (9) SDIA/PITCH (10)NO. OF TEETH (11)ANGL
: NCformat T code actually output from the NC machine to the power magnetic circuit when a management number is specified : Cutter compensation number for the tool : Length compensation number for the tool Offset values are set with the tool list.
: Set the small diameter of a tool such as a chamfering tool. : Set the number of teeth of a milling cutter such as a face mill. : Set the corner angle of a tool side face.
(12)LENGTH OF CUT : Set the length of a tool tip. (13)COMPENSATION : Set the distance between the tool length compensation measuring point and the point where the effective depth is determined. NOTE 1 When data is not set in the management number item, no other items can be set. To set a blank in the management number item, type 0 then press <INPUT>, or press <CAN> then <INPUT>. If a blank is set in the management number item when various data items are already set, all of those data items are cleared. NOTE 2 The cursor does not stop at those items marked with J . Items marked with J vary from one tool name to another.
82
B63294EN/02 1.7.6 Tool directory
Press [TOOL DRCTRY]. The following tool directory screen appears:

TOOL DIRECTRY TOOL NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 : 1 NDIA. 1.000 2.000 3.000 4.000 5.000 6.000 7.000 8.000 9.000 10.000 2.000 4.000 6.000 8.000 10.000 12.000 TOOL NO. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 TOOL NAME DRILL DRILL DRILL DRILL TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP TAP REAMER REAMER NDIA. 15.000 18.000 20.000 25.000 3.000 5.000 7.000 9.000 10.000 13.000 16.000 28.000 22.000 28.000 4.000 5.000
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
TOOL NAME CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL CENT.DRILL DRILL DRILL DRILL DRILL DRILL DRILL
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
>_
< DEF. FILE TOOL USED PRE TOOL TOOL FILE TOOL DIVIDE F.S. DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
One tool file directory screen displays tool serial numbers, management numbers, tool names, and nominal diameter data for 32 tools. This tool directory can be compared to the payroll of a company listing employee codes, names, and so forth. Data cannot be set on this screen.
83
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.7.7 Categorized tool directories

Press [DIVIDE TOLDIR]. The following tool directory screen appears:
DIVIDE TOLDIR : 1
B63294EN/02
TOOL NAME CENT.DRILL TOOL NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 NDIA. 1.000 2.000 3.000 4.000 5.000 6.000 7.000 8.000 9.000 10.000 MATERIAL CARBIDE HIGHSPEED SPECIAL CARBIDE HIGHSPEED SPECIAL CARBIDE HIGHSPEDD SPECIAL CARBIDE TCODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DCODE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 HCODE 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
>_
< DEF. FILE TOOL USED PRE TOOL TOOL FILE TOOL DIVIDE F.S. DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
On this categorized tool directory screen, tool information can be speedily obtained by typing a tool name and a range of nominal diameters, thus facilitating tool management number selection. The displayed tool file items are No., TOOL NO., NOMINALDIA., and the next four items starting with MATERIAL; these additional four items can be selected by setting parameter No. 9217 to No. 9220. One screen can display up to 14 tools. When more than 14 tools are to be displayed, press page keys and. (1) Display by specifying a tool name When the continuation key is pressed, the soft keys indicated below appear. Press the soft key for a tool name to display tool data on a toolbytool basis.
CENTER DRILL TAP DRILL
REAMER BORE
BACK BORE
END MILL
FACE MILL
RANGE DISPLY
(2) Toolbytool display by specifying a range of nominal diameters After specifying a tool name for display, a range of nominal diameters can be specified to display tool data within that range only. A direct specification method and range specification method are available for setting the range. f Direct specification : Displays only those tools that have a specified nominal diameter. f Range specification : Displays only those tools that have a specified range of nominal diameters. Press [RANGE DISPLY]. The following soft keys appear:
DIRECT RANGE
Direct specification Press [DIRECT]. The soft key indicated below appears. Enter a nominal diameter, then press <INPUT> on the MDI keyboard. The entered nominal diameter is set at the topright corner of the screen. Next, press [EXEC]. Only those tools that have the specified nominal diameter are displayed. Range specification Press [RANGE]. The same soft key as for direct specification appears. Enter the lower limit for the nominal diameters, then press <INPUT> on the MDI keyboard. Next, enter the upper limit for the nominal diameters, then press <INPUT> on the MDI keyboard. The upper limit can also be set before the lower limit. The entered nominal diameter range is set at the topright corner of the screen. Next, press [EXEC]. Only those tools that have the specified range of nominal diameters are displayed.
84
B63294EN/02 1.7.8 Cutting condition file A

Press [F.S. FILE]. The following cutting condition file appears:
F.S.FILE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 : DATA 20 100 8 5 120 120 40 90 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 1 NO. 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 DATA 20 100 8 5 110 110 40 75 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 NO. 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 49 DATA 25 90 8 5 80 80 35 100 0 0 0 0 0 90 0 0 NO. 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
DATA 30 80 8 5 110 110 50 110 0 0 0 0 0 90 0 0
>_
Cutting condition data can be set and displayed on this screen. A total of 512 cutting condition data items are available; each item can be set to a value from 0 to 32767. For detailed information on each data item, refer to the relevant manual of the machine tool builder. To set a data item, move the cursor to the item with the cursor keys ( , , , ) and page keys ( , ), type a numeric value, then press <INPUT> on the MDI keyboard. A serial number can be specified by entering it on the MDI keyboard and pressing [NO. SEARCH].
85
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.7.9 Cutting condition file B

1. Outline
B63294EN/02
By this function, it is possible to use setting data (the tool data file, cutting condition data and pretool list data) of CAP I. When the parameter No.9238#0 is set to 1, you can use this function. NOTE When you use this function, following optional function can not be specified. Conversational C language programming function (J750). Be sure to set a workpiece material name because parameter No. 9500 to parameter No. 9599 are referenced.
2. Detail When [F.S. FILE] softkey is pressed on the conversational data screen, the following screen is displayed.
F.S. FILE FILE
TOOL DISPLAY AND SET VARIOUS DATA OF TOOLS REGISTERED
1. MACHINING COND. (HOLE) 2. MACHINING COND. (MILL)
F.S. DISPLAY AND SET PARAMETER 3. MACHINING COND. (SPECIAL) 4. MACHINING COND. (COEFF) PARAM OF CUTTING CONDITION DEF. DISPLAY DEFAULT DATA FILE
TOOL DISPLAY A LIST OF TOOL USED SET TORDER FOR TORDER CHANGE USED SELECT FROM SOFTKEYS.
< DATA I/O
F.S. DEF. PARAM FILE
TOOL USED
1 2 3 4
The F.S.FILE is displayed on the window at the right low of the conversational data screen. You can set the data of feed amount and cutting speed for eight types of workpiece materials for every tool. The following setting display screens are displayed.
86
B63294EN/02
[Tool name]
Drilling tool Center drill
[Tool material]
HSS Cemented carbide Special HSS Cemented carbide Special HSS Cemented carbide Special HSS Cemented carbide Special HSS (roughing) HSS (finishing) Cemented carbide (roughing) Cemented carbide (finishing) Special (roughing) Special (finishing) HSS (roughing) HSS (finishing) Cemented carbide (roughing) Cemented carbide (finishing) Special (roughing) Special (finishing) HSS (roughing) HSS (finishing) Cemented carbide (roughing) Cemented carbide (finishing) Special (roughing) Special (finishing) HSS Cemented carbide Special
Drill
Tap
Reamer
Bore
Milling tool
Face mill tool
End mill tool
Special tool
Chamferin g tool
Setting of coefficients
Drill Tap Reamer Bore (roughing) Bore (finishing) Face mill tool (roughing) Face mill tool (finishing) End mill tool (roughing) End mill tool (finishing)
NOTE
In the setting of coefficients screen, the maximum number of ranks for all types of tools is 10.
87

2.1 Machining condition of hole
B63294EN/02
Select [1] softkey on the F.S.file screen, the cutting condition data screen for drill tool is displayed on the following window screen.
TOOL DISPLAY AND SET VARIOUS DATA

MACHINING COND. (HOLE) : 1 FILE OF TOOLS REGISTERED HISPDDRILL (S.DIA 0MM) MATERIAL FEED F SPEED V (MM/REV.) (M/MIN.) 1.GHISA GR 0.500 80.000 2.GHISA DU 0.000 0.000 3.ACCIA CO 0.000 0.000 4.ACCIA CA 0.000 0.000 5.ACCIA LE 0.000 0.000 6.ACCIA IN 0.000 0.000 7.ALLUMINI 0.000 0.000 8.SPECIALE 0.000 0.000
DEF. DISPLAY DEFAULT DATA FILE
< DATA I/O
>^
TOOL USED DRILL CENTER TAP DRILL REAMER BORE
The cutting condition data screen for every tool material can be displayed by pressing the pagekey. NOTE 1 The cutting condition data of a tap tool is used to set only the cutting speed. NOTE 2 The cutting condition data of a bore tool is set for roughing and finishing. 2.2 Machining condition of mill Select [2] softkey on the F.S.file screen, the cutting condition data screen for face mill and end mill tools is displayed on the following window screen.

MACHINING COND. (MILL) : 1 FILE OF TOOLS REGISTERED HISPDFACEML (S.DIA 0MM) ROUGHING MATERIAL FEED FXY FEED FZ SPEED V (MM/TOTH) (MM/TOTH) (M/MIN.) 1.GHISA GR 0.500 0.300 80.000 2.GHISA DU 0.000 0.000 0.000 3.ACCIA CO 0.000 0.000 0.000 4.ACCIA CA 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.ACCIA LE 0.000 0.000 0.000 6.ACCIA IN 0.000 0.000 0.000 7.ALLUMINI 0.000 0.000 0.000 8.SPECIALE 0.000 0.000 0.000
< DATA I/O
>^
TOOL USED FACE MILL END MILL
Two types of feed amount are specified for the end mill tool; cutting in horizontal and axial direction of tool. The cutting condition data for roughing/finishing machining of each tool material can be displayed by pressing the page key. NOTE The feed amount data of the tools is used to set data per tooth.
88
B63294EN/02
2.3 Machining condition of special
Select [3] softkey on the F.S.file screen, the cutting condition data screen for a chamfering tool is displayed on the following window screen.

MACHINING COND. (SPECIAL) : 1 FILE OF TOOLS REGISTERED HISPDCHAMFR MATERIAL 1.GHISA GR 2.GHISA DU 3.ACCIA CO 4.ACCIA CA 5.ACCIA LE 6.ACCIA IN 7.ALLUMINI 8.SPECIALE FEED F (MM/REV.) 0.500 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 SPEED V (M/MIN.) 80.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
< DATA I/O
>^
TOOL USED
The cutting condition data screen for every tool material can be displayed by pressing the page key. 2.4 Machining condition of coefficient data Select [4] softkey on the F.S.file screen, the cutting condition data screen for coefficient data is displayed. The cutting speed for tap tool can be increased or decreased in accordance with the range of the nominal diameter for every tool. The feed amount for except tap tool can be increased or decreased in accordance with the range of the nominal diameter for every tool.

MACHINING COND. (COEFF) : 1 FILE OF TOOLS REGISTERED DRILLDIA. (MM) HISPD CARBID SPCIAL 5 10 15 20 25
0.600 1.000 1.300 1.500 1.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0 0 0
DRILLDIA. (MM) HISPD 0.000 CARBID 0.000 SPCIAL 0.000
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
< DATA I/O
>^
TOOL USED
NOTE 1 NOTE 2 NOTE 3 NOTE 4
The maximum number of ranks for all types of tools is 10. For the reference nominal diameter the coefficient data is assigned to 1.000. It is not necessary to set all boundary values and coefficient data. The coefficient data screen for every tool can be displayed by pressing the page key.
89

3. Reading the setting data of CAP I
B63294EN/02
When the parameter No.9238#0 is set to 1, it is possible to read setting data of CAP I by reading all CAP data via the reader interface. And the following data of CAP I setting data is read. S The tool data file S The cutting condition data S The pretool list data NOTE The relation between CAP I tool file item and Super CAPi M are as follows. CAP I TCODE TOOL NAME TOOL MATERIAL NOMINAL DIA. TOOL LENGTH PITCH/SDIA TOOTH/CDEP. ANGLE OFST NO.(H) OFST NO.(D) DEPTH OFST. 4. F.S. parameter When [F.S.PARAM] softkey was pressed on the conversational data screen, the following screen is displayed. The data of F.S. parameter is the data of the previous cutting condition file. The data is only related with the motion of the tool.
F.S.PARAMETER NO. 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 DATA 8000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 0 0 0 0 0 5000 0 0 : 0 NO. 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 DATA 200 310 100 10 1 0 0 0 0 20 20 50 50 30 70 70 NO. 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 DATA 30 30 70 30 30 30 30 30 0 0 0 0 0 50 0 0 NO. 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 DATA 30 50 50 0 0 0 0 50 50 50 50 0 0 50 50 50
Super CAPi M TCODE TOOL NAME MATERIAL NOMINAL DIA. LENGTH OF CUT SDIA./PITCH NO. OF TOOTH ANGL HCODE DCODE COMPENSATION

< NO. SEARCH F.S. PARAM DEF. FILE TOOL USED PRE TOOL TOOL FILE
>^
90
B63294EN/02
5. Automatic cutting condition function Spindle speed and feed rate are calculated as follows. i) For drill, center drill, reamer and chamfer S In case of metric input V 1000 D F=S R S= V : Cutting speed R : Feed amount D : Nominal diameter S : Spindle speed F : Feed rate
S In case of inch input S= F=S R V 12 D
(m/min, feet/min) (mm/rev, inch/rev) (mm, inch) (rpm) (mm/min, inch/min)
The feed amount is increased or decreased with the coefficient data. ii) For tap S In case of metric input S= F=S P V : Cutting speed P : Pitch D : Nominal diameter S : Spindle speed F : Feed rate (m/min, feet/min) (mm, inch) (mm, inch) (rpm) (mm/min, inch/min) V 1000 D S In case of inch input S= F=S P V 12 D
The cutting speed is increased or decreased with the coefficient data. iii) For face mill, end mill, bore, and back bore S In case of metric input V 1000 D F=S R N S= S In case of inch input V 12 D F=S R N S=
V : Cutting speed R : feed amount N : No. of cutters S : Spindle speed F : Feed rate
(m/min, feet/min) (mm/rev, inch/rev)
D : Nominal diameter (mm, inch) (rpm) (mm/min, inch/min)
The feed amount is increased or decreased with the coefficient data.
91

Upper limit of spindle speed is as follows. No.449 Upper limit of spindle speed for center drill No.450 Upper limit of spindle speed for drill No.451 Upper limit of spindle speed for tap No.452 Upper limit of spindle speed for reamer No.453 Upper limit of spindle speed for bore No.454 Upper limit of spindle speed for back bore No.455 Upper limit of spindle speed for end mill No.456 Upper limit of spindle speed for face mill No.462 Upper limit of spindle speed for chamfer The limit of feed rate is the value of parameter 1422.
B63294EN/02
92
B63294EN/02 1.7.10 Offset file
The compensation for the position for up to 30 workpieces can be specified for X,Y and Z axes for All Copy Pattern menu (ZI06). When you set the input item OFFSET DATA (K) of All Copy Pattern to EFFECT. The offset data of Offset File is used during machining of multiple workpieces. Pressing the soft key [+] displays the following soft keys:
< DATA I/O
OFFSET FILE
Pressing [OFFSET FILE] displays the screen shown below. Set a position offset value for each workpiece. The numbers represent the serial numbers of the workpieces for All Copy Pattern. Pressing the soft key [ALL CLEAR] clears all data. NOTE The offset data of Offset File cannot be punch/read to the external input/output unit.
OFFSET FILE NO. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 OFFSET DATA X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 NO. 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 OFFSET DATA X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y X 0.000 Y 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SELECT SOFT KEYS.

< NO. ALL SEARCH CLEAR
> +
#7 9238 WOF
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1 WOF
#0
: Multi piece offset function 0 : Ineffect 1 : Effect
93
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.7.11 NC statement conversion comment file
B63294EN/02
In an NC statement program generated by conversion using the NC program conversion function, a process name, tool name, and nominal diameter can be output as a comment statement. Data set using the screen below is output as a comment statement. 1. Pressing the soft key [8] for conversational data on the conversational basic menu screen displays the following soft keys:
< DATA I/O
DEF. FILE
TOOL USED
PRE TOOL
TOOL FILE
2. Pressing the soft key [+] displays the following screen:
3. Pressing [DATA I/O] displays the soft keys indicated below. Data set on the NC statement conversion comment setting screen can be input from and output to an external input/output device.
4. Pressing [NC STATEMENT CONVERSION COMMENT] in (2) displays the following setting screen:
94
B63294EN/02

The menu names under MENU NO. are displayed, referencing the menu definition table.
Menu No. 17 and No. 18 are dedicated to contouring, and are not output as comment data. The NC language menu does not call a machining macro, so that comment data cannot be output. In addition, the hole position menu is a figure menu, so that it is not output as comment data. 5. Pressing [TOOL NAME SETTING] displays the following screen:
NOTE
Additional tool names under MENU NO. are displayed, referencing the menu definition table. 6. Pressing [STANDARD SETTING] in (4) or (5) displays the following soft keys:
Pressing the [EXEC] key set the standard values. On the process name setting screen, the standard process names are set. On the tool name setting screen, the standard tool names are set. (The data shown on the screen of (4) or (5) is set.) Pressing the [CANCEL] key returns the screen display to the screen of (4) or (5). #7 9140 NCC #6 #5 #4 #3 NCC : In NC program conversion, process data is output: 0 : With no comment. 1 : With comment data. #2 #1 #0
95
B63294EN/02
1.8 Other Functions

1.8.1 Program list
(1) Overview The program list can contain the program type, program name, program creation date, and program size, in addition to the program number. By positioning the cursor within the list, any program can be selected, copied, or deleted. (2) Operation and screen The program list screen can be displayed from [1] to [4] of the basic menu screen, shown below:
NOTE 1 The program list can be displayed from only [2], [3], or [4] if parameter No. 9132 is set accordingly. NOTE 2 You can use any of [1], [2], [3], or [4] in EDIT or back ground edit mode. For [3] or [4], switch the mode to MEMORY on the graphic screen. #7 9132 MN2 to 4 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 MN4 #1 MN3 #0 MN2
: MN2, MN3, MN4: Determines whether the program list is displayed from [2], [3], or [4]. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
Press [1] on the basic menu screen. The following program list screen is displayed:
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 EDIT 987 33120 SIZE 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 480 480 400 480 2000 80
PROGRAM NO. USED: 13 FREE: MEMORY AREA USED: 4480 FREE: NO. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0010 0011 1000 1002 1003 2000 TYPE CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP OPT CAP OPT CNV NC NAME TEST1 DEMO TEST2 SUS304 TEST3 FCD45 TEST4 SKD11 TEST5 SUS41 TEST6 ALUME TEST7 SPECIAL UAXIS DEMO UAXIS DEMO MANUAL1 UAXIS DEMO MANUAL1 CREATE DATA 941006 11:47 941006 11:49 941006 11:50 941006 11:51 941006 11:52 941006 11:53 941006 11:56 941006 13:09 941006 14:21 941006 12:02 941006 14:22 941006 14:27
INPUT PROGRAM NO.

>_
96
B63294EN/02
The fields of the program list are as follows: (1) NO (2) TYPE : Program number : Program type
CNV : Program created by conversational editing function [1] OPT : Program created by optimal process editing function [2] CAP : Program created by NC statement output function [4] NC (3) NAME (5) SIZE NOTE : NC statement program created by NC : Program name. A name of up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be specified. : Program size (number of characters). The size is calculated in units of pages (80 characters). The value for size is, therefore, a multiple of 80.
(4) CREATE DATE : Day and time when the program was created
To select a program from the program list screen, position the cursor to the desired program, then press the [PROG.SELECT] key. The soft keys have the following functions: [PROG.SELECT] Pressing this soft key enables editing of the program to which the cursor is positioned. The editing screen is displayed. If this soft key (or the MDI <INPUT> key) is pressed after a program number has been entered, the program is registered as a new program. Thus, the editing screen for creating a new program is displayed. [PROG.COPY] Enables copying of the program to which the cursor is positioned. When this soft key is pressed, the program copy screen is displayed, as shown below. If this soft key (or the MDI <INPUT> key) is pressed after a program number has been entered, the corresponding program can be copied.
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 EDIT 987 33120
PROGRAM NO. USED: 13 FREE: MEMORY AREA USED: 4480 FREE: NO. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0010 0011 1000 1002 1003 2000 TYPE CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP OPT CAP OPT CNV NC NAME TEST1 DEMO TEST2 SUS304 TEST3 FCD45 TEST4 SKD11 TEST5 SUS41 TEST6 ALUME TEST7 SPECIAL UAXIS DEMO UAXIS DEMO MANUAL1 UAXIS DEMO MANUAL1
CREATE DATA SIZE 941006 11:47 80 941006 11:49 80 PROGRAM DIR. : 1 O0001 O0002 O0003 O0004 O0005 O0006 O0007 O1000 O0010 O0011 O1002 O1003 O2000
INPUT NEW PROGRAM NUMBER.

COPY EXEC CANCEL
>_
On the screen, enter a number for the program to hold the copy, then press the [COPY EXEC] soft key. The selected program is copied. If the program to hold the copy satisfies any of the following conditions, a message is displayed: 1) If the number specified for the program to hold the copy already exists The message INPUT PROGRAM IS ALREADY REGIST. is displayed. To overwrite the existing pro gram, press the [OVERWRITE] soft key. 2) If the number specified for the program to hold the copy is the same as that of the program to be copied The message INPUT PROGRAM NUMBER IS ORIGIN is displayed.
97

[PROG.DELETE]
B63294EN/02
The program to which the cursor is positioned can be deleted. When this soft key is pressed, the program deletion screen is displayed, as shown below. The same screen is displayed when the MDI <DELETE> key is pressed. To delete the program to which the cursor is positioned, press the [DELETE EXEC] soft key.
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 EDIT 987 33120 SIZE 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 480 480 400 480 2000 80
DELETE OK?
DELETE CANCEL EXEC
If a program number is entered and the [PROG.DELETE] soft key is pressed, the corresponding program is deleted. If there is no program having the same number as that specified, the message INPUT PROGRAM NUMBER IS NOT FOUND is displayed. [MODIFY TITLE] This key is used to change a program name. The program to which the cursor is positioned can be renamed. When the soft key is pressed, the title input window is displayed, as shown below. The title input window is also displayed when a new program is created. Input a program name using the title input window, then press the [INPUT TITLE] soft key (or the MDI <INPUT> key). The name is stored in the program list buffer. At this stage, the program name is not yet registered in memory. To register the program name in memory, press the [INPUT END] soft key.
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 EDIT 987 33120 SIZE 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 480 480 400 480
PROGRAM NO. USED: 13 FREE: MEMORY AREA USED: 4480 FREE: NO. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0010 0011 1000 1002 TYPE CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP OPT CAP OPT NAME TEST1 DEMO TEST2 SUS304 TEST3 FCD45 TEST4 SKD11 TEST5 SUS41 TEST6 ALUME TEST7 SPECIAL UAXIS DEMO UAXIS DEMO MANUAL1 UAXIS DEMO CREATE DATA 941006 11:47 941006 11:49 941006 11:50 941006 11:51 941006 11:52 941006 11:53 941006 11:56 941006 13:09 941006 14:21 941006 12:02 941006 14:22
TITLE INPUT :1 PROG.TITLE : =UAXIS TEST_
INPUT PROGRAM TITLE.(WITHIN 16 CHAR)

INPUT TITLE CANCEL
98
B63294EN/02
[LIBRARY]
A list of program numbers can be displayed. When this soft key is pressed, only program numbers are listed in the bottomright window of the screen. To clear the window, press the [LIBRARY] soft key again.
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 EDIT 987 33120
PROGRAM NO. USED: 13 FREE: MEMORY AREA USED: 4480 FREE: NO. 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 0007 0010 0011 1000 1002 1003 2000 TYPE CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP CAP OPT CAP OPT CNV NC NAME TEST1 DEMO TEST2 SUS304 TEST3 FCD45 TEST4 SKD11 TEST5 SUS41 TEST6 ALUME TEST7 SPECIAL UAXIS DEMO UAXIS DEMO MANUAL1 UAXIS DEMO MANUAL1
CREATE DATA SIZE 941006 11:47 80 941006 11:49 80 PROGRAM DIR. : 1 O0001 O0002 O0003 O0004 O0005 O0006 O0007 O1000 O0010 O0011 O1002 O1003 O2000
INPUT PROGRAM NO.

>_
If [2], [3], or [4] is selected from the basic menu screen, the following program list screen is displayed:
PROGRAM DIR. PAGE 01/01 OPTIMUM 987 33120 SIZE 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 480 480 400 480 2000 80
INPUT PROGRAM NO.

< PROG. SELECT LIBRARY
The soft keys have the following functions: [PROG.SELECT] When this soft key is pressed, the program to which the cursor is positioned can be optimized, drawn, or output in NC format. If this soft key (or the MDI <INPUT> key) is pressed after a program number has been entered, the corresponding program can be optimized, drawn, or output in NC format. The initial screen of the corresponding menu is displayed. [LIBRARY] A list of program numbers can be displayed. When this soft key is pressed, only program numbers are listed in the bottomright window of the screen. To clear the window, press the [LIBRARY] soft key again.
99
1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M 1.8.2 Arithmetic functions
B63294EN/02
Expressions can be entered on the data input screen to perform calculations using entered numeric data. In one operation, any binomial arithmetical operation (addition, subtraction, multiplication, or division) can be performed. However, the result of each operation can be used in succession as the first term of the next operation. Thus, any number of operations can be performed in one numeric data input item. Numeric data that can be entered depends on the data format of the numeric data item. When data entered in a data item is more accurate than the least input increment of the data item, the more accurate part of the entered data is not rounded but just ignored. Use the following key operations for the arithmetic operations: (1) Addition : 100.+200.<INPUT> The result is displayed where the cursor is placed in the input data. (2) Subtraction : 100. 200.<INPUT> Same as above (3) Multiplication : 100. *20. <INPUT> Same as above (4) Division : 100. /10. <INPUT> Same as above The displayed result of an operation is not directly entered in the numeric data item. The user must check the displayed result of an operation, then press <INPUT> to enter the result in the input data item. Example To calculate and enter the result of the operation 210.65.3+1.25, press the following keys: 210.65.3<INPUT>+1.25<INPUT><INPUT>
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL (1)
V (3) (X,Y) (4)
PAGE :01/ EDITING

U YD (2)
YC
:SQUARE BIDIR : W= * V LENGTH : X= 0. ANGEL : Y= 0. START POINT : U= 150. APPROACH
: V= : A=. : B= :YC=.
100. ESCAPE 0. (4) 5.
:YD=
5.

< GUIDAN INPUT END CE
100
B63294EN/02 1.8.3 Embedding tool management numbers
When creating a machining program in the conversational mode, enter the management numbers of tools used for machining on the conversational data input screen. NC statements such as those shown below are stored in memory.
ZH01 (drilling) ZF01 (plane preparation) ZS01 (side face preparation) M30 ;
T0001.(1) T0002.(2) T0003.(3)
When a machine with an automatic tool changer (ATC) is used, the management number of the tool used next needs to be output beforehand so that the tool can be selected from the tool magazine used to set the tool in the standby position. When block (2) is executed in the example above, the number of tool T0003 used in block (3) needs to be output beforehand. To meet this requirement, tool management numbers are embedded. At each tool management number in the created machining program, the management number of the tool used next is embedded. More specifically, in this processing, the management number of the tool used next is inserted after the decimal point of the current tool management number as shown below.
ZH01 (drilling) ZF01 (plane preparation) ZS01 (side face preparation) M;
T0001.000(4) T0002.000(5) T0003.000(6)
When a machining program with embedded tool management numbers is executed, each tool management number placed after the decimal point is output. For example, when block (5) above is executed, the fractional part (T0003) of T0002.0003 is output, and the tool with the number T0003 is set at the standby position. When block (6) is executed, the tool with the number T0003 is attached to the spindle from the standby position for machining. Tool management number embedding is performed automatically by the setting in parameter No. 9107. #7 9107 ACT1: Embeds a T code when exiting from basic menu 1. ACT2: Embeds a T code when exiting from basic menu 2. For example, when ACT1 is turned on, tool management number embedding is performed upon return to the basic menu screen after the creation or editing of a machining program. At this time, the indication NEXT TOOL FILE blinks at the lowerleft corner of the basic menu screen; this indication disappears when embedding is completed. NOTE 1 When an 8digit tool management number is used (when TND (parameter No. 9216) = 0), tool management number embedding is not performed. Tool management number embedding is performed only when 4digit tool management numbers are used. NOTE 2 Tool management number embedding is not performed for NC statements not created in the conversational mode. (The system determines that a machining program was not created in the conversational mode when the first three blocks of the program contain no Z* code.) #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ACT2 #0 ACT1
101
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS
B63294EN/02

2.1 Types of Machining Menus
Each machining menu provides the detailed menus shown below:
HOLE
DRILLING PECK DRILLING BORING FINE BORING BACK BORING TAPPING REAMING FACING
HOLE POSITION
POINTS LINE SAM. SP LINE DIF. SP GRID PARALL ELOGRM BOLT H OL CIR ARC SA ME SP ARC DIFF SP COPY RANDOM COPY PATTRN
PROCESS END
FACING FACING PREP.
SQUARE UNIDI SQUARE BIDIR CIRCLE UNIDI CIRCLE BIDIR SQUARE FRING CIRCLE DRING COPY RANDOM COPY PATTRN
SURFACE
PROCESS END
SIDE CUTING SIDE CUTING PREP.
SQUARE OSID SQUARE ISID CIRCLE OSID CIRCLE ISID TRACK OSID TRACK ISID ONE SIDE COPY RANDOM COPY PATTRN CONTOR PREP.
SIDE FACE
PROCESS END
CONTOUR APPROACH
HORIZONTAL LINE VERTICAL LINE OBLIQUE LINE ARC CHAMF. CRNRR TANGNT ESCAPE
CONTOUR END
102
B63294EN/02
POCKETING POCKETING PREP.
SQUARE POCKE CIRCLE POCKE TRACK POCKET POLY. POCKET POLYR POCKE GROOVING COPY RANDOM COPY PATTER CONTOR POCKE CONTOR GROOVE
POCKET
PROCESS END
CONTOUR CUTTING START POINT
NC LANGUAGE
POSITIONING LINE ARC STOP/END FEED RATE COOLANT SPINDLE TOOL NC LANG.
HORIZONTAL LINE VERTICAL LINE OBLIQUE LINE ARC CHAMF. CRNRR TANGNT
CONTOUR END
2 +1/2 CVX 2 +1/2 CVX PREP.
CVX QU AD PR CVX HE MISPHE CVX HA LF CYL CVX HL F CYL COPY (RANDOM) COPY (PATTERN)
2 +1/2 CVX
PROCESS END
2 +1/2 CCV 2 +1/2 CCV PREP.
CCV QU AD PR CCV HE MISPHE CCV HA LF CYL CCV HL F CYL COPY (RANDOM) COPY (PATTERN)
2 +1/2 CCV
PROCESS END
AUXILIALY
INITAL SETIN END OF PROG. B AXIS ROTAT NC LNG PREP. ALL CP RANDO ALL CP PATTR GRP CP RANDM GRP CP PATTR GRP CP TURN
103
B63294EN/02
2.2 Auxiliary
PROGRAM O1000 01 INITAL SETING SELECT THIS SCREEN AT THE BEGINNING OF THE PROGRAM. PAGE :01/ EDITING 02 END OF PROG. 03 B AXIS ROTAT. SELECT THIS SCREEN AT THE END OF THE PROGRAM.
04 NC LNG PREP. 05 ALL CP RANDOM 06 ALL CP PATTRN SELECT BEFORE PROWHEN COPYING ALL MACHINING.SELECT EITHER GRAMMING IN NC STATE ONE AFTER INITIAL SETTING.(THE BOTH MENT. CANNOT BE SELECTED.) THIS CASE,NO MODIF CAN BE MADE IN COORDINATE SYSTEM BY EACH MENU. 07 GRP CP PANDM 08 GRP CP PATTRN WHEN COPYING PART OF MACHINING.SELECT AFTER INITIAL SETTING OR ALL COPYING. TO BE CONTINUE (OVERLAP IS ALLOWED,SELECTABLE UP TO 3 NEXT PAGE. TIMES.)THIS CASE,NO MODIF CAN BE MADE IN COORDINATE SYSTEM BY EACH MENU. MACROE VER.1.0
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES + CE END
EDITING O2600(NODA1) 09 GRP CP TURN 10 ALL CP MIRROR REFERENCE ZI07,ZI08
EDIT 16:36:39 11 GRP CP MIRROR
IT IS IMPOSSIBLE TO USE COMBINATION OF ALL COPY MIRROR AND GROUP COPY (RANDOM, PATTERN, TURN) OR ALL COPY (RANDOM, PATTERN) AND GROUP COPY MIRROR.

< 09 10 11 GUIDAN PROCES + END CE
If AUXILIARY is pressed on the machining menu select screen, a further detailed menu is displayed on the screen. This menu allows setting of an initial setting which is selected at the beginning of program, to set end of program which is selected at the end of program, and to set multipiece machining, etc. The software keys on the bottom of the screen display numbers of two figures for selecting one menu. Press a software key of the number corresponding to a menu to select. 1) INITIAL SETTING Select this menu at the beginning of program. If a new program number is input on the conversational guide screen, this menu is automatically selected. In this menu, data common to the whole program are set. 2) END OF PROGRAM Select this menu at the end of the program. If input is terminated, the conversational guide screen appears automatically. 3) B AXIS ROTATION Select this menu for programming the rotary axis movement. 4) NC LANGUAGE PREP When you want to insert an NC statement program on the way of conversational programming, select this menu immediately before. After tool change, positioning for specified coordinate values is performed, and subsequent NC statement program is executed. 5) ALL COPYRANDOM This menu is selected when multipiece machining of machining pattern of whole program is performed. Up to six arbitrary positions of multiple machining can be performed.
104
B63294EN/02
6) ALL COPYPATTERN
This menu is selected when multipiece machining of machining pattern of whole program is performed. Multipiece machining is performed on the basis of fixed shift amount in the X and Y directions. 7) GROUP COPYRANDOM This menu is selected when multipiece machining of machining pattern of a part of program is performed in arbitrary positions. 8) GROUP COPYPATTERN This menu is selected when multipiece machining of machining pattern of a part of program is performed at regular intervals on the XYplane. 9) GROUP COPYTURN This menu is selected when rotation copy of machining pattern of a part of program is performed on the XYplane. 10)ALL COPY MIRROR This menu is selected when mirror copy of machining pattern of whole program is performed on the XY plane. 11) GROUP COPY MIRROR This menu is selected when mirror copy of machining pattern of a part of program on the XYplane.
105
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.1 Initial setting (ZI01)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE O1000(MANUAL1) PROCESS PAGE :01/ CREATING
MATERIAL,COOLANT AND Z SEFTY LMT ARE SURE TO INPUT. TOOL NAME Y WORK CO 1 (G54) X Y WORK CO 2 (G55) X Y WORK CO 3 (G56) ... X
B63294EN/02
MACHINE ZERO POINT I Y Z SAFETY LMT
X WORK COORDINATES X= Y= Z= B= * * * *
AUXILIARY MATERIAL COOLANT Z SAFTY LMT COORDINATES
:INITAL SETING : Q= : M= : I= : W= WORK CO 1
X Y Z B
AXIS AXIS AXIS AXIS
1/2 : : : :
WORK SHAPE : C= MAT X COORD :YA= MAT Y COORD :YB= MAT Z COORD :YC=
* * * *
INPUT THE Z COORD WHICH DO NOT INTERFERE WITH WORKPIECE AND JIG.
< GRAY CAST DCTIL CAST LOLED CARBON ALLOY STL STL STL STAINL ALMIESS NUM SPECIAL GUIDAN INPUT CE END
1 Q M W C MATERIAL COOLANT COORDINATE GRAY CAST COOLNT M7 WORK CO SET
2 DCTIL CAST COOLNT M8 WORK CO 1
3 LOLEDSTL OFF M9 WORK CO 2
4 CARBON STL
5 ALLOYA STY
6 STAINL ESS
7 ALMINUM
8 SPECIAL
WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WWORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
Blank figure
Rectangu- Column lar paralle- parallel to lepiped Zaxis
1) Screen explanation This screen is selected first within the program. The data, which is common in the entire program, is set here. 2) Input item explanation Q : MATERIAL Input the material of the workpiece is input. The spindle speed of the tool in each machining and the cutting feed rate are automatically decided here based on the input value. Be sure to input. M : COOLANT Input the coolant used throughout the program. The value input here is used to decide automatically the coolant in each machining menu screen. Be sure to input. I : Z SAFETY LMT Input the Z coordinates which do not interfere with the workpiece and jig even when the tool moves anywhere on the X and Y planes, using the reference work coordinates system. Be sure to input. W : COORDINATE Input the standard coordinate system for machining. As for the common safety point Z of the tool exchange, (I), the coordinate system input here is used as a standard work coordinate system. Work coordinate 1 (G54) is specified if there is no setting. Do not specify work coordinate setting G92 when you use All Copy in the program. X : X AXIS, Y : Y AXIS, Z : Z AXIS, B : B AXIS Input only at the time you specify work coordinate setting G92 using the coordinate system setting (W). The process considers that the coordinate values of the position of the tool immediately before the program is executed is the one that has been input.
106
B63294EN/02
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001
O1234(TEST) PROCESS TOOL NAME
PAGE :01/ EDITING

Z (YA, YB, YC) YI YJ Z
YK YI X YJ Y
YK Y
X WHEN COLUMN OR CYLINDER YI : RADIUS OF OUTSIDE CIRCLE YJ : RADIUS OF INSIDE CIRCLE (COLUMN IS 0)
AUXILIARY JORK DIM JORK DIM JORK DIM
:INITAL SETING :YI= * :YJ= * :YK= *
2/2
<
GUIDAN INPUT CE END
YA : MAT X COORD YB : MAT Y COORD YC : MAT Z COORD YI : WORK DIM Input a blank dimension. (Rectangular parallelepiped: Length along Xaxis, Column/cylinder: Outside radius) : WORK DIM Input a blank dimension. (Rectangular parallelepiped: Length along Yaxis, Column/cylinder: Inside radius) Input coordinates (X, Y, Z) of blank origin.
YJ
YK : WORK DIM Input a blank dimension. (Rectangular parallelepiped: Length along Zaxis, Column/cylinder: Blank length)
107
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.2 End of program (ZI02)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PAGE :01/ EDITING
B63294EN/02
PROCESS TOOL NAME M30:RESET AND REWIND INITAL SETING M02:RESET TOOL ID NO.IS SURE TO INPUT.
AUXILIARY :END OF PROG. PROGRAM END : C= M30 TOOL ID NO. : T=
TOOL TO BE SET AFTER COMPLETION: WHEN NO TOOL IS CHANGED,SET 0.

1 C PROGRAM END M30 M02
2 M99
1) Screen explanation This screen is selected last within the program. The Menu screen is displayed automatically when the input ends. 2) Input item explanation C : PROGRAM END Input the condition for the program to end. M30 is specified if there is no setting. At M30 The automatic operation is stopped and it is reset. The program is rewound. At M02 The automatic operation is stopped and it is reset. At M99 The program is treated as subprogram call. X Y T : END X COORDINATE : END Y COORDINATE A movement is made to the input X and Y coordinates when the program ends. : TOOL ID NO. Input the ID number of the tool set in the spindle when the program ends. When 0 is inputted, no tool is changed but the spindle stops at the coordinate value in which the machining is completed. Be sure to input.
108
B63294EN/02 2.2.3 B axis rotation (ZI03)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING
PAGE :01/ EDITING
(x,Y,Z) (1 )
(2 ) B
AUXILIARY COORDINATES B AXIS ROT. X COORD Y COORD
:B AXIS ROTAT. : W= * Z COORD : B= : X= * : Y= *
: Z=
INPUT THE ANGLE TO BE ROTATED.

1 W COORDINATE UNUSED
2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select this screen to perform a rotation of the B axis. Pay attention to the following points when you select this menu. S B axis rotation, All Copy and Group Copy can not be used in the same program. S The entire program can not be optimized by using the tool order modification function. 2) Input item explanation W : COORDINATES Input the coordinate system before rotating the B axis. The G code of the coordinate system setting is not executed if there is no setting. It is not necessary to input the work coordinate system if it does not need to be altered while creating the program. B X Y Z : B AXIS ROTAT Input the angle to be rotated. : X COORD : Y COORD : Z COORD Input only the coordinate axis which needs escape clearance before the B axis rotation.
109
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.4 NC language preparation (ZI04)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING PAGE :01/ EDITING
MAX NUM,OF TOOLS2 T
B63294EN/02
R J U V Z
AUXILIARY GROUP COPY COORDINATES R POINT Z POINT
:NC LNG PREP. :YB= UNUSED : W= * : R= : Z=
X COORD Y COORD REMOVAL PITCH
: : : :
X= Y= U= J=
FINISHING TOOL ID NO
: U= : T=
0.
INPUT THE Z COORD OF CUTTING FEED STARTING POINT FOR MACHINING.

< F.S. AUTO PROCES INPUT END END
1 YB GROUP COPY W B COORDINATE MACHINING PROCESS COOLANT UNUSED UNUSED ROUGH MACHINING COOLANT M7
2 AGROUP WORK CO 1 FINISH MACHINING COOLANT M8 OFF
3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select this menu immediately before inputting the NC statement program if you want to input it while the conversational program is created. The data of the tool such as the feed rate is set from the tool change. Position at the specified coordinate values after the tool is changed; the NC Language is executed afterwards. Multiple parts can be machined from a single sheet using the NC language program following this menu. 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP COPY When Group Copy is set, designate the group copy whether it is made valid in NC statement. Group Copy is not used if there is no setting. W : COORDINATES Input the work coordinate system when it is altered while the program is being created. Otherwise it is not necessary to input it. R : R POINT Input the Z coordinate of the cutting feed start point for machining. This coordinate must always be specified. Z X : Z POINT Input the Z coordinate of the machining end surface. This coordinate must always be specified. : START PT.X, Y: START PT.Y Input the coordinates of the start point specified in the NC program. These coordinates must always be specified. U : REMOVAL Input the cutting allowance for the Z direction on the machining plane. This value must always be specified.
110
B63294EN/02
J : PITCH
Input the cutting allowance for the Z direction for each roughing pass. The cutting allowance for roughing (U V) is divided by pitch (J) and multiple passes are made. If no pitch is input, the cutting allowance for roughing (U V) is made with a single pass. V : FINISHING Input the cutting allowance for the Z direction for finishing. This cutting allowance is made by a single pass. Finishing is executed only when this value is input. T Q : TOOL ID NO. Input the tool ID number used in the NC program. This value must always be specified. : TOOL NAME The tool name corresponding to a value input in TOOL ID NO. (T) is read from the tool file and displayed. B H : MACHINING PROCESS There are two machining processes: [ROUGH MACHINING] and [FINISH MACHINING]. : H OFFSET NO. It is decided automatically by pressing the [F.S. AUTO] soft key. The H offset No. is displayed after reading the input value of a tool ID number (T) from a tool file. M : COOLANT It is the coolant used with this machining menu. It is automatically decided using the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. The coolant set by the initial setting menu is displayed. After automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. S : SPINDLE SPEED It is the speed of the tool spindle. It is decided automatically using the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. It is calculated from the cutting condition file data based on the workpiece material, tool name, tool diameter, and so forth. After automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. F : FEED RATE It is the feedrate of the tool. It is decided automatically using by the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. It is calculated from SPINDLE SPEED (S) and the cutting condition file data. After automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. 3) Example of program ZI01 (Initial setting) Q_M_I; ZF01 (Facing prepare) YB_Z_U; ZF02 (Square (unidir)) X_Y_U; ZE99 (End of machining); ZI04 (NC language preparation) YB_R_Z; ZN01 (Positioning) G00X_Y_; ZN02 (Line) G01X_Y_; ZE99 (End of machining); ZI02 (End of program) C_T_; NOTE 1 When All Copy or Group Copy is selected, the workpiece coordinate system cannot be changed in the NC statement program. NOTE 2 When Group Copy is enabled, the coordinate plane (G17, G18, G19) cannot be changed in the NC statement program. NOTE 3 Be sure to insert ZE99 (end of machining) at the end of an NC statement. NC statement program
111
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.5 All copy (Random) (ZI05)

B63294EN/02
PROCESS TOOL NAME WORK COORD 1 TO WORK COORD 6 SYSTEMS ARE USED. INITAL SETING THE CURRENTLY PRESET WORK ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE IS USED WHEN UNDEFINED.
AUXILIARY COPY TOTAL X COORD 1 Y Z
:YJ= :YK= :YC= :YD= INPUT THE TOTAL NO.OF PARTS TO BE MADE FROM A SINGLE SHEET.(2A6) < GUIDAN INPUT CE END
:ALL CP RANDOM : E= : X= : Y= : Z=
X COORD 2 Y Z X COORD 3
:YF= :YG= :YH= :YI=
Y Z X COORD 4 Y
1) Screen explanation Select when multiple parts with a machining pattern are made from a single sheet, in the entire program. Select this menu just after the initial setting (ZI01). Up to 6 parts in an arbitrary position can be made from a single sheet. The machining is done altering the G54G59 work coordinate system. 2) Input item explanation E : COPY TOTAL Input the number of multiple parts to be mode from a single sheet. The range of the input value is from 2 to 6. X Y Z : X COORD 1 : Y COORD 1 : Z COORD 1 Input the work zero offset value for each work coordinate system in the machine coordinate system. If the coordinate system is input the work zero offset value is rewritten when the program is executed. When the offset value is not input, the work origin offset value preset during program execution is used as it is. When the workpiece position is known in advance, input the offset value, and when it is not known, set it in the work origin offset screen after the workpiece is installed. 3) Example of program A machining pattern is used for two or more workpieces like in the figure below when multiple parts are copied from a single sheet.
1. First, input the data after selecting the initial setting screen.
112
B63294EN/02
2. Following this, select All Copy (random) and input the data. Make the total number of copies (E) equal to 3 and do not input the work zero offset value of each work coordinate system. If the work origin offset value is separately measured at the time when the workpiece is installed and preset on the work origin offset screen, the machining is performed at that value. 3. Select the machining menu one by one and input the data. 4. To end programming select the end setting of the program. Program contents ZI01 Initial setting Q_M_I; ZI05 (All Copy (Random)) E_X_Y; ZF01 (Facing preparation) YB_Z_U; ZF02 (Square UNIDIR) X_Y_U; ZE99 (End of machining); ZP01 (Pocketing prep) YB_R_Z; ZP04 (Track pocket) YA_X_Y; ZE99 (End of machining); ZH01 (Drilling) YB_B_V; ZL02 (Line(same space)) X_Y_E; ZE99 (End of machining); ZI02 (End of program) C_T_; 4) Notes S This program can not select All Copy (pattern) when this menu is selected. S The work coordinate system in each menu can not be changed. The purpose is to use G54G59 using All Copy. S Do not input any item of a work coordinate system in each menu when All Copy is selected. S The work zero offset value is not the same before and after the execution of the program. S To draw a program of All Copy (multiple parts), set the ORG bit (bit 0 of parameter 6501) to 0.
i)
Square facing
ii)
Track pocketing
iii) Hole machining
113
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.6 All copy (Pattern) (ZI06)

U J A I (1) (2) (3) (4)
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING
BI DE RECTION UNI DE RECTION WORK COORD 6 SYSTEM IS USED.
AUXILIARY COORDINATES COPY PATH COPY START COPY TOTAL
:ALL CP PATTRN : W= WORK CD 2 :YA= BIDIREC. : B= (3) : E=
U PITCH V PITCH U NUMBER ANGEL
: : : :
I= J= D= A=
0.
INPUT THE TOTAL NO.OF PARTS TO BE MADE FROM A SINGLE SHEET.

1 W YA B K COORDINATE COPY PATH COPY START OFFSET DATA WORK CO 1 UNIDI REC. (1) VALID
2 WORK CO 2 BIDIREC. (2) INVALID (3)
3 WORK CO 3
4 WORK CO 4
5 WORK CO 5
(4)
1) Screen explanation Select when multiple parts with machining patterns of the entire program are made from a single sheet. Select this menu just after the initial setting (ZI01). There is no limit in number. Multiple parts are made from a single sheet based on the shift amount fixed in the X and Y directions. Make the G59 offset value equal to the work zero point offset value in the specified work coordinate system and then change the offset value of G59 to process it. 2) Input item explanation W : COORDINATES Input the work coordinate system to be used. The work coordinate system specified by the initial setting is usually input. G54 is specified if there is no setting. YA : COPY PATH Input either BIDIREC. or UNIDIREC. BIDIREC. is specified if there is no setting. B E : COPY START Input a number from 1) to 4). 3) is specified if there is no setting. : COPY TOTAL Input the total No. of parts to be made from a single sheet. When offset data is valid, the total No. of parts is 30. Be sure to input. I J D A : U PITCH Input the shift amount in the U direction. Be sure to input. : V PITCH Input the shift amount in the V direction. Be sure to input. : U NUMBER Input the number of copies in the U direction. Be sure to input. : ANGLE Input the angle of the X direction and of the U direction. 0 is input if there is no input.
114
B63294EN/02
K : OFFSET DATA
When you use Offset file, please set it to EFFECT. Please refer to 1.7.10 Offset file for multi workeieces. 3) Example of the program Refer to 3). Refer to 2.2.6 4). 4) Notes S This program can not select All Copy (Random) when this menu is selected. S The work coordinate system cannot be changed in every menu. S Do not specify G59 using a work coordinate system of the initial setting when you select this menu. S Moreover, do not input any item of a work coordinate system in a menu. S The value of the work zero offset of G59 does not coincide before and after the execution of the program.
115
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.2.7 Group copy (Random) (ZI07)

B63294EN/02
G52 LOCAL COORD SYSTEM IS PROCESS TOOL NAME USED. INITAL SETING
AUXILIARY :GRP CP PANDM GROUP SELECT :YB= AGROUP COPY TOTAL : E= 2ND REF.X COOR : X= Y COOR : Y=
Z COORD X Y Z COORD
: Z= :YF= :YG= :YH=
3RD X Y Z 4TH X
COORD:YI= COORD:YJ= COORD:YK= COORD:YC=
INPUT THE TOTAL NO.OF PARTS TO BE MADE FROM A SINGLE SHEET.(2A4)

1 YB GROUP COPY AGROUP
2 BGROUP
3 CGROUP
1) Screen explanation Select when multiple parts with a machining pattern of part of the program are made in an arbitrary position from a single sheet. Select this menu just after the initial setting (Z101), or just after All Copy if All Copy is selected. Up to 4 parts at an arbitrary position can be made from a single sheet. Process by altering the offset amount at the origin of the local coordinate system of G52. 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP COPY It is possible to designate 3 group copies: A Group, B Group and C Group. Only the machining menu designated by the group copy that should be performed for each machining menu becomes the object of Group Copy. A Group is specified if these is no setting. E X Y Z : TOTAL NO. OF COPIES Input the total No. of parts to be made from a single sheet. The input range is 2 4. : REF. X COORD : REF. Y COORD : REF. Z COORD It is a parameter showing the relative position. Be sure to input. 3) Example of the program Refer to 2.2.9 3). 4) Notes S In groups AC, Group Copy can be selected up to three times in the same program. S It is also possible to select either Random (Z107), Pattern (Z108), Rotation (Z109), or Mirror (ZI11) for each group from A to C. S When Group Copy is selected, the work coordinate system can not be changed in each menu. Do not input any item in the work coordinate system of a menu. S All Copy Mirror can not be selected, when Group Copy is selected.
116
B63294EN/02 2.2.8 Group copy (Pattern) (ZI08)

PAGE :01/ EDITING
U J A I (1) (2) (3) (4) BI DE RECTION UNI DE RECTION G52 LOCAL COORD SYSTEM IS USED.
AUXILIARY :GRP CP PATTRN GROUP SELECT :YB= AGROUP U PITCH COPY PATH :YA= BIDIREC. V PITCH COPY START : B= (3) U NUMBER COPY TOTAL : E= ANGEL
: : : :
I= J= D= A=
0.

1 YB GROUP COPY YA B COPY PATH COPY START AGROUP UNIDI REC. (1)
2 BGROUP BIDIREC. (2) (3)
3 CGROUP
(4)
1) Screen explanation Select this screen when multiple machining patterns of a part of the program are copied on the XY plane at regular intervals. Select this menu just after All Copy or, when All Copy is not selected, just after the initial setting (ZI01). There is no limit in number. Multiple parts can be made from a single sheet based on the shift amount fixed in the X and Y directions. Machine altering the offset amount at the origin of the local coordinate system of G52. 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP COPY It is possible to designate 3 group copies A Group, B Group and C Group. Only the machining menu designated by the group copy that should be performed for each machining menu becomes the object of Group Copy. A Group is specified if there is no setting. YA : COPY PATH Input either BIDIREC. or UNIDIREC. BIDIREC. is specified if there is no setting. B : COPY START Input a number from 1) to 4). 3) is specified if there is no setting. E I J D : COPY TOTAL Input the total No. of parts to be made from a single sheet. Be sure to input. : U PITCH Input the shift amount in the U direction. Be sure to input. : V PITCH Input the shift amount in the V direction. Be sure to input. : U NUMBER Input the number of parts to be made from a single sheet in the U direction. Be sure to input.
117

A : ANGLE
B63294EN/02
Input the angle of the X direction and of the U direction. 0 is input if there is no other input. 3) Example of the program Refer to the example of the program of Group copy (Tarn). 4) Notes S In groups AC, Group Copy can be selected up to three times in the same program. S It is also possible to select either Random (Z107), Pattern (Z108), Rotation (Z109), or Mirror (ZI11) for each group from A to C. S When Group Copy is selected, the work coordinate system can not be changed in each menu. Do not input any item in the work coordinate system of a menu. S All Copy Mirror can not be selected, when Group Copy is selected.
118
B63294EN/02 2.2.9 Group copy (Turn) (ZI09)

PAGE :01/ EDITING
A (X,Y)
G68 COORD ROTATION IS USED. AUXILIARY :GRP CP TURN GROUP SELECT :YB= AGROUP PITCH ANGEL : A= COPY TOTAL : E= X COORD : X= Y COORD : Y=

1 YB GROUP COPY AGROUP
2 BGROUP
3 CGROUP
1) Screen explanation Select when a machining pattern of part of the program is rotated and copied on the XY plane. S Select this menu just after All Copy or, when All Copy is not selected, just the initial setting (ZI01). There is no limit in the number. Multiple parts are made from a single sheet by rotating a certain standard point at the center of the XY plane. Machine using the coordinate system rotation of G68. 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP SELECT It is possible to designate 3 group copies: A Group, B Group and C Group. Only the machining menu designated by the group copy that should be performed for each machining menu becomes the object of Group Copy. A Group is specified if there is no setting. E : COPY TOTAL Input the total number of parts to be made from a single page. When 1 is input, the rotation only is carried out by the designated angle. Be sure to input the total number. X Y A C : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinates of the center of rotation. Be sure to input. : PITCH ANGLE Input the pitch angle of rotation. Be sure to input. : START ANGLE Input a rotation start angle. 3) Example of the program As illustrated below, this function is used when multiple machining patterns of a program in the same workpiece are produced.
119
B63294EN/02
1. First, input the data selecting the initial setting screen. 2. Next, select Group Copy (TURN) and set Group Selection to A Group. 3. After inputting the data of Group Copy (TURN), select the machining menu in sequence and input the data. At this time, enable A Group Group Copy in the track pocket and hole pattern menus. 4. Programming is ended by selecting End of program. Program contents ZI01 (Initial setting) Q_M_I; ZI09 (Group copy (turn)) YB_E_X; ZF01 (Facing prepare) YB_Z_U; ZF02 (Square (unitdir)) X_Y_U; (Group copy (turn) is not specified.) ZE99 (End of machining); ZP01 (Pocketing/grooving) YB_R_Z; (Group copy (turn) is specified.) ZP04 (Track pocket) YA_X_Y; ZE99 (End of machining); ZH01 (Drilling) YB_B_V; ZL02 (Line (same space)) X_Y_E; (Group copy (turn) is specified.) ZE99 (End of machining); ZI02 (End of program) C_T_; 4) Notes S In groups AC, Group Copy can be selected up to three times in the same program. S It is also possible to select either Random (Z107), Pattern (Z108), Rotation (Z109), or Mirror (ZI11) for each group from A to C. S When Group Copy is selected, the work coordinate system can not be changed in each menu. Do not input any item in the work coordinate system of a menu. S All Copy Mirror can not be selected, when Group Copy is selected.
Square facing
Track pocketing
Hole machining
120
B63294EN/02 2.2.10 All copy mirror (ZI10)

EDITING NO. 001 002 003 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CYCLE AUXILIARY AUXILIARY POCKET/GROOV O2600(NODA1) PROCESS TOOL NAME Y INITAL SETING ALL CP PATTRN CONTOR POCKETEND MILL POCKET WALL PREP START POINT LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE POCKET WALL END PROCESS END PROGRAM END
EDIT
16:37:27
004 AUXILIARY
X AUXILIARY MIRROR TYPE BASE PT X BASE PT Y :ALL CP MIRROR Q= X= Y=
INTRODUCIR COORDENADA X DEL PUNTO BASE

1 0 Mirror type Copy
2 Move
(1) Screen explanation Select this screen when a machining pattern of the program is moved or copied on the XY plane. Select this menu just after the INITIAL SETTING (ZI01). ALL CP RANDAM (ZI05),ALL CP PATTERN (ZI06) or GRP CP MIRROR (ZI11) can not select when this menu is selected. (2) Input item explanation Q : MIRROR TYPE Select [COPY] or [MOVE] from the soft keys. X,Y : BASE POINT X,Y Specify the X and Y coordinates through which the symmetry axes. (3) Example of the program Select this function when the machining pattern of an entire program is to be mirrored as shown below. NOTE
1. First, select the initial setting screen, then input desired data. 2. Select All Copy Mirror, then input desired data. When MIRROR TYPE = [COPY] is set, both figures are machined. When MIRROR TYPE = [MOVE] is set, only a figure produced by mirroring is machined. 3. Select machining menus sequentially, and input desired data. 4. Finally, select the end of setting to terminate program creation.
121

Program contents ZI01 (Initial setting) Q_M_I; ZI10 (All copy mirror) Q_X_Y; ZP01 (Pocketing/grooving) YB_R_Z; ZP04 (Track pocket) YA_X_Y; ZE99 (End of machining); ZH01 (Drilling) YB_B_V; ZL02 (Line (same space)) X_Y_E; ZE99 (End of machining); ZI02 (End of program) C_T_; NOTE The difference between the mirror types COPY and MOVE is as follows: When [COPY] is selected. When [MOVE] is selected.
B63294EN/02
Track pocketing
Hole machining
After mirror image.
Before mirror image.
After mirror image.
Before mirror image.
Both figures are machined. (4) Restrictions
Only a figure after mirror image is machined.
S All Copy Mirror and Group Copy Mirror cannot be specified at the same time. S When tapering is specified in contour pocketing, All Copy Mirror and Group Copy Mirror cannot be specified.
122
B63294EN/02 2.2.11 Group copy mirror (ZI11)

EDITING NO. 001 002 003 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CYCLE AUXILIARY AUXILIARY POCKET/GROOV O2600(NODA1) PROCESS TOOL NAME Y INITAL SETING ALL CP PATTRN CONTOR POCKETEND MILL POCKET WALL PREP START POINT LINE LINE LINE LINE LINE POCKET WALL END PROCESS END PROGRAM END
EDIT
16:38:14
004 AUXILIARY
X AUXILIARY :ALL CP MIRROR GROUP SELCTYB= AGROUP MIRROR TYPE Q= BASE PT X X= BASE PT Y Y=
INTRODUCIR COORDENADA X DEL PUNTO BASE

1 YB GROUP COPY Q MIRROR TYPE AGROUP COPY
2 BGROUP MOVE
3 CGROUP
(1) Screen explanation Select this screen when a machining pattern of part of the program is moved or copied on the XY plane. Select this menu just after INITIAL SETTING (ZI01) is selected. (2) Input item explanation YB :GROUP SELECT Select [AGROUP] ,[BGROUP] or [CGROUP] from the soft keys. Other input items are the same as ALL COPY MIRROR menu. (3) Example of the program Select this function when the machining pattern of a part of a program is to be mirrored as shown below.
1. First, select the initial setting screen, then input desired data. 2. Select Group Copy Mirror, select [AGROUP], and select [MOVE] as mirror type. 3. After inputting Group Copy Mirror data, select machining menus sequentially, and input desired data. At this time, enable Group Copy of [AGROUP] for the track pocketing menu only. 4. Finally, select the end of setting to terminate program creation.
123

Program contents ZI01 (Initial setting) Q_M_I; ZI11 (Group copy mirror) YB_Q_X; ZP01 (Pocketing/grooving) YB_R_Z; (Group copy mirror is specified.) ZP04 (Track pocket) YA_X_Y; ZE99 (End of machining); ZH01 (Drilling) YB_B_V; ZL02 (Line (same space)) X_Y_E; ZE99 (End of machining); ZI02 (End of program) C_T_; (4) Restrictions S See the description of All Copy Mirror.
B63294EN/02
Track pocketing
124
B63294EN/02
2.3 Hole Machining

PROGRAM 01 DRILLING O1000 02 PECK DRILING PAGE :01/ EDITING 03 BORING
04 FINE BORING
05 BACK BORING
06 TAPPING
07 REAMING
08 FACING
SELECT SOFTKEY.
If HOLE is pressed on the machining menu select screen, detailed menu selection screen regarding hole machining is displayed. This menu allows input of hole shape data in hole machining. After data is input in this menu, the screen changes automatically to the hole position menu selection screen of Section 2.4 1) DRILLING This menu is selected when normal drilling is performed. 2) PECK DRILLING This menu is selected when drilling a relatively deep hole is performed. 3) BORING This menu is selected when boring machining is performed. 4) FINE BORING This menu is selected when boring machining is performed. It can be done when spindle orientation is effective. 5) BACK BORING This menu is selected when backboring machining is performed. It can be done when spindle orientation is effective. 6) TAPPING This menu is selected when threading is performed. 7) REAMING This menu is selected when reaming is performed. 8) FACINGCIRCLECUT This menu is selected when washer based spot facing is performed. Spot facing is performed when the tool is an end mill.
125
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.3.1 Drilling (ZH01)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END PAGE :01/ EDITING
MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10 T
B63294EN/02
I C R B V YE Z
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURAFCE DRILL DEPTH CHAMFER DIA
:DRILLING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C= *
RETURN POINT: I= * FEEDRATE CHG:YC= UNCHANGE TOOL ID NO. : T=

1 YB GROUP COPY YC FEED RATE CHG M U COOLANT UNUSED UNUSED COOLNT M7 G81
2 AGROUP AT APP ROACH COOLNT M8 G82
3 BGROUP PENETR ATION OFF M9
4 CGROUP AP. PENET
CANNED CYCLE
1) Screen explanation Select for ordinary drilling. Up to 10 tools can be selected including the tool used for the prehole machining. The chamfering tool is automatically decided. Compensation of the feed rate is possible when the tool is approaching or penetrating the work. 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP COPY The Group Copy menu is used to designate whether group copy should be made. Group Copy is not used. if there is no setting. B V I : WORK SURFACE Input the Z coordinate of the upper surface of the workpiece. Be sure to imput. : DRILL DEPTH Input the effective depth of the hole to be cut. Be sure to imput. : RETURN POINT Input the Z coordinate of the point to which the tool will return in rapid traverse mode bafter drilling. It returns to point R if not input. YC : FEED RATE CHG It is possible to reduce the feed rate when the drill is approaching or penetrating the workpiece. Specify either: UNUSED, APPROACHING, PENETRATION, or AP & PENET. UNUSED is specified if there is no specification. Refer to 3) Movement explanation for details. #7 9120 DCY #6 #5 #4 DCY : The drilling cycle is performed based on: 0 : Modal codes 1 : Canned cycle 126 #3 #2 #1 #0
B63294EN/02
C : CHAMFER DIA Input the outer dia. when chamfering.
The chamfering tool is decided automatically in Tool Auto.. When the chamfering tool is automatically set, it is displayed at the far left side of the screen, and other tools are shifted one row to the right. This is because the chamfering tool is used at later stage than the final tool. Refer to the figure below. Chamfering is not done unless input.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS 3 87. TOOL ID NO. T= PRO TOOL NAME Q= CHAMFER INI FAC TOOL DIA E= 15. H OFFSET NO. H= 187. FAC R POINT R= 5. FACING SQU PRO Z POINT Z= 2.25 003 HOLE TAP DWELL D= 0. TAP COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 TAP SPINDL SPEED S= 4240. TAP FEED RATE F= 1272. HOLE PATERN PAR SPEED OFFSET%YD= * PRO SPEED CHG PT YE= * 004 AUXILIARY END
PAGE :01/ EDITING

PROCESS 2 PROCESS 1 15. 3. DRILL CENT.DRILL 10. 3. 115. 103. 3. 3. 22. 3. 1431. 0 COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 5000. 4240. 500. 42. * * * *
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURAFCE DRILL DEPTH CHAMFER DIR
:DRILLI :YB= : Z= : V= : C=
UNUSED RETURN FGINT : I= 0. FEEDRATE CHG :YC= 20. TOOL ID NO. : T= 12.
* UNCHANGE 15.

: TOOL ID NO. Input the tool ID number of the final tool to be used. Refer to a tool file for the corresponding tool by pressing the TOOL DRCTRY soft key. Be sure to imput.
: TOOL NAME It is the name of the tool to be used. The tool name corresponding to the value inputted to Tool ID. No. (T) is read out of the tool file, and the tool name is displayed.
: TOOL DIA. It is the nominal diameter of the tool to be used. It is decided automatically by pressing the TOOL AUTO soft key. It is displayed reading a nominal diameter, which corresponds to the value assigned to a tool ID number (T), from a tool file.
: H OFFSET NO. It is the H offset No. of the tool to be used. It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is displayed reading the H offset No., which corresponds to the value assigned to a tool ID number (T), from a tool file.
: R POINT It is the Z coordinate of the cutting feed start point before drilling. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key.
: Z POINT It is the Z coordinate of the tool in the deepest point of the cutting feed. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key.
: DWELL It is the dwell time (in seconds) at the deepest point of drilling. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. After the automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary.
: COOLANT It is the specification of the coolant used by this machining menu. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. The coolant set by the initial setting menu is displayed. After the automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary.
: SPINDLE SPEED It is the speed of the tool spindle. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated from the cutting condition file data based on the work material, the tool, and the tool diameter, etc. After the automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary.
127

F : FEED RATE
B63294EN/02
It is the feed rate of the tool. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated considering the spindle speed (S) and the cutting condition file data. After the automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. YD : SPEED OFFSET % It is the amount of speed compensation during penetration or approaching when the feed rate is changed. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is displayed only when it is time when does the feed rate change and the tool is a drill. After the automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. This item can be set when bit 4 (DCY) of parameter No. 9120 is set to 0. YE : SPEED CHG PT It is the Z point coordinates at which the compensation of the feed rate starts when the drill penetrates the workpiece. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is displayed only when there is a feed rate change during penetration and the tool is a drill. After the automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. This item can be set when bit 4 (DCY) of parameter No. 9120 is set to 0. U : CANNED CYCLE A machining cycle can be selected from the soft keys. It is decided automatically using the F.S.AUTO soft key. After automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. This item can be set when bit 4 (DCY) of parameter No. 9120 is set to 1. 3) Movement explanation The following machining cycle is executed by the tool that has been set.
Machining cycle Model Canned cycle Center drill D G81 D G81, G82 Drill Tap Impossible Impossible D Impossible Reamer BR Impossible Bore Back bore Impossible Impossible D Impossible End mill Face mill Impossible Impossible Chamfer D G81
a) Movements of the drilling (D) cycle
When point I is omitted
When point I is inputted
I R R
Z Dwell 1. Rapid traverse up to point R 2. Cutting feed from point R to point Z 3. Dwell at point Z 4. Rapid traverse from point Z to point I b) Movements of the boring (BR) cycle Please refer to 2.3.3 3). c) Movement according to the feed rate change Dwell
The following movement is performed according to the specification of the feed rate change (YC) during the drilling (D) cycle.
128
B63294EN/02
i) At feed rate change (YC) = UNUSED The ordinary drilling cycle is done. ii) At feed rate change (YC) during APPROACH
I R B F F R B
Z Dwell 1. Rapid traverse up to point R Dwell
2. Just before the tool approaches the workpiece (See Note 2), the feed rate is changed to F (See Note 1) for cutting. 3. After the tool approaches the workpiece by the nose compensation amount (see Note 3), the tool feed rate is returned to its initial state. 4. Cutting feed to point Z 5. Dwell at point Z. 6. Rapid traverse back to point R or point I from point Z iii) At feed rate change (YC) = PENETRATION
I R F B YE Z F
F Dwell 1. Rapid traverse up to point R
F Dwell
YE Z
2. Cutting at feed rate F from point R to the feed rate change point (YE) 3. Cutting at feed rate F from the feed rate change point (YE) to point Z. 4. Rapid traverse back to point R or point I from point Z
129

iv) At feed rate change (YC) = AP & PENET.
B63294EN/02
I R B F F Dwell 1. Rapid traverse up to point R 2. Just before the tool approaches the workpiece (see Note 2), the feed rate is changed to F (see Note 1) for cutting. 3. The tool feed rate changes back to the initial value after approaching the workpiece and reaching the tool nose compensation amount of (Note 3). 4. Before the tool penetrates the workpiece, the feed rate is again changed to F at the speed change point (YE). 5. Even point Z is cut. 6. Rapid traverse back to point R or point I from point Z NOTE 1 The feed rate F during penetration or approach is calculated as follows. F = Feed rate (F) x Speed compensation (YD) NOTE 2 The Z coordinates immediately before approaching the workpiece has the following value. Work surface Z coordinate (B) + is calculated from the cutting condition file. NOTE 3 The Z coordinate just after the tool penetrates the workpiece by the tool nose compensation amount is as follows. Work surface Z coordinate (B) (Tool offset +) is calculated from the cutting condition file. d) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC. YE Z Dwell F F YE Z R B
130
B63294EN/02 2.3.2 Peck drilling (ZH02)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL FACING PREP. FACE MILL SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END
PAGE :01/ EDITING

I C R J U K V Z B
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURFACE DRILL DEPTH CHAMFER DIR
:PECK DRILING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C=
RETURN POINT : ONE DEPTH : PECK DEPTH : RETRACT DEPT :
I= J= K= U=
TOOL ID NO. : T=

1 YB GROUP COPY M YJ Coolant Canned cycle Not used Coolant M7 G73
2 AGROUP Coolant M8 G81
3 BGROUP None G82 G83
4 CGROUP
1) Screen explanation Select when relatively deep holes are drilled. It is possible to select up to 10 tools, including the tool used for prehole machining. The chamfering tool is automatically decided. 2) Input item explanation J K : ONE DEPTH Since the effective depth is cut in several passes, input the cutting depth/pass. Be sure to input. : PECK DEPTH Input the escape clearance of one pass for cutting. Be sure to input. This item can be set when bit 4 (DCY) of parameter No. 9120 is set to 0. U : RETRACT DEPTH The cutting dust is exhausted returning to point R when the depth of the hole is more than n x U. Input the value of U. Be sure to input. This item can be set when bit 4 (DCY) of parameter No. 9120 is set to 0. Other input items is the same as 2.3.1 Drilling. 3) Movement explanation The following machining cycle is executed using the tool that has been set.
Center drill Machining cycle Canned cycle D G81 DD G73 G81 G82 G83 Drill Tap Impossible Impossible Reamer DD Impossible BR Impossible Bore Back bore Impossible Impossible D Impossible End mill Face mill Impossible Impossible Chamfer D G81
131

a) Movements of the peck drilling (DD) cycle
B63294EN/02
This opration changes as follows, depending on the rereact depth (U). i) When retract depth (U) < = Cutting depth/pass ii) When retract depth, (U) point > R (R)point Z (Z)
Z iii) When cutting depth/pass < retract depth (U) < point R (R)point Z (Z)
For example, the movement of iii), shown above, can be described as follows: 1. Rapid traverse up to point R 2. Pecking done from point R using the cutting depth of one pass (J) 3. When the depth of hole exceeds n x retract depth (U) (n=1,2,3...) halfway, the tool returns to point R to discharge chips. 4. Rapid traverse from point R to the point the peck depth (K) above the point reached by previous cutting. 5. Peck again with a cutting depth of one pass (J). 6. Repeat 35 and machine up to point Z. 7. Dwell at point Z. 8. Rapid traverse back to point R or point I b) Movement of the drilling (D) cycle Refer to 2.3.1 3). c) Movement of the boring (BR) cycle Refer to 2.3.3 3). d) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC.
132
B63294EN/02 2.3.3 Boring (ZH03)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

I C
R B V Z
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURFACE BORE DEPTH CHAMFER DIR
:BORING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C= *
RETURN POINT : I= TOOL ID NO. : T=

< F.S. AUTO PROCES WINDOW TOOL GUIDAN INPUT END INFORM CE
1 YB GROUP COPY J K FINISH MACHINING MACHINING PROCESS COOLANT CANNED CYCLE RETRACTION NOT USED VALID ROUGH MACHINING COOLANT M7 G73 RAPID TRAVERSE
2 AGROUP INVALID FINISH MACHINING COOLANT M8 G81 CUTTING FEED OFF G82
3 BGROUP
4 CGROUP
M U YJ
G83
G85
G86
G89
1) Screen explanation Select when boring. It is possible to select up to 10 tools, including the tool used for prehole machining. The chamfering tool is automatically selected. 2) Input item explanation J : MACHINING PROCESS When using a cutting condition for CAP I, select the soft key [VALID] or [INVALID] to choose whether to specify finish machining for boring. This item can be set when bit 1 (SFL) of parameter No. 9238 is set to 1. #7 9238 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 SFL SFL = 0: The cutting condition file of Super CAPi M is used. SFL = 1: The cutting condition file of CAP I is used. K : MACHINING PROCESS When using the cutting condition for CAP I, select the soft key [ROUGH MACHINING] or [FINISH MACHINING] for boring only. Do not set this item for machining other than boring. This item can be set when bit 1 (SFL) of parameter No. 9238 is set to 1. #0
133

YA: CUTTING DEPTH OF ONE PATH
B63294EN/02
For cutting to a valid depth by several paths, input the cutting depth of one path. When no value is input or 0 is input, the valid depth (V) is assumed to be the cutting depth of one path. It is automatically decided using the F.S.AUTO soft key. After automatic decision, the value can be altered if necessary. The angle/sizing value corresponding to the value input in TOOL ID NO. is read from the tool file and displayed. YJ: RETRACTION For boring only, a type of retraction can be selected from the soft keys [RAPID TRAVERSE] and [CUTTING FEED]. It is automatically decided using F.S.AUTO soft key. After automatic decision, this value can be altered if necessary. This item can be set when bit 4 (DCY) of parameter No. 9120 is set to 0. The other input items are the same as for drilling. 3) Movement explanation The following machine cycle is executed using the tool that has been set.
Machining cycle Modal Canned cycle D G81 Center drill D G73 G81 G82 G83 Drill Tap Reamer BR (finish) G81 G85 G86 G89 Bore Back bore End mill Face mill Chamfer
Impossible D
Impossible D
Impossible D
Impossible Impossible (rough) G73 G81 G85 G86 G89
Impossible Impossible Impossible G81
a) Movement of the boring (BR) cycle When point I is omitted When point I is inputted
I R R
Z Dwell 1. Rapid traverse up to point R 2. Cutting feed from point R to point Z 3. Dwell at point Z 4. Cutting feed to point R 5. In addition, it traverses rapidly to point I when I is input. b) Movement of the drilling (D) cycle Refer to 2.3.1 3). c) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC. Dwell
134
B63294EN/02 2.3.4 Fine boring (ZH04)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

I C
R B V X,Y Z
:FINE BORING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C= *
RETURN POINT : SHIFT OF X : SHIFT OF Y : TOOL ID NO. :
I= X= Y= T=

1 YB GROUP COPY M U Coolant Canned cycle Not used Coolant M7 G73
4 CGROUP
G83
G85
G86
G89
1) Screen explanation Select when boring. Fine boring can be done when the positioning of the spindle is possible. It is possible to select up to 10 tools, including the tool used for the prehole machining. The chamfering tool is selected automatically. 2) Input item explanation X Y : SHIFT OF X : SHIFT OF Y During boring, after cutting up to point Z, the fixedposition spindle stop (M19) is carried out, then the tool is moved away from the workpiece in the XY direction. Input the amount of movement of the X and Y axis. When performing a canned cycle, input one of the two values. Which value to be input depends on the settings of bit 4 (RD1) and bit 5 (RD2) of parameter No. 5101. Be sure to input. Refer to 2.3.1 Drilling for other input items. 3) Movement explanation The following machining cycle is executed using the tool that has been set.
Center drill Machining cycle Canned cycle D G81 D G73 G81 G82 G83 Drill Tap Impossible Impossible D Impossible Reamer FB G73 G76 G81 G85 G86 G89 Bore Back bore Impossible Impossible D Impossible End mill Face mill Impossible Impossible Chamfer D G81
135

a) Movement of the fine boring (FB) cycle
B63294EN/02
M03 I M03 R R
F Dwell M19
F Dwell M19
XY
XY
1. Rapid traverse up to point R 2. Cutting feed from point R to point Z 3. Dwell at point Z 4. Positioning of spindle (M19) 5. Rapid traverse shift to XY direction 6. Rapid traverse escape up to point R 7. Spindle rotation b) Movement of the drilling (D) cycle Refer to 2.3.1 3). c) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC.
136
B63294EN/02 2.3.5 Backboring (ZH05)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10 T I C B U Z V X,Y R
:BACK BORING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C= *
RETURN POINT : THICKNESS : SHIFT OF X : SHIFT OF Y :
I= U= X= Y=
TOOL ID NO. : T=

1 YB GROUP COPY M J Coolant Canned cycle Not used Coolant M7 G73
4 CGROUP
G83
G85
G86
G87
1) Screen explanation Select when backboring. It can be done when the positioning of the spindle is possible. It is possible to select up to 10 tools, including the tool used for prehole machining. The chamfering tool is automatically selected. 2) Input item explanation I : RETURN POINT Input the Z coordinate of the point to which the tool will return in rapid traverse mode after the cutting feed. Be sure to input when back boring. U X Y : THICKNESS Input the thickness of the workpiece. Be sure to input. : SHIFT OF X : SHIFT OF Y After the spindle stops at the fixed position when backboring, release the cutting tool so that it does not interfere with the inner wall of the workpiece. When performing a canned cycle, input one of the two values. Which value to be input depends on the settings of bit 4 (RD1) and bit 5 (RD2) of parameter No. 5101. Be sure to input. YA : CUTTING DEPTH OF ONE PATH When cutting a workpiece with a certain thickness by several paths, input the cutting depth of one path. When no value is input or 0 is input, THICKNESS (U) is assumed to be the cutting depth of one path. It is automatically decided using the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. After automatic decision, the value can be altered if necessary. The angle/sizing value corresponding to the value input in TOOL ID NO. (T) is read from the tool file and displayed. Other input items are the same as drilling
137

3) Movement explanation The following machining cycle is executed using the tool that has been set.
Machining cycle Modal Canned cycle Center drill D G81 D G73 G81 G82 G83 Drill Tap Impossible Impossible D Impossible Reamer BR G73 G76 G81 G85 G86 Bore Back bore BB G87 D Impossible End mill
B63294EN/02
Face mill Impossible Impossible
Chamfer D G81
a) Movement of the backboring (BB) cycle
M19 M03 I Dwell M19 Z
M03
XY
1. The fixedposition spindle stop (M19) is executed after the excape in XY direction. 2. Rapid traverse up to point R 3. Movement to a specified position returning to the XY direction and rotating the spindle 4. Cutting feed up to point Z 5. Dwell at point Z 6. Escape the XY direction after the fixedposition spindle stop (M19) 7. Rapid traverse from point Z to point I 8. Rotation of the spindle at point I b) Movement of the drilling (D) cycle Refer to 2.3.1 3). c) Movement of the boring (BR) cycle Refer to 2.3.3 3). d) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC.
138
B63294EN/02 2.3.6 Tapping (ZH06)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10 J T
I C R B YE V Z
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURFACE TAP DEPTH CHAMFER DIR
:TAPPING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C= *
RETURN POINT : I= FEEDRATE CHG :YC= KIND OF TAP : A= TOOL ID NO. : T=
* UNCHANGE NORMAL

1 YB GROUP COPY YC FEED RATE CHG A M U KIND OF TAP COOLANT Canned cycle Not used UNCHAN GE NORMAL COOLNT M7 G73
2 AGROUP AT APP ROACH LEFT HAND COOLNT M8 G81
3 BGROUP PENYER ATION RIGID NORMAL OFF M9 G82 G83
4 CGROUP AP. PENET RIGID OPP.
1) Screen explanation Select when cutting a thread. It is possible to select up to 10 tools, including the tool used for prehole machining. It is possible to compensate the feed rate when approaching or penetrating during prehole machining with a drill. The chamfering tool is automatically selected. In this machining, canned cycle (G84/G74) is used. 2) Input item explanation A : KIND OF TAP Specify either NORMAL, LEFTHAND, RIGID NORMAL, or RIGID OPP. NORMAL is specified if there is no specification. J : PITCH Input the pitch (mm) of the thread of the tap. When drilling a workpiece up to a valid depth by several paths, input the depth of one path. When no value is input or 0 is input, TAP DEPTH (V) is assumed to be the cutting depth of one path. It is automatically decided using the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. The pitch corresponding to the value input Tool ID No. (T) is read out of the tool file and displayed. Refer to 2.3.1 Drilling for other input items. 3) Movement explanation The following process cycle is executed using the tool that has been set.
Machining cycle Modal Canned cycle Center drill D G81 D G73 G81 G82 G83 Drill Tap Impossible Desides from the kind of thread D Impossible Reamer BR Impossible Bore Back bore Impossible Impossible D Impossible End mill Face mill Impossible Impossible Chamfer D G81
139

a) Movement of the tapping (TP) cycle
B63294EN/02
M03/04 I M03/04 R R
F Dwell Dwell
Dwell 1. Rapid traverse up to point R
Z M03/04
Z M03/04
2. Cutting feed from point R to point Z 3. Dwell at point Z. 4. Spindle CCW rotation 5. Cutting feed from point Z to point R 6. Rapid traverse from point R to point I (No movement if there is no specification) 7. Spindle CW rotation b) Movement of the drilling (D) cycle Refer to 2.3.1 3). c) Movement of the boring (BR) cycle Refer to 2.3.3 3). d) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC.
140
B63294EN/02 2.3.7 Reaming (ZH07)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

I C R B V YE Z
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURFACE REAM DEPTH CHAMFER DIR
:REAMING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C= *
RETURN POINT : I= FEEDRATE CHG :YC= TOOL ID NO. : T=
* UNCHANGE

1 YB GROUP COPY YC FEED RATE CHG M U Coolant Canned cycle Not used UNCHAN GE Coolant M7 G73
2 AGROUP AT APP ROACH Coolant M8 G81
3 BGROUP PENETR ATION Off G82 G83
4 CGROUP AP. PENET
G58
G86
G89
1) Screen explanation Select when reaming. It is possible to select up to 10 tools, including the tool used for prehole machining. It is possible to compensate the feed rate when approaching or penetrating during prehole machining with a drill. The chamfering tool is automatically decided. 2) Input item explanation A : OVERRIDE An override can be applied to the feedrate for retraction along the Zaxis after reaming. It is automatically decided using the F.S.AUTO soft key. After automatic decision, the value can be altered if necessary. Do not set this item for machining other than reaming. This item can be set when bit 4 (DCY) of parameter No. 9120 is set to 0. This function is enabled when bit 2 of parameter No. 9221 is set to 1. #7 9221 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #2 #2 = 0: Retraction after reaming is performed by rapid traverse. #2 = 1: Retraction after reaming is performed by cutting feed. The other input items are the same as for drilling and boring. 3) Movement explanation The following machining cycle is executed using the tool that has been set.
Machining cycle Modal Canned cycle Center drill D G81 D G73 G81 G82 G83 Drill Tap Impossible Impossible D G81 G85 G86 G89 Reamer BR Impossible Bore Back bore Impossible Impossible D Impossible End mill Face mill Impossible Impossible Chamfer D G81
#1
#0
141

a) Movement of the reaming cycle
B63294EN/02
The reaming cycle movement is the same as that of the drilling cycle (D). When bit 2 of parameter No. 9221 is 1, however, retraction along the Z axis is performed in cutting feed mode. b) Movement of the boring (BR) cycle Refer to 2.3.3 3). c) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC.
142
B63294EN/02 2.3.8 Spot facing (Circle cut) (ZH08)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

I C K V YE Z
R B
HOLE GROUP COPY WK SURFACE DEPTH CHAMFER DIR
:FACING :YB= UNUSED : B= : V= : C= *
RETURN POINT : I= FEEDRATE CHG :YC= FACING DIA : J= FACING DEPTH : K=
* TOOL ID NO. : T= UNCHANGE

1 YB GROUP COPY YI M YJ Cutting method Coolant Canned cycle Not used Down cutting Coolant M7 G73
2 AGROUP Upper cutting Coolant M8 G76 Off G81
3 BGROUP
4 CGROUP
G82
G83
G85
G86
G89
1) Screen explanation Select when drilling and using a washer. Spot facing is performed at the end mill. Circle cutting is done when the facing dia. is larger than the tool diameter. It is possible to select up to 10 tools, including the tool used for prehole machining. It is possible to compensate the feed rate when approaching or penetrating the work during the hole machining with a drill. The chamfering tool is automatically decided. 2) Input item explanation J : SPOT FACING DIA Input the spot facing diameter. Circle cutting is performed when the input value (E) is larger than the nominal diameter of the end mill tool. The spot facing diameter is the same as the nominal diameter of the end mill tool (E) if it is not input. K : FACING DEPTH It is the effective depth of the spot facing when the tool is an end mill tool. It is the same as the effective depth (V) unless input. YI : CUTTING METHOD When performing circle cutting, specify the direction of cutting by selecting the soft key [DOWN CUT] or [UPPER CUT]. YA: SHIFT For boring, input an amount of shift after orientation at the bottom of a hole. Be sure to input this value. U : CIRCLE FEEDRATE/CUTTING Input a feedrate for circle cutting. Be sure to input this value. When drilling or boring a workpiece up to a valid depth by several paths, input the cutting depth of one path. When no value is input or 0 is input, DEPTH (V) is assumed to be the cutting depth of one path. It is automatically decided using the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. After automatic decision, the value can be altered if necessary. The angle/sizing value corresponding to the value input in TOOL ID NO. (T) is read from the tool file and displayed. Refer to 2.3.1 Drilling for other input items.
143

3) Movement explanation The following machining cycle is executed using the tool that has been set.
Machining cycle Modal Canned cycle Center drill D G81 D G73 G81 G82 G83 Drill Tap Impossible Impossible D Impossible Reamer BR G73 G76 G81 G85 G86 G89 Bore Back bore Impossible Impossible D Impossible End mill
B63294EN/02
Face mill Impossible Impossible
Chamfer CF Impossible
a) End mill machining movement (EM)
I R R
1. Rapid traverse up to point R 2. Cutting feed to point RK 3. Circle cutting at point RK (When facing dia. (J) > nominal diameter (E)) 4. Rapid traverse to point R or point I b) Chamfering machining movement (CF) 1. Rapid traverse up to the chamfering height 2. Circle cutting 3. Rapid traverse to point R or point I c) Machining movement of the drilling (D) cycle Refer to 2.3.1 3). d) Movement of the boring (BR) cycle Refer to 2.3.3 3). e) Canned cycle operation For canned cycle operation, refer to the operators manual of the NC. NOTE With the end mill and chamfering tool, circle cutting is performed without canned cycle output.
144
B63294EN/02
2.4 Hole Pattern

PROGRAM 01 POINTS O1000 02 LINE SAM.SP PAGE :01/ EDITING 03 LINE DIF.SP
04 GRID
05 PARALLELOGRM
06 BOLT HOL CIR
07 ARC SAME SP
08 ARC DIFF SP TO BE CONTINE NEXT PAGE.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
PROGRAM O0030(MANUAL1) 09 COPY RANDOM 10 COPY PATTRN
PAGE :01/ EDITING

< 09 10 GUIDAN INSERT + END CE
After data for hole machining menu ared input, this screen appears automatically. 1) POINTS If hole position data are input one by one, X and Y coordinates of hole positions are input on this menu. Up to 8 points can be input. 2) LINESAME SPACE This is a menu for commanding the pattern of hole positions at same spaces on an arbitrary line. 3) LINEDIFFER SPC This is a menu for commanding the pattern of hole positions at different spaces on an arbitrary line. 4) GRID This is a menu for commanding the pattern of hole positions at same spaces on a grid. 5) PARALLELOGRAM This is a menu for commanding the pattern of hole positions on a parallelogram. 6) BOLT HOLE CIRCLE This is a menu for commanding the pattern of hole positions at same spaces on an arbitrary circumference. 7) ARCSAME SPACE This is a menu for commanding the pattern of hole positions at same spaces on an arbitrary circular arc. 8) ARCDIFFER SPACE This is a menu for commanding the pattern of hole positions at different spaces on an arbitrary circular arc.
145

9) COPY (RANDOM)
B63294EN/02
This is a menu to be selected when multiple copies of a hole position pattern defined in (1) through (9) are produced at an arbitrary position. 10)COPY (PATTERN) This is a menu to be selected when multiple copies of a hole position pattern defined in (1) through (9) are produced based on shift amounts in the Xdirection and Ydirection.
146
B63294EN/02 2.4.1 Group of points (ZL01)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 HOLE O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING DRILLING DRILL
PAGE :01/ EDITING
HOLE PATERN COORDINATES POINT1 X Y POINT2 X
:POINTS : W= : A= : B= : C=
Y POINT3 X Y POINT4 X
: : : :
I= J= K= X=
: Y= : Z= :YF= :YG=
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE POSITION OF THE 1ST HOLE.

< CHECK GUIDAN INPUT END CE
2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation When inputting data of the position of holes, one by one, input the XY coordinate values of the holes from this screen. It is possible to input up to 8 coordinate values. Select this menu again in case there are 9 or more. 2) Input item explanation W : COORDINATES Specify when you alter a work coordinate system. It is not necessary to input unless a work coordinate system specified by the initial setting is altered. When All Copy and Group Copy are selected, no work coordinate system can be changed in the course of the program. Do not input anything in this case. Specify UNUSED when you specify work coordinate setting G92 in the initial setting. A B . . Input the X coordinate and Y coordinate of the position of each hole. Input the points one by one in the order of machining. There can be up to 8 holes. This menu is selected again when it is necessary to input more than 8 holes by pressing INPUT END after inputting. : POINT1 X : POINT1 Y
147
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.4.2 Line (Same space) (ZL02)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 HOLE O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING DRILLING DRILL PAGE :01/ EDITING
B63294EN/02
U E I 2 1 X ,Y A 3
HOLE PATERN COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD NUM OF HOLE
:LINE SAM.SP : W= * : X= : Y= : E=
PITCH : I= LINE LENGTH : U= LINE ANGLE : A= OMIT POINT 1 :YF=
OMIT POINT 2 :YG= OMIT POINT 3 :YH= 0. OMIT POINT 4 :YI= *
* * *

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining hole patterns with holes equally spaced on an arbitrary line. It is possible to specify a drilling point to be omitted. 2) Input item explanation W X Y E I U A : COORDINATES Refer to 2.4.1 2). : X COORD : Y COORD Input the X coordinates and Y coordinates of the position of the 1st hole. Be sure to input. : NUM OF HOLES Input the total number of holes, including the number of the points to be omitted. : PITCH Input the space in the hole position. : LINE LENGTH Input the length of the straight line. Input either the pitch width (I) or the line length (U). : LINE ANGLE Input the angle between the X axis and the straight line. 0 is input if there is no input. YF : OMIT POINT 1 YG : OMIT POINT 2 YH : OMIT POINT 3 YI : OMIT POINT 4 It is possible not to drill up to 4 arbitrary points. Hole drilling is performed in sequence from the start point (X, Y); therefore, to designate the point to be omitted, input the hole drilling sequence numbers including its point. If it is not input, it is considered that there are no points omitted and all the points are drilled.
148
B63294EN/02
Hole machining sequence
Line(same space)
Grid
Square
Circle
Arc(same space)
149
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.4.3 Line (Differ SPC) (ZL03)

YG YF
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING
YH
A X ,Y
HOLE PATERN COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD LINE ANGEL
:LINE DIF.SP : W= * : X= : Y= : A= 0.
PITCH PITCH PITCH PITCH
1 2 3 4
:YF= :YG= :YH= :YI=
PITCH PITCH PITCH PITCH
5 6 7 8
:YJ= :YK= :YL= : B=

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining hole position patterns, with holes not equally spaced on an arbitrary line at different space. 2) Input item explanation W X Y A : COORDINATES Refer to 2.4.1 2). : X COORD : Y COORD Refer to 2.4.2 2). : LINE ANGLE Refer to 2.4.2 2). YF : PITCH 1 YG : PITCH 2 . . Input the distance from the start point to the 2nd point, and from the 2nd point to the 3rd point. Input sequentially the pitches starting with pitch 1. Because it is possible to input 11 pitches, the maximum number of holes is 12.
150
B63294EN/02 2.4.4 Grid (ZL04)

E
PAGE :01/ EDITING
2 C 3 1 1 X ,Y 2 A D
:GRID : W= : X= : Y= : U=
V LENGTH U NUMBER V NUMBER XU ANGEL
: : : :
V= D= E= A=
UV ANGEL : C= 90. OMIT POINT 1 :YF= * OMIT POINT 2 :YG= * 0. OMIT POINT 3 :YH= *

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when the position of the holes in a row are equally spaced on a grid. It is possible to specify points to be omitted. 2) Input item explanation W X Y : COORDINATES Refer to 2.4.1 2). : X COORD : Y COORD Input the X coordinates and Y coordinates of the position of the hole of the 1st point. The 1st point is at the lower left position of the grid. Be sure to input. U V D E : U LENGTH Input the length in the horizontal direction. Be sure to input. : V LENGTH Input the length in the vertical direction. Be sure to input. : U NUMBER : V NUMBER Input the number of holes in the horizontal direction and in the vertical direction respectively. Be sure to input. A : XU ANGLE It is possible to incline the line defined by the points with respect to the X axis. Input the angle between the line in the horizontal direction and the X axis. It is considered to be 0 if not input. C : UV ANGLE Input the acute angle between the line defined by the points and the horizontal direction and the vertical direction. It is considered to be a right angle (90_) if not input. YF : OMIT POINT 1 YG : OMIT POINT 2 YH : OMIT POINT 3 YI : OMIT POINT 4 Refer to 2.4.2 2).
151
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.4.5 Parallelogram (ZL05)

E
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING
2 C 3 1 X ,Y 1 2 A D
:PARALLELOGRM : W= * : X= : Y= : U=
V LENGTH U NUMBER V NUMBER XU ANGEL
: : : :
V= D= E= A=
UV ANGEL : C= 90. OMIT POINT 1 :YF= * OMIT POINT 2 :YG= * 0. OMIT POINT 3 :YH= *

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when the position of the holes form a quadrangle. It is possible to specify the specification of a point to be omitted. 2) Input item explanation Refer to 2.4.4 2).
152
B63294EN/02 2.4.6 Bolt hole circle (ZL06)

3
PAGE :01/ EDITING

2 1 R A X ,Y E
HOLE PATERN COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD RADIUS
:BOLT HOL CIR : W= * : X= : Y= : R=
ANGEL : A= NUM OF HOLES : E= OMIT POINT 1 :YF= OMIT POINT 2 :YG=
0. OMIT POINT 3 :YH= OMIT POINT 4 :YI= * *
* *
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE CIRCLE.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when the holes are equally spaced in an arbitrary position on a circumference. It is possible to specify the points to be omitted. 2) Input item explanation X Y R A : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinates of the center of the circle. Be sure to input. : RADIUS Input the radius of the circle. Be sure to input. : ANGLE Input the angle between the segment from the center of the circle to the starting point and the X axis. The angle is considered to be 0 and the starting point is considered to be on the X axis if not input. Refer to 2.4.2 2) for other input items.
153
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.4.7 Arc (Same space) (ZL07)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 HOLE O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING DRILLING DRILL PAGE :01/ EDITING
B63294EN/02
2 3 1 R C A X ,Y E
:ARC SAME SP : W= * : X= : Y= : R=
START ANGEL : A= PITCH ANGEL : C= NUM OF HOLES : E= OMIT POINT 1 :YF=
0. OMIT POINT 2 :YG= OMIT POINT 3 :YH= OMIT POINT 4 :YI= *
* * *

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when the holes are in equally spaced an arbitrary position on an arc. It is possible to specify the points to be omitted. 2) Input item explanation Refer to 2.4.6 2).
154
B63294EN/02 2.4.8 Arc (Differ space) (ZL08)

PAGE :01/ EDITING
R YH YG YF A X ,Y
:ARC DIFF SP : W= * : X= : Y= : R=
START ANGEL ANGEL ANGEL
ANGEL 1 2 3
: A= :YF= :YG= :YH=
0. ANGEL ANGEL ANGEL ANGEL
4 5 6 7
:YI= :YJ= :YK= :YL=

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when holes are not equally spaced in an arbitrary position on an arc. 2) Input item explanation YF : ANGLE 1 YG : ANGLE 2 . . . Input the angle between segments from the center of the circle to each point. Input the angles one by one starting from angle 1. Because it is possible to input 11 angles, the maximum number of holes is 12. Refer to 2.4.6 2) for other input items.
155
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.4.9 Copy (Random) (ZL09)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 HOLE O1000 PAGE :01/ EDITING
B63294EN/02
THE PREVIOUS VALUE IS TAKEN PROCESS TOOL NAME OVER WHEN UNDEFINED INITAL SETING DRILLING DRILL
HOLE PATERN COPY TOTAL X COORD Y COORD 2ND X COOR
:COPY RANDOM : E= : X= : Y= :YF=
Y 3RD X Y 4TH X
COORD :YG= COORD :YH= COORD :YI= COORD :YJ=
Y 5TH X Y 6TH X
COORD :YK= COORD : A= COORD : B= COORD : C=
INPUT THE TOTAL NO.OF PARTS TO BE MADE FROM A SINGLE SHEET.(2A8)

1) Screen explanation It is available in each menu, that is, hole pattern, facing, side cutting, and pocket machining. Select when the shape defined by each menu is copied to several arbitrary positions. However, it is not possible to use it for NC language preparation, random points, and contours. Select this menu just before the hole position menu when copying multiple parts from a single sheet. Further, for multiple copy in facing, side cutting and pocketing, select each menu copy (random) just after each preparation. 2) Input item explanation E : COPY TOTAL Input the total number of parts to be made from a single sheet. The input range is 2 8. Be sure to input. X Y : X COORD : Y COORD It is a parameter showing the relative position. Input the arbitrary coordinates on the figure which becomes the standard. YF : 2ND X COORD YG : 2ND Y COORD It is a parameter showing the destination of the copy. It is copied so that the standard point (X and Y) input before is the same as the coordinate input here. 3) Notes It is impossible to use Copy (random) and Copy (pattern) simultaneously in the same machining menu.
156
B63294EN/02 2.4.10 Copy (Pattern) (ZL10)

J
PAGE :01/ EDITING
A I (1) BI DE RECTION UNI DE RECTION (2) (3) (4)
HOLE PATERN COPY PATH COPY START COPY TOTAL U PITCH
:COPY RANDOM :YA=UNIDIREC. V PITCH : B= (3) U NUMBER : E= ANGEL : I=
: J= : D= : A=
0.

1 YA B COPY PATH COPY START UNIDI REC. (1)
2 BIDIREC. (2) (3)
(4)
1) Screen explanation It is available in each menu, that is, hole pattern, facing, side cutting, and pocket machining. This is selected to copy multiple figures defined in each menu from a single sheet on the basis of a given shift amount in XY directions. However, it is not possible to use it for NC language preparation, random points, and contours. Select this menu just before the hole pattern menu when drilling multiple parts from a single sheet. Further, for multiple copy in facing, side cutting and pocketing, select the copy (pattern) of each menu just after each preparation. 2) Input item explanation YA : COPY PATH Input either BIDIREC. or UNIDIREC. BIDIREC. is specified in if there is no setting B : COPY START Input a number from 1) to 4). (3) is specified if there is no setting E I J D A : COPY TOTAL Input the total number of the multiple parts from a single sheet. Be sure to input. : U PITCH The amount of shift in the U direction. Be sure to input. : V PITCH Input the amount of shift in the V direction. Be sure to input. : U NUMBER Input the number of multiple parts from a single sheet in the U direction. Be sure to input. : ANGLE Input the angle of the X direction and of the U direction. 0 is input if there is no input.
157

3) Example of program
B63294EN/02
It is used only for one machining menu with a series of processes like the figure below when the multiple parts are made from a single sheet. In this case, only the track pocket is made using several menu copies (Pattern).
1. The data is input selecting the initial setting screen first. 2. The machining menu is selected one by one. 3. Pocketing Prep, Menu Copy (Pattern), then Track are selected in turn for multiple copy from a single sheet when pocketing. 4. The programming ends by selecting end of program. Program contents ZI01 ZF01 ZF02 ZE99 ZP01 ZP10 ZP04 ZE99 (Initial setting) Q_M_I; (Facing prepare) YB_Z_U; (Square UNIDIR) X_Y_U; (End of machining); (Pocketing/grooving) YB_R_Z; (Copy pattern) YA_B_E; (Track pocket) YA_X_Y; (End of machining);
Square facing
Track pocketing
ZH01 (Drilling) YB_B_V; ZL02 (Line (same space)) X_Y_E; ZE99 (End of machining); ZI02 (End of program) C_T_; 4) Notes
Hole machining
It is impossible to use Copy (random) and Copy (pattern) simultaneously in the same machining menu.
158
B63294EN/02
2.5 Facing
PROGRAM O1000 01 SQUARE UNIDIR PAGE :01/ EDITING 03 CIRCLE UNIDIR
02 SQUARE BIDIR
04 CIRCLE BIDIR
05 SQUAREFRING
06 CIRCLE DRING
07 COPY RANDOM
08 COPY PATTRN
SELECT SOFTKEY.
If FACING is pressed on the machining menu select screen, detailed menu select screen regarding facing is displayed. This menu screen includes a menu for inputting tool data (facing prepare) and menus for inputting the shape of machining plane, etc. Facing prepare is selected at the beginning of facing, and then a menu for inputting shape, etc is selected. 1) FACING PREPARE At the beginning of facing this menu is selected. Input position data in the Z direction and tool data. 2) SQUARE UNIDIR. This menu is selected when facing is performed with unidirectional cutting on a square shape plane. 3) SQUARE BIDIR. This menu is selected when facing is performend with bidirectional cutting on a square shape plane. 4) CIRCLE UNITDIR. This menu is selected when facing is performed with unidirectional cutting on a circle shape plane. 5) CIRCLE BIDIR. This menu is selected when facing is performed with bidirectional cutting on a circle shape plane. 6) SQUARERING This menu is selected when facing is performed only on the edge of a square plane. 7) CIRCLERING This menu is selected when facing is performed only on the edge of a circle plane. 8) COPY RANDOM This is a menu for multipiece machining of facing shape defined by 2) through 7) on arbitrary positions. 9) COPY PATTERN This is a menu for multipiece machining of facing shape defined by 2) through 7) on the basis of a fixed shift amount in X and Y directions.
159
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.5.1 Facing prepare (ZF01)

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS2 T E*2D
B63294EN/02
J VY Z U
:FACING PREP. :YB= UNUSED : Z= : V= : J=
FINISHING : Y= THICKNESS : U= TOOL ID NO. : T=
0.

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY
O0031(MANUAL2)
TOOL ID NO. PRO TOOL NAME INI CUTTING DATA1/1 T= Q= PROCESS B= H OFFSET NO. H= D OFFSET NO. D= COOLANT M= SPINDL SPEED S= FEED RATE F= CUT WIDTH(0/0)E= ZESCAPE K= PROCESS2 71. FACE MILL FINISHING 171. 71. COOLNT M7 848. 458. 70. 3.
PAGE :01/ CREATING

PROCESS1 72. 72 FACE MILL ROUGHING 172. 72. COOLNT M7 1431. 773. 70. 3.
:FACING :YB= : Z= : V= : J=
UNUSED FINISHING : Y= 0. THICKNESS : U= 5. TOOL ID NO. : T= *
1. 20. 71.

1 YB GROUP COPY B M PROCESS COOLANT Not used ROUGHI NG COOLNT M7
2 AGROUP FINISHING COOLNT M8
3 BGROUP
4 CGROUP
OFF M9
1) Screen explanation Select this screen to start facing. Input the data of the position in the Z direction and the data of the tool. A pretool and the machining process are automatically decided by TOOL AUTO. There are two machining processes, that is, rough cutting and finish cutting. The max. number of tools used is 2. 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP COPY When Group Copy is selected, this menu is used to designate whether Group Copy is used or not. Group Copy = is not used, if there is no setting. Z V : Z POINT Input the Z coordinate of the final machined surface. Be sure to input. : REMOVAL Input the machining in the Z direction of the cutting surface. Be sure to input.
160
B63294EN/02
J : PITCH
Input the machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting in the Z direction. Cut dividing the machining allowance (VY) of the rough cutting by the pitch (J) into several passes. The machining allowance (VY) is cut in one pass if not input. Y : FINISHING Input the machining allowance in the Z direction for finish cutting. This finish allowance is cut in one pass. Finish cutting is not done if not input. U : THICKNESS Input the thickness of the work after facing. Despite that this input item is irrelevant to the actual machining, it is used for drawing and checking the shape of the work. Be sure to input. T : TOOL ID NO. Input the tool ID number of the final tool to be used. Refer to the tool file for the corresponding tool by pressing the TOOL DRCTRY soft key. Be sure to input. Q B H D : TOOL NAME The tool corresponding to the value input to Tool ID No. (T) is read from the tool file, and displayed. : PROCESS There are two Rough cutting and Finish cutting : H OFFSET NO. : D OFFSET NO. It is the offset number of the tool used. It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is displayed reading the offset number, which corresponds to the value assigned to a tool ID number (T), from a tool file. M : COOLANT It is the coolant selected by this machining menu. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. The coolant set by the initial setting menu is displayed. After automatic setting, the coolant can be changed as needed. S : SPINDLE SPEED It is the speed of the tool spindle. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated from the cutting condition file data based on the work material, the tool, and the tool diameter, etc. It can be modified after the automatic decision if needed. F : FEED RATE It is the feed rate of the tool. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated from the spindle speed (S) and the cutting condition file data. After automatic setting, the feedrate can be changed as needed. E : CUT WIDTH (%) Pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key automatically determines the % of the cutting width. The actual cutting width is calculated from the tool diameter and the % of the cutting width. After the automatic setting, the cutting width % can be changed as needed. K : ZESCAPE It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. The actual clearance for cutting is the following amount: Clearance = Clearance in the Z direction (K) + Pitch (J) 3) Explanation of movements Facing is divided into the following two operations (B). 1 Rough cutting 2 Bottom finish cutting Bottom finishing (2) above can be omitted according to the setting of input item, but the order of processes (1) and (2) cannot be changed.
161

a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation.
B63294EN/02
J V Y Z
Y Z
1. Machining is done considering the cutting amount of one pass, that is, pitch (J). 2. When cutting in one plane is completed, further advance in Z direction by the pitch (J) and continue the with same operation. 3. This is repeated until reaching the machining allowance (VY). 4. Machining allowance (VY) is cut in one pass unless the pitch (J) is input. NOTE Machining of the remaining machining allowance The remainder of the machining allowance is machined as follows advancing in the Z direction. Example Input as follows. V : REMOVAL = 6.5 J : PITCH = 3.0 Y : FINISHING = 0.2 In this case, the roughing allowance is 6.3 mm (= 6.50.2). It will be cut in three passes with a pitch of 3 mm and a smaller final pitch. 3.0 mm 3.0 mm 0.3 mm Thus, when the odd amount at the last roughing is far smaller than the pitch, the cutting operation is performed 2 times as follows: 1st time : 3.0 mm 2nd time : 3.3 mm The allowable amount in which the last odd amount is cut together with the previous pass is set in advance in cutting conditios file. (No. 474) in advance. Alter this value if necessary.
162
B63294EN/02

b) When the machining operation (B) is a finish cutting operation.
Y Z
1. The amount cut is the finish cutting machining allowance (Y). 2. Finishing cutting is done with a cutting amount equal to zero when the finish cutting machining allowance (Y) is 0.
163
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.5.2 Square (unidir) (ZF02)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL PAGE :01/ EDITING
U YD (2)
B63294EN/02
(1) V (X,Y) (3)
(4)
YC
:SQUARE UNIDIR : W= * : X= : Y= : U=
V LENGTH ANGEL START POINT APPROACH
: V= : A= : B= :YC=
ESCAPE 0. (4) 5.
:YD=
5.

1 W B COORDINATE START POINT UNUSED 1)
2 WORK CO 1 2)
3 WORK CO 2 3)
4 WORK CO 3 4)
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when a side of the quadrangle is machined in the plane by unidirectional cutting. 2) Input item explanation W : COORDINATES Specify when you alter a work coordinate system. It is not necessary to input unless a work coordinate system specified by the initial setting is altered. While programming, a work coordinate system can not be altered when All Copy and Group Copy are selected. Do not input anything in this case. Specify UNUSED when you specify G92 using the initial setting. X Y U V A : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinate of the center of the quadrangle. : U LENGTH Input the horizontal length of the quadrangle. : V LENGTH Input the vertical length of the quadrangle. : ANGLE Input the center (X and Y) of the quadrangle when the work is inclined with respect to the X axis. Input the angle between the U side and the X axis. If there is no input, the angle is 0* and the work piece is placed parallel to the Xaxis. Further when it is desired to perform machining in the direction parallel to the Yaxis, it can be performed by reversing the Uside and the Vside by turning 90_. B : START POINT Specify the starting position of the machining. Select a number from 1) to 4). The machining starts at the front right hand side corner 4) unless there is a special specification. YC : APPROACH Input the gap between the tool edge in the cutting feed start point and the work. It is assumed to be 5 mm if there is no input.
164
B63294EN/02
YD : ESCAPE
Input the gap between the tool edge and the workpiece when the tool moves away from the work. It is assumed to be 5 mm if there is no input. 3) Explanation of movements a) When the operation (B) is a rough cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse along the Zaxis up to the point equal to (point Z (Z) + Machining allowance (V)) Pitch (J) 3. Cutting feed from the starting point on (U direction). (The escape clearance (YD) is considered) 4. Rise along the Zaxis in rapid traverse mode by escape clearance (K) in the Z direction + Pitch (J) 5. Rapid traverse along the XY axes to the point determined by taking into consideration at the starting point the cutting width (E). 6. Descent along the Zaxis in rapid traverse mode by an amount equal to the the escape clearance (K) in the Z direction + Pitch (J). 7. 3. 6. is repeated. 8. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to the point corresponding to the work surface + amount in the Z direction (K). 9. Repeat steps 1. to 8. advancing in the Z direction, pitch by pitch, up to the point equal to point Z (Z) + Finishing allowance (Y). 10. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z. NOTE Refer to 2.3.1 3) for the processing of the remainder. b) When the machining operation (B) is a finish cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point Z (Z). 3. Cutting feed to the other side of the starting point (U direction). (The clearance (YD) is considered) 4. Rise along the Zaxis in rapid traverse mode by an amount equal to the the (K) in the Z direction + Finishing allowance (Y) 5. Rapid traverse along the XY axes back to the point determined by considering the cutting width (E) at the start point. 6. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the point Z (Z). 7. 3. 6. is repeated. 8. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z.
165
B63294EN/02
5. 6. 3. 4. 1. 2. 1. 4. 5.
3.
6.
2.
166
B63294EN/02 2.5.3 Square bidir (ZF03)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL (1)
V (3)
PAGE :01/ EDITING

U YD (2)
(X,Y)
(4)
YC
:SQUARE BIDIR : W= * : X= : Y= : U=
V LENGTH ANGEL START POINT APPROACH
: V= : A= : B= :YC=
ESCAPE 0. (4) 5.
:YD=
5.

2 WORK CO 1 2)
3 WORK CO 2 3)
4 WORK CO 3 4)
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when a side of the quadrangle is machined using bidirectional cutting. 2) Input item explanation Refer to 2.5.2 2). 3) Explanation of movements a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse along the Zaxis up to (point Z (Z) + machining allowance (V)) pitch (J) 3. Cutting feed to the other side of the starting point (U direction). (the escape amount (YD) is considered) 4. Rapid traverse in the V direction a distance equal to the move distance in the V direction according to the cutting width (E) 5. Cutting feed at the start point side (U direction). (The escape clearance (YD) is considered) 6. Rapid traverse in V direction by the move distance in V direction according to the cutting width (E) 7. 3. 6. is repeated. 8. Rapid traverse along the Zaxis up to the present work surface + amount in Z direction (K). 9. Repeat steps 1. to 8. advancing in the Z direction, pitch by pitch up to point Z (Z) + finishing allowance (Y). 10. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z. NOTE Refer to 2.5.1 3) for the machining of the remainder. b) When the machining operation (B) is finish cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (The clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse along the Zaxis to the Z point coordinates (Z) 3. Cutting feed to the other side of the starting point (U direction) (The clearance (YD) is considered) 4. Rapid traverse in the V direction a distance equal to the move distance in the V direction according to the cutting width (E) 5. Cutting feed to the start point side (U direction). (The escape clearance (YD) is considered) 6. Rapid traverse in the V direction a distance equal to the move distance in the V direction according to the cutting width (E)
167

7. 3. 6. is repeated. 8. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z.
B63294EN/02
4. 1. 3. 2.
1.
3.
4.
2.
6.
5.
5.
6.
168
B63294EN/02 2.5.4 Circle unidir (ZF04)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL
PAGE :01/ EDITING
YD (2) R (X,Y)
(1)
(3) YC
(4)
FACING COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD RADIUS
:CIRCLE UNIDIR : W= * : X= : Y= : R=
START POINT : B= APPROACH :YC= ESCAPE :YD=
(4) 5. 5.
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE CIRCULAR SURFACE.

2 WORK CO 1 2)
3 WORK CO 2 3)
4 WORK CO 3 4)
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when the circular surface is machined by unidirectional cutting. 2) Input item explanation X Y R : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinates of the center of the circular surface. Be sure to input. : RADIUS Input the radius of the circular surface. Be sure to input. Refer to 2.5.2 2) for other input items. 3) Explanation of movements The unidirectional cutting of a circular surface, is the same as the unidirectional quadrangular surface facing (ZF02).
169
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.5.5 Circle bidir (ZF05)

(1) R (3) (X,Y) (4) YC
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING
YD (2)
:CIRCLE BIDIR : W= * : X= : Y= : R=
START POINT : B= APPROACH :YC= ESCAPE :YD=
(4) 5. 5.

1 W B COORDINATE START POINT DESIGNATION UNUSED 1)
2 WORK CO 1 2)
3 WORK CO 2 3)
4 WORK CO 3 4)
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when the circular surface is machined by bidirectional cutting. 2) Input item explanation Refer to 2.5.4 2). 3) Explanation of movement Bidirectional cutting of a circular surface is the same as the bidirectional quadrangular surface facing (ZF03).
170
B63294EN/02 2.5.6 Square (Ring) (ZF06)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

U
(1)
(2)
(X,Y) (3) YD (4) YC A FACING COORDINATES X COORD Y COORD U LENGTH :SQUARE FRING : W= * : X= : Y= : U=
V LENGTH : USIDE WIDTH : VSIDE WIDTH : ANGEL :
V= I= J= A=
START POINT : B= APPROACH :YC= ESCAPE :YD= 0.
(4) 5. 1.

2 WORK CO 1 2)
3 WORK CO 2 3)
4 WORK CO 3 4)
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select only when an edge of the quadrangular surface is machined. This menu is effective when machining the connecting surface of a workpiece whose center is cylindrical. 2) Input item explanation I J : USIDE WIDTH Input the width of the frame corresponding to side U. Be sure to input. : VSIDE WIDTH Input the width of the frame corresponding to side V. Be sure to input. YD : ESCAPE Input the gap between the inside of the frame and the center of the tool. It is assumed to be 1 mm unless input. Refer to 2.5.2 2) for other input items. 3) Operation explanation a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse up to (Z point coordinate (Z) + Machining allowance (V)) pitch (J) 3. Facing of the quadrangular surface (Ring). Cut spirally and finally move in cutting feed mode an amount equal to the escape clearance. 4. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to to the present work surface + amount in Z direction (K). 5. Repeat steps 1. to 4. advancing in the Z direction, pitch by pitch, up to the point equal to point Z (Z) + machining allowance (V). 6. Z axis up to the common safety point point Z in rapid traverse. b) When the machining operation (B) is a finish cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse up to point Z (Z). 3. Facing of the quadrangular surface (Ring). Cut spirally and finally move in cutting feed mode an amount equal to the escape clearance. 4. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z.
171
B63294EN/02
3. 1. 2.
1.
3.
2.
172
B63294EN/02 2.5.7 Circular surface (Ring) (ZF07)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O1000
PAGE :01/ EDITING
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING (1) FACING PREP. FACE MILL
R I (X,Y) YC (3) YD
(2)
(4)
:CIRCLE DRING : W= * : X= : Y= : R=
RING WIDTH START POINT APPROACH ESCAPE
: I= : B= :YC= :YD=
(4) 5. 1.

2 WORK CO 1 2)
3 WORK CO 2 3)
4 WORK CO 3 4)
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select only when a edge of the circular surface is machined. This menu is effective when machining such as facing of the joint about the workpiece whose midair is cylindrical. 2) Input item explanation I : RING WIDTH Input the width of the ring. YD : ESCAPE Input the gap between the inner frame of the workpiece and the center coordinates of the tool at the point where cutting ends. It is assumed to be 1 mm unless input. Refer to 2.5.2 2) for other input items. 3) Explanation of movements Except for the shape of the circular surface (Ring), the machining movements are the same as the machining movements for a quadrangular surface (Ring) (ZF06).
2.5.8 Copy (Random) (ZF08)

Refer to 3.3.10 Hole Pattern Copy (Random) (ZL09)
2.5.9 Copy (Pattern) (ZF09)

Refer to 3.3.11 Hole Pattern Copy (Pattern) (ZL10)
173
B63294EN/02
2.6 Side Cutting

PROGRAM O1000 01 SQUARE OSIDE PAGE :01/ EDITING 03 CIRCLE OSIDE
02 SQUARE ISIDE
04 CIRCLE ISIDE
05 TRACK OSIDE
06 TRACK ISIDE
07 ONE SIDE
08 CONTOR PREP. TO BE CONTINUE NEXT PAGE.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
PROGRAM O1000 09 COPY RANDOM
PAGE :01/ EDITING 10 COPY PATTRN
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< 09 10 GUIDAN PROCES + CE END
If you press the soft key SIDE CUTTING, a more detailed menu on side cutting will appear on the screen. The rest of the operation is identical to facing. Press SIDE CUTTING on the machining menu selection screen to display the detailed menu selection screen regarding side cutting. This menu screen includes menus for inputting tool data (side preparation and contour preparation) and menus for inputting side shape, etc. Select SIDE PREPARATION, SIDE PREPARE or CONTOUR PREPARE at the beginning of side cutting, and then select a menu for inputting a figure, etc. 1) SIDE PREPARATION When you perform side machining for side shape of (2) through (8), select this menu first. Input position data in Z direction and tool data. 2) SQUARE OUTSIDE This menu is selected when machining of square outside is performed. 3) SQUARE INSIDE This menu is selected when machining of square inside is performed. 4) CIRCLE OUTSIDE This menu is selected when machining of square outside is performed. 5) CIRCLE INSIDE This menu is selected when machining of circle inside is performed. 6) TRACK OUTSIDE This menu is selected when machining of track shape outside is performed.
174
B63294EN/02
7) TRACK INSIDE
This menu is selected when machining of track shape inside is performed. 8) ONE SIDE This menu is selected when machining of only one side is performed. 9) CONTOUR PREPARE If you perform side cutting of an arbitrary shape using contour function, select this menu first. Input position data in Z direction and tool data required for side facing. When data input is completed, Contour menu selection screen appears automatically. For contour function, refer to Paragraph 2.11. 10)COPY RANDOM This is a menu for multipiece machining of side machining shape defined by (2) through (8) on arbitrary positions. 11) COPY PATTERN This is a menu for multiple machining of side machining shape defined by (2) through (8) on the basis of a fixed shift amount in X and Y directions.
175
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.6.1 Side preparation (ZS01)

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS4 T C J V Y I U X A Z R K
B63294EN/02
SIDE CUTING GROUP COPY R POINT Z POINT SIDE REMOV
:SIDE PREP. :YB= UNUSED : R= : Z= : U=
SIDE PITCH : SIDE FINISH : BOTTOM REMOV : BOTTOM PITCH :
I= X= V= J=
BOTTOM FINSH : 0. FINISH PITCH : CHAMFER REMV : TAPER ANGEL :
Y= K= * C= A=
0. 0. 0.

O0031(MANUAL2)
TOOL ID NO. PRO TOOL NAME INI CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS2 T= 65. Q= END MILL PROCESS B=BOTTOM FIN H OFFSET NO. H= 165. D OFFSET NO. D= 65. COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 SPINDL SPEED S= 1272. FEED RATE F= 229. Z CUT SPEED YE= 114.
PAGE :01/ CREATING

PROCESS1 66. 66 END MILL ROUGHING 166. 66. COOLNT M7 2120. 572. 286.
SIDE CUTTING :SIDE P TOOL ID NO. : T=
65.

1 YB GROUP COPY B M PROCESS COOLANT UNUSED ROUGHI NG COOLNT M7
2 AGROUP BOTTOM FINISH COOLNT M8
3 BGROUP SIDE FINISH OFF M9
4 CGROUP CHAMFE RING
1) Screen explanation This screen is selected to start the side cutting. Input the data of the position in the Z direction and the data of the tool. The pretool and the operation are automatically decided by TOOL AUTO. There are four machining processes, that is, rough cutting, bottom finish cutting, side finish cutting, and chamfering. The max. number of tools used is 4. 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP COPY When Group Copy is selected, this menu is used to designate whether its group copy is made valid or not. Group Copy is not used if there is no setting. R Z : R POINT Input the Z coordinate of the cutting feed starting point for machining. Be sure to input. : Z POINT Input the Z coordinate of the final machined surface. Be sure to input.
176
B63294EN/02
U I : SIDE REMOVAL
Input the side machining allowance. Be sure to input. : SIDE PITCH Input the side machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting. Cut dividing the machining allow ance (UX) in the rough cutting by the pitch (I) into several passes. The machining allowance (UX) is cut in one pass if not input. X : SIDE FINISH Input the machining allowance of the side finish cutting. The side finish cutting operation is not se lected by TOOL AUTO unless input, therefore, the side finish cutting operation is not done. V J : BOTTOM REMOVAL Input the machining allowance in the Z direction of the cutting surface. Be sure to input. : BOTTOM PITCH Input the machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting in the Z direction. Cut dividing the ma chining allowance (VY) of the rough cutting by the pitch (J) into several passes. The machining allowance (VY) is cut in one pass if not input. Y : BOTTOM FINISH Input the machining allowance of the bottom finish cutting operation. The process of the bottom finish cutting is not selected by TOOL AUTO unless input, therefore, the bottom finish cutting operation is not done. K : FINISH PITCH Input the pitch in the Z direction in the side finish cutting. If it is not input, the side finishing allowance is cut in one pass at the time of side finish cutting. C : CHAMFER REMV Input the amount of chamfering. Otherwise, the machining operation process is not selected by TOOL AUTO and the chamfering is not done. Therefore, chamfering is not done. A : TAPER ANGLE If taper angle is input, taper cutting is possible. If taper cutting is not required, it is not necessary to input the taper angle. T : TOOL ID NO. Input the tool ID number of the final tool used. When inputting, refer to the tool file for the corresponding tool by pressing the TOOL DRCTRY soft key. Be sure to input. Q : TOOL NAME The tool name corresponding to the value input to Tool ID No. (T) is read out of the tool file, and displayed. B : PROCESS There are four machining processes; Roughing, Bottom finishing, Side finishing and Chamfering. H D : H OFFSET NO. : D OFFSET NO. It is the offset number of the tool used. It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is displayed reading the offset numbers which corresponds to the value assigned to a tool ID number, (T) from a tool file. M : COOLANT It is the coolant selected by this machining menu. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. Coolant set by the initial setting menu is displayed. After automatic setting, the coolant can be changed as needed. S : SPINDLE SPEED It is the speed of the tool spindle. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated from the cutting condition file data based on the work material, the tool, and the tool diameter etc. After automatic setting, the spindle speed rpm can be changed as needed.
177

F : FEED RATE
B63294EN/02
It is the tool feed rate. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated from the spindle speed (S) and the cutting condition file data. After automatic setting, the feed rate can be changed as needed. YE : Z CUT SPEED It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is the cutting feed rate in Z direction from point R (R). If necessary it can be modified after the automatic decision. 3) Explanation of movements Side cutting is divided into the following four operations (B). 1. Rough cutting 2. Bottom finish cutting 3. Side finish cutting 4. Chamfering Each machining operation can be omitted by setting the input items, but the order of operation cannot be changed. The machining movements differ, depending on whether or not the taper angle is input. a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation (Without taper cutting).
U I X
V 3 4
The number shows the machining sequence
Before roughing
After roughing
1. The onepass cutting amount is cut by the side pitch (I) in XY direction and bottom pitch (J) in Z direction. 2. When advancing in XY direction is completed, further advance in the Z direction by the bottom pitch (J) and continue the same operation. 3. When side pitch (I) and bottom pitch (J) are not entered, the respective machining allowance is cut in one pass. NOTE Machining of the remaining machining allowance Advancing in the XY and Z directions the remainder of the machining allowance machined as follows. Example Input as follows: U : SIDE REMOVAL = 24.0 I : SIDE PITCH = 10.0 Y : SIDE FINISH = 2.0
178
B63294EN/02

In this case, the roughing allowance is 22 mm (= 24 2). It will be cut in three passes when cutting with a pitch of 10 mm and a smaller final pitch. 1st pass : 10.0 mm 2nd pass : 10.0 mm 3rd pass : 2.0 mm This way, when the remaining machining allowance during rough cutting is smaller than the pitch, cutting can be completed in two passes as follows: 1st pass : 10.0 mm 2nd pass : 12.0 mm The allowable amount in which the last odd amount is cut together at the during previous pass is set in the cutting conditions file (No. 475) in advance. Alter this value if necessary. b) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom finish cutting operation (Without taper cutting).
U I X
1 Y
Before bottom finishing
After bottom finishing
1. Onetime cutting amount is cut by the side pitch (I) in XY direction and bottom machining allowance (Y) in Z direction. 2. Cut along the XY plane. 3. Cutting along the XY plane is done in one pass unless the side cutting pitch (I) is input. 4. The bottom finish cutting operation is done cutting an amount equal to zero when the bottom finish cutting allowance (Y) is 0. 5. The machining of the remaining machining allowance in the XY direction is the same in the rough cutting operation.
179
B63294EN/02
c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting operation (Without tapering).
Before side finishing
After side finishing
1. The amount of cutting in the Z direction in one path is equal to the finishing pitch (K). If the finishing pitch is not input, infeed machining is not performed in the X and Y directions, as in the case of the bottom pitch (J). 2. If the side finishing allowance (X) is not input, or it is set to 0, side finish cutting is not performed. d) When the machining operation (B) is a chamfering operation (Without taper cutting).
Before chamfering
After chamfering
The chamfer (C) is cut in one pass. Chamfering is not done unless the chamfer dimension (C) is input.
180
B63294EN/02
The path of the chamfering tool is calculated as follows.
: Samll diameter: For chamfering tool : Angle: Tool nose angle of a chamfering tool : 3 mm fixed. Parameter No. 9214 (TEA) can also be used to compensate the toolnose position in the tool file. In this case, however, the toolnose position compensation must have already been set in the tool file. x= /2 + tan (/2) y= + C tan (/2)
(Tapering) When tapering, input the taper angle (A). The range of the taper angle is 0_ 90_. Finishing pitch (K) is entered, making it possible to extremely reduce the pitch in Z direction during finishing for smooth finishing surface. It is possible to select either Machining Upper or Lower Surface for the reference surface in XY direction according to the symbol of bottom machining allowance (V). When the bottom surface machining allowance V y 0, the cutting bottom surface (Z) is a reference surface. When the bottom surface machining allowance (V) < 0, the cutting upper surface (ZV) is a reference surface.
181

e) When the machining operation (B) is roughing (tapering)
B63294EN/02
U U I X
V 4 5
Before roughing
After roughing
The machining allowances in the XY plane of the upper surface and of the base have different tapering. Normally, the bottom surface (U) is assumed to be a machining allowance, but the machining allowance (U) on the upper surface may be assumed to be a reference, depending on the drawing. In this case, the bottom machining allowance (V) is input with a negative value. The quantity of advance steps along the XY plane when taper cutting differs from side cutting. The cutting depth of one pass, the cutting order, etc. is similar if there is no tapering.
182
B63294EN/02

f) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom surface finishing (tapering) operation.
U U I X
1 Y
Before bottom surface finishing
After bottom surface finishing
It is the same if there is no tapering. g) When the machining operation (B) is a side surface finishing (tapering) operation.
C X K
Before side finishing
After side finishing
It is the same if there is no tapering.
183

h) When the machining process (B) is chamfering (tapering)
B63294EN/02
Before chamfering It is the same if there is no tapering. The path of the chamfering tool is shown below.
After chamfering
x :Samll diameter: For chamfering tool :Angle: Tool nose angle of a chamfering tool :3 mm fixed C x= /2 + tan (/2) + tan (/2) tan (A) C tan (A) y= + tan (/2) tan (A) V tan (A)
184
B63294EN/02 2.6.2 Square outside (ZS02)

PROGRAM O1000
PAGE :01/ EDITING
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 SIDE CUTING SIDE PREP. END MILL
R V (X,Y)
SIDE CUTING COORDINATES WAY OF CUTN X COORD Y COORD
:SQUARE OSIDE : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
U LENGTH V LENGTH CORNERRAD. ANGEL
: : : :
U= V= R= A=
APPROACH
:YC =
5.
0.

1 W YA YJ B COORDINATE COPY PATH Corner type Start point UNUSED UNIDI REC. CORNER R (1)
2 WORK CO 1 BIDIREC. CORNER L (2)
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining an outer side of a quadrangle. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the workpiece and corner radius R can be specified. 2) Input item explanation W : COORDINATES Specify when you alter a work coordinate system. It is not necessary to input unless a work coordinate system specified by the initial setting is altered. While programming, a work coordinate system can not be altered if All Copy and Group Copy have been selected. Do not input in this case. Specify UNUSED when you specify work coordinate setting G92 using the initial setting. YA : WAY OF CUTN Specify DOWN CUT or UP CUT. The DOWN CUT movement is considered if there is no specification.
185

a) Down cut Rotation of the cutting tool in the forward direction.
B63294EN/02
Cutting direction

b) Up cut Rotation of the cutting tool in the reverse direction. Cutting direction

X Y U V YJ R : X COORD : Y COORD Coordinate of the center of the quadrangle is input. Be sure to input. : U LENGTH Input the horizontal length of the quadrangle. Be sure to input. : V LENGTH Input the vertical length of the quadrangle. Be sure to input. : Corner type Arcs and chamfers can be specified for all corners. If none is specified, [CORNER R] is assumed. : CORNER R/C. Specify the radius of the circle or the dimension of the chamfer. If [CORNER R] is specified for Corner type, the tool moves as described below.
186
B63294EN/02
a) If there is no input.
Corner edging
b) If 0 is input.
Corner smoothing
c) If a positive value is input.
Corner R which uses the input value as radius is cut.
: ANGLE Input the center (X and Y) of the quadrangle when the workpiece is inclined with respect to the center on the X axis. Input the angle between side U and the X axis. If not input; it is assumed to be 0_ and the work is put parallel to the X axis.
YC : APPROACH Input gap between the work piece edge and the tool edge at the rough cutting starting point and before machining. It is assumed to be 5 mm unless it is input. YB : APPROACH/ESCAPE The arc radius circle for the approach and escape in side finish cutting and chamfering can be specified. It is automatically calculated if it is not input. B : MACHINING START POINT Either [(1)] or [(2)] can be specified as the machining start point.
187

3) Explanation of movements a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation.
B63294EN/02
1. Rapid traverse up to the start point (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse along Zaxis up to point R 3. Descent along the lower Zaxis in cutting feed mode (YE) by the bottom pitch (J) 4. Cutting movement toward the center by the side pitch (I) 5. Side cutting with the cutting width of the side pitch (I) 6. 4. 5. are repeated to the maximum allowance in the XY direction (UX) in the rough cutting. If the last side advance amount is less than the allowable amount (%) of cutting conditions file No. 475, the amount is added to the side pitch (I) for cutting in one pass. (Refer to 2.6.1 3)) 7. Moves away 3 mm on axis Z in cutting feed mode The amount of this escape can be set for parameter No.9108. 9108 Approach/escape clearance amount Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
If this parameter is 0, approach and escape is performed by 3mm. 8. Rapid traverse back to the start point (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 9. 3. 8. are repeated to the maximum allowance in the Z direction (V Y) in the rough cutting. If the last machining allowance is less than the allowable amount (%) of cutting conditions file No. 474, the amount is added to the bottom pitch (J) for cutting at a time. (Refer to 2.6.1 3)) 10. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z (Square outside cutting, rough cutting, and cutting operation diagram)
1. 2.
4.
3.
6.
7.
8.
188
B63294EN/02

b) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom finish cutting. 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point. (The approach clearance (YC) is considered) 2. Zaxis rapid traverse up to point Z coordinate (Z) + bottom finishing allowance (Y) + 3 mm (Refer to the parameter No. 9108.) 3. Cutting feed up to point Z coordinate (Z) 4. Cut toward the center by the side pitch (I) 5. Side cutting with the specified cutting width and side pitch (I). 6. 4. 5. are repeated to the maximum allowance in the XY direction (UX) when rough cutting. If the last side advance amount is less than the allowable amount (%) of cutting conditions file No. 475, the amount is added to the side pitch (I) for cutting in one pass. (Refer to 2.6.1 3)) 7. Moves away 3 mm on axes X, Y, and Z in the cutting feed mode. (Refer to the parameter No. 9108.) 8. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z (The squre outside cutting, bottom finish cutting, and cutting operation diagram.)
1. 2. 4.
3.
6.
7.
8.
c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting. 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to a point 3 mm from point Z (Z). (Refer to the parameter No. 9108.) 3. Descent along the Zaxis in cutting feed mode (YE) by the workpiece surface finishing pitch (K) * n. 4. Cut into the workpiece following a circular path 5. Cutting of the side finish allowance (X) 189

6. Moves away from the workpiece following a circular path after cutting
B63294EN/02
7. Moves away 3 mm on axis Z in cutting feed mode. (Refer to the parameter No. 9108.) 8. 3. 7. are repeated up to point Z. If the last machining allowance is less than the odd allowable amount (%) of cutting conditions file No. 474, the amount is added to the finishing pitch (K) for cutting in one pass. (Refer to 2.6.1 3)) 9. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z (Square outside cutting, side finish cutting and cutting operation diagram)
1. 2.
5. 4. 3.
6.
NOTE
The radius of the path when approaching or moving away from the work during side finish cutting is calculated as follows. Length in the V direction (V) Tool diameters (D) Approaching/ Length in the V direction (V) tool diameters (d) Escape radius (r) = 4 In circle side and track side machining, calculation is started from 2 x radius (R) instead of the length in the direction (V).
190
B63294EN/02
r d
V d
d) When the machining operation (B) is a chamfering. 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to the machining point + 3 mm (Refer to the parameter No. 9108.) 3. Descent along the Z axis to the machining point in the cutting feed 4. Cut into the workpiece following a circular path 5. Cutting of the chamfer (C) 6. Moves away from the workpiece following a circular path after cutting 7. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z
191

(Square outside cutting, chamfering, and cutting operation diagram.)
B63294EN/02
5.
4.
5.
6.
192
B63294EN/02 2.6.3 Square inside (ZS03)

PROGRAM O1000
PAGE :01/ EDITING
R V (X,Y)
:SQUARE ISIDE : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
U LENGTH V LENGTH CORNERRAD. ANGEL
: : : :
U= V= R= A=
APPROACH
:YC =
5.
0.

1 W YA B COORDINATE COPY PATH START POINT UNUSED DOWN CUT (1)
2 WORK CO 1 UPPER CUT (2)
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining an inner side of a quadrangle. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the workpiece and corner radius R can be specified. 2) Input item explanation R : CORNERRAD Input the radius when a corner radius is required. A corner radius which is smaller than the tool diameter d), cannot be done by square inside cutting machining. a) At R > d
193

b) At R=d
B63294EN/02
c) At R < d These is an error message because machining is not possible. U V : U length : V length Input the horizontal and vertical length of the quadrangle respectively. Be sure that U y V. At that time, input the length with angle (A) = 90. For other input items, refer to 2.6.2 2). 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements in this operation are similar to those of the quadrangle outerside cutting (ZS02).
194
B63294EN/02 2.6.4 Circle outside cutting (ZS04)

PROGRAM O1000
PAGE :01/ EDITING
R
(X,Y)
:CIRCLE OSIDE : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
RADIUS APPROACH
: R= :YC=
5.
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE CIRCULAR.

1 W YA B COORDINATE WAY OF CUTN START POINT UNUSED DOWN C UT (1)
2 WORK CO 1 UP CUT (2)
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining the outerside of a circle. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. 2) Input item explanation X Y R : X COORD : Y COORD Input the circle center coordinates. Be sure to input. : RADIUS Input the circle radius. Be sure to input. For other input items, refer to 2.6.2 2). 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements on this operation are similar to those of the quadrangle outerside cutting (ZS02).
195
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.6.5 Circle inside (ZS05)

PROGRAM O1000 PAGE :01/ EDITING
B63294EN/02
(X,Y)
:CIRCLE ISIDE : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
RADIUS APPROACH
: R= :YC=
5.

3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining the inside of a circle. It is possible select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. 2) Input item explanation Refer to 2.6.4 2). 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements in this operation are similar to those of the quadrangle outerside cutting square (ZS02).
196
B63294EN/02 2.6.6 Track outside (ZS06)

PROGRAM O1000
PAGE :01/ EDITING
R U (X,Y)
:TRACK OSIDE : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
DISTANCE RADIUS ANGEL APPROACH
: U= : R= : A= :YC=
0. 5.
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE ARC,OF THE LEFT.

3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining the outer side of racetrack shape. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the workpiece can be specified. 2) Input item explanation X Y R U : X COORD : Y COORD Input the center coordinates of the left arc. Be sure to input. : RADIUS Input the circle radius. Be sure to input. : DISTANCE Input the distance between the centers of the two arcs. Be sure to input. For other input items, refer to 2.6.2 2). 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements in each operation is similar to the quadrangle outerside cutting outside (ZS02).
197
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.6.7 Track inside (ZS07)

PROGRAM O1000 PAGE :01/ EDITING
B63294EN/02
R U (X,Y)
:TRACK ISIDE : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
DISTANCE RADIUS ANGEL APPROACH
: U= : R= : A= :YC=
0. 5.
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE ARC,OF THE LEFT.

3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining the inside of a race track shape. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the workpiece can be specified. 2) Input item explanation Refer to 2.6.6 2). 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements in this operation are similar to those of the quadrangle outerside cutting (ZS02).
198
B63294EN/02 2.6.8 One side (ZS08)

EDITING NO. 001 002 003 004 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CYCLE AUXILIARY SIDE CUTING AUXILIARY POCKET/GROOV O2600(NODA1) PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING SIDE PREP. END MILL ALL CP PATTRN CONTOR POCKETEND MILL POCKET WALL PREP START POINT 4 LINE LINE 3 LINE LINE LINE POCKET WALL END PROCESS END PROGRAM END
EDIT
16:39:50
U 2 A 1 (X, Y) YC YD
005 AUXILIARY
:ONE SIDE : W= * U LENGTH :YA= 1 DOWN CUT ANGEL : X= APPROACH : Y= ESCAPE
: U= : A= :YC= :YD=
0. 0. 5.
INPUT X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE CUTTING SURFACE AFTER CUTTING.

3 UP 4 DOWN < 1 DOWN 2 UP CUT CUT CUT CUT GUIDAN INPUT CE END
1 W YA COORDINATE WAY OF CUTN UNUSED 1 DOWN CUT
2 WORK CO 1 2 UP CUT
3 WORK CO 2 3 UP CUT
4 WORK CO 3 4 DOWN CUT
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining only one side. It is possible to the select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the workpiece can be specified. 2) Input item explanation X Y U : X coordinates : Y coordinates Input the center coordinates of the cutting surface after cutting. Be sure to input. : Length of U side Input the length of the workpiece in the cutting surface. Be sure to input. YC : APPROACH/ESCAPE YD : ESCAPE/APPROACH It is the gap between the tool edge in the machining start point or the tool edge when the tool moves away from the workpiece after cutting and the workpiece edge. It will be 5 mm unless it is input. Refer to 2.6.2 2) for other input items. 3) Explanation of movements a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point. (The approach or escape clearance (YC/YD) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to point R 3. Rapid traverse toward one side by side pitch (I) 4. Descent along the Z axis in cutting feed mode (YE) by bottom pitch (J) 5. Side cutting with the cutting width and the side pitch (I) 6. Moves away from the workpiece after cutting (The escape or approach clearance (YD/YC) is considered) 7. Moves away by Z point coordinate (Z) + bottom allowance (V) + 3 mm along the Z axis with rapid traverse. (Refer to parameter No. 9108.) 8. Rapid traverse back to the cutting start point
199
B63294EN/02
9. 3. 8. are repeated until reaching the allowance in the XY direction (U X) when rough cutting. If the last side cutting width is less than the allowable amount (%) of cutting conditions file No. 475, it is added to the previous side pitch (I) for cutting in one pass. (Refer to 2.6.1 3)) 10. Rapid traverse back to the start point (One side cutting, rough cutting, and cutting operation diagram)
(1) (2)
(3)
(4) YC
(7)
(8)
(6) YD YC
b) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom finish cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. (The approach or escape amount (YC/YD) is considered) 2. Rapid traverse toward one side by side pitch (I) 3. Rapid traverse Z axis up to point Z (Z). 4. The side is cut wiht a specified cutting width and pitch (I). 5. Rapid traverse along the Zaxis up to point Z (Z) + bottom finishing allowance (V) +3 mm (Refer to the parameter No. 9108.) 6. Rapid traverse back to the cutting starting point 7. 3. 6. is repeated until reaching the allowance in the XY plane (U X). The machining of the last add pitch is the same as during rough cutting a) above. 8. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z 200
B63294EN/02

c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point (The approach or escape clearance (YC/YD) is considered) 2. Descent along the Zaxis with rapid traverse by the workpiece surface finishing pitch (K) * n. 3. The side is cut with a specified cutting width and side finish allowance (X). 4. Moves away 3 mm on axis Z in cutting feed mode. (Refer to parameter No. 9108.) 5. Rapid traverse back to the cutting start point 6. 2. 5. is repeated up to the point Z coordinates. The machining of the last odd pitch is the same as during rough cutting a) above. 7. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z d) When the machining operation (B) is a chamfering operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. (The approach or escape clearance (YC/YD) is considered) 2. Descent along the Z axis to the machining point in cutting feed mode. 3. Cutting of chamfer (C). 4. Moves away by Z point coordinate (Z) + bottom allowance (V) + 3 mm along the Z axis with rapid traverse. (Refer to parameter No. 9108.) 5. Rise along the Z axis up to the common safety point Z
201
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.6.9 Contour prepare (ZS09)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING PAGE :01/ EDITNG
MAX NUM.OF TOOLS4 T C J V Y Z I U X A R K
B63294EN/02
SIDE CUTING GROUP COPY R POINT Z POINT SIDE REMOV
:CONTOR PREP. :YB= UNUSED : R= : Z= : U=
SIDE PITCH : SIDE FINISH : BOTTOM REMOV : BOTTOM PITCH :
I= X= V= J=
BOTTOM FINSH : 0. FINISH PITCH : CHAMFER REMV : TAPER ANGEL :
Y= K= * C= A=
0. 0. 0.

O0031(MANUAL2)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

PROCESS1 65. END MILL ROUGHING 165. 65. COOLNT M7 1272. 229.
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS3 PROCESS2 66. T= 66. Q= END MILL END MILL PROCESS B=SIDE FINSH BOTTOM FIN H OFFSET NO. H= 166. 166. D OFFSET NO. D= 66. 66. COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 SPINDL SPEED S= 2120. 2120. FEED RATE F= 572. 572.
POKET/GROOV GROUP COPY R POINT Z POINT REMOVAL
:POCKET :YB= : R= : Z= : V=
UNUSED 5. 10. 10.
PITCH : K= BOTTOM FINSH : Y= SIDE FINISH : X= CHAMFER REMV :
* 1. 1. 0.
TOOL ID NO. : T=
65.

1 YB GROUP COPY W B M COORDINATE PROCESS COOLANT UNUSED UNUSED ROUGHI NG COOLANT M7
2 AGROUP WORK CO 1 BOTTOM FINISH COOLANT M8
3 BGROUP WORK CO 2 SIDE FINISH OFF M9
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3 CHAMFE RING
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation When side cutting of an arbitrary shape is done using the contour function, this menu is selected at the beginning. (Side preparation is not selected when the contour function is used) Input the position data in the Z direction and the tool data, which are necessary for the contour program. A pretool and the process are automatically decided by TOOL AUTO. The machining process includes a maximum of 4 processes, Roughing, Bottom finishing, Side finishing and Chamfering. Taper cutting is possible. 2) Input item explanation W : COORDINATES Specify these when you alter a work coordinate system. Input is not necessary unless the work coordinates specified by the initial set are altered. When programming, the work coordinate system cannot be altered when All Copy and Group Copy are selected. Do not input anything in this case. Specify UNUSED when you specify G92 using the initial setting. 202
B63294EN/02
For other input items, refer to 2.6.1 2). 3) Explanation of movements Refer to 2.6.1 3).
2.6.10 Copy (Random) (ZS10)

Refer to Copy (Random) (ZL09).
2.6.11 Copy (Pattern) (ZS11)

Refer to Copy (Pattern) (ZL10).
203
B63294EN/02
2.7 Pocketing
PROGRAM O1000 01 SQUARE POCKET PAGE :01/ EDITING 03 TRACK POCKET
02 CIRCLE POCKET
04 POLY. POCKET
05 POLYR POCKET
06 GROOVING
07 CONTOR POCKET
08 TO BE CONTINLE NEXT PAGE.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 GUIDAN PROCES + END CE
PROGRAM O1000 09 COPY RANDOM
PAGE :01/ EDITING 10 COPY PATTRN
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< 09 10 GUIDAN PROCES + CE END
Press POCKETING on the machining menu selection screen: the detailed menu selection screen for pocketing is displayed. This menu screen includes the screen (Pocket Prepare and Controur pocket prepare) when data regarding the tool is input and the screen where the figures of the machined surface are input. When beginning pocket machining, the pocket preparation screen is selected, then the screen inputting the shape, etc. is selected. Also, select the contour pocket beforehand when programming an arbitrary figure. 1) POCKETING PREP This menu is always selected first when pocketing shapes (2) to (7) are to be machined with pocketing. Input a position data in the Z direction and tool data. 2) SQUARE POCKET This menu is selected when pocket machining of square shapes is performed. 3) CIRCLE POCKET This menu is selected when pocket machining of circle shapes is performed. 4) TRACK POCKET This menu is selected when pocket machining of track shapes is performed. 5) POLYGONAL POCKET This menu is selected when pocket machining of arbitrary convex polygons is performed. Up to 8 polygons can be specified. 6) POLYGONAL POKTR This menu is selected when pocket machining of arbitrary convex polygons with corner R at each vertex.
204
B63294EN/02
7) GROOVING
This menu is selected when machining of linear grooves is performed. 8) CONTOUR POCKEING This menu is selected when pocket machining of arbitrary figures is performed. 9) CONTOUR GROOVING This menu is selected when grooving of arbitrary figures is performed. 10)COPY RANDOM This is a menu for multiple machining of pocketing shape defined by 2) through 7) on arbitrary positions. 11) COPY PATTERN This is a menu for multiple machining of pocketing shape defined by 2) through 7) on the basis of a fixed shift amount in the X and Y directions.
205
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.7.1 Pocketting prep. (ZP01)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING E*2D PAGE :01/ EDITING MAX NUM,OF TOOLS4 T
B63294EN/02
C K YF
V Y X Z
POCKETTING GROUP COPY R POINT Z POINT REMOVAL
:POCKETTING PREP. :YB= UNUSED PITCH : : R= BOTTOM FINSH : : Z= SIDE FINISH : : V= CHAMFER REMV :
K= Y= X= C=
TOOL ID NO. : T= 0. 0. 0.

O0031(MANUAL2)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

PROCESS1 65. END MILL ROUGHING 165. 65. COOLNT M7 1272. 229. 70. 114.
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS3 PROCESS2 66. T= 66. Q= END MILL END MILL PROCESS B=SIDE FINSH BOTTOM FIN H OFFSET NO. H= 166. 166. D OFFSET NO. D= 66. 66. COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 SPINDL SPEED S= 2120. 2120. FEED RATE F= 572. 572. CUT WIDTH(0/0)E= 70. 70. Z CUT SPEED YF= 286. 286.
UNUSED 5. 10. 10.
* 1. 1. 0.
TOOL ID NO. : T=
65.

1 YB GROUP COPY B M PROCESS COOLANT UNUSED ROUGHI NG COOLANT M7
2 AGROUP BOTTOM FINISH COOLANT M8
3 BGROUP SIDE FINISH OFF M9
4 CGROUP CHAMFE RING
HOLE HOLE MACHINING (PECK)
1) Screen explanation Select this screen to start pocket machining. Input the position data in the Z direction and the tool data. The pretool and the operation are automatically decided by TOOL AUTO. The max. number of tools used is 10. There are six machining processes, that is, rough cutting, bottom finish cutting, side finish cutting, chamfering, hole machining, and hole (peck). 2) Input item explanation YB : GROUP COPY When Group Copy is selected, this menu is used to designate whether its group copy is made valid. Group Copy is not used. if there is setting. R Z : R POINT Input the Z axis coordinates of the cutting feed start point when cutting. Be sure to input. : Z POINT Input the Z coordinate of the final machining surface. Be sure to input
206
B63294EN/02
V K : REMOVAL Input the depth of the pocket. Be sure to input. : PITCH
Input the machining allowance of one pass for rough cutting, in the Z direction. Cut dividing the machining allowance (V Y) of the rough cutting by the pitch (K) into several passes. The machining allowance (VY) in rough cutting is cut in one pass if not input. Y : BOTTOM FINISH Input the bottom machining allowance for bottom finish cutting. Bottom finish cutting is not done if not input. X : SIDE FINISH Input the side machining allowance for side finish cutting. Side finishing cutting is not done if not input. YA : FINISH PITCH Input the pitch in the Z direction in the side finish cutting. If it is not input, the side finishing allowance is cut in one pass. C T : CHAMFER REMV Input the chamfering amount. Chamfering is not done if not input. : TOOL ID NO. Input the tool ID number of the final tool to be used. Refer to the tool file the for the corresponding tool pushing the TOOL DRCTRY soft key. Be sure to input. Q : TOOL NAME The tool name corresponding to the value input to TOOL ID No. (T) is read out of the tool file and displayed. B : PROCESS There are six machining processes available, that is, Rough cutting, Bottom finish cutting, Side finish cutting, Chamfering, Hole machining, and Hole (peck). H : H OFFSET NO. It is the tool length offset number of the tool used. It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is displayed reading the offset number, which corresponds to the value assigned to tool ID number, (T) from a tool file. D : D OFS./DIA. It is the cutter compensation number of the tool used. For a hole tool, it is the nominal diameter of the tool used. It is decided automatically using the F.S.AUTO soft key. For the compensation number or hole tool corresponding to the value entered for TOOL ID NO. (T), the corresponding nominal diameter is read from the tool file and displayed. M : COOLANT It is the coolant selected by this machining menu. It is decided automatically using the soft key F.S. AUTO. The coolant set by the initial setting menu is displayed. After the automatic setting, the coolant can be changed as needed. S : SPINDLE SPEED It is the speed of the tool spindle. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated from the cutting condition file data based on the work material, the tool, and the tool diameter, etc. After the automatic setting, the spindle speed (rpm) can be changed as needed. F : FEED RATE It is the feed rate of the tool. It is decided automatically using the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is calculated from the spindle speed (S) and the cutting condition file data. After the automatic setting, the feed rate can be changed as needed. E : CUT WIDTH (%) It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. The actual cutting width is calculated from the tool diameter and the (%) of the cutting width. After the automatic setting, the cutting width can be changed as needed. 207

YF : Z CUT SPEED
B63294EN/02
It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S. AUTO soft key. It is the cutting feed rate in the Z direction from point R (R). It is calculated from the feed rate (F) and cutting condition file No. 476. YG : HOLE Z POINT It is the Z point coordinate assumed during hole machining. It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S.AUTO soft key. For machining processes other than hole machining, it need not be set. After the automatic setting, the hole Z point can be changed as needed. 3) Explanation of movements Pocket machining is separated into the following four operations (B). 1. Rough cutting 2. Bottom finish cutting 3. Side finish cutting 4. Chamfering 5. Hole machining 6. Hole (peck) Each machining operation can be omitted by setting the input items, but the order of operations cannot be changed. a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation.
Before rough cutting X C 1 2 3 K V Y Z R
After rough cutting
X C
R V Y Z
1. Machining is done considering the cutting amount of one pass, that is, the pitch (K). 2. When the cutting in one plane is completed, move further in the Z direction by the pitch (K) amount, and continue with the same operation. 3. The operation is repeated until reaching the machining allowance (V Y). 4. Machining allowance (V Y) is cut in one pass unless pitch (K) is input. NOTE Machining of the remainder Refer to 3.4.1 Facing Prepare (ZF01) (3)Note
208
B63294EN/02

b) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom finish cutting operation.
Before bottom finishing X C R V Y Z
After bottom finishing X C R V Z
1. Machine an amount according to the bottom finishing allowance (Y). 2. The bottom finish cutting is not done unless the bottom finish cutting allowance (Y) is input. The bottom finish cutting is done by cutting an amount equal to zero when the bottom finish cutting allowance (Y) is 0. c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting operation.
Before side finishing X C R V Z
After side finishing C R V Z
1. The amount of cutting in the Z direction in one pass is the finishing pitch (YA). If the finishing pitch is not input, cutting is performed in one pass. 2. The side finishing is done by cutting an amount equal to zero when the side finish cutting allowance (X) is 0. 3. This is repeated up to the Z point coordinate (Z).
209

d) When the machining operation (B) is a chamfering operation. Before chamfering
B63294EN/02
R V Z
After chamfering R V Z
1. The chamfer (C) is cue in cut in one pass. 2. For the method of calculating the path of the chamfering tool, refer Side Preparation (ZS01) (3) (d). e) When the machining operation (B) is a hole machining or hole (peck) operation. NOTE 1 Which of hole machining and hole (peck) is to be performed is decided automatically, as follows: Cutting condition file (No. 470) x Allowance (V) Bottom finish allowance (Y) No. 470: Maximum depth of cut for hole machining If the above expression is true, hole (peck) machining is assumed. Otherwise, hole machining is assumed. NOTE 2 For an explanation of the machining operation, refer to (3) Operation description of Drilling (ZH01) and Peck drilling (ZH02). NOTE 3 In canned cycles, the following G codes are output.
Hole machining Dwell performed G82 Dwell not performed G81 Retract > Point R Point Z G73 Hole (peck) Retract x Point R Point Z G83
NOTE 4 Set the following parameters: 9222 Depth of a single cut during hole (peck) machining Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
9223
Peck depth during hole (peck) machining (for a modal cycle) Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
210
B63294EN/02

In canned cycles, parameters Nos. 5114 and 5115 are referred to. 9224 Retract depth during hole (peck) machining Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
9225
Dwell during hole machining and hole (peck) machining Unit of setting: 1/1000
211
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.7.2 Square pocket (ZP02)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 POCKETTING O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING POCKETTING PREP.END MILL
V
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING

U R (1) (2) (X,Y)
POCKETTING COORDINATES WAY OF CUTN X COORD Y COORD
:SQUARE POCKET : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
U LENGTH V LENGTH CORNERRAD. ANGLE
: : : :
U= V= R= A=
START POINT : B=
(1)
0.

3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining a quadrangular pocket. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the work and corner radius R can be specified. 2) Input item explanation For other input items, refer to 2.6.3 2). 3) Explanation of movements a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the starting point. 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to point R. 3. Cut pitch (K) in cutting feed (YF) mode. 4. Cutting from the inside to the outside using the same cutting width (E). 5. After cutting, side finish allowance (X) remains. 6. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to point R. 7. Rapid traverse back to the starting point 8. Rapid traverse down to the cutting surface + 3mm along the Z axis. (Refer to parameter No. 9108.) 9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 for infeed machining with a pitch of (K) in the Z direction until the allowance (V Y) is reached. When the last allowance would be less than or equal to the tolerance (%) set in cutting condition file No. 474, the remaining allowance is cut with a pitch of (K) added to the last allowance. 10. Move up along the Z axis to the common safety point Z.
212
B63294EN/02

(Quadrangular pocket, rough cutting, and cutting operation diagram)
1. 2.
3.
7. 8. 9. 5.
6.
b) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom finish cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point. 2. Rapid traverse along the Zaxis up to point Z (Z) + bottom machining allowance (Y) +3 mm (Refer to the parameter No. 9108.) 3. Cut up to point Z (Z) in cutting feed (YF) mode. 4. Cutting from the inside to the outside using the same cutting width (E). 5. After cutting side finish allowance (X) remains. 6. Moves up along the Z axis to the common safety point Z.
213

(Quadrangular pocket, bottom finish cutting, and cutting operation diagram)
B63294EN/02
1. 2.
3.
4.
6.
5.
c) When the operation (B) is a side finish cutting operation. Refer to (c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting in (3) Operation description of Outer square side (ZS02). d) When the operation (B) is a chamfering operation. Refer to (c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting in (3) Operation description of Outer square side (ZS02). e) When the machining operation (B) is a hole machining or hole (peck) operation Refer to (3) Operation description of Drilling (ZH01) and Peck drilling (ZH02).
214
B63294EN/02 2.7.3 Circle pocket (ZP03)

PAGE :01/ EDITING
R (2) (1) (X,Y)
:CIRCLE POCKET : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
RADIUS : R= START POINT : B=
(1)

3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining a circular pocket. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. 2) Input item explanation X Y R : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinates of the center of the circle. Be sure to input. : RADIUS Input the circle radius. Be sure to input. For other input items, refer to 2.7.2 Square Pocket (ZP02) (2). 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements in this operation are similar to those of the Square Pocket (ZP02). Please refer to 3.6.2 3).
215
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.7.4 Track pocket (ZP04)

(X,Y) (1) (2)
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING

U
:TRACK POCKET : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
DISTANCE RADIUS ANGLE START POINT
: : : :
U= R= A= B=
0. (1)
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE ARC. OF THE LEFT.

1 W YA B COORDINATE WAY OF CUTN START POINT UNUSED DOWN C UT 1)
2 WORK CO 1 UP CUT 2)
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK COW 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select race track shape pocket machining. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the work can be specified. 2) Input item explanation X Y U R : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinates of the center of the left arc. Be sure to input. : DISTANCE Input the distance between the centers of each semicircle. Be sure to input. : RADIUS Input the circle radius. Be sure to input. For other input items, refer to 2.7.2 Square Pocket (ZP02) (2). 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements in this operation are similar to 2.7.2 3).
216
B63294EN/02 2.7.5 Polygonal pocket (ZP05)

PAGE :01/ EDITING
2 (U,V)
POCKETTING COORDINATES STARTING X STARTING Y POINT1 X
:POLY. POCKET : W= * : U= : V= : X=
: Y= : Z= :YF= :YG=
:YH= :YI= :YJ= :YK=
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CUT IN THE Z AXIS DIRECTION.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining an arbitrary convex polygonal pocket. Up to eight polygons can be specified. 2) Input item explanation U V : STARTING X : STARTING Y It is the XY coordinates of the cut in the Z axis direction. Input the coordinate values as close as possible to the center inside the polygonal pockets. X Y . . Input the coordinates in each vertex; input sequentially from vertex 1. The number of vertices is three to eight. The coordinates of each vertex are input one by one. In actual machining, the tool moves from vertex 1 in sequence. Sometimes it is not possible to machine concave polygonal pockets. Change it to two or more convex polygons. For other input items, refer to 2.7.2 Square Pocket (ZP02) (2). 3) Explanation of movements a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation. (A1) How to determine the cutting point of the polygonal pocket 1. Offset the tool diameter from the given figure to get the desired figure. : APEX1X : APEX1Y
217
B63294EN/02
1st top
2nd top 5th top Start point (U,V) X : Side finishing allowance 4th top 3rd top d/2 : Tool radius
2. Connect each corner of the drawing offset by the tool diameter with the start point (U, V), and divide equally the longest line segment by the cutting width.
1st top
2nd top 5th top Start point (U,V)
4th top 3rd top
3. Divide the remaining segments equally so that the number of divisions is the same for each segment.
1st top
2nd top 5th top
4th top 3rd top
218
B63294EN/02

4. Connect the equally divided points of each line segment, and cut spirally from inside in the order of 1st and 2nd corner from the start point (U, V).
1st top
2nd top 5th top
4th top 3rd top
(A2) Some of the concave polygon shapes which cannot be normally machined The figure in which no normal machining can be performed is a concave polygon, that is, one side of the polygon crosses a line segment connecting the start point and a corner. Example
8th top
7th top 6
4th top 5
3rd top
1st top
2nd top
In the above figure, the line segments connecting the start point, and 4th/7th points cross one side (5th/6th points) of the polygon. If the line segment connecting the start point and each corner as illustrated above, does not come out of the polygon, the concave polygon can be machined. However, in such a case, substantial unrequired movement is found in the tool path; therefore, a more efficient machining becomes possible when the figure is divided into some convex polygons for programming. b) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom finish cutting operation. It is the same as the rough cutting operation.
219

c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting operation. The side finish allowance is cut along each vertex as in the figure below.
B63294EN/02
1st top
2nd top 5th top Start point (U,V)
4th top 3rd top
d) When the machining operation (B) is a chamfering operation. It is similar to the side finish cutting operation. e) When the machining operation (B) is a hole machining or hole (peck). Refer to (3) Explanation of movements of Pocketing prep. (ZP01).
220
B63294EN/02 2.7.6 Polygonal pokt (with radius) (ZP06)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

4 1
(U,V)
POCKETTING COORDINATES STARTING X STARTING Y POINT1 X
:POLYR POCKET : W= * : U= : V= : X=
Y : Y= RAD. : Z= POINT2 X :YF= Y :YG=
RAD. :YH= POINT3 X :YI= Y :YJ= RAD. :YK=
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CUT IN THE Z AXIS DIRECTION.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining an arbitrary polygonal pocket with a corner radius at each vertex. The number of vertices is 3 or 4. 2) Input item explanation Z . . Input the value of the corner radius at each vertex. Input a value which is larger than the radius of the tool used. (Refer to 2.7.5 2) for other input items. 3) Explanation of movements The basic movements in this process are similar to the polygonal pocket (ZP05). : APEX1 RAD.
221
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.7.7 Grooving (ZP07)

(1) (X,Y) (2)
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING

U
YC
YD
:GROOVING : W= * :YA=DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
U LENGTH V LENGTH ANGLE START POINT
: : : :
U= V= A= B=
APPROACH EACAPE 0. (1)
: YC= : YC=
5. 5.
INPUT THE X COORD OF THE CENTER OF THE GROOVE.

1 W YA B COORDINATE WAY OF CUTN COPY START UNUSED DOWN C UT (1)
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen explanation Select when machining a straight groove. It is possible to select DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Moreover, the angle of the work can be specified. 2) Input item explanation X Y U X : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinate of the center of the groove. : U LENGTH Input the groove length. : GROOVE WIDTH Input the groove width. For other input items, refer to 2.7.2 Square Pocket (2). 3) Explanation of movements a) When the machining operation (B) is a rough cutting operation 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to point R 3. Move down pitch (K) along Z axis in cutting feed mode. 4. Cutting the opposite side of the start point. 5. Widening of the groove on the right and left sides symmetrically using the specified cutting width (E). 6. The side finish cutting allowance is left and the groove is cut. 7. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to point R. 8. 3. 7. are repeated until reaching the maximum allowance in the Z direction (VY). 9. Rapid traverse to the common safety point Z.
222
B63294EN/02

(Grooving, rough cutting, and cutting operation diagram)
1. 2. 4. 3.
7.
6.
It does not apply when the groove width is not big enough for the tool diameter. b) When the machining operation (B) is a bottom finish cutting operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point 2. Rapid traverse along the Zaxis up to point A (Z) + bottom finishing allowance (Y) + 3 mm 3. Move down along the Zaxis to point Z coordinates (Z) in cutting feed mode. 4. Cutting of the opposite side of the start point 5. Widening of the groove on the right and left sides symmetrically using the specified cutting width (E) 223

6. The groove bottom side is cut leaving the side finish allowance (X). 7. Rapid traverse back to the common safety point Z c) When the machining operation (B) is a side finish cutting operation 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point
B63294EN/02
2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to machining point + 3 mm (Refer to the parameter No. 9108) 3. Move down along the Z axis by the workpiece surface finishing pitch (YA) * n in cutting feed mode (YE). 4. Both sides of the groove are cut. 5. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to point R. 6. 3 to 5 are repeated up to the Z point coordinate. If the last machining allowance is less than the allowance amount (%) of cutting conditions file No. 474, the amount is added to pitch (YA) for cutting in one pass. (Refer to Operation description of Side preparation.) 7. Rapid traverse back to the common safety point Z (Grooving, side finish cutting, and cutting operation diagram)
2.
4.
3.
d) When the machining operation (B) is a chamfering operation. 1. Rapid traverse up to the start point 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis up to the processing point + 3 mm (Refer to the parameter No.9108) 3. Move down along the Z axis to the processing point in cutting feed mode. 4. Both sides of the groove are chamfered. 5. Rapid traverse back to the common safety point Z. NOTE With grooving, do not specify hole machining and hole (peck).
224
B63294EN/02 2.7.8 Cont pocket prep (ZP08)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS3 T C J V Y Z X A R K
70%
POCKETTING GROUP COPY COORDINATES R POINT Z POINT
:CONTOR POCKET :YB= UNUSED : W= * : R= : Z=
CUTTING DIR. : CUT WID.<70% : SIDE FINISH : BOTTOM REMOV :
U= I= X= V=
X AXIS BOTTOM PITCH : 70. BOTTOM FINSH : 0. FINISH PITCH : CHAMFER REMV :
J= Y= K= * C=
0. 0.

1 YB GROUP COPY U B CUTTING DIR. PROCESS UNUSED XAXIS ROUGHING COOLANT M7
2 AGROUP YAXIS FINISH
3 BGROUP SPIRAL CHAMFERING NONE
4 CGROUP
HOLE MACHINING
HOLE (PECK)
SPIRAL BOTTOM FINISH
SPIRAL SIDE FINISH
COOLANT
COOLANT M8
1) Screen description When performing pocketing of arbitrary figure, always select this menu first of all. (No Pocketting prep. is selected in the case of contour function.) Input the position data needed for contour program in Z direction and data related to tools. The pretool and machining process are set automatically by TOOL ID NO.. The machining process consists of a There are a maximum of seven machining processes, namely, the ROUGHING, FINISHING, Chamfering, HOLE PREPARATION, HOLE (PECK), SPIRAL BOTTOM FINISH, and SPIRAL SIDE FINISH. SPIRAL BOTTOM FINISH, SPIRAL SIDE FINISH, and FINISHING cannot be specified at the same time. The machining methods that can be specified differ depending on the cutting direction. It is possible to perform taper cutting if the cutting direction is the X or Y direction.
225

2) Input item description B : PROCESS
B63294EN/02
There are seven processes, namely, the ROUGHING, FINISHING, Chamfering, HOLE MACHINING, HOLE (PECK), SPIRAL BOTTOM FINISH, AND SPIRAL SIDE FINISH. The machining processes that can be specified differ depending on the cutting direction.
Cutting direction Machining processes that can be specified X/Yaxis ROUGHING FINISHING Chamfering HOLE MACHINING HOLE (PECK) Spiral ROUGHING SPIRAL BOTTOM FINISH SPIRAL SIDE FINISH Chamfering HOLE MACHINING HOLE (PECK)
: Cutting direction Direction in which the tool cuts the pocket of a workpiece on the XY plane. The direction is along the Xaxis, the Yaxis, or spiral.
: D OFS./DIA. It is the cutter compensation number of the tool to be used. For a hole tool, it is the nominal diameter of the tool to be used. It is decided automatically using the [F.S.AUTO] soft key.
: Cutting width/Z point Width of an effective cutting area of the tool tip. Specify 70% or less of the width of the tool tip. For a hole tool, it is the deepest point of the tool used. It is decided automatically by pressing the F.S.AUTO soft key.
: BOTTOM PITCH/DIAMETER Input the allowance in the Z direction in one pass during roughing. Input it only for roughing. If it is not input, cutting is performed in one pass. For hole machining and hole (peck), input the nominal diameter of the largest tool. When [SPIRAL] is selected as the cutting direction, input the cutter compensation number of the roughing tool for hole machining and hole (peck). It is decided automatically by using the F.S.AUTO soft key.
: FINISH PITCH/WIDTH Input the allowance in the Z direction in one pass during finishing. When FINISHING or [SPIRAL] is selected, input it only for spiral side machining. If it is not input, cutting is performed in one pass. Do not input anything for hole machining and hole (peck). When [SPIRAL] is selected, input the cutting width of the roughing tool for hole machining and hole (peck). It is decided automatically by using the F.S.AUTO soft key.
NOTE
When the cutting direction is changed from [XAXIS] or [YAXIS] to [SPIRAL], or vice versa, be sure to activate F.S.AUTO because the contents of BOTOM PITCH/DIAMETER and FINISH PITCH/WIDTH differ. For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Input item description of Contour side preparation.
226
B63294EN/02
3) Operating procedure a) Cutting pocket and island walls
1. The tool moves to the supplementary approach point of the pocket wall (point A in the figure) at rapid traverse. 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to point R. 3. The tool moves to the machining start point (point B in the figure) at rapid traverse. During the rapid traverse, cutter compensation C is applied to the tool using G41 or G42. The offset number specified in parameter No. 9404 is used. 9404 Cutter compensation offset number used when machining contour pocket walls and island walls When this parameter is 0, use the last number of the offset sets. For example, if the number of offset sets is 200, use 200. As the cutter compensation data corresponding to this offset number, set the value of (the side finishing allowance + tool radius of the roughing tool). The distance (point D in the figure) from the supplementary approach point (point A in the figure) to the machining start point (point B in the figure) is decided by parameters Nos. 9462 and 9464. #7 9462 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DTA As the supplementary approach/escape point distance in contour pocketing. DTA: 0: 1: 9464 Uses the value set for parameter No. 9464. Uses the tool diameter.
Supplementary approach/escape point distance in contour pocketing Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm/min 1/10000 inch/min
4. The tool moves to the machining point on the Zaxis at cutting feedrate along the Zaxis. 5. The tool cuts the inside contour of the pocket wall for all the blocks along the X and Yaxes at the feedrate (F) to which the override specified in parameter No. 9402 is applied. 9402 Override amount (%) assumed when machining contour pocket walls and island walls
6. The tool moves to point R along the Zaxis at rapid traverse. The escape speed at this time can be set for parameter No. 9465. 9465 Escape speed assumed for contour pocket walls and island walls Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm/min 1/10000 inch/min 7. The tool moves to the supplementary retraction point (point C in the figure) at rapid traverse. During the rapid traverse, cutter compensation C is canceled using G40.
227
B63294EN/02
8. The same operations as described in steps 1. to 7. are repeated to cut all island walls.
b) Area machining (twoway cutting) 1. The tool moves from point R to the Zaxis machining point along the Zaxis at the specified cutting feedrate. 2. The tool cuts the area back and forth horizontally along the Xaxis (or horizontally along the Y axis if the cutting direction is Yaxis) with the Zaxis position held.
In portion A in the figure where the tool path overlaps, cutting speed can be increased. The speed can be set for parameter No. 9403. 9403 Specification of the speed of the return operation during contour pocketing and twoway cutting (1 to 5), multiple of the cutting speed Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm/min 1/10000 inch/min 3. After area machining has been completed, the tool moves to point R at rapid traverse along the Zaxis. 4. 1 to 3 are repeated until the Z point coordinate is reached. NOTE If there are island figures and for concave figures, twoway cutting cannot be specified.
228
B63294EN/02
c) Area machining (oneway cutting)
1. The tool moves from point R to the Zaxis machining point along the Zaxis at the specified cutting feedrate. 2. Assuming that one cutting stroke horizontally along the Xaxis (or horizontally along the Yaxis if the cutting direction is Yaxis) is one areamachining operation, the one areamachining operation is always performed in the positive X or Yaxis direction. 3. Each time one areamachining operation is completed, the tool retracts to point R along the Z axis at rapid traverse. Then the tool moves to the start point of the next areamachining operation. The tool can retract only to the clearance instead of retracting to point R. For island figures and concave figures, the tool always retracts to point R. The clearance amount can be set for parameters Nos. 9462 and 9463. #7 9462 #6 #5 #4 #4 When area machining is performed with oneway cutting, the point to which the tool retracts in each operation is: #4: 0: 1: 9463 Point R Machining point + clearance point #3 #2 #1 #0
Clearance amount assumed when performing area machining with oneway cutting Unit of setting: 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
4. Each areamachining operation includes a retraction and an approach of the tool, as shown in the following figure, before and after cutting along the Zaxis: 5. During area machining, rough machining is also performed for the upper portion of the island. The upper portion is cut, leaving the finishing allowance of the bottom. 6. After area machining has been completed, the tool moves to point R along the Zaxis at rapid traverse.
Pocket wall
Pocket wall Island
Pocket wall Island wall
Retraction Approach
End mill
229

d) Finishing
B63294EN/02
1. The tool moves to the supplementary approach point of the pocket wall (point A in the figure) at rapid traverse. 2. The tool moves to point R along the Zaxis at rapid traverse. 3. The tool moves to the approach start point (point B in the figure) at rapid traverse. During the rapid traverse, cutter compensation C is applied to the tool using G41 or G42.The offset number used at this time is the cutter compensation number set for the finishing tool. 4. The tool moves from point R to Zaxis machining point at the Z direction feedrate. 5. The tool approaches the machining start point (point C in figure) along the approach quarter circle. The radius of this circle is obtained by adding the finishing allowance to 10% of the cutting width. 6. The tool cuts to the final figure after the approach operation. 7. The tool retracts to the retraction point (point D in the figure) along the retraction quartercircle. The radius of this circle is the same as that of the approach circle described in 5. 8. The tool repeats until it reaches the Z point coordinate. 9. If bottom finishing is to be performed, area machining is performed at the position of the Z point coordinate. 10. The tool moves to the supplementary retraction point (point E in the figure) at rapid traverse. During the rapid traverse, cutter compensation C is canceled using G40. 11. The tool moves to common safety point Z at rapid traverse along the Zaxis.
e) Chamfering Refer to (d) Finishing in (3) Operation description of Contour pocketing preparation (ZP09). f) When the machining operation (B) is a hole machining or hole (peck) operation. Refer to (3) Operation description of Drilling (ZH01) and Peck drilling (ZH02).
230
B63294EN/02 2.7.9 Contour grooving preparation (ZP09)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000(MANUAL1)
PAGE :01/ EDITING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS4
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL SQUARE BIDIR 70% PROCESS END K 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRI TAPPING DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING TAP HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END
T C J
U POCKET/GROOV:CONTOR GROOVE GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * R POINT : R= Z POINT : Z= 1/2 GROOVE WID. : CUT WID.<70% : SIDE FINISH : BOTTOM REMOV : U= I= Z= U= BOTTOM PITCH : 70. BOTTOM FINSH : 0. FINISH PITCH : CHAMFER REMV : J= Y= K= C= * 0. * 0.
<
F.S. AUTO
PROCES WINDOW
TOOL GUIDAN INPUT INFORM CE END
1 YB GROUP COPY B M PROCESS COOLANT UNUSED
2 AGROUP
3 BGROUP CHAMFERING
4 CGROUP CHAMFERING
ROUGHING FINISH COOLANT M7 COOLANT M8
HOLE MACHINING
HOLE (PECK)
NONE
1) Screen description This menu is always selected first when grooving of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. (Pocketing preparation is not selected when the contour function is used.) Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There are a maximum of six machining processes, that is, ROUGHING, BOTTOM FINISH, SIDE FINISH, CHAMFERING, HOLE MACHINING, AND HOLE (PECK). It is possible to perform taper cutting. 2) Input item description U B : GROOVE WID. Input the width of the groove cross section. Be sure to input. : Machining processes There are six machining processes, that is, [ROUGHING], [BOTTOM FINISH], [SIDE FINISH], [CHAMFERING], [HOLE MACHINING], and [HOLE (PECK)].
231
B63294EN/02
For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Input item description of Contour pocketing preparation. 3) Operation description a) Rough machining A groove is cut by moving the tool in order from 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5 to 6, as shown below:
2 J 5
1 4 d*I/100
3 6
d: Tool diameter, I: Cutting width, J: Bottom pitch
F H G B d/2
D B A
C d/2
1. The tool moves by means of rapid traverse to the auxiliary approach point (point A in the figure). 2. The tool moves by means of rapid traverse to the machining start point (point B) along the X and Yaxes simultaneously. Cutting operations are performed along the Zaxis. Then, an arc is cut, via auxiliary point 2 (point C), to auxiliary point 3 (point D). At this time, the arc radius is the depth of the lateral cut (d*I/100). 3. The tool moves to point R along the Zaxis in cutting feed, then moves by means of rapid traverse to the auxiliary approach point (point A), along the X and Yaxes simultaneously. 4. Cutter compensation C (G41 or G42) is applied during startup to achieve the machining start point (point C). The offset number used is set in parameter No. 9404. The first cutting operation is performed with the cutter compensation data set to 0. For the second and subsequent cutting operations, the depth of lateral cut (d*I/100) is added to the cutter compensation data each time cutting is performed. 5. At the start point of the groove (point C), cutting is performed along the Zaxis. Then, cutting is performed up to the machining end point (point E) along the contour of the center line of the groove, after which the tool moves to point R along the Zaxis by means of cutting feed. 6. Cutter compensation C is canceled (by using G40), after which the tool moves to the auxiliary escape point (point F) by means of rapid traverse.
232
B63294EN/02

7. The tool moves by means of rapid traverse to the machining end point (point G) along the X and Yaxes simultaneously. Cutting is performed along the Zaxis, after which an arc is cut via auxiliary point 2 (point H) to auxiliary point 3 (point E). The arc radius is equal to the depth of the lateral cut (d*I/100). 8. The tool moves along the Zaxis to point R during cutting feed then moves, by means of rapid traverse, to the auxiliary escape point (point F) along the X and Yaxes simultaneously. Then, the tool moves to the auxiliary approach point (point A). 9. Cutter compensation C (G41 or G42) is applied during startup to obtain the machining start point (point C). The offset number used is set in parameter No. 9404. 10. At the start point of the groove (point D), cutting is performed along the Zaxis. Cutting is performed along the contour of the center line of the groove, up to the machining end point (point H), after which the tool moves to point R along the Zaxis by means of cutting feed. 11. Cutter compensation C is canceled by the issue of G40 after which the tool moves, by means of rapid traverse, to the auxiliary escape point (point F). 12. Steps 2. to 11. are repeated until infeed machining for a specified groove width, along the Zaxis is completed. Infeed machining for the groove width is alternately applied to the right and left sides of the groove. b) Finish machining 1. When the finishing allowance for the sides of the groove is 0, finish machining is not applied to the groove sides. Similarly, when the finishing allowance for the bottom of the groove is 0, finish machining is not applied to the bottom. 2. Finish machining for the bottom of the groove is performed in the same way as in steps 2. to 6. for rough machining except that, in finish machining, the Z coordinate of the tool tip is the same as that of the bottom of the groove (Z). 3. Finish machining for the portion of the bottom to the right of the groove center line is performed, after which finish machining for the right side of the groove is performed. Also, finish machining for the portion of the bottom to the left of the center line is performed, after which finish machining for the left side of the groove is performed.
Finish machining is performed by moving the tool, in order from 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 to 5.
4 5 Z
233

c) Chamfering
B63294EN/02
1. The right and left sides of the groove are chamfered separately in the same manner as that for finish machining for the groove sides.
Zc Dc
Center line of the groove
d) When the machining operation (B) is a hole machining or hole (peck) operation. Refer to (3) Operation explanation of Drilling (ZH01) and Peck drilling (ZH02).
2.7.10 Copy (random) (ZP10)

See the description of hole position copy (random) (ZL09).
2.7.11 Copy (pattern) (ZP11)

See the description of hole position copy (pattern) (ZL10).
234
B63294EN/02
2.8 NC Language
PROGRAM O1000(MANUAL1) 01 POSITIONING 02 LINE PAGE :01/ EDITING 03 ARC
04 STOP/END 00 30 01 98 02 99 07 SPINDLE
05 FEED RATE
06 COOLANT
MM/MIN INCH/MIN 08 NC LANG.
/MIN
SELECT FORM SOFTKEYS.

If NC LANG is pressed on the machining menu selection screen, detailed menu selection screen regarding NC statement program is displayed. This menu allows easy input using menu of a format similar to NC command such as auxiliary function (M code), spindle function (S code), tool function (T code), and preparatory function (G code) as well as a movement command such as line and circular. 1) POSITIONING This menu is selected when positioning by G00 is specified. 2) LINE This menu is selected when linear interpolation by G01 is specified. 3) ARC This menu is selected when circular interpolation by G02 or G03 is specified. 4) STOP/END This menu is selected when auxiliary function by M code is specified. 5) FEED RATE This menu is selected when feed rate is specified. 6) COOLANT This menu is selected when cutting oil is specified. 7) SPINDLE This menu is selected when spindle rotation/stop is specified. 8) NC LANGUAGE This menu is selected when various commands in NC statement program are issued. NOTE The NC language macro call address (ZN) is ignored when the memory operation is executed. Therefore macro program is not called even if this address is detected. Other words in the ZN block are executed like NC statements. However, it is necessary that the conversational parameter No. 9111 must have been set correctly.
235
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.8.1 Positioning (ZN01)

( X,Y,Z)
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING
NC LANGUAGE G CODE X COMMAND Y COMMAND Z COMMAND
:POSITIONING : G= 0. : X= : Y= : Z=
INPUT THE POSITION X COORD.

1) Screen explanation Select this screen when positioning is instructed using G00 (Rapid traverse). 2) Input item explanation G X Y Z : G CODE Input 0. (The command for rapid traverse is G00.) : X COMMAND : Y COMMAND : Z COMMAND Input position coordinates.
236
B63294EN/02 2.8.2 Line (ZN02)

PAGE :01/ EDITING
( X,Y,Z) F
:LINE : G= : X= : Y= : Z=
1. FEED RATE
: F=
INPUT THE END POINT X COORD VALLE OF THE LINEAR MOVEMENT.

1) Screen explanation Select this screen when linear movement is instructed using G01 (Cutting feed). 2) Input item explanation G X Y Z : G CODE Input 1. (The command for cutting feed is G01.) : X COMMAND : Y COMMAND : Z COMMAND Input the end point coordinate value of the linear movement. If the Z command value in each coordinate axis is the same as the starting point, it is not necessary to input it. F : FEED RATE Input the feed rate in the linear movement. Input is unnecessary if the same feed rate has been already instructed.
237
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.8.3 Arc (ZN03)

B63294EN/02
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING START POINT
END POINT (X,Y)
R J END POINT (X,Y) START POINT
(CENTER)
NC LANGUAGE G CODE X COMMAND Y COMMAND I VECTOR
:ARC : G= : X= : Y= : I=
(NOTE) RADIUS OF ARC MORE THEN 180 DEG. IS EXPRESSED WITH NEGATIVE SING
2. J VECTOR RADIUS FEED RATE : J= : R= : F=
INPUT THE END POINT X COORD VALLE OF THE ARC.

1) Screen explanation Select this screen when cutting of an arc is instructed using G02 or G03. NOTE Limit to a command on the XY plane of the arc in this screen. 2) Input item explanation G X Y I J : G CODE Input 2 or 3. (G02 is a clockwise arc and G03 is a counterclockwise arc.) : X COMMAND : Y COMMAND Input an end point coordinate of the arc. : I VECTOR : J VECTOR Input the vector component from the starting point to the center point. It is not necessary to input when the radius (R) has been input. R : RADIUS Input the arc radius. No input is required when the center point XY components (I, J) is entered.
238
B63294EN/02 2.8.4 Program stop/end (ZN04)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 M PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING
PAGE :01/ EDITING CODE FUNCTION 0 1 2 30 98 99 PROGRAM STOP OPTIONAL STOP END OF PROGRAM END OF TAPE SUBPROGRAM CALL END OF SUBPROGRAM
NC LANGUAGE :STOP/END M CODE : M=
INPUT THE M CODE.

1) Screen explanation Select this screen when commanding an auxiliary function using M code. 2) Input item explanation M : M CODE 0 1 : PROGRAM STOP Input to temporarily stop the program. : OPTIONAL STOP Input to temporarily stop the program only if the optional stop switch on the machine operators panel is on. 2 : END OF PROGRAM Input to end the program. Reset it by stopping the automatic operation. 30 : END OF PROGRAM Input to end the program in the same way as in 2. Reset and rewind it by stopping the automatic operation. 98 : SUB PROGRAM CALL Input to call a sub program. 99 : END OF SUBPROGRAM Input to end a sub program. After M99 is executed, the program returns to the main program.
239
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.8.5 Feed rate (ZN05)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 PAGE :01/ EDITING MM/MIN. 1 INCH/MIN. 0.01
B63294EN/02
PROCESS TOOL NAME F CODE INITAL SETING 1
2000
2000
20.00
8000
8000
80.00
NC LANGUAGE :FEED RATE FEED RATE : F=
INPUT THE FEED RATE.

1) Screen explanation Select this screen when the feed rate is instructed. 2) Input item explanation F : FEED RATE Input the feed rate.
240
B63294EN/02 2.8.6 Coolant (ZN06)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 M PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING
PAGE :01/ EDITING CODE FUNCTION 8 9 COOLANT ON COOLANT OFF
NC LANGUAGE :COOLANT M CODE : M=
INPUT THE M CODE.

1) Screen explanation Select this screen when a coolant is specified. 2) Input item explanation M : M CODE 8 9 : COOLANT ON Input when coolant is required. : COOLANT OFF Input when coolant is not required. Additionally, the coolant M code command differs according to the machine tool builder.
241
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.8.7 Spindle (ZN07)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY O1000 M PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING PAGE :01/ EDITING CODE FUNCTION 3 4 5 19 SPINDLE CW ROTATION SPINDLE CCW ROTATION SPINDLE STOP ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP
B63294EN/02
NC LANGUAGE :SPINDLE SPINDL SPED : S= M CODE : M=
INPUT THE SPINDLE SPEED OF THE TOOL.

1) Screen explanation Select this screen when commanding spindle rotation/stop. 2) Input item explanation S : SPINDLE SPEED . . M 3 4 5 Input the speed of the spindle. (min1) It is not necessary to input when the auxiliary function (M code) is 5 or 19. : SPINDLE CW ROTATION The spindle rotates clockwise. : SPINDLE CCW ROTATION The spindle rotates counterclockwise. : SPINDLE STOP The spindle stops rotating. 19 : ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP The spindle always stops at a fixed position.
: M CODE
242
B63294EN/02 2.8.8 NC language (ZN08)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING O1000(MANUAL1)
PAGE :01/ EDITING
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING FACING PREP. FACE MILL SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRI TAPPING DRILL TAPPING DRILL TAPPING TAP HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END
:NC LANG. : G= : X= : Y= : Z=
B I J K
AXIS VECTOR VECTOR VECTOR
1/2 : : : :
B= I= J= K=
FEED RATE : SPINDL SPEED : M FUNCTION : RADIUS OFFS :
F= S= M= D=
INPUT THE G CODE.

1) Screen explanation Various commands using NC statements can be produced within this screen. 2) Input item explanation Refer to the explanation on the right side of the screen.
243
B63294EN/02
2.9 2 + 1/2 Convex Cut

PROGRAM O1234 01 CUX QUAD PR PAGE :01/ EDITING 02 CUX HEMISPHERE 03 CUX HALF CYL L
04 CUX HLF CYL RING 05 COPY(RANDOM)
06 COPY(PATTERN)
SELECT SOFTKEY.
Detailed menu selection screen 1 of 2.5 CONVEX CUT Press the 2 + 1/2 on the machining menu selection screen to allow the detailed menu selection screen for 2 + 1/2 convex cutting to be displayed. There are the 2 + 1/2 convex cutting preparation where data related to tools is input and the screen where the 2.5 concavo cutting preparation and figure of machining face on this menu screen. Always the 2.5 CVX CUT PREP is selected before the convex machining. Then, select the screen to input figures. (1) 2 + 1/2 convex cutting preparation This menu is always selected at the beginning of 2 + 1/2 convex cutting. Input the Zdirection position data and the data related to the tool. (2) CUX QUAD PR Select this to machine the convex quadrate pillar. (3) CUX HEMISPHERE Select this to machine the convex hemisphere. (4) CUX HALF CYL L Select this to machine the convex half cylinder L type. (5) CUX HLF CYL RING Select this to machine the convex half cylinder ring. (6) COPY (RANDOM) This is a menu for multiple machining of convex shape defined by (2) through (5) on arbitrary position. (7) COPY (PATTERN) This is a menu for multiple machining of convex shape defined by (2) through (5) on the basis of a fixed shift amount in the X and Y directions.
244
B63294EN/02 2.9.1 2 + 1/2 Convex cut prep. (ZV01)

PAGE :01/ EDITING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS3 T R YF K V J I X U Z
2+1/2 CVX :2.5CVX CUT PREP GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED SIDE PITCH : R POINT : R= SIDE FINISH : Z POINT : Z= BOTTOM REMOV : SIDE REMOVAL : U= BOTTOM PITCH :
I= X= V= J=
BOTTOM FINSH : Y= * FINISH PITCH : K= TOOL ID NO. : T=

< F.S AUTO PROCES WINDOW TOOL GUIDAN INPUT INFORM CE END
1 YB GROUP COPY B M CUTTING DIR. COOLANT UNUSED ROUGHING COOLANT M7
3 BGROUP SIDE FINISH
4 CGROUP
NONE
1) Screen description Always select this screen at start of the 2.5 convex cutting. Input the position data in the Z direction and data on tools. The pretool and machining process are automatically set by TOOL AUTO. A maximum of three tools can be used and there are three processes, namely, rough cutting, bottom finish, and side finish. 2) Input item description YB : GROUP COPY When the group copy is selected, use this menu to specify whether the group copy is valid or not. When no setting value, it is realized that GROUP COPY = UNUSED. R Z U : R POINT Always input the Z coordinate at cutting feed start point on machining. Be sure to input. : Z POINT Always input the Z coordinate on the machining end surface. Be sure to input. : SIDE REMOVAL Always input the removal of side. However, the setting in the case of convex square column, the wider side becomes a reference.
245

Side removal diagram
B63294EN/02
U I : SIDE PITCH
Input the side removal per rough cutting. Cut the removal (UX) in rough cutting several times for each pitch (I). Cut the removal (UX) in rough cutting once if nothing is input. X : SIDE FINISH Input the removal in the side finish cutting. If nothing is input, the machining process of side finish is selected by the TOOL AUTO. Thus, no side finish cutting is carried out. V J : BOTTOM REMOVAL Input the removal of machine face in Z direction. Always input this. : BOTTOM PITCH Input the side removal per rough cutting in the Z direction. Cut the removal (VY)in rough cutting several times for each pitch (J). Cut the removal (VY) in rough cutting once if nothing is input. Y : BOTTOM FINISH Input the removal at the bottom of bottom finish cutting. If nothing is input, the machining process of bottom finish is selected by TOOL AUTO. Thus, no bottom finish cutting is performed. K : FINISH PITCH Input the removal per side finish in Z direction. The side becomes smoother by making the pitch value of finish smaller. When the side finish is carried out and nothing is input, the side finish removal is cut every bottom pitch (J) similarly in rough cutting on side finish cutting. T : TOOL ID NO. Input the tool ID number of final tool used. See the tool file for the corresponding tool by pressing the software key TOOL LIST. Always input this. Q : TOOL NAME The tool name corresponding to the value input to the tool management number (T) is read from the tool file and the tool name is displayed. B : PROCESS There are three types of machining processes, namely Rough cutting, Bottom finish cutting, and Side finish cutting. H D : H OFFSET NO. : D OFFSET NO. This is the compensation number of tool used. It is automatically set by the software key of F.S. AUTO. The compensation number corresponding to the value input to the tool ID number (T) is read from the tool file and is displayed.
246
B63294EN/02
M : COOLANT
This is the coolant used in this machining menu. It is automatically set by the software key F.S. AUTO. The coolant set by the initial setting menu is displayed. It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically. S : SPINDLE SPEED It indicates the speed of spindle of tool. It is automatically set by the software key F.S. AUTO. It is calculated from the cutting condition file data based on the work material, tool name, and tool diameter. It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically. F : FEEDRATE It is the feedrate of tool. It is automatically set by the software key F.S. AUTO. It is calculated from the spindle speed (S) and cutting condition file data. It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically. YF : Z CUT SPEED Press the software key F.S. AUTO to allow it to be automatically set. It is the cutting feed rate in Z direction from the R point coordinate (R). It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically. 3) Convex type machining operation description The 2.5 convex type machining is divided into the following three processes depending on the machining process (B): 1. 2. 3. Rough cutting Bottom finish cutting Side finish cutting
Each machining process can be abbreviated depending on the setting of input items but the order of processes cannot be changed. a) When the machining process (B) is rough cutting Convex type rough cutting procedure
U U I J V 5 7 Y Number indicates the machining order 1 3 4 X 2 6 8
Before rough cutting
After rough cutting
1. One cutting is carried out for side pitch (I) in the XY direction and bottom pitch (J) for the Z direction. 2. At the time when the cornering in XY direction ends, the cornering further continues for the bottom pitch (J) in the Z direction. 3. When no side pitch (I) and bottom pitch (J) have been input, each removal is cut at one time. NOTE There is no remainder in the 2.5 machining since the removal is divided by pitch and the pitch is obtained by the number of cuttings again. This allows cornering in the same space.
247

b) When the machining process (B) is bottom finish cutting Convex type bottom finish cutting order diagram U U I X
B63294EN/02
1 Y Number indicates the order of machining .
Before bottom finish cutting
After bottom finish cutting
1. One cutting is carried out for side pitch (I) in the XY direction and bottom pitch (Y) for the Z direction. 2. Perform cutting by cornering in the XY direction. 3. When the side pitch (I) has not been input, the XY direction is cut at one time. 4. The bottom finish cutting is performed at 0 cut when the bottom finish removal (Y) is 0. c) When the machining process (B) is side finish cutting: Convex type side finish cutting order diagram
X K
Before side finish cutting
After side finish cutting
1. One cutting is carried out for side finish removal (I) in the XY direction and finish pitch (K) for the Z direction. When no finish pitch (K) has been input, it is the same as the bottom pitch (J). 2. When the side finish removal has been cut, cornering is performed in the Z direction by the finish pitch (K) and a similar operation continues. 3. When the finish pitch (K) has not been input, the Z direction is cut at one time. 4. The side finish cutting is performed at 0 cut when the side finish removal (X) is 0.
248
B63294EN/02 2.9.2 CVX QUAD PR (ZV02)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CUX O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING 2.5CUX CUT PREP END MILL
PAGE :01/ EDITING

YC (1)
U SIDE DIR A CENTER X AXIS (X,Y) (2) U
I 2+1/2 CVX COORDINATES WAY OF CUT X COORD Y COORD :CVX QUAD PR : W= * LENGTH1 : C= DOWN CUT HEITH1 : X= WIDTH1 : Y= RADIUS1
YI
: : : :
U= H= I= R=
HEITH2 WIDTH2 RADIUS2 ANGLE
:YH= * :YI= * :YL= * : A=
0.
INPUT CENTER X COORD OF THE SQUARE POLE.

1 W C B COORDINATES UNUSED
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
WAY OF CUT DOWN CUT START POINT (1)
1) Screen description Select this to allow the convex quadrate pillar. It is possible to select the Down cut and Up cut. Also, the angle and corner R of a workpiece can be specified. 2) Input item description W : COORDINATES Specify this to modify the work coordinate system. It is not necessary to input this when the work coordinate system specified in initial setting is not modified. It is not possible to modify the work coordinate system halfway in a program when the Allcopy and Groupcopy are selected. In this case, do not input anything. Specify UNUSED when the work coordinate setting G92 has been specified in the initial setting. C : WAY OF CUTIN Specify the DOWN CUT and UP CUT. If nothing has been specified, it is assumed that the DOWN CUT has been specified. X Y U H I R : X COORD : Y COORD Input the center coordinate of quadrate pillar. Always input this. : LENGTH Input the horizontal length of quadrate pillar. Always input this. : DEPTH 1 Input the height of single side of quadrate pillar. Always input this. : WIDTH 1 Input the width of single side of quadrate pillar. Always input this. : RADIUS 1 Input the corner R (Z direction) of single side of quadrate pillar. Always input this. Input 0 if no corner R is added.
249

YH : DEPTH 2
B63294EN/02
Input the height of the other side of quadrate pillar. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that the height 1 has been input. YI : WIDTH 2 Input the width of the other side of quadrate pillar. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that the width 1 has been input. YL : RADIUS 2 Input the corner R (Z direction) of the other side of quadrate pillar. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that the radius 1 has been input. A : ANGLE Input this when the work slants toward the X axis in reference to the center (X,Y) of quadrate pillar. Input the angle between the length of quadrate pillar and Xaxis. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that 0 has been input, indicating that the work has been placed in parallel to the Xaxis. B : START POINT Specify the start position of machining. Specify either (1) or (2). If nothing has been input, it is assumed that (1) has been specified. YC : APPROACH Input the gap between the tool edge and work edge at the start point of cutting feed. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that 5 mm has been input. 3) Operation description a) When the machining process (B) is rough cutting: i. Rapid traverse to the start point (approach amount (YC) is added) ii. Rapid traverse to point R along Zaxis iii. The Zaxis is lowered by the bottom pitch (J) with the cutting feed (YF). iv. The upper machining surface is planecut by the cutting width of side pitch (I). v. The procedures i. iv. are repeated until the bottom removal is equal to (square column height + side finish removal). vi. Rapid traverse along Zaxis to the common safety Z point.
250
B63294EN/02

(Convex quadrate pillar rough cutting (upper surface) procedure)
i. ii.
iii.
iv.
vi. v.
1. Rapid traverse to the start point (approach amount (YC) is added) 2. Rapid traverse along Z axis to R point 3. The Z axis is lowered by the cutting feed (YE) for bottom pitch (J). 4. Side is cut by the cutting width of side pitch (I). 5. The procedure 4. above is repeated until the side removal (UX) in rough cutting. 6. The procedures 3. 5. are repeated up to the removal (height Y) in rough machining.
251

7. The Zaxis goes up to the common safety Z point by rapid traverse. (Convex quadrate pillar Rough cutting procedure)
B63294EN/02
2. 3. 4.
5.
8.
6. 7.
b) When the machining process (B) is bottom finish cutting: 1. Rapid traverse to the start point (approach amount (YC) is added) 2. Rapid traverse along Zaxis to R point 3. Cutting feed to the Z point coordinate 4. Side is cut by the cutting width of side pitch (I).
252
B63294EN/02

5. The procedure 3. above is repeated until the side removal (UX) in rough cutting. 6. The Zaxis goes up to the common safety Z point. (Convex quadrate pillar Bottom finish cutting procedure)
1. 2.
4.
3.
6.
5.
c) When the machining process (B) is side finish cutting: 1. Rapid traverse to the start point (approach amount (YC) is added) 2. Rapid traverse along Zaxis to R point 3. The Zaxis is lowered to the square column height by cutting feed (YF). 4. The upper cutting surface is cut by the cutting width of bottom pitch (J).
253

5. The Zaxis goes up to the common safety Z point.
B63294EN/02
1. 2. 3.
4.
5.
6. Rapid traverse to the start point (approach amount (YC) is added) 7. Rapid traverse along Z axis to R point 8. The Z axis is lowered by the cutting feed (YE) by the amount of finish pitch (K). 9. The side finish removal (X) is cut. 10. Repeat the procedure 9. above up to the Z point coordinate. 11. The Z axis goes up to the common safety Z point.
254
B63294EN/02

(Convex quadrate pillar side finish cutting procedure)
6. 7. 8.
9.
11.
10.
255
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.9.3 CVX hemisphere (ZV03)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CUX O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING 2.5CUX CUT PREP END MILL PAGE :01/ EDITING
(2) YC
B63294EN/02
(1)
(3)
(4)
H U 2+1/2 CVX COORDINATES WAY OF CUT X COORD Y COORD :CVX HEMISPHERE : W= * RADIUS : C= DOWN CUT HEITH : X= DIAMETER : Y= START POINT
: : : :
R= H= U= B=
APPROACH
:YC=
5.
(1)
INPUT HEMISPHERE CENTER X COORD.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
WAY OF CUT DOWN CUT UP CUT START POINT (1) (2) (3) (4)
1) Screen description Select this screen to machine the convex hemisphere. It is possible to select the DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Also, the height of the hemisphere can be specified. 2) Input item description W : COORDINATES Specify this to modify the work coordinate system. It is not necessary to input this when the work coordinate system specified in initial setting is not modified. It is not possible to modify the work coordinate system halfway in a program when the Allcopy and Groupcopy are selected. In this case, do not input anything. Specify UNUSED when the work coordinate setting G92 has been specified in the initial setting. C : WAY OF CUTN Specify the DOWN CUT and UP CUT. If nothing has been specified, it is assumed that the work coordinate setting DOWN CUT has been specified. X Y R H U : X COORD : Y COORD Input the coordinate center of hemisphere. Always input this. : RADIUS Input the radius of hemisphere. Always input this. : HEIGHT Input the height of hemisphere. : DIAMETER Input the width of hemisphere. Input either the height (H) or diameter (U). If nothing has been input, it is assumed that the radius (R) has been input. B : START POINT Specify the start position of machining. Specify either (1), (2), 3, or 4. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that (1) has been specified. YC : APPROACH Input the gap between the tool edge and work edge at the start point of cutting feed. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that 5 mm has been input.
256
B63294EN/02
3) Operation description
The basic operation in each machining process is the same as that of CVX QUAD PR (ZV02). See 2.9.2 (3) for details.
257
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.9.4 CVX half CYL L (ZV04)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CUX O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING 2.5CUX CUT PREP END MILL PAGE :01/ EDITING
(2)
B63294EN/02
(X,Y) A CENTER YC (1)
H D
2+1/2 CVX COORDINATES WAY OF CUT X COORD Y COORD
:CVX HALF CYL L : W= * RADIUS : C= DOWN CUT ANGLE : X= U LENGTH : Y= V LENGTH
: I= :YA= : U= : V=
RADIUS HEITH WIDTH START ANGLE
: : : :
R= H= D= A=
0.
INPUT CONTER X COORD OF THE CIRCLE IN THE RING PART.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
WAY OF CUT DOWN CUT UP CUT START POINT (1) (2)
1) Screen description Select this to machine the convex half cylinder L type. It is possible to select either the DOWN CUT or UP CUT. The angle of work can also be specified. 2) Input item description W : COORDINATES Specify this to modify the work coordinate system. It is not necessary to input this when the work coordinate system specified in initial setting is not modified. It is not possible to modify the work coordinate system halfway in a program when the Allcopy and Groupcopy are selected. In this case, do not input anything. Specify NOT USED when the work coordinate setting G92 has been specified in the initial setting. C : WAY OF CUTN Specify the DOWN CUT and UP CUT. If nothing has been specified, it is assumed that the DOWN CUT has been specified. X Y I : X COORD : Y COORD Input the drawing center of ring. Always input this. : RADIUS Input the radius of ring. Always input this. YA : ANGLE Input the angle of circular of ring. Always input it. U V : U LENGTH Input the U side length. Always input it. : V LENGTH Input the V side length. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that the U side length has been input. R H : RADIUS Input the radius of semicylinder. Always input it. : HEIGHT Input the height of semicylinder.
258
B63294EN/02
D : WIDTH
Input the width of semicylinder. Input either height (H) or diameter (U). If nothing has been input, it is assumed that the radius (R) has been input. A : START ANGLE Input this when the work slants toward the Xaxis in reference to the center (X,Y) of ring. Input the start angle of ring. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that 0 has been input, indicating that the work has been placed in parallel to the Xaxis. B : START POINT Specify the start position of machining. Specify either (1) or (2). If nothing has been input, it is assumed that (1) has been specified. YC : APPROACH Input the gap between the tool edge and work edge at the start point of cutting feed. If nothing has been input, it is assumed that 5 mm has been input. 3) Operation description The basic operation in each machining process is the same as that of CVX QUAD PR (ZV02).
259
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.9.5 CVX HLF CYL ring (ZV05)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CUX O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING 2.5CUX CUT PREP END MILL
YC A (X,Y) (2) H D (1)
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING
2+1/2 CVX COORDINATES WAY OF CUT X COORD Y COORD
:CVX HLF CYL RING : W= * RADIUS : C= DOWN CUT ANGLE : X= RADIUS : Y= HEITH
: I= :YA= : R= : H=
WIDTH ANGLE START POINT APPROACH
: D= : A= : B= :YC=
0. (1) 5.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen description Select this screen to machine the convex half cylinder ring. It is possible to select either the DOWN CUT or UP CUT. Also, a complete circle ring can be machined by specification. 2) Input item description See 2.9.4 CVX HLF CYL L 2) for details. 3) Operation description The basic operation in each machining process is the same as that of CVX QUAD PR (ZV02).
2.9.6 Copy (random) (ZV06)

See Hole position copy of standard program C (random) (ZL09) for details.
2.9.7 Copy (pattern) (ZV07)

See Hole position copy of standard program C (pattern) (ZL10) for details.
260
B63294EN/02
2.10 2 + 1/2 Concave Cut

PROGRAM O1234 01 CCV QUAD PR PAGE :01/ EDITING 02 CCV HEMISPHERE 03 CCV HALF CYL L
04 CCV HLF CYL RING 05 COPY(RANDOM)
06 COPY(PATTERN)
SELECT SOFTKEY.
Detailed menu selection screen 1 of 2.5 CONCAVE CUT Press the 2 + 1/2 CONCAVE CUT on the machining menu selection screen to allow the detailed menu selection screen for 2 + 1/2 CONCAVE cutting to be displayed. There are the 2 + 1/2 convex cutting preparation where data related to tools is input and the screen where the 2.5 concavo cutting preparation and figure of machining face on this menu screen. Always the 2.5 CVX CUT PREP is selected before the convex machining . Then, select the screen to input figures. (1) 2 + 1/2 concave cutting preparation This menu is always selected at the beginning of 2 + 1/2 concave cutting. Input the Zdirection position data necessary and the data related to the tool. (2) CCV QUAD PR Select this to machine the concave quadrate pillar. (3) CCV HEMISPHERE Select this to machine the concave hemisphere. (4) CCV HALF CYL L Select this to machine the concave half cylinder L type. (5) CCV HLF CYL RING Select this to machine the concave half cylinder ring. (6) COPY (RANDOM) This is a menu for multiple machining of concave shape defined by (2) through (5) on arbitrary position. (7) COPY (PATTERN) This is a menu for multiple machining of concave shape defined by (2) through (5) on the basis of a fixed shift amount in the X and Y directions.
261
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.10.1 2 + 1/2 Concave cut prep. (ZC01)

E*2D YF
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS4 T
XC
R Z I
J Y
2+1/2 CCV GROUP COPY R POINT Z POINT PITCH
:2.5CCV CUT PREP :YB= UNUSED BOTTOM FINSH : : R= SIDE FINISH : : Z= FINISH PITCH : : U= * CHAMFER REMV :
Y= X= J= C=
* * * *
TOOL ID NO. : T=

< PROCES WINDOW TOOL GUIDAN INPUT INFORM CE END
O0031(MANUAL2)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

PROCESS1 65. END MILL ROUGHING 165. 65. COOLNT M7 1272. 229. 70. 114.
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS3 PROCESS2 66. T= 66. Q= END MILL END MILL PROCESS B=SIDE FINSH BOTTOM FIN H OFFSET NO. H= 166. 166. D OFFSET NO. D= 66. 66. COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 SPINDL SPEED S= 2120. 2120. FEED RATE F= 572. 572. CUT WIDTH(0/0)E= 70. 70. Z CUT SPEED YF= 286. 286.
UNUSED 5. 10. 10.
* 1. 1. 0.
TOOL ID NO. : T=
65.

1 YB GROUP COPY B M PROCESS COOLANT UNUSED ROUGHING COOLANT M7
3 BGROUP SIDE FINISH
4 CGROUP CHAMFERING
NONE
262
B63294EN/02
1) Screen description
Always select this screen for performing the 2.5 concavo cutting. Input the position data in the Z direction and data related to tools. The pretool and machining process are automatically set by TOOL AUTO. There are a maximum of four tools available and there are four machining processes, namely rough cutting, bottom finish, side finish, and chamfering.
E*2D YF
PAGE :01/ EDITING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS4 T
XC
R Z I
J Y
2+1/2 CCV GROUP COPY R POINT Z POINT PITCH
:2.5CCV CUT PREP :YB= UNUSED BOTTOM FINSH : : R= SIDE FINISH : : Z= FINISH PITCH : : U= * CHAMFER REMV :
Y= X= J= C=
* * * *
TOOL ID NO. : T=

< PROCES WINDOW TOOL GUIDAN INPUT INFORM CE END
The bottom finish cutting is valid to the concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding (ZD02) only. It is ignored in other menus. 2) Input item description YB : GROUP COPY When the group copy is selected, use this menu to specify whether this group copy is valid or not. When no setting value, it is realized that GROUP COPY = UNUSED. R Z I : R POINT Always input the Z coordinate of start point of cutting feed on machining. Be sure to input. : Z POINT Always input the Z coordinate on machining surface(not machining end surface). Be sure to input. : PITCH Input the removal per rough machining in the Z direction. Cut the depth (depth X/depth Y) in each figure menu several times for rough pitch (I). Cut the depth (depth X/depth Y) in each figure menu once if nothing is input. Y : BOTTOM FINISH Input the removal in the bottom finish cutting in concave quadrate pillar. If nothing is input, the machining process of bottom finish is selected by TOOL AUTO. Thus, no bottom finish cutting is performed. Also, it cannot be performed in menus other than concave quadrate pillar even if the bottom finish cutting has been selected. X J : SIDE FINISH Input the removal in the side finish cutting. If nothing is input, no side finish cutting is performed. : FINISH PITCH Input the removal per side finish in the Z direction. The side becomes smoother by making the pitch value of finish smaller. When the side finish is carried out and nothing is input, the side finish removal is cut by the depth of each figure menu on side finish cutting. C : CHAMPER REMV Input the chamfering amount. If nothing is input, no machining process of chamfering is selected by TOOL AUTO. Thus, no chamfering is performed. T : TOOL ID NO. Input the tool ID number of the final tool used. See the tool file for the corresponding tool by pressing the software key TOOL LIST. Always input this.
NOTE
263

Q : TOOL NAME
B63294EN/02
The tool name corresponding to the value input to the tool ID number (T) is read from the tool file and the tool name is displayed. B : PROCESS There are four types of machining processes, namely Rough cutting, Bottom finish cutting, Side finish cutting and Chamfering. However, the Bottom finish cutting is valid to the concave square column only. H D : H OFFSET NO. : D OFFSET NO. This is the compensation number of tool used. It is automatically set by the software key of F.S. AUTO. The compensation number corresponding to the value input to the tool ID number (T) is read from the tool file and is displayed. M : COOLANT This is the coolant used in this machining menu. It is automatically set by the software key F.S. AUTO. The coolant set by the initial setting menu is displayed. It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically. S : SPINDLE SPEED It indicates the speed of spindle of tool. It is automatically set by the software key F.S AUTO. It is calculated from the cutting condition file data based on the work material, tool name, and tool diameter. It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically. F : FEEDRATE It is the tool feedrate . It is automatically set by the software key F.S. AUTO. It is calculated from the spindle speed and cutting condition file data. It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically. E : CUT WIDTH (%) It is automatically set by pressing the software key F.S. AUTO. Actual cutting width is calculated from the tool diameter and cutting width (%). It can be modified as needed after automatic setting. YF : Z CUT SPEED Press the software key F.S. AUTO to allow it to be automatically set. It is the cutting feedrate in Z direction from the R point coordinate (R). It can be modified as needed after it has been set automatically.
264
B63294EN/02
3) Concave type cutting operation description
The 2.5 concave type cutting is divided into the following four processes depending on the machining process (B). 1. Rough cutting 2. Bottom finish (concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding only) 3. Side finish 4. Chamfering Each machining process can be abbreviated by the setting of input items but the order of processes cannot be changed. a) When the machining process (B) is rough cutting (Concave type rough cutting procedure)
Before rough cutting
X C
R Z
1 2 3 The number indicate the order of machining
I Depth X X C Z I Depth X R 265
After rough cutting
1. One cutting amount is machined by the rough pitch (I). 2. When the cutting of one plane ends, cornering is performed in the Z direction by the rough pitch (I) and the similar operation is performed. 3. This is repeated until the depth (depth X/depth Y) is reached. 4. If no rough pitch (I) has not been input, the depth (depth X/depth Y) in each figure menu is cut at a time. NOTE There are no fractional processes in the 2.5 cutting since the removal is divided by the pitch and the pitch is obtained again by the number of cuttings. This allows cornering at the same space.
B63294EN/02
b) When the machining process (B) is bottom finish cutting (concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding only): (Concave type bottom finish cutting procedure)
X C
R Z
X C
Depth R Z Y 1. Cutting amount is machined by bottom finish removal (Y). 2. The bottom finish is performed at 0 cut when the bottom finish removal (Y) is 0. NOTE If a figure menu other than the concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding has been selected, the bottom finish cutting is ignored. 266 Depth
B63294EN/02

c) When the machining process (B) is side finish cutting (Concave type side finish cutting procedure)
Before side finish cutting R C J Z
NOTE
Only the concave quadrate pillar is machined from the top to bottom.
After side finish cutting C J
Depth R Z X 1. One cutting is carried out for side finish removal (X) in the XY direction and finish pitch (K) for the Z direction. When no finish pitch (K) has been input, the depth in each figure menu is selected. In the case of concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding and other cases, machining is performed from the machining surface and (machining face depth), respectively. 2. When the side finish removal has been cut, perform cornering in the Z direction and + Z direction in the case of concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding and other cases, respectively and then continue the similar operation. 3. When the finish pitch (J) has not been input, the Z direction is cut at one time. 4. The side finish cutting is performed at 0 cut when the side finish removal (X) is 0. 267 Depth

d) When the machining process (B) is chamfering (Concave type chamfering procedure)
B63294EN/02
Before chamfering R C Z
After chamfering R Z
The chamfering amount (C) is cut at one time. When no chamfering amount (C) has been input, chamfering is not performed.
268
Depth
Depth
B63294EN/02 2.10.2 CCV QUAD PR with Corner Rounding (ZC02)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CCV O1000
PAGE :01/ EDITING
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING U SIDE DIR 2.5CCV CUT PREP END MILL
A CENTER (X,Y) I
U (X,Y)
YI YH H YL
2+1/2 CCV COORDINATES WAY OF CUT X COORD Y COORD
:CCV QUAD PR : W= * LENGTH : C= DOWN CUT DEPTH1 : X= WIDTH1 : Y= RADIUS1
: : : :
U= H= I= R=
DEPTH2 WIDTH2 RADIUS2 ANGLE
:YH= * :YI= * :YL= * : A=
0.
INPUT CENTER X COORD OF THE SQUARE POLE.

1 W C COORDINATES UNUSED
2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
WAY OF CUT DOWN CUT UP CUT
1) Screen description Select when machining the concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding. It is possible to select the DOWN CUT and UP CUT. Also, it is possible to specify the angle and corner R of a workpiece. 2) Input item description H : DEPTH 1 Input the depth of single side of quadrate pillar. Always input this. YH : DEPTH 2 Input the depth of the other side of quadrate pillar. It is assumed that the depth 1 has been input if nothing has been input. See 2.10.2 CVX QUAD PR with Corner Rounding 2) for other input items. 3) Operation description a) When the machining process (B) is rough machining: 1. Rapid traverse to the start point 2. Rapid traverse to point R along Zaxis 3. Cutting is performed by the pitch (I) with the cutting feed (YF). 4. Cutting is performed from the inside to the outside by the same cutting width (E). 5. Cutting ends except the side finish removal (X). 6. Escape by 3 mm for Z axis direction (Refer to the parameter No. 9108). 7. Rapid traverse along Zaxis to R point 8. Return to start point at XYaxes rapid traverse 9. Lowers to + 3 mm of cutting surface at Zaxis rapid traverse (refer to the parameter No. 9108). 10. Perform cornering in the Z direction by pitch (I) for each of 3. 9. until the square column depth (depth Y) is completed. 11. The Zaxis goes up to the common safety Z point.
269

(Concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding rough cutting procedure)
B63294EN/02
1. 2. 3. 4.
8. 7. 6. 5.
b) When the machining process (B) is bottom finish cutting: 1. Rapid traverse to the start point 2. Rapid traverse by Z point coordinate (Z) + bottom allowance (Y) + 3 mm along the Z axis (refer to parameter No. 9108). 3. Cutting is performed to Z axis with the cutting feed (YF). 4. Cutting is performed from the inside to the outside by the same cutting width (E). 5. Cutting ends except the side finish removal (X). 6. Escape by 3 mm for Z axis (refer to the parameter No. 9108). 7. The Zaxis goes up to the common safety Z point. 270
B63294EN/02

(Concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding bottom finish cutting procedure)
1. 2.
3.
7. 6. 4. 5.
c) When the machining process (B) is side finish machining: 1. Rapid traverse to the start point 2. Rapid traverse to machining point +3 mm along the Zaxis (Refer to the parameter No. 9108) 3. Cutting is performed by the pitch (J) with the cutting feed (YF). 4. Cutting is performed to the side surface in circular. 5. The side finish removal (X) is cut. 6. Escape in circular after cutting. 7. Repeat 3. to 6. up to the Zpoint coordinate. 8. The Zaxis goes up to the common safety Z point.
271

(Concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding side finish cutting procedure)
B63294EN/02
1. 2. 5. 4. 3.
8. 6. 7.
d) When the machining process (B) is chamfering: 1. Rapid traverse to the start point 2. Rapid traverse to machining point +3 mm along the Zaxis (Refer to the parameter No. 9108) 3. The Z axis is lowered to the machining point with cutting feed. 4. Work is cut in circular. 5. The chamfering amount (C) is cut. 6. Escape in circular after cutting. 7. The Z axis goes up to the common safety Z point.
272
B63294EN/02

(Concave quadrate pillar with corner rounding chamfering procedure)
5. 4.
5. 6.
273
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.10.3 CCV hemisphere (ZC03)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CCV O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING 2.5CCV CUT PREP END MILL PAGE :01/ EDITING
B63294EN/02
(2) (1) (X,Y) (3) (4)
U R H
:CCV HEMISPHERE : W= * RADIUS : C= DOWN CUT DEPTH : X= DIAMETER : Y= START POINT
: : : :
R= H= U= B=
(1)
INPUT HEMISPHERE CENTER X COORD.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen description Select this screen to machine the concave hemisphere. It is possible to select either the DOWN CUT or UP CUT. 2) Input item description H U : DEPTH Input the depth of hemisphere. : DIAMETER Input the width of hemisphere. Input either depth (H) or diameter (H). When neither depth (H) nor diameter (H) is input, it is assumed that the radius (R) has been input. See 2.9.3 CVX HEMISPHERE 2) for other input items. 3) Operation description The basic operation in each machining process is the same as that of CCV QUAD PR with corner rounding (ZC02).
274
B63294EN/02 2.10.4 CCV half CYL L (ZC04)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CCV O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING 2.5CCV CUT PREP END MILL
PAGE :01/ EDITING

V YA I
(2)
A CENTER
(1)
D R
:CCV HALF CYL L : W= * : C= DOWN CUT : X= : Y=
RADIUS ANGLE U LENGTH V LENGTH
: I= :YA= : U= : V=
RADIUS DEPTH WIDTH START ANGLE
: : : :
R= H= D= A=
0.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen description Select this screen to machine the concave half cylinder L type. It is possible to select either the DOWN CUT or UP CUT. Also, the angle of work can be specified. 2) Input item description H : Depth Always input the depth of half cylinder. Be sure to input. See 2.9.4 CVX HALF CYL L 2) for other input items. 3) Operation description The basic operation in each machining process is the same as that of CCV QUAD PR with corner rounding (ZC02).
275
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.10.5 CCV HLF CYL ring (ZC05)

PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 2+1/2 CCV O1000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING 2.5CCV CUT PREP END MILL
YA (2) I (1)
B63294EN/02
PAGE :01/ EDITING
D R
:CCV HLF CYL RING : W= * RADIUS : C= DOWN CUT ANGLE : X= RADIUS : Y= DEPTH
: I= :YA= : R= : H=
WIDTH ANGLE START POINT APPROACH
: D= : A= : B= :YC=
0. (1) 5.

2 WORK CO 1
3 WORK CO 2
4 WORK CO 3
5 WORK CO 4
6 WORK CO 5
7 WORK CO 6
1) Screen description Select this screen to machine the concave half cylinder ring. It is possible to select either the DOWN CUT or UP CUT. Also, a complete circle ring can be machined by specification. 2) Input item description See 2.10.4 CCV HALF CYL L 2) for details. 3) Operation description The basic operation in each machining process is the same as that of CCV QUAD PR (ZC02).
2.10.6 Copy (random) (ZC06)

See Hole position copy of standard program C (random) (ZL09) for details.
2.10.7 Copy (pattern) (ZC07)

See Hole position copy of standard program C (pattern) (ZL10) for details.
276
B63294EN/02
2.11 Contour Cutting Programming

Contour programming can be used for the following cutting: 1) Side cutting 2) Pocket cutting 3) Groove cutting
2.11.1 Contour side cutting

Contour side cutting forms a specified contour that consists of lines and arcs as shown in the figure below. NOTE Rough machining in contour side cutting is performed with cutter compensation C decreased by the depth of one cutting stroke. Depending on the contour, P/S alarm 41, the interference alarm for cutter compensation C, may be issued.
End mill
1. Approach
277

1 A APPROACH TYPE CIRCUMSCRIB ED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE RIGHT 2 CIRCUMSCRIB ED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE LEFT 3 TANGENT 4 VERTICAL 5 6 7
B63294EN/02
8
CUTTER COMPENSATION
(1) Screen explanation When the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed on the contour side preparation screen, this screen is always selected. On this screen, set the data required for the tool to approach the machining start point. (2) Explanation of input items A : APPROACH TYPE Select from the [CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE], [CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE], [TANGENT], and [VERTICAL] soft keys to specify how to move the tool to the machining start point. This item must always be specified. The initial value can be set for parameter No. 9424. 9424 Initial value of the approach type 1 2 3 4 : CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE : CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE : TANGENT : VERTICAL
If a value other than 1 to 4 is set, CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE is assumed the initial value. X : MACHINING START POINT X Y : MACHINING START POINT Y Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the machining start point of the contour side figure. These items must always be specified. F : APPROACH RATE Z Feedrate assumed up to machining point Z. This item must always be specified. The initial value can be set for parameter No. 9432. 9432 Initial value of the approach rate Z Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch D : CUTTER COMPENSATION Select between the [RIGHT] and [LEFT] soft keys to specify which side to cut in relation to the movement direction of the specified figure. For CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE, [RIGHT] is set first. For CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE, [LEFT] is set first. For TANGENT and VERTICAL, nothing is set. This item must always be specified. R : APPROACH RADIUS Radius assumed when the tool moves from the approach point to the machining start point. This item must always be specified. The initial value can be set for parameter No. 9430. 9430 Initial value of the approach radius
278
B63294EN/02
Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch I : APPROACH POINT DISTANCE J : APPROACH POINT DISTANCE
Distance from the approach point to the machining start point. The approach point is determined from the approach radius and this data. With both distances, the tool approaches with an undefined quarter arc. If both are specified, approach point distance (I) takes precedence. If, however, approach point distance I is equal to 0 and approach point distance J is equal to 10, approach point distance J takes precedence. Both of these prompts are displayed for CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE and CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE. For TANGENT, only APPROACH POINT DISTANCE I is displayed. For VERTICAL, only APPROACH POINT DISTANCE J is displayed. The initial values can be set for parameters Nos. 9426 and 9428. 9426 Initial value of approach point distance I
9428
Initial value of approach point distance J Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch NOTE Before moving from the current point to the approach point, the tool moves to the auxiliary approach point. Then, the tool moves to the approach point. The reason for this is to ensure that cutter compensation (G41/G42) starts up successfully. The distance from the auxiliary approach point to the approach point must be set for parameter No. 9434 beforehand. The distance is not output if APPROACH TYPE is VERTICAL.
9434
Distance from the approach point to the auxiliary approach point Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch If this parameter is set to 500 or less, 500 is assumed.
279

(3) Explanation of operation
B63294EN/02
(a) For CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE/CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE
Registration in memory ZY10 (start point) X_Y_ X: Machining start point coordinate X Y: Machining start point coordinate Y ZY14 (approach) X_Y_R_E_H_A_D_F_ X: Y: R: E: H: A: D: F: Approach point coordinate X Approach point coordinate Y Approach radius Auxiliary approach point coordinate X Auxiliary approach point coordinate Y Approach type Cutter compensation Approach rate Z Rapid traverse to the auxiliary approach point Rapid traverse to the Z axis approach point Rapid traverse to the approach point with compensation perCutting feed to the Z axis cutting point Cutting feed to the machining start point
Results of outputting NC statements G00G17G90X***Y***; Z#6993; G41/G42X***Y***D***; formed G01Z#6994F***; G02/G03***Y***R***F***;
280
B63294EN/02
(b) For TANGENT
Registration in memory ZY10 (start point) X_Y_ X: Machining start point coordinate X Y: Machining start point coordinate Y ZY14 (approach) X_Y_E_H_A_D_F_ X: Y: E: H: A: D: F: Approach point coordinate X Approach point coordinate Y Auxiliary approach point coordinate X Auxiliary approach point coordinate Y Approach type Cutter compensation Approach rate Z Rapid traverse to the auxiliary approach point To the Z axis approach point Rapid traverse to the approach point with compensation performed Cutting feed to the Z axis cutting point Cutting feed to the machining start point
Results of outputting NC statements G00G17G90X***Y***; Z#6993; G41/G42X***Y***D***; G01Z#6994F***; G01X***Y***F***;
281

(c) For VERTICAL
B63294EN/02
Registration in memory ZY10 (start point) X_Y_ X: Machining start point coordinate X Y: Machining start point coordinate Y ZY14 (approach) X_Y_A_D_F_ X: Y: A: D: F: Approach point coordinate X Approach point coordinate Y Approach type Cutter compensation Approach rate Z Rapid traverse to the approach point Rapid traverse to the Z axis approach point Cutting feed to the Z axis cutting point Cutting feed to the machining start point with compensation performed
Results of outputting NC statements G00G17G90X***Y***; Z#6993; G01Z#6994F***; G41/G42X***Y***F***D***;
When all the necessary data for approach is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, the system is switched to the figure selection screen shown in the figure below.
282
B63294EN/02

On the screen in the above figure, pressing the rightmost soft key [+] changes the soft key display to that shown in the figure below.
2. Horizontal line
1 B HORIZONTAL DIRECTION 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(1) Screen explanation When the [] or [] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. (2) Explanation of input items B : HORIZONTAL DIRECTION Select between the [] and [] soft keys to specify the horizontal direction. This item must always be specified. X : END POINT X COORDINATE Y : END POINT Y COORDINATE Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the end point of the horizontal line. Q: LINE LENGTH Enter the length of the horizontal line. NOTE During entry of figure data, pressing the leftmost soft key [<] causes the following message to be displayed: Figure data will be lost. Do you still want to end contouring? YES [<] NO CAN key Pressing the [<] soft key causes all of the data entered for contour preparation (the tool setting screen), as well as the contour figures, to be lost. CAUTION When entering a contour figure, be sure to check that the figure is a correct one that can be machined with the selected machining type and the tool used.If the entered figure is not a correct one, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. CAUTION When entering a contour figure, you can view the entered figure as a graphic figure. Be sure to check that the coordinates and the numeric values of the arc radius data displayed for each figure are correct. Check, in particular, the data that has been automatically calculated by conversational functions. If the data is not correct, the correct product cannot be machined.
283

3. Vertical line
B63294EN/02
1 B VERTICAL DIRECTION
(1) Screen explanation When the [] or [] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. (2) Explanation of input items Refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Horizontal line.
284
B63294EN/02
4. Slanted line
1 B H MOVEMENT DIRECTION HORIZONTAL/RIGHT ANGLE HORIZONTAL
2 RIGHT ANGLE
(1) Screen explanation When the [], [], [], or [] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. (2) Explanation of input items I : ANGLE X COMPONENT Enter the X component of the angle. J/K:ANGLE Y COMPONENT/ANGLE Enter the angle or the Y component of the angle. Usually, the angle can be specified in 0.001 units, with the angle of the right side of the X axis on the screen being assumed 0 and the counterclockwise direction being assumed the positive direction. Depending on the movement direction, however, the angle can be calculated as follows: H : HORIZONTAL/RIGHT ANGLE Select between the [HORIZONTAL] and [VERTICAL] soft keys to specify which of horizontal or right angle straight lines is to be defined in a previous block. P : REFERENCE BLOCK NUMBER When a horizontal or rightangle straight line is to be defined in a previous block, enter the block number.
285
B63294EN/02
[Programming figure example] To enter the figure shown above, the slant of slanted line No5 can be specified as follows: H : HORIZONTAL/RIGHT ANGLE = HORIZONTAL P : REFERENCE BLOCK NUMBER = 3 U : AUXILIARY POINT X COORDINATE V : AUXILIARY POINT Y COORDINATE Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the auxiliary point. D : AUXILIARY POINT DISTANCE Enter the distance from the auxiliary point to the slanted line to be defined. [Programming figure example]
To enter the figure shown above, the slant of slanted line No3 can be specified as follows: U : AUXILIARY POINT X COORDINATE = 150. V : AUXILIARY POINT Y COORDINATE = 0. D : Distance from the auxiliary point = 30. For an explanation of other items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Horizontal line. NOTE Usually, the angle can be specified in 0.001 units, with the angle of the right side of the X axis on the screen being assumed 0 and the counterclockwise direction being assumed the positive direction.
286
B63294EN/02
5. Arc
1 B MOVEMENT DIRECTION
(1) Screen explanation When the [ ] or [ ] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears.
(2) Explanation of input items B : DIRECTION OF ROTATION Select between the [ always be specified. R : ARC RADIUS Enter the radius of the arc. I : ARC CENTER X COORDINATE J : ARC CENTER Y COORDINATE Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the center of the arc. X : ARC END POINT X COORDINATE Y/K:ARC Y/CENTER ANGLE Y Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the end point of the arc. If only the arc Y/center angle (Y/K) are entered, the center angle is handled as the center angle of the arc. L : ARC CHORD LENGTH Enter the length of the chord of the arc (straight distance between the start and end points of the arc) Q : CIRCLE START POINT TANGENT ANGLE Enter the angle of the slant of the straight line at the start point of the arc that is tangent to the circle to be defined. The angle can be set in the range of 0 to 180, with angle of the +X axis being assumed 0 and the counterclockwise direction being assumed as the positive direction. ] and [ ] soft keys to specify the direction of rotation of the arc. This item must
287
B63294EN/02
As shown in the figure below, an arc is defined by specifying the angle of the slant of the tangent straight line at the start point of the arc Q, arc radius R, and direction B. The end point of the circle can be defined by specifying the length of the chord of the arc (length of the straight line from the start and end points of the arc).
6. Contact point
(1) Screen explanation When the [CONTACT POINT] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. If the figure to be specified is in contact with the one in front of it, press the [CONTACT POINT] soft key. When the [CONTACT POINT] soft key is pressed, this soft key is displayed in reverse video. When CONTACT POINT is specified, pressing the [CANCEL] soft key or the [CONTACT POINT] soft key, displayed in reverse video, causes CONTACT POINT to be canceled and the [CONTACT POINT] soft key, displayed in reverse video, to return to the previous display. (2) Explanation of input items There are no input items. 7. Chamfer
(1) Screen explanation When the [CHAMFER] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears.
288
B63294EN/02
(2) Explanation of input items B : CHAMFER AMOUNT
Enter the amount of chamfer at a corner. This item must always be specified. NOTE It is not possible to enter chamfer amounts in succession.
Chamfer amount
8. Corner R
(1) Screen explanation When the [CORNER R] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. (2) Explanation of input items B : CORNER R RADIUS Enter the radius of the arc at a corner. This item must always be specified. NOTE It is not possible to enter corner R radii in succession.
Corner R radius
289

9. Cancel By pressing the [CANCEL] soft key, the last entered contour figure is deleted. This is useful for modifying or reentering a contour figure. 10. Escape
B63294EN/02
1 A ESCAPE TYPE CIRCUMSCRIB ED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE
2 CIRCUMSCRIB ED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE
3 TANGENT
4 VERTICAL
(1) Screen explanation When the [ESCAPE] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen is always selected. On this screen, set the data necessary for the tool to escape from the machining end point. (2) Explanation of input items A : ESCAPE TYPE Select from the [CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE], [CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE], [TANGENT], and [VERTICAL] soft keys to specify how to move the tool from the machining end point. This item must always be specified. The initial value can be set for parameter No. 9425. 9425 Initial value of the escape type 1 2 3 4 : CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE : CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE : TANGENT : VERTICAL
If a value other than 1 to 4 is set, CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE is assumed the initial value. B : TARGET POINT X C : TARGET POINT Y Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the machining start point after the completion of an escape operation. The coordinates need not be entered if the target point is not required. F : ESCAPE RATE Z Feedrate assumed up to the R point coordinate. This item must always be specified. The initial value can be set for parameter No. 9433. 9433 Initial value of the escape rate Z Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
290
B63294EN/02
R : ESCAPE RADIUS
Radius assumed to move from the machining end point to the escape point. This item must always be specified. The initial value can be set for parameter No. 9431. 9431 Initial value of the escape radius Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch I : ESCAPE POINT DISTANCE J : ESCAPE POINT DISTANCE Distance from the machining end point to the escape point. The escape point is determined from the escape radius and this data. With both distances, the tool escapes with an undefined quarter arc. If both are specified, escape point distance (I) takes precedence. If, however, escape point distance I is equal to 0 and escape point distance J is equal to 10, escape point distance J takes precedence. Both of these prompts are displayed for CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE and CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE. For TANGENT, only ESCAPE POINT DISTANCE I is displayed. For VERTICAL, only ESCAPE POINT DISTANCE J is displayed. The initial values can be set for parameters Nos. 9427 and 9429. 9427 Initial value of escape point distance I
9429
Initial value of escape point distance J Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch NOTE After moving to the escape point, the tool moves to the auxiliary point. The reason for this is to ensure that cutter compensation (G40) is canceled successfully. Then, the move moves to the target point (if the target point is entered.) The distance from the escape point to the auxiliary escape point must be set for parameter No. 9435. The parameter is not output if ESCAPE TYPE is VERTICAL. Refer to the drawing in the NOTE of Approach.
9435
Distance from the escape point to the auxiliary escape point Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
If this parameter is set to 500 or less, 500 is assumed. (3) Explanation of operation (a) For CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE CLOCKWISE/CIRCUMSCRIBED CIRCLE COUNTERCLOCKWISE
291

Registration in memory ZY15 (escape) X_Y_B_C_D_E_R_F_A X: Y: B: C: D: E: R: F: A: Escape point coordinate X Escape point coordinate Y Target point coordinate X Target point coordinate Y Auxiliary escape point X Auxiliary escape point Y Escape radius Escape rate Z Escape type Cutting feed to the escape point Cutting feed to the Z axis escape point Rapid traverse to the Z axis target point Rapid traverse to the auxiliary point Rapid traverse to the target point Not output if the target point is not specified.
B63294EN/02
Results of outputting NC statements G02/03G90X***Y***R***F***; G01Z#6993F***; G00Z#6995; G40X***Y***D0; X***Y***; (b) For TANGENT
Registration in memory ZY15 (escape) X_Y_B_C_D_E_F_A_ X: Y: B: C: D: E: F: A: Escape point coordinate X Escape point coordinate Y Target point coordinate X Target point coordinate Y Auxiliary escape point X Auxiliary escape point Y Escape rate Z Escape type Cutting feed to the escape point Cutting feed to the Z axis escape point Rapid traverse to the Z axis target point Rapid traverse to the auxiliary point Rapid traverse to the target point Not output if the target point is not specified.
Results of outputting NC statements G01X***Y***F***; G01Z#6993F***; G00Z#6995; G40X***Y***D0; X***Y***;
292
B63294EN/02
(c) For VERTICAL
Registration in memory ZY15 (escape) X_Y_B_C_D_F_A_ X: Y: B: C: D: F: A: Escape point coordinate X Escape point coordinate Y Target point coordinate X Target point coordinate Y Auxiliary escape point X Escape rate Z Escape type Cutting feed to the escape point Cutting feed to the Z axis escape point Rapid traverse to the Z axis target point Rapid traverse to the target point Not output if the target point is not specified.
Results of outputting NC statements G01G90G40X***Y***F***D0; Z#6993F***; G00Z#6995; X***Y***; 11. Contour end When the [CONTOUR END] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, the data for the created contour figure is stored in the program memory. If the escape process is not specified, the system automatically switches to the escape menu. This allows a series of contour figures to be specified.
293
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.11.2 Contour pocketing A
B63294EN/02
Contour pocketing A is used to machine a pocket with an arbitrary figure consisting of straight lines and arcs, such as that shown in the figure below. In a pocket, up to six islands can be specified. The heights of the individual islands can be specified independently of the others. NOTE The outer wall cutting by rough machining in contour pocketing uses the amount of compensation plus the side finish machining allowance as the amount of compensation. Depending on the figure specified, therefore, cutter compensation C interference alarm (P/S alarm 41) may be issued.
NOTE
The following restrictions are imposed on the size of the pocket specified with contour pocketing: 1. Maximum number of cuts in the X direction (Xmax x 255 Xmax = (maximum horizontal length of the pocket)/(D*R/100) 2. Maximum number of cuts in the Y direction (Ymax x 255 Ymax = (maximum vertical length of the pocket)/(D*R/100) D: Tool diameter, R: Cutting width 3. Xmax * Ymax x 2500
1. Pocket outer wall preparation
294
B63294EN/02
1 H CUTTER COMPENSATION DIRECTION CUTTING DRCT. LEFT COMPENSATION UP 2 RIGHT COMPENSATION TWOWAY DOWN 3 4

5 6 7 8
(1) Screen explanation When the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed on the contour pocketing preparation screen, this screen is always selected. On this screen, enter the common data required for contour pocketing. (2) Explanation of input items H : CUTTER COMPENSATION DIRECTION Select between the [RIGHT COMPENSATION] and [LEFT COMPENSATION] soft keys to specify which side of the figure is subject to tool compensation in relation to the movement direction of the figure when the outer wall of the pocket is machined.
Q : CUTTING DRCT. Select from the [UP], [TWOWAY], and [DOWN] soft keys to specify the cutting direction of the tool when machining the pocket area. This item must always be specified.
[UP]
[DOWN]
NOTE
For a figure containing two or more machining areas, such as a concave or island figure, as shown in the figure below, twoway cutting cannot be specified, because some portion remains uncut (the hatched portion in the figure). The term machining area refers to the XY plane that remains after the pocket outer wall has been cut.
295

F : Z AXIS FEEDRATE
B63294EN/02
Feedrate assumed up to the machining Z point. This item must always be specified. The initial value can be set for parameter No. 9406. 9406 Initial value of the Z axis feedrate Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch 2. Specification of the machining start point
(1) Screen explanation When the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed on the contour pocketing outer wall preparation screen, this screen is always selected. On this screen, enter the machining start point of a contour pocketing figure. (2) Explanation of input items X : START POINT X COORDINATE Y : START POINT Y COORDINATE Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the machining start point of a contour pocketing figure. After all the necessary data for the machining start point has been entered, pressing the [INPUT END] soft key causes the system to switch to the figure selection screen shown in the figure below.
When the rightmost soft key [+] is pressed on the screen shown in the figure above, the soft key display changes to that shown in the figure below.
296
B63294EN/02
For an explanation of contour figures such as straight lines and arcs, refer to Contour side. NOTE When defining a pocket figure, specify a point on a side as the start point of the pocket outer wall. For example, when defining a pocket shown in the figure below, points A, B, C, and D cannot be specified as the start point. Specify a point on a side, such as point E, as the start point. This also applies to island figures.
CAUTION When entering a contour figure, be sure to check that the figure is a correct one that can be machined with the selected machining type and the tool used.If the entered figure is not a correct one, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. CAUTION When entering a contour figure, you can view the entered figure as a graphic figure. Be sure to check that the coordinates and the numeric values of the arc radius data displayed for each figure are correct. Check, in particular, the data that has been automatically calculated by conversational functions. If the data is not correct, the correct product cannot be machined. 3. Pocket outer wall end
1 0 ISLAND REQUIRED? NO
2 YES
(1) Screen explanation When the [END] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. On this screen, specify whether island figures are to be specified.
297

(2) Explanation of input items Q: ISLAND REQUIRED?
B63294EN/02
Following the specification of the pocket, select between the [YES] and [NO] soft keys to specify whether island figures are to be specified. When the [NO] soft key is pressed, followed by the [INPUT END] soft key, the data for the created contour figure is stored in the program memory. When the [YES] soft key is pressed, followed by the [INPUT END] soft key, the system switches to the island outer wall preparation screen. This item must always be specified. 4. Island outer wall preparation
1 H CUTTER COMPENSATION DIRECTION LEFT COMPENSATION
2 RIGHT COMPENSATION
(1) Screen explanation When the [YES] soft key is pressed on the pocket outer wall end screen, this screen appears. On this screen, enter the common data necessary for island outer wall machining. (2) Explanation of input items Z: ISLAND TOP Z AXIS COORDINATE Enter the coordinate of the Z point at the top of the island figure. If it is not entered, it is assumed to be at the same height as the pocket outer wall. For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Pocket outer wall preparation.
298
B63294EN/02
5. Island outer wall end
1 Q END/CONTINUE? END
2 CONTINUE
(1) Screen explanation When the [END] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. On this screen, specify whether to continue the entry of an island figure. Up to six island figures can be specified. The heights of the individual island figures can be specified independently of the others. (2) Explanation of input items Z: END/CONTINUE? Select between the [END] and [CONTINUE] soft keys to specify whether to continue the entry of an island figure. This item must always be entered. 6. Contour end When the [CONTOUR END] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, the data for the created contour figure is stored in the program memory. If the pocket outer wall end or island outer wall end process is not specified, the system automatically switches to the pocket outer wall end or island outer wall end menu. This allows a series of contour figures to be specified.
299
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.11.3 Contour pocketing B (option)
B63294EN/02
Contour pocketing B is used to machine a pocket figure programmed with arbitrary straight lines and arcs from the inside to the outside or from the outside to the inside in a spiral fashion (web fashion). After the tool cuts in the Z direction, therefore, the tool does not rise until the machining of the plane ends, allowing efficient machining. Even if an island figure exists, the tool does not jump but goes around to perform optimum machining. Island figures can be specified in the same way as in contour pocketing A. The side cannot, however, be tapered. Contour pocketing B is an option function. 1 MB of DRAM is used for the work area. (1) Program example
1. Display the contour pocketing preparation screen and enter data. On this screen, select [SPIRAL] for CUTTING DRCT. (U). This causes the pocket to be cut in a spiral fashion. For an explanation of input items, refer to Contour pocketing preparation (ZP01). 2. After the entry of data, press the [INPUT END] soft key, and the pocket outer wall preparation screen appears.
Only when [SPIRAL] is selected for CUTTING DRCT. (U) on the contour pocketing preparation screen, CUTIN DIRECTION (K) is displayed. For this item, select between the [FROM INSIDE] or [FROM OUTSIDE] soft keys to specify whether to cut the pocket from the inside or outside. For CUTTING DRCT., the [TWOWAY] soft key disappears. (2) Explanation of operation Contour pocketing B is divided into the following six processes depending on the machining process (B): 1. Rough machining 2. Spiral bottom finish machining 3. Spiral side finish machining 4. Chamfer 5. Hole machining 6. Hole (peck) Each machining process can be omitted depending on the settings of input items. The order of the machining processes cannot be changed. NOTE Rough machining 1 and spiral bottom finish machining 2 do not use the input item R point coordinates. They use parameter No. 9747, clearance.
300
B63294EN/02

(a) When the machining process (B) is rough machining
1. Rapid traverse to the start point. The start point is automatically calculated by the system. 2. Rapid traverse along the Z axis to the machining start point. The machining start point can be specified as follows, using the parameter. 9470 Cutin angle (Ap) Unit of setting: deg
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the tool cuts in obliquely. Take great care because no check is performed for the interference with the outer walls of the pocket and the island. #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 MOV The movement during infeed is performed with: MOV = 0: Surface + parameter No. 9474 = 1: Machining surface + parameter No. 9474 #0
#7 9475
9471
Feedrate assumed during movement in the tool diameter direction (Frm)
9472
Feedrate assumed during movement in the tool axis direction (Ftm) Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm/min 1/10000 inch/min If the feedrates are zero, the tool moves with rapid traverse.
301
B63294EN/02
9473
Clearance amount in the tool diameter direction (Cr)
9474
Clearance amount in the tool axis direction (Ct) Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm/min 1/10000 inch/min
NOTE
Depending on the clearance amount and the method of movement during infeed, the tool may not be pulled up to a sufficiently safe position, possibly causing the tool to interfere with the machining profile. When setting the clearance amount and the method of movement during in feed, take great care so that the tool does not interfere with the machining profile. 3. Cutting feed along the Z axis up to the machining point 4. The tool cuts from the inside to the outside or from the outside to the inside. It cuts clockwise or counterclockwise depending on up cut and down cut. The machining of corners and the top of the islands can be specified as follows, using the parameter. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 CNR #1 #0 ILA
9475
CHK
Specify whether to check pocketing to see if there are uncut portions. CHK = 0 : Does not perform the check. = 1 : If there are portions at corners or elsewhere that remain uncut during pocketing, automatically identifies the uncut portions and cuts them. (Processing speed slows down slightly.)
302
B63294EN/02
Specify the cutting method at corners during pocketing. CNR = 0 : Interpolates corners with arcs. = 1 : Interpolates corners with straight lines.
Specify whether to machine the top of islands. ILA = 0: Machines the top by controlling the depth of cut. = 1: Does not machine the top. 5. Cutting feed to the escape point 6. 1 to 5 are repeated until the Z point coordinate is reached. 7. Rapid traverse to the common safety point Z coordinate. Other features: With pocketing figures, multiple island figures (up to six) can be defined. Cutting is performed so that the defined island figures remain uncut. If the tool interferes with the pocketing figures and island figures, a tool path in which the interference is avoided is created. An efficient tool path in which escape operations in the tool axis direction are not performed whenever possible is created. Infeed in the tool axis direction is possible. Cutting is possible in either cutting direction, up cut and down cut. The cutting direction is automatically controlled around islands. Cutting is possible by performing infeed from the inside or outside. If there are portions at corners or elsewhere that remain uncut, the uncut portions can be automatically identified and cut. The cutting start point can be determined automatically. (a) When the machining process (B) is spiral bottom finishing Refer to Rough machining of Contour pocketing B. (b) When the machining process (B) is spiral side finish machining Refer to (d) Finish machining of (3) Explanation of operation of Contour pocketing preparation (ZP09).
303

(c) When the machining process (B) is chamfer
B63294EN/02
Refer to (d) Finish machining of (3) Explanation of operation of Contour pocketing preparation (ZP09). (d) When the machining process (B) is hole machining or hole (peck) Refer to Explanation of operation of Drilling (ZH01) and Peck drilling (ZH02). NOTE 1 Because of the restrictions on the contour figure or the size of the work area for calculation (1MB), an alarm may be issued. If this occurs, separate the input figure, i.e., separate the definition of the figure into multiple definitions. (Divide the machining area into multiple areas.) NOTE 2 In pocketing figures and island figures, the side cannot be tapered. NOTE 3 If the tool interferes with the pocketing figure or island figures during side finish machining, a tool path in which the interference is avoided is not created. NOTE 4 Foreground operation with this function and background drawing cannot be used at the same time. If an attempt is made, an alarm not enough memory is issued. NOTE 5 To use this function, the following parameters are required in addition to the option: 9476
Address of the argument representing the input item CUTTING DRCT. on the contour pocketing preparation screen
Enter the decimal equivalents of ASCII codes. To use FANUC standard macros, set 85 (U). 9477 Value of the argument representing the input data [SPIRAL] on the contour pocketing preparation screen To use FANUC standard macros, set 3 (SPIRAL). NOTE 6 This function calculates an optimum tool path before executing contour pocketing. For complicated figures profile, therefore, much time may be required for the calculation. When drawing is in progress, a message Calculating the tool path is displayed. If the tool path is not to be calculated during execution, execute a program converted into NC statements.
304
B63294EN/02 2.11.4 Contour grooving
Contour grooving is used to machine a groove with an arbitrary figure consisting of straight lines and arcs, such as that shown in the figure below. NOTE In contour grooving, rough machining is executed while decreasing the amount of compensation by the depth of cut in one path by using cutter compensation C. Depending on the specified figure, therefore, a cutter compensation C interference alarm (P/S alarm 41) may be issued.
The ends of a contour groove becomes semicircular like a track figure.
1. Specification of the machining start point
(1) Screen explanation When the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed on the contour grooving screen, this screen is always selected. On this screen, enter the machining start point on the contour grooving figure and other information.
305

(2) Explanation of input items X : START POINT X COORDINATE Y : START POINT Y COORDINATE
B63294EN/02
Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the machining start point of a contour grooving figure. F : Z AXIS FEEDRATE Feedrate assumed up to the machining Z pint. This item must always be specified. After all the necessary data for the machining start point has been entered, pressing the [INPUT END] soft key causes the system to switch to the figure selection screen shown in the figure below.
For an explanation of contour figures such as straight lines and arcs, refer to Contour side. 2. Movement
(1) Screen explanation When the [MOVE] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, this screen appears. On this screen, enter the machining start position and other information if there is a groove figure at a distant point that is to be machined under the same cutting conditions. (2) Explanation of input items R : ESCAPE Z COORDINATE Enter the Z coordinate of the escape position. When it is not entered, the tool returns to only point R. X : NEXT FIGURE START POINT X COORDINATE Y : NEXT FIGURE START POINT Y COORDINATE Enter the absolute X and Y coordinates of the machining start point of the next figure.
306
B63294EN/02
3. Contour end
When the [CONTOUR END] soft key is pressed on the figure selection screen, the data for the created contour figure is stored in the program memory. This allows a series of contour figures to be specified. CAUTION When entering a contour figure, be sure to check that the figure is a correct one that can be machined with the selected machining type and the tool used. If the entered figure is not a correct one, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. CAUTION When entering a contour figure, you can view the entered figure as a graphic figure. Be sure to check that the coordinates and the numeric values of the arc radius data displayed for each figure are correct. Check, in particular, the data that has been automatically calculated by conversational functions. If the data is not correct, the correct product cannot be machined.
307
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.11.5 Calculating a contour figure
B63294EN/02
A contour figure is hereinafter called a figure block. A figure block whose end point has not been determined yet is called a pending figure block. A pending figure block is displayed as a dashed line. The contour figure data programming screen contains more data programming items than necessary. The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks and the end point are calculated using these data items to release the pending state of the preceding figure block. NOTE The maximum contour figure is 50 blocks. But, it is possible to increase the maximum number 200 blocks from 50 blocks by setting the following optional function. S Contour figure block extension (J756) (B) (X) (Y) (Q)
(1) Horizontal line Positive direction of a horizontal line X coordinate of the end point of a horizontal line Y coordinate of a horizontal line Length of a horizontal line (a) When a preceding figure block is not pending 1. When (B) and (Y) are programmed The horizontal line is pending.
(Start point)
2. When (B), (Q), and (Y) are programmed The horizontal line is uniquely defined.
Q (End point) (Start point)
3. When (X) and (Y) are programmed The horizontal line is uniquely defined.
(X,YS) (End point)
(XS,YS) (Start point)
(b) When the preceding figure block is pending and the contact point is not specified 1. When (B), and (Q) are programmed A warning message is displayed. The message indicates that the programmed data is incorrect. 2. When (B) and (Y) are programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
308
B63294EN/02
2.
(End point of 1., start point of 2.)
1. Y
When the figure block is an arc, the intersection selection request screen (below) is displayed. Specify 1 or 2 to select a desired intersection.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 POCKETTING 1 2 3 4 5 6 O6000 PAGE :01/ CREATING FEED SPINDL 57. 3180.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDAI INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL 62. 4.000 (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= 0. Y= 0. X= 50. Y= 0. X= Y= X= Y=
R=
CONTOUR FROM (SELECT CROSSING) CROSSING NMB : P=
DEPRESS THE SOFT KEY.

< POINT1 POINT2 INPUT END
3. When (X) and (Y) are programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
(X,Y) (End point of 2.)
2.
(End point of 1., start point of 2.)
1.
309

4. When (B), (Q), and (Y) are programmed
B63294EN/02
The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
Q (End point of 1., start point of 2.) (End point of 2.)2. 1.
(c) When the preceding figure block is pending and the contact point is specified, only an arc can be specified as the preceding figure block. 1. When (B) is programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 POCKETTING 1 2 3 4 5 O6000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= X= X= PAGE :01/ CREATING TOOL NO 62. 0. 0. Y= Y= Y= NDAI 4.000 0. 100. FEED SPINDL 57. 3180.
R=
50.
DEPRESS THE SOFTKEY,SELECT EDITTING (INSERT,DELETE OR ALTER

< DELETE ALTER INSERT
2. When (B) and (Q) are programmed As with 1. above, the contact point selection request screen is displayed. Select a desired contact point on the screen.
Q 1
310
B63294EN/02
3. When (X) is programmed
As with 1. above, the contact point selection request screen is displayed. Select a desired contact point on the screen.
4. When (B) and (Y) are programmed From the two contact points, select the contact point whose Y coordinate is equal to (Y). If there is no contact point whose Y coordinate is equal to (Y), the contact point selection request screen is displayed.
1 Y
5. When (B), (Q), and (Y) are programmed As with 4. above, the horizontal line that is not pending is created.
Q 1 Y
311

6. When (X) and (Y) are programmed As with 4. above, the horizontal line that is not pending is created.
B63294EN/02
X Y
(2) Vertical line Positive direction of a vertical line Y coordinate of the end point of a vertical line X coordinate of a vertical line Length of a vertical line 1. When (B) and (X) are programmed The vertical line is pending. (B) (Y) (X) (Q)
(a) Data programming when the preceding figure block is not pending
(Start point)
2. When (B), (Q), and (X) are programmed The vertical line is uniquely defined.
(End point)
Q (Start point)
312
B63294EN/02
3. When (X) and (Y) are programmed The vertical line is uniquely defined.
(End point)
(XS,Y)
(Start point)
(XS,YS)
(b) When the preceding figure block is pending and the contact point is not specified 1. When (B) is programmed A warning message is displayed. The message indicates that the programmed data is incorrect. 2. When (B) and (X) are programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
2. X
1. (End point of 1., start point of 2.)
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 POCKETTING 1 2 3 4 5 O6000 PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= X= X= PAGE :01/ CREATING TOOL NO 62. 0. Y= Y= Y= NDAI 4.000 0. R= FEED SPINDL 57. 3180.
CONTOUR FORM (SELECT CROSSING) CROSSING NMB : P=

313

3. When (X) and (Y) are programmed
B63294EN/02
(X,Y) 2.
4. When (B), (Q), and (X) are programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
2. Q
(c) When the preceding figure block is pending and the contact point is specified Only an arc can be specified as the preceding figure block. 1. When (B) is programmed The point of intersection with the preceding figure block is calculated.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDAI INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL 61. 2.000 (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= 0. Y= 0. X= 50. Y= 0. 3 X= 2 50. Y=4 0. X= Y=
R=
50.
DEPRESS SOFTKEY,SELECT CONTOUR FORM. PUSH [TANGNT] KEY FOR SPECIFYING TAGENT.
< TANGNT CHAMF. CRNRR CANCEL ENS CONTOR END
314
B63294EN/02
2. When (B), and (Q) are programmed
As with 1. above, the contact point selection request screen is displayed. Select a desired contact point on the screen.
3. When (Y) is programmed As with 1. above, the contact point selection request screen is displayed. Select a desired contact point on the screen.
4. When (B) and (X) are programmed From the two contact points, select the contact point whose X coordinate is equal to (X). If there is no contact point whose X coordinate is equal to (X), the contact point selection request screen is displayed.
315

5. When (B), (Q), and (X) are programmed As with 4. above, the vertical line that is not pending is created.
B63294EN/02
6. When (X) and (Y) are programmed As with 4 above, the vertical line that is not pending is created.
(X,Y)
(3) Oblique line Positive direction X coordinate of the end point Y coordinate of the end point Length X component of an angle Y component/Angle 1. When (X) and (Y) are programmed The oblique line is uniquely defined. (B) (X) (Y) (Q) (I) (J/K)
(End point)
(X,Y)
(Start point)
316
B63294EN/02

2. When (B), (Q), and (J/K < 90) are programmed The oblique line is uniquely defined.
(End point) Q
K (Start point)
3. When (Q) and (J/Ky 90 ) are programmed The oblique is uniquely defined.
(End point) Q K (Start point)
4. When (Q), (I), and (J/K) are programmed The oblique line is uniquely defined.
(End point) Q J I (Start point)
5. When (B) and (J/K < 90 ) are programmed The oblique line is pending.
K (Start point)
317

6. When (J/Ky 90 ) is programmed The oblique line is pending.
B63294EN/02
Q K (Start point)
7. When (I) and (J/K) are programmed The oblique line is pending.
Q J (Start point)
8. When (B), (J/K < 90 ), and (X) or (Y) are programmed 9. When (J/Ky 90 ) and (X) or (Y) are programmed 10. When (I), (J/K), and (X) or (Y) are programmed The oblique line is uniquely defined. X or Y coordinate (End point)
K (Start point) (b) When the preceding figure block is pending and the contact point is not specified 1. When (B), (X), (Y), and (J/K< 90 ) are programmed or 2. When (X), (Y), and (J/K y 90 ) are programmed or 3. When (X), (Y), (I), and (J/K) are programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
318
B63294EN/02
(End point) (X,Y) 2. (End point of 1., start point of 2.)
1.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDAI INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL 61. 2.000 (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= 0. Y= 0. X= 50. Y=2 0. X= Y= X= Y=
R=
CONTOUR FROM (SELECT CROSSING) CROSSING NMB : P=

(c) When the preceding figure block is pending and the contact point is specified Only an arc can be specified as the preceding figure block. 1. When (B) and (J/K< 90 ) are programmed or 2. When (J/Ky90 ) is programmed or 3. When (I) and (J/K) are programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 POCKETTING 1 2 3 4 5 O6000 PAGE :01/ CREATING FEED SPINDL 57. 3100.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDAI INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL 62. 4.000 (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= 0. Y= 0. X= 47.141 Y= 66.667 X= 0. Y= 200.
R=
50.
DEPRESS THE SOFTKEY,SELECT EDITTING (INSERT,DELETE OR ALTER

319

4. When (X) and (Y) are programmed
B63294EN/02
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 POCKETTING 1 2 3 4 5 O6000 PAGE :01/ CREATING
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDAI FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL 62. 4.000 57. 3100. (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= 0. Y= 0. X= 25. Y= 93.30. R= 50. X= 100 Y= 50. R=
DEPRESS THE SOFTKEY,SELECT EDITTING (INSER,DELETE OR ALTER

(4) Arc Positive direction of rotation Radius of an arc X coordinate of the center of an arc Y coordinate of the center of an arc X coordinate of the end point of an arc End point Y/Central angle of the arc 1. When (B), (I), and (J) are programmed The arc is pending. (B) (R) (I) (J) (X) (Y/K)
(Start point) (I,J)
320
B63294EN/02
2. When (B), (R), (X), and (Y/K) are programmed The arc of a smaller circle is selected.
(End point) (X,Y)
R (Start point)
3. When (B), (I), (J), (X), and (Y/K) are programmed The arc is uniquely defined.
(X,Y) (End point)
(Start point) (I,J)
4. When (B), (I), (J), and (Y/K) are programmed The arc is uniquely defined.
(End point)
K (I,J) (Start point)
321

5. When (B) and (R) are programmed
B63294EN/02
Specify a contact point and X coordinate of the end point of a horizontal line. Then, the arc can be defined uniquely.
(X,Y)
1.
R 3. Contact point 2.
(b) Data programming when the preceding figure block is pending and the contact point is not specified 1. When (B), (R), (I), and (J) are programmed The intersection between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO. NDAI INITAL SETING CONTOR POCKETEND MILL 61. 2.000 (START OF POCKET WALL) START PT. X= 0. Y= 0. X= 50. Y= 0. X= 23.301. Y= 25. X= 0. Y= 100.
R=
50.
DEPRESS SOFTKEY,SELECT CONTOUR FORM. PUSH [TANGNT] KEY FOR SPECIFYING TAGENT.
< TANGNT CHAMF CRNRR CANCEL END CONTOR END
2. When (B), (I), (J), (X), and (Y/K) are programmed As with 1. above, the intersection selection request screen is displayed. Select a desired intersection. (c) Data programming when the preceding figure block is a pending line and the contact point is specified 1. When (B), (I), and (J) are programmed The contact point between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
2. (I,J) (Start point of 1.) Contact point 1.
322
B63294EN/02
2. When (B), (I), (J), and (Y/K) are programmed
The contact point between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
(End point of 2.) 2. K
(I,J)
(Start point of 1.) Contact point 1.
3. When (B), (I), (J), (X), and (Y/K) are programmed The contact point between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
(End point of 2.) 2.
(I,J)
(Start point of 1.) Contact point 1.
4. When (B), (R), (X), and (Y/K) are programmed The contact point between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
(End point of 2.)
(X,Y) R
2. Contact point 1.
(d) Data programming when the preceding figure block is a pending arc and the contact point is specified When the rotation direction for the preceding figure block is the same as that for the current figure block, be sure to program the arc radius for the current block. If the radius of the arc is not programmed, a warning message indicating that the programmed data is incorrect is displayed. 1. When (B), (I), (J), and (R) (for an arc whose direction is the same as that of an arc specified in the preceding block) are programmed The contact point between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
323
B63294EN/02
2.
R (I,J)
(Start point of 1.) 1.
Contact point
2. When (B), (I), (J), (Y/K), and (R) (for an arc whose direction is the same as that of an arc specified in the preceding block) are programmed The contact point between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
(I,J) R K Contact point 1.
2. (Start point of 1.)
3. When (B), (I), (J), (X), (Y/K), and (R) (for an arc whose direction is the same as that of an arc specified in the preceding block) are programmed The contact point between the current and preceding figure blocks is calculated.
(I,J) (X,Y) 2. Contact point R 1. (Start point of 1.)
324
B63294EN/02
(5) Specifying a line that touches two arcs
2. 3.
(I3,J3) (I1,J1) 1.
1. Arc created by programming (B), (I), and (J) (pending) 2. Oblique line created by programming only (B) (pending) 3. Arc created by programming (B), (R), (I), and (J) If the above figures are specified in the above order, oblique line 2 can uniquely be defined.
325
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.11.6 Contour repetition function (option)

(1) Outline
B63294EN/02
In contouring by conversational automatic programming, a series of figures can be automatically repeated several times. There are three repetition types. This function helps the operator to program even complicated figures easily. 1. Repetition with linear movement
Repeat the figure twice by moving it linearly through X and Y. Y X Basic figure
2. Repetition with rotation
(X,Y) Repeat the figure twice by rotating it counterclockwise through about (X, Y).
3. Mirror transformation about an arbitrary linear axis
(X,Y)
326
B63294EN/02
4. Screen configuration
PROGRAM O0040(CONTOUR2)
PAGE :01/ CREATING
5 6 NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 SIDE CUTING CONTOR PREP. END MILL 65. 10.000 229. 1272. 4 Y= 10. 1 START PT. X= 10. 2 APPROA X= 0. Y= 0. R= 10. 3 X= 20. Y= 0. 4 X= 20. Y= 15. 5 CORNER X= 25. Y= 20. R= 5. 6 X= 40. Y= 20. 7
SELECT FROM SOFTKEYS. IF BLOCK IS TANGENT, PRESS TANGENT SOFTKEY. 1

< TANGNE CHAMF. CRNRR CANCEL ESCAPE CONTOR + END
When the [+] soft key on the above screen is pressed, the soft keys for contour repetition appear.
PROGRAM O0040(CONTOUR2) PAGE :01/ CREATING
5 6 NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 SIDE CUTING CONTOR PREP. END MILL 65. 10.000 229. 1272. 4 Y= 10. 1 START PT. X= 10. 2 APPROA X= 0. Y= 0. R= 10. 3 X= 20. Y= 0. 4 X= 20. Y= 15. 5 CORNER X= 25. Y= 20. R= 5. 6 X= 40. Y= 20. 7
SELECT FROM SOFTKEYS. IF BLOCK IS TANGENT, PRESS TANGENT SOFTKEY. 1

< APPROACH TRANS- ROTAT- SYMMTLAT CO ION CO TRY CO CONTOR + END
1.1 Linear movement

PROGRAM O0040(CONTOUR2) PAGE :01/ CREATINGTRA.COPY 6 R2
5 NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME Y 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 SIDE CUTING CONTOR PREP. END MILL 4 1 START PT. X= R1 2 APPROA X= 3 X= END PT. 4 X= 5 CORNER X= 6 X= 7 START PT. 2 3
CONTOUR FORM (TRANSLATION COPY) NO. OF REPEAT : R=
1
(1) Screen explanation Press the [TRANSLAT CO] soft keA)y. Then, the following data input screen appears: Linear movement is performed a specified number of times, using the end point of a specified figure as the start point.
327

(2) Explanation of input items R: NO. OF REPEAT Specify the repetition count.
B63294EN/02
(3) Operation procedure 1. Create the figure to be repeated, then press the [TRANSLAT CO] soft key. The linear movement screen is displayed. 2. Input 2 for NO. OF REPEAT (R), and press the [INPUT END] soft key.
3. Position the cursor on the first block of the figure to be repeated, then press the [START POINT] soft key. 4. The screen changes as shown in the figure below. Position the cursor on the last block of the figure to be repeated, then press the [END POINT] soft key. Press the [RANGE REESTABLISH] soft key, and the screen shown in 2 reappears.
5. The screen changes as shown in the figure below. The figure resulting from the repetition is displayed on the screen. Press the [RANGE REESTABLISH] soft key, and the screen shown in 2 reappears.
328
B63294EN/02
6. Press the [EXEC] soft key to confirm the figure. 1.2 Rotation
PROGRAM O0040(CONTOUR2) PAGE :01/ CREATINGROT.COPY 5 6
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME Y 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 SIDE CUTING CONTOR PREP. END MILL 4 1 START PT. X= 2 APPROA X= 3 X= 4 X= 5 CORNER X= 6 X= 7
END PT.
START PT.
K
X
2 3
CONTOUR FORM (ROTATION COPY) NO. OF REPEAT : R= CENTER X : X= CENTER Y : Y= ANGLE : K= *
(X,Y)
1
(1) Screen explanation Press the [ROTATION CO] soft key. Then, the following data input screen appears: Rotation is performed about a specified rotation center, through a specified angle, a specified number of times, where the end point of a specified figure is used as the start point. (2) Explanation of input items R: NO. OF REPEAT Specify the repetition count. X: CENTER X Y: CENTER Y Input the absolute X and Y coordinates of the rotation center. K: ANGLE Specify the angle of rotation, in degrees. Specify a negative value for clock wise rotation, and a positive value for counterclockwise rotation. (3) Operation procedure Refer to (3) Operation procedure of Linear movement.
329
B63294EN/02
NOTE
As the rotation angle, the angle between the line connecting the start point of a specified figure and the rotation center, and the line connecting the end point and the rotation center, is normally specified. If a different angle is specified, movement from the end point of the specified figure to the end point specified in the first block of the rotated figure is assumed to be specified for the block.
B A C End point C B
Rotation center : Specified angle : Angle formed by the start point and end point of a specified figure and the rotation center Start point A
1.3 Screen for mirror transformation

PROGRAM O0040(CONTOUR2) PAGE :01/ CREATINGSYM.COPY 5 NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING Y 002 SIDE CUTING CONTOR PREP. END MILL 4 1 START PT. X= 2 APPROA X= 3 X= 4 X= 5 CORNER X= 6 X= 7 6 BASE AXIS END PT.
START PT.
K 2 3 ( X ,Y)
CONTOUR FORM (SYMMETRY COPY) BASE POINT : X= BASE POINT : Y= ANGLE : K=
INPUT EITHER BASE POINT OR ANGLE. 1

(1) Screen explanation Press the [SYMMETRY CO] soft key. Then, the following data input screen appears: (2) Input item explanation X:SYMMETRY AXIS X : Specify the X and Y coordinates through which the symmetry axis Y:SYMMETRY AXIS Y for mirror transformation passes. The symmetry axis connects the point at the specified X and Y coordinates with the end point of the specified figure. K:ANGLE Specify the angle between the symmetry axis and the +Xaxis, in de grees. With the +X direction assumed to be 0 a negative value indicates a clockwise displacement, while a positive value indicates a counter clockwise displacement. Specify SYMMETRY AXIS X, Y or ANGLE. If both items are specified at the same time, SYMMETRY AXIS X, Y is used.
330
B63294EN/02
(3) Operation procedure
Refer to (3) Operation procedure of Linear movement. NOTE 1 If the program expands to more than 50 blocks as a result of repetition, an alarm is issued. NOTE 2 When a corner R and chamfer are included in a figure to be repeated, they are indicated as an arc and straight line after repetition is executed, respectively. NOTE 3 If an approach or escape block is included in the blocks that define a figure to be repeated, an alarm is issued. NOTE 4 The block immediately before the blocks that define a figure to be repeated, and the last block of these blocks defining the figure, must be determined. NOTE 5 Neither the corner R nor chamfer block can be specified immediately before and after the blocks that define a figure to be repeated. In addition, neither corner R nor chamfer can be specified at the beginning or end of the blocks that define a figure to be repeated. NOTE 6 If the blocks defining a figure to be repeated are followed by an existing block, and the last block of the blocks defining the figure and the existing block do not form a continuous figure, an alarm is issued to indicate that intersection cannot be obtained. The blocks generated by repetition are then overwritten. To prevent this, after selecting the repetition range, always check the end point of the last block of the blocks that define the figure to be repeated, then press [REPEAT EXEC].
331
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.11.7 Contour editing

(1) Inserting Figure data is inserted after the block specified with the cursor as follows:
B63294EN/02
1. Move the cursor to the position at which data is to be inserted. The soft keys change as follows:
>
DELETE
ALTER INSERT
FIGURE WINDOW
Fig. 2.11.7 (a) 2. Press the soft key [INSERT]. The figure selection screen shown below appears. Press the soft key corresponding to the figure to be inserted.
PROGRAM o1000 PAGE :01/01 EDITING
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 22 X 0.000 Y 50.000 23 X100.000 Y 50.000 24 X100.000 Y50.000 25 X Y 26 END OF POCKET WALLCONTINVE 27 PROCESS END 28 AVXILIARY END OF PROG 29
DEPRESS SOFTKEY,SELECT CONTOUR FORM. PUSH [TANGNT] KEY FOR SPECIFYING TANGENT.
// f TANGNT CHAMF CRNRR CANCEL END CONTOR END
Fig. 2.11.7 (b) 3. After entering the figure data, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The figure data is inserted and the soft keys return to those shown in Fig. 2.11.7 (a). (2) Changing The block specified by the cursor is changed as follows: 1. Move the cursor to the block to be changed. The soft keys change to those shown in Fig. 2.11.7 (a). 2. Press the soft key [ALTER]. The screen changes to the data input screen for the figure specified by the block at the cursor position. 3. After entering the new data for the figure, press the soft key [INPUT END]. The contour is calculated and the soft keys return to those shown in Fig. 2.11.7 (a). (3) Deleting The block specified by the cursor is deleted. Only one block can be deleted at a time. Delete a figure as follows: 1. Move the cursor to the block to be deleted. The soft keys change to those shown in Fig. 2.11.7 (a). 2. Press the soft key [DELETE]. The specified block is deleted. However, if the intersection of the figures specified by the blocks preceding and following the block to be deleted cannot be obtained, an alarm occurs and the block is not deleted. The soft key [CANCEL] can be used to delete the last block.
332
B63294EN/02 2.11.8 Contour figure window function
During contour programming, the programmed contour figure is drawn in a window. The contour figure displayed in the window can be resized by using the scaling function. The conventional method of display can also be specified by using a parameter, such that the contour figure is drawn overlapping the program list. #7 9700 FWC FWC : Determines whether the contour figure is displayed when the figure window is closed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed overlapping the current screen (1) Opening and closing the figure window The figure window is open (open mode) while the [FIGURE WINDOW] soft key is turned on (displayed as if it had been pressed) on the figure selection screen. Pressing the [FIGURE WINDOW] soft key turns off the soft key (displayed as if it had been released), thus closing the figure window (close mode). Open or close mode of the figure window is maintained while other screens are displayed or the power is turned off, in the same way as for the guidance window. By default, the figure window is opened. #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
333

(2) Figure scaling function
B63294EN/02
Pressing the [+] soft key on the figure selection screen displays the soft keys used for scaling.
SCALE1 SCALE2 SCALE NORMAL
: ncreases the scaling factor applied to the display of the contour figure. The scaling factor can be increased to a maximum of 99.9 in units of 0.1 (1.0 when the soft key is held down). : Reduces the scaling factor applied to the display of the contour figure. The scaling factor can be reduced to a minimum of 1.0 in units of 0.1 (1.0 when the soft key is held down). : Draws the contour figure with the specified scaling factor applied. : Draws the contour figure with the standard scaling factor (1.0) applied, such that the entire contour figure can be displayed in the window.
NOTE
Once the contour figure has been magnified, the magnification is maintained during subsequent contour programming. The standard display is restored at the restart of contour programming after it has been terminated once. Once the figure window has been closed then opened again during magnified drawing, the standard display is restored. The figure window cannot be opened on the figure detail screen (when the figure detail window and guidance window are open). To display the figure window on the figure detail screen, close the guidance window.
334
B63294EN/02 2.11.9 Contour alarms

(1) Alarm types Alarms are handled according to their types as follows: (i) Alarms related to input data
(ii) Alarms related to the calculation of the intersections (iii) General alarms other than (i) and (ii) above (iv) System alarms (i) Alarms related to input data The cursor moves to the item which caused the alarm and an alarm message is displayed. (not inputted neccessary data) When [INPUT END] is pressed without entering data, the cursor moves to the top line and an alarm message is displayed.(no data is entered) (ii) Alarms related to the calculation of the intersections The intersection of the entered figure and the preceding figure and that of the entered figure and the following figure are calculated. When an error occurs, an alarm message is displayed. (the crossing point cannot be obtained) When the operator changes the data and presses the soft key [INPUT END], the intersections are recalculated. An intersection calculation error occurs, for example, when a circle is defined at the position where the circle does not have a intersection with the line defined previously. The cursor does not move to the invalid data item because it cannot be determined whether the alarm is caused by an invalid center coordinate or invalid radius. (iii) General alarms other than (i) and (ii) above One of the following messages is displayed according to the alarm: 1. The crossing point cannot be obtained. Check inputted data, and change the data. 2. The tangential point cannot be obtained. Check inputted data, and change the data. 3. Incorrect data. The cursor automatically moves to the invalid data item. 4. This contour form block is not specified more than 2 blocks in a program. When more than one figure is specified in a screen in which only one can be specified, such as a figure for approach or a start point. 5. Not inputted neccessary data. The cursor automatically moves to the missing item. 6. Cannot specify escape as approach form not inputted. 7. Cannot specify this figure as previous figure block is pending. When a figure is defined in a screen such as the screens for retraction or pocket or island wall end, the figure specified immediately before must be fixed. 8. Number of blocks exceeded 50 blocks. The number of figures, however, is not always 50 because an arc is counted as two blocks. 9. Not continued between start and end line. The figure of a pocket or island must be closed for contour pocket cutting. 10. Incorrect comment for contour. The figure cannot be restored because invalid raw data for figure input is contained in comments in the contour program being edited or checked. 11. Number of islands exceeded 6 blocks. 12. Pending block number exceeds 10. 13. The block cannot delete. Basic figures such as figures for the approach or start point cannot be deleted. When only one figure is specified between the start point and end block (for example, start point > arc > end block), the figure cannot be deleted.
335

14. Cannot alter other contour form.
B63294EN/02
Figures such as those for the approach or start point, or those specified in screens such as the screen for pocket wall start/end or island wall start/end cannot be changed to other figures. 15. Cannot make the last contours that continue the first contours. An attempt to connect the last figure to the first figure by pressing the soft key [END] so that the entire figure is closed failed in pocket cutting. 16. Protected program memory. The created figure data cannot be written in memory because the memory protect switch is on when contouring is ended. 17. Tangential point is defined. Specify circle for the next block. 18. Cannot specify chamfer, corner between same contour forms except taper, circle. 19. Cannot specify the data I, J (K) and H, P at the same time. 20. Cannot specify continual oblique line using auxriary point. 21. Cannot specify tangent angle Q of arc when previous figure block is pending. 22. Cannot create figure after this figure block. An attempt is made to create chamfer or corner R after approach. Alternatively, an attempt is made to create a figure such as a line or arc, without specifying a start point after pocket wall start or island wall start. 23. Cannot find contour prepare blocks. An attempt is made to create figure data after the contour start block when contouring is ended. However, the contour start block is not found. 24. Not inputted any contour block. An attempt is made to create a figure such as corner R or chamfer when no figure is input. 25. Approach, chamfer and corner cannot specify tangential point. 26. During calculation, softkey cannot be accepted. A key input failed to be accepted when the contour is calculated. Pressing the keys too fast tends to cause this alarm. 27. Last contour form is not end of pocket wall or island wall. An attempt is made to end contouring without specifying the wall end in pocket cutting. 28. Cannot specify chamfer and corner continuously. 29. Teach the editting mode. (deleet, insert or alter) Pressing [INPUT END] in the figure input screen has no effect because the edit mode is not specified (not displayed at the top right of the screen). 30. Cannot program for the EDIT mode or BGEDIT mode. A figure is created in a mode other than the EDIT mode or background EDIT mode when contouring is ended. The figure data is not stored in memory. (iv) System alarms System alarms are caused by an error in internal processing for calculating the contour. A system alarm is displayed as SYSTEM ALARM nnn, where nnn is the alarm number assigned as follows: 1. System alarms in input data processing (nnn = 1 to 99) 2. System alarms in the calculation of the intersection (nnn = 100 to 199) 3. System alarms in other processings (nnn = 200 to 299) When a system alarm occurs, contact FANUC.
336
B63294EN/02
2.11.10 Restrictions and rules on calculating the contour

(1) Rules on the automatic determination of the tangent When the calculation of the tangent of a line and arc yields two points, one of the two points is automatically selected as the tangent by the rule described below. When the tangent cannot be automatically selected, the selection screen appears, and the operator must select the tangent. (a) Arc and horizontal line (i) When first an arc is defined and then a horizontal line is defined A tangent vector on an arc is determined so that it indicates the direction in which the tool moves along the arc. If the direction of the horizontal line is specified, the tangent at which the tangent vector indicates the same direction as the horizontal line is selected. A
r Tangent A is selected.
(ii) When first a horizontal line is defined and then an arc is defined (at least the X and Y coordinates of the end point, (X) and (Y), and the radius, (R), are given for the arc) Two arcs having a tangent on the line may be obtained (only small arcs whose central angle is 180 degrees or less are considered). The direction of rotation from the tangent to the end point is obtained for each arc. The tangent with the arc whose direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation specified in a command is selected.
(X, Y)
Tangent A is selected.
(b) Arc and vertical line (i) When first an arc is defined and then a vertical line is defined Same as (i) in (a). (ii) When first a vertical line is defined and then an arc is defined (at least the X and Y coordinates of the end point, (X) and (Y), and the radius, (R), are given for the arc) Same as (ii) in (a).
337

(c) Arc and oblique line
B63294EN/02
(i) When first an arc is defined and then an oblique line is defined (the slope is given for the oblique line) A tangent vector on an arc is determined so that it indicates the direction in which the tool moves along the arc. If the direction of the oblique line is specified, the tangent at which the tangent vector indicates the same direction as the oblique line is selected.
A Tangent A is selected.
(ii) When first an arc is defined and then an oblique line is defined (the X and Y coordinates of the end point, (X), and (Y), are given for the oblique line) Same as (i) above. (iii) When first an oblique line is defined and then an arc is defined (at least the X and Y coordinates of the end point, (X) and (Y), and the radius, (R), are given for the arc) Two arcs having a tangent on the line may be obtained (only small arcs whose central angle is 180 degrees or less are considered). The direction of rotation from the tangent to the end point is obtained for each arc. The tangent with the arc whose direction of rotation is the same as the direction of rotation specified in a command is selected.
A B (X, Y) Tangent A is selected.
(2) Rules on the automatic determination of the intersection When the calculation of the intersection of a line and arc yields two points, one of the two points is automatically selected as the intersection by the rule described below. When the intersection cannot be automatically selected, the selection screen appears, and the operator must select the intersection. (a) Arc and horizontal line (i) When first an arc is defined and then a horizontal line is defined When the X coordinate of the end point of the horizontal line, (X), and the positive horizontal direction, (B), of the line are given, the directions from the intersections to the end point are obtained. If the directions are different, the intersection having the same direction to the end point as the given direction of the horizontal line is selected. Otherwise, the selection screen appears, and the operator must select the intersection.
338
B63294EN/02
A (X)
B Intersection A is selected.
(ii) When first a horizontal line is defined and then an arc is defined When the X coordinate of the start point of the horizontal line, (X), and the positive horizontal direction, (B), of the line are given, the directions from the start point to the intersections are obtained. If the directions are different, the intersection having the same direction from the start point as the given direction of the horizontal line is selected. Otherwise, the selection screen appears, and the operator must select the intersection.
Intersection A is selected. B (X) A
(b) Arc and vertical line (i) When first an arc is defined and then a vertical line is defined When the Y coordinate of the end point of the vertical line and, (Y), the positive vertical direction, (B), of the line are given, the directions from the intersections to the end point are obtained. If the directions are different, the intersection having the same direction to the end point as the given direction of the vertical line is selected. Otherwise, the selection screen appears, and the operator must select the intersection. (ii) When first a vertical line is defined and then an arc is defined When the Y coordinate of the start point of the vertical line, (Y), and the positive vertical direction, (B), of the line are given, the directions from the start point to the intersections are obtained. If the directions are different, the intersection having the same direction from the start point as the given direction of the vertical line is selected. Otherwise, the selection screen appears, and the operator must select the intersection. (c) Arc and oblique line (i) When first an arc is defined and then an oblique line is defined When the X and Y coordinates of the end point of the oblique line, (X) and (Y), and the positive direction, (B), of the line are given, the directions from the intersections to the end point are obtained. If the directions are different, the intersection having the same direction to the end point as the given direction of the oblique line is selected.
339

(ii) When first and an oblique line is defined and then an arc is defined
B63294EN/02
When the X and Y coordinates of the start point of the oblique line, (X) and (Y), and the positive direction, (B), of the line are given, the directions from the start point to the intersections are obtained. If the directions are different, the intersection having the same direction from the start point as the given direction of the oblique line is selected. (d) Arc and arc (i) When the start point, central angle, (K), and positive rotation direction, (B), of the first arc are given, the intersection having the same angle of rotation from the start point as the central angle is selected.
A (X, Y) Intersection A is selected.
(ii) When the end point, central angle, (K), and positive rotation direction, (B), of the second arc are given, the intersection having the same angle of rotation to the end point as the central angle is selected.
A (X, Y) Intersection A is selected. 1 B 2
340
B63294EN/02
(3) The circle which contacts nonintersecting two circles Input Data Circle Circle Circle
C1 : Direction of Rotation, Center Point, Radius C2 : Direction of Rotation, Radius C3 : Direction of Rotation, Center Point, Radius
Circle C2, which contacts circles C1 and C3 that do not intersect, can be defined by only specifying the direction of rotation and the radius. Circle C2 is decided to connect the three circles smoothly by considering their direction of rotation. There are two circles which are suitable for the above condition, so the operator can decide C2 by selecting the tangent point on the selection screen.
(4) The circle which contacts nonintersecting a line and a circle Input Data Line Circle Circle 1 : Direction (start point is decided) C1 : Direction of Rotation, Radius C2 : Direction of Rotation, Center Point, Radius
Circle C1 with a tangent line 1 and circle C2 which do not intersect, can be defined by only specifying the direction of rotation and the radius. There are two circles which connect line 1 and circle C2 smoothly, so the operator can decide C1 by selecting the tangent point on the selection screen.
341

(5) Others (a) Specify both the X and Y coordinates of the specified points for an arc.
B63294EN/02
(X, ?) (?, Y) C
Arc C cant be defined.
(b) A circle with tangent lines which do not intersect (parallel lines) cannot be defined by only specifying the direction of rotation and the radius.
r Arc C cant be defined.
(c) When defining a tangent line, press the soft key [TANGNT] immediately before defining the figure of the tangent line. This indicates that the figure to be defined is a tangent line of the preceding figure. For example, to define a line that has a tangent on two circles, perform the following: Define circle 1, press [TANGNT], define an oblique line, press [TANGNT], and define circle 2. (d) A pending figure may be incorrectly drawn. This, however, is not erroneous. The correct figure is automatically redrawn when the figure is determined.
342
B63294EN/02
2.12 Uaxis Machining (Option)

2.12.1 Uaxis machining menu items
By enabling the movement of a tool along the Uaxis (in the radial direction), lathe cutting functions can be added to a machining center. Such additional Uaxis machining functions are provided by the Uaxis menu. The Uaxis machining menu provides the detailed menus shown below. UAXIS MACHINING Outer contour preparation Inner contour preparation End face contour preparation Outer groove preparation Inner groove preparation End face groove preparation Thread preparation CONTOUR Start point Horizontal line Vertical line Slanted line Arc Chamfer Corner R Contact point Outer thread Inner thread Before attempting to use a conversational function to create a machining program, ensure that all required data in the tool data, cutting condition data, and pretool list is set correctly. If any of the required data is not set correctly, the cutting conditions will not be set correctly. In such a case, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. Once the initialization data has been set, the soft keys displayed for machining menu selection will include the [UAXIS MACHIN] soft key.
WARNING
< HOLE
FACING SIDE C POCKET NC LAN UTING /GROOV GUIAGE
2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXILI UAXS PROGRA CVX CCV ARY M END MACHIN
When the [UAXIS MACHIN] soft key is selected from the machining menu selection screen, the detailed menu selection screen for Uaxis machining appears.
PROGRAM O0010(UAXIS DEMO) PAGE :01/ CREATING 01 OUTER CONTOR 02 INNER CONTOR 03 FACE CONTOR
04 OUTER GROOVE
05 INNER GROOVE
06 FACE GROOVE
07 OUTER THREAD
08 INNER THREAD

(1) Outer contour (OUTER CONTOR) Select this item to perform outer surface Uaxis contouring.
343

(2) Inner contour (INNER CONTOR) Select this item to perform inner surface Uaxis contouring. (3) End face contour (FACE CONTOR) Select this item to perform end face Uaxis contouring. (4) Outer groove (OUTER GROOVE) Select this item to perform outer surface Uaxis grooving. (5) Inner groove (INNER GROOVE) Select this item to perform inner surface Uaxis grooving. (6) End face groove (FACE GROOVE) Select this item to perform end face Uaxis grooving. (7) Outer thread (OUTER THREAD) Select this item to perform outer surface Uaxis threading. (8) Inner thread (INNER THREAD) Select this item to perform inner surface Uaxis threading.
B63294EN/02
344
B63294EN/02
2.12.2 Creating and editing a Uaxis machining program 2.12.2.1 Outer contour (ZU01)
O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10
PROCESS TOOL NAME INITAL SETING

T X
(R,Z)
U YA
K E Y V
UAXIS MACHIN:OUTER CONTOR GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= * EFFEC HEIGH : V=
OUTER WIDE : X= FINISHU : U= FINISHZ : Y= CUTSPD CNST :YF=
TOOL ID NO. : T= 0. 0. EFFECT

< F.S. AUTO PROCES WINDOW TOOL GUIDAN INFORM CE INPUT END
O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS2 PROCESS1 121. T= 123. Q=OUTGENRAL OUTGENRAL PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 121. 123. D OFFSET./DIA.D= 121. 123. CUT PT. U/R R= * * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * * ESCAPE/DWELL E= 0. 1.111 COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 40. 50. FEED RATE F= 50. 100. CUTDPTH K= * 5. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN:OUTER GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC HEIGH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 30.
100. TOOL ID NO. : T= 1. 0. EFFECT
121.

1 YB W YF B M YD GROUP COPY COORDINATES CUTSPD CNST PROCESS COOLANT DIRECTION OF ROTATION UNUSED UNUSED EFFECT ROUGHING COOLANT M7 FORWARD
2 AGROUP WORK CO 1 INEFFECT FINISH COOLANT M8 REVERSE
3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when outer Uaxis machining of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There are two machining processes, that is, roughing and finishing.
345

(2) Explanation of input items
B63294EN/02
YB : GROUP COPY When GROUP COPY is selected, this menu is used to designate whether the selection is made valid. Group Copy is not used. if there is no setting. W : COORDINATES Specify this to modify the work coordinate system. It is not necessary to input this when the work coordinate system specified in initial setting is not modified. It is not possible to modify the work coordinate system halfway in a program when Allcopy and Groupcopy are selected. In this case, do not input anything. Specify UNUSED when the work coordinate setting G92 has been specified in the initial setting. YA : WK SURFACE (Workpiece surface Z coordinate) Enter the Z coordinate to be used as the reference for the workpiece surface. This item must always be specified. V X U Y : EFFEC HEIGH Enter the effective height of the workpiece in the Z direction. This item must always be specified. : OUTER WIDE Enter the outer width of the workpiece portion to be machined. This item must always be specified. : FINISHU Specify a finishing allowance in the U direction by entering a radius value. : FINISHZ Enter a finishing allowance in the Z direction. When neither FINISHU nor FINISHZ is set, the finishing process is not created.
YF : CUTSPD CNST Select between the [EFFECT] and [INEFFECT] soft keys to specify whether to perform constant surface speed control. If this item is not specified, CUTSPD CNST=EFFECT is assumed. T : TOOL ID NO. Enter the tool management number of the last tool to be used. For information about a tool, display the tool file by pressing the [TOOL LIST] soft key. This item must always be specified. : TOOL NAME The tool name corresponding to the value entered for T (TOOL ID NO.) is read from the tool file, then displayed. : PROCESS Four processes are supported: ROUGHING and FINISHING. : H OFFSET NO. This item specifies the tool length compensation number for the tool being used. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed. The tool length compensation number corresponding to the value entered for T (TOOL ID NO.) is read from the tool file, then displayed. : D OFS./DIA. D OFS. (Uaxis machining) This item specifies the cutter compensation number for the tool being used. This item is automatically determined by pressing the [F.S. AUTO] soft key. The cutter compensation number corresponding to the value entered for T (TOOL ID NO.) is read from the tool file, then displayed. DIA. (Hole preparation) This item specifies the nominal diameter of the tool used for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined by pressing the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. The nominal diameter corresponding to the value entered for T (TOOL ID NO.) is read from the tool file, then displayed. This data item is not used for this machining.
B H
346
B63294EN/02
R : CUT PT. U/R
CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (using the workpiece coordinate system) of a cutting start point by entering a radius value. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is assumed. <Automatic calculation> Forward cutting : CUT PT. U = [Outer width/2] + [cutting condition No. 793] Reverse cutting : CUT PT. U = Same as above R (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of the cutting feed start point for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined by pressing the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. This data item is not used for this machining. Z : CUT PT. Z/Z CUT PT. Z (Uaxis machining) Enter the Z coordinate (using the workpiece coordinate system) for the cutting start point. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is assumed. <Automatic calculation> Forward cutting : CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] {[start point Z coordinate] [cutting condition No. 794]} Reverse cutting : CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] {[start point Z coordinate] + [cutting condition No. 794]} Z (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of the deepest point of the tool during cutting feed for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined by pressing the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. This data item is not used for this machining. E : ESCAPE/DWELL ESCAPE (Uaxis machining) Specify an escape amount along the Uaxis by entering a radius value. Upon pressing the [F.S. AUTO] soft key, this item is automatically determined according to the specification described below. Roughing : Escape amount = Conversational parameter No. 9437 (escape amount U). If no escape amount is specified for finishing, the radius of the tool tip of the tool being used, multiplied by 2, is assumed. DWELL (Hole preparation) This item specifies the dwell time (in seconds) at the deepest point of hole preparation. This item is automatically determined by pressing the [F.S.AUTO] soft key. This data item is not used for this machining. M : COOLANT This item specifies the coolant to be used for machining. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed. The coolant set with the initialization menu is displayed. After being determined automatically, this item can be modified as required. : CUT/SPINSPD This item specifies a surface speed or rotational speed. Select between the [EFFECT] and [INEFFECT] soft keys. When the setting is CUTSPD CNST=EFFECT, specify a surface speed. When on the other hand, the setting is CUTSPD CNST=INEFFECT, specify a rotational speed. For hole preparation, however, always specify a rotational speed. A value is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed. : FEED RATE This item specifies the tool feedrate. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed. In Uaxis machining, an automatically determined value is usually handled as a feedrate for feed per rotation. By setting a negative value, however, a feedrate for feed per minute can be specified. : CUTDPTH This item specifies the depth of cut for roughing. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed.
347
B63294EN/02
YD : DIRECTION OF ROTATION This item specifies the direction of rotation about the spindle. Select between the [FORWARD] and [REVERSE] soft keys. Contour data (a) Uaxis preparation
PROGRAM O0010(UAXIS DEND) PAGE :01/ CREATING
SPECIFY CUTTING DIRECTION DURING UAXIS CUTTING. NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN OUTER CONTOR OUTGENRAL OUTER CONTOR OUTGENRAL 1 REV
REV
FRW REV
FRW OUTSIDE
FRW INSIDE FACE
CONTOUR FORM (START OF UAXIS) ORIGIN X : X= 0. ROUGHNESS ORIGIN Y : Y= 0. FOWARD CUTTING DRCT.: J= MOTION : K= NORMAL
: A=

< FOWARD REVERS PREV NEXT BLOCK BLOCK GUIDAN INPUT CE END
1 J K A CUTTING DRCT. MOTION ROUGHNESS FORWARD NORMAL 1
2 REVERSE HIGH SPEED 2
10
10
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary outer contour data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected. (2) Explanation of input items X Y J : ORIGIN X : ORIGIN Y Enter the X and Y coordinates of the origin of the figure subject to Uaxis machining. : CUTTING DRCT Using the soft key, specify a cutting direction (forward or reverse). When this item is not specified, the forward direction is selected by default. [Forward] [Reverse]
: MOTION Select between the [NORMAL] and [HIGHSPEED] soft keys to specify the cutting direction. If this item is not specified, [NORMAL] is assumed. When [HIGHSPEED] is specified, semifinish machining is performed.
348
B63294EN/02
[Normal]
[Highspeed]
: ROUGHNESS (Specified when finishing is to be performed) Specify a surface roughness for finishing by pressing the corresponding soft key ([1] to [10]). These soft keys are also displayed on page 2. Roughing Surface roughness data is ignored; machining is performed according to the roughing feedrate specified using the machining preparation menu. Finishing The finishing feedrate is calculated from the specified surface roughness data. If no surface roughness data is specified, the feedrate determined from the surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 1 is used for machining. The default display can be set for parameter No. 9461. 9461 Initial surface roughness code displayed in Uaxis contour preparation
If a value other than 1 to 10 is specified, 1 is assumed. Surface roughness data, displayed as part of the guidance information on the data input screen, must be set in advance in the following parameters: 9451 9452 9453 9454 9455 9456 9457 9458 9459 9460 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 1 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 2 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 3 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 4 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 5 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 6 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 7 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 8 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 9 Surface roughness corresponding to surface roughness code 10 Unit of setting : 1/1000 mm 1/10000 inch
349

(b) Specification of the machining start point
SPECIFY THE START POINT.
B63294EN/02
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING U 002 UAXS MACHIN OUTER CONTOR OUTGENRAL OUTER CONTOR OUTGENRAL 1
U ,Z) (U
CONTOUR FORM (START POINT) START PT.U : U= START PT.Z : Z=
<
PREV NEXT GUIDAN INPUT BLOCK BLOCK CE END
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary Uaxis preparation data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected. (2) Explanation of input items U Z : START PT.U : START PT.Z Enter the Z or Z coordinate of a contour start point.
(c) Contour selection screen

PROGRAM O0010(UAXIS DEMO) PAGE :01/ CREATING
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN OUTER CONTOR OUTGENRAL 123. 100. 50. OUTER CONTOR OUTGENRAL 121. 50. 40. 1 (START OF UAXIS) 1 2 START PT. U= 50. Z= 0. 3
SELECT FROM SOFTKEYS. IF BLOCK IS TANGENT, PRESS TANGENT SOFTKEY.

< TANGNE CHAMF. CRNRR CANCEL CONTOR + END
When all the data necessary for the specification of the start point is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this contour selection screen is selected. For an explanation of figure input, refer to Section 2.11.1, Contour side cutting.
350
B63294EN/02 2.12.2.2 Inner contour
O0010(UAXIS
DEND)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10

T
(R,Z) YA K V Y X UAXS MACHIN :INNER CONTOR GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC DEPTH : V=
HOLE DIA. : X= FINISHU : U= FINISHZ : Y= CUTSPD CNST :YF=

O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

PROCESS2 PROCESS1 19. 3. DRILL CENT.DRILL HOLE HOLE 119. 103. 20. 3. 3. 3. 24. 3. 0. 0. COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 100. 16. 239. 17. * * * *
CUTTING DATA1/2 PROCESS4 PROCESS3 126. T= 128. Q=INNGENRAL INNGENRAL PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 126. 128. D OFS./DIA. D= 126. 128. CUT PT. U/R R= * * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * * ESCAPE/DWELL E= 0. 1.111 COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 40. 50. FEED RATE F= 50. 100. CUTDPTH K= * 5. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN:INNER GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC DEPTH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 20.
126.

1 YB W YF B M YB GROUP COPY COORDINATES CUTSPD CNST PROCESS COOLANT DIRECTION OF ROTATION UNUSED UNUSED EFFECT ROUGHING COOLANT M7 FORWARD
3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
HOLE MACHINING NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when inner Uaxis machining of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There are three machining processes, that is, roughing, finishing, and hole machining.
351

(2) Explanation of input items V
B63294EN/02
: EFFEC DEPTH Enter the effective depth of the workpiece in the Z direction. When hole machining is to be performed, enter the effective depth of the hole to be drilled. This item must always be specified. This item must always be specified. : HOLE DIA. When no hole preparation is required (when a preparatory hole has already been drilled), enter the diameter of the hole. If this item is not specified, drilling a preparatory hole is assumed to be necessary. : CUT PT. U/R CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (using the workpiece coordinate system) of a cutting start point by entering a radius value. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> Forward cutting : CUT PT. U = [Hole diameter/2] [cutting condition No. 793] Reverse cutting : CUT PT. U = Same as above As the hole diameter, the specified diameter of the prepared hole or the maximum nominal diameter of tools to be used for hole preparation must be used. R (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of a cutting feed start point for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed. For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer contour.
Contour data For an explanation of Contour data, refer to Contour data of Outer contour.
352
B63294EN/02 2.12.2.3 End face contour
O0010(UAXIS
DEND)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10

T X
U E K (R,Z) Y V YA
UAXS MACHIN :FACE CONTOR GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC HEIGH : V=
OUTER/HOLE : X= FINISHU : U= FINISHZ : Y= CUTSPD CNST :YF=

O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS2 PROCESS1 131. T= 133. Q=FACE-GENRA FACE-GENRA PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 131. 133. D OFS./DIA. D= 131. 133. CUT PT. U/R R= * * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * * ESCAPE/DWELL E= 0. 2.222 COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 40. 50. FEED RATE F= 50. 100. CUTDPTH K= * 5. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN:FACE GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC HEIGH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 30.
OUTER/HOLE : X= FINISHU : U= FINISHZ : Y= CUTSPD CNST :YF=
131.

3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
HOLE MACHINING NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when end face Uaxis machining of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There are three machining processes, that is, roughing, finishing, and hole machining.
353

(2) Explanation of input items V X
B63294EN/02
: EFFEC HEIGH Enter the effective depth of the workpiece in the Z direction. This item must always be specified. : OUTER/HOLE When performing forward cutting, enter the outer width of the workpiece to be machined. When performing reverse cutting, enter the diameter of the hole to be prepared. When performing forward cutting, this item must always be specified. : CUT PT. U/R CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (using the workpiece coordinate system) of a cutting start point by entering a radius value. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> Forward cutting : CUT PT. U = [Outer width/2] + [cutting condition No. 793] Reverse cutting : CUT PT. U = [Hole diameter/2] [cutting condition No. 793] As the hole diameter, the diameter specified for a prepared hole or the maximum nominal diameter of the tools being used for hole preparation must be used. R (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of a cutting feed start point for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed.
: CUT PT. Z/Z CUT PT. Z (Uaxis machining) Enter the Z coordinate (using the workpiece coordinate system) of the cutting start point. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> Forward cutting : CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] {[start point Z coordinate] [cutting condition No. 794]} Reverse cutting : CUT PT. Z = Same as above Z (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of the deepest point reached by the tool during cutting feed for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S. AUTO] soft key has been pressed. For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer contour.
Contour data (a) Uaxis preparation

SPECIFY CUTTING DIRECTION DURING UAXIS CUTTING. NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN FACE CONTOR FACEGENRA FACE CONTOR FACEGENRA 1 REV
REV
FRW REV
FRW OUTSIDE
FRW INSIDE FACE
CONTOUR FORM (START OF UAXIS) ORIGIN X : X= 0. ROUGHNESS ORIGIN Y : Y= 0. FOWARD CUTTING DRCT.: J= MOTION : K= NORMAL
: A=

< FOWARD REVERS PREV NEXT GUIDAN INPUT BLOCK BLOCK CE END
354
B63294EN/02
1 J K A CUTTING DRCT. MOTION ROUGHNESS FORWARD NORMAL 1 2 REVERSE HIGH SPEED 2 3 4 5 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10
10
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary end face contour data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected. (2) Explanation of input items J : CUTTING DRCT Specify a cutting direction (forward or reverse) by pressing the corresponding soft key. If this item is not specified, the forward direction is assumed.
[Forward]
[Reverse]
For an explanation of other contour data, refer to Contour data of Outer contour.
355
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.12.2.4 Outer groove (ZU04)
B63294EN/02
O0010(UAXIS
DEND)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10

T X
Y (R,Z) V
UAXS MACHIN :OUTER GROOVE GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC HEIGH : V=

O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS2 PROCESS1 136. T= 136. Q=OUTGROOVE OUTGROOVE PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 136. 136. D OFS./DIA. D= 136. 136. CUT PT. U/R R= * * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * * DWELL E= * 0. COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 50. 100. FEED RATE F= 40. 80. CUTDPTH K= * 5. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN:OUTER GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC HEIGH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 30.
136.

3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
HOLE MACHINING NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when outer grooving of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There are two machining processes, that is, roughing and finishing.
356
B63294EN/02
(2) Explanation of input items R : CUT PT. U/R
CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (using the workpiece coordinate system) for a cutting start point by entering a radius value. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. U = [Outer width/2] + [cutting condition No. 793] R (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of the cutting feed start point of hole machining. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S.AUTO] soft key has been pressed. This data item is not used for this machining. Z : CUT PT. Z/Z CUT PT. Z (Uaxis machining) Enter the Z coordinate (using the workpiece coordinate system) for a cutting start point. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] [start point Z coordinate] Z (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of the deepest point of the tool during cutting feed for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined once the [F.S.AUTO] soft key has been pressed. This data item is not used for this machining. E : DWELL Specify a dwell time (in seconds) observed at the bottom of a groove. If this item is not specified, an automatically calculated value is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> Dwell time = [Time per rotation] * [cutting condition No. 800] For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer contour.
Contour data (a) Uaxis preparation

SPECIFY NUMBER OF GROOVES.
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN OUTER GROOVE OUTGROOVE OUTER GROOVE OUTGROOVE 1
CONTOUR FORM (START OF UAXIS) ORIGIN X : X= 0. ROUGHNESS ORIGIN Y : Y= 0. 1 NUM OF GRV. : Q= PITCH : R=
: A=

< PREV NEXT GUIDAN BLOCK BLOCK CE INPUT END
1 A ROUGHNESS 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary outer groove contour data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected.
357

(2) Explanation of input items Q
B63294EN/02
: NUM OF GRV. When specifying multiple grooves, each having the same pitch, enter the number of grooves to be machined. If this item is not specified, the number of grooves is assumed to be 1. : PITCH When cutting grooves having the same dimensions at regular intervals, specify the interval. This item must be specified when multiple grooves are to be produced. Grooving is performed differently depending on whether a positive or negative value is entered, as shown below. [Positive value] +U [Negative value] +U
Pitch
Reference groove
Pitch Pitch Pitch Reference groove +Z +Z
For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer contour. (b) Specification of the machining start point
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN OUTER GROOVE OUTGROOVE OUTER GROOVE OUTGROOVE 1
(U U ,Z)
CONTOUR FORM (START OF UAXIS) START PT.U : U= START PT.Z : Z=

< PREV NEXT BLOCK BLOCK GUIDAN INPUT CE END
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary Uaxis preparation data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected. (2) Explanation of input items U Z : START PT.U : START PT.Z Enter the Z/U coordinate of the contour start point.
When specifying an outer groove figure, enter data beginning with the start point in the positive (+) direction along the Zaxis. 358
B63294EN/02
+U Start point
End point
+Z For an explanation of other contour data, refer to Contour data of Outer contour.
359
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.12.2.5 Inner groove (ZU05)
B63294EN/02
PROGRAM
O0010(UAXIS
DEND)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING

T
YA Y (R,Z) V X UAXS MACHIN :INNER GROOVE GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC DEPTH : V=

O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

CUTTING DATA1/2 PROCESS4 PROCESS3 141. T= 142. Q=INNGROOVE INNGROOVE PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 141. 142. D OFS./DIA. D= 141. 142. CUT PT. U/R R= * * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * * DWELL E= * 0. COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 50. 50. FEED RATE F= 40. 80. CUTDPTH K= * 5. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN:INNER GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC DEPTH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 30.
141.

3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
HOLE MACHINING NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when inner grooving of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There are three machining processes, that is, roughing, finishing, and hole machining.
360
B63294EN/02
CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of the cutting start point by entering a radius value. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. U = [Hole diameter/2] [cutting condition No. 793] As the hole diameter, the diameter specified for a prepared hole or the maximum nominal diameter of the tools used for hole preparation is to be used. R (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of a cutting feed start point for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined when the [F.S. AUTO] soft key is pressed. Z : CUT PT. Z/Z CUT PT. Z (Uaxis machining) Specify the Z coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of the cutting start point. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] [start point Z coordinate] Z (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of the deepest point to be reached by the tool during cutting feed for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined when the [F.S. AUTO] soft key is pressed. E : DWELL Specify a dwell time (in seconds) to be observed at the bottom of a groove or prepared hole. The dwell time for drilling is automatically determined when the [F.S. AUTO] soft key is pressed. After a value has been automatically determined, it can be modified as required. When this item is not specified in Uaxis machining, an automatically calculated value is used. <Automatic calculation> Dwell time = [Time per rotation] * [cutting condition No. 800] For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Inner contour.
361
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.12.2.6 End face groove (ZU06)

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10
B63294EN/02

T
(R,Z) YA
UAXS MACHIN :FACE GROOVE GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC HEIGH : V=

O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS2 PROCESS1 146. T= 147. Q=FACEGROOVEFACEGROOVE PROCESS B= FINISHING ROUGHING H OFFSET NO. H= 146. 147. D OFS./DIA. D= 146. 147. CUT PT. U/R R= * * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * * DWELL E= * 0. COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 50. 100. FEED RATE F= 40. 80. CUTDPTH K= * 5. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN :FACE GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= EFFEC HEIGH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 30.
146.

3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when end face grooving of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There are two machining processes, that is, roughing and finishing.
362
B63294EN/02
CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of a cutting start point by entering a radius value. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. U = [Start point U coordinate] R (Hole preparation) This data item is not used for this menu. Z : CUT PT. Z/Z CUT PT. Z (Uaxis machining) Enter the Z coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of a cutting start point. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] + [cutting condition No. 794] Z (Hole preparation) This data item is not used for this menu. For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer groove. Contour data (a) Uaxis contour preparation
SPECIFY NUMBER OF GROOVES.
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN FACE GROOVE FACEGROOVE FACE GROOVE FACEGROOVE 1
CONTOUR FORM (START OF UAXIS) ORIGIN X : X= 0. ROUGHNESS ORIGIN Y : Y= 0. 1 NUM OF GRV. : Q= PITCH : R=
: A=
<
1 A ROUGHNESS 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary outer groove contour data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected. (2) Explanation of input items R : PITCH When cutting grooves having the same dimensions at regular intervals, specify the pitch. This item must always be specified when producing multiple grooves. Grooving is performed differently depending on whether a positive or negative value is entered, as shown below.
363
B63294EN/02
[Positive value] Pitch +U Pitch
Basic groove +Z [Negative value] Pitch +U Pitch
Basic groove +Z For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer groove. (b) Specification of the machining start point
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN FACE GROOVE FACEGROOVE FACE GROOVE FACEGROOVE 1
(U U ,Z)
CONTOUR FORM :(START POINT) START PT.U : U= START PT.Z : Z=
<
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary Uaxis preparation data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected. (2) Explanation of input items U Z : START PT.U : START PT.Z Enter the U/Z coordinate of the contour start point.
When specifying an end face groove figure, enter data beginning with a start point in the negative () direction along the Uaxis, as shown below.
364
B63294EN/02
Start point +U
End point
+Z
For an explanation of other contour data, refer to Contour data of Outer contour.
365
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.12.2.7 Outer thread (ZU07)
B63294EN/02
PROGRAM
O0010(UAXIS
DEND)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10

T U
(R,Z) X
V UAXS MACHIN :THREAD PREP. GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= CUT DEPTH : V=
UDIRC.DIA. : X= FINISHU : U= LEAD : I= CUTSPINSPD:YF=
TOOL ID NO. : T= 0. CUT SPEED

O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING
CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS1 151. T= Q=OUTTHREAD PROCESS B= * H OFFSET NO. H= 151. D OFS./DIA. D= 151. CUT PT. U/R R= * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * DWELL E= * COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 100. FEED RATE F= * CUTDPTH K= 4. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN :THREAD GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= CUT DEPTH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 30.
UDIRC.DIA. : X= FINISHU : U= FINISHZ : Y= CUT/SPINSPD:YF=
100. TOOL ID NO. : T= 0. 5. CUT SPEED
151.

1 YB W YF GROUP COPY COORDINATES SURFACE SPEED/ ROTATIONAL SPEED PROCESS COOLANT DIRECTION OF ROTATION UNUSED UNUSED SURFACE SPEED
2 AGROUP WORK CO 1 ROTATIONAL SPEED
3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
B M YD
HOLE MACHINING COOLANT M7 FORWARD COOLANT M8 REVERSE NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when outer threading of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There is one machining process, that is, hole machining. Do not, however, specify hole machining because a hole tool cannot be specified.
366
B63294EN/02
(2) Explanation of input items V X I
: CUT DEPTH Enter the effective depth of the workpiece in the Z direction. This item must always be specified. : UDIRC. DIA. Enter the outer width of the workpiece to be machined. This item must always be specified. : LEAD Specify a screw lead. This item must always be specified.
YF : CUT/SPINSPD Using the soft keys [CUT SPEED] and [SPIN SPEED], specify whether the spindle speed is to represent a surface speed or spindle rotational speed. When this item is not specified, surface speed is assumed. R : CUT PT. U/R CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of a cutting start point by entering a radius value. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. U = [Outer width/2] + [cutting condition No. 793] R (Hole preparation) This data item is not used for this menu. Z : CUT PT. Z/Z CUT PT. Z (Uaxis machining) Specify the Z coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of the cutting start point. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] [start point Z coordinate] Z (Hole preparation) This data item is not used for this menu. E S : DWELL This data item is not used for this menu. : CUT/SPINSPD This item specifies either a surface speed or rotational speed. Which is specified depends on the specification made for CUTSPD CNST. : FEED RATE This data item is not used for this menu. For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer groove.
Outer thread figure data

NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN THREAD PREP. OUTTHREAD
(YA,YB) H
AMNT SINGLE AMNT BOTH
DEPTH SINGLE
DEPTH BOTH UAXS MACHIN:OUTER THREAD 1/2 ORIGIN X : X= 0. CUTMETHD ORIGIN Y : Y= 0. THRD HEIGHT 5. SPARK OUT LEAD : I= NO.OF THREAD : J= 1. CHAMFER (YC,YD) : : : : K= AMNT SINGL START PT. U1 :YA= H= START PT. Z1 :YB= S= 1. END PT. U1 :YC= C= END PT. Z1 :YD=
CHANGE THE LEAD IN THE PREPARE SCREEN TOO IF IT IS CHANGED IN THIS SCREEN.
< HEIGHT AUTO GUIDAN INPUT CE END
367
B63294EN/02
PROGRAM
O0010(UAXIS
DEND)
PAGE :01/ CREATING
NO. CYCLE PROCESS TOOL NAME 001 AUXILIARY INITAL SETING 002 UAXS MACHIN THREAD PREP. OUTTHREAD
( ,YB) H
AMNT SINGLE AMNT BOTH
DEPTH SINGLE
DEPTH BOTH UAXS MACHIN:OUTER THREAD 1/2 START PT. U2 :YE= START PT. U3 :YI= START PT. Z2 :YF= START PT. Z3 :YJ= 1 END PT. U3 :YK= END PT. U2 :YG= END PT. Z2 :YH= END PT. Z3 :YL= (YC,YD)
INPUT THE START U COORD OF 2nd. FIGURE.

< HEIGHT AUTO GUIDAN INPUT CE END
1 K CUT METHD CHAMFERING CUTTING, SINGLE EDGE ON
2 CUTTING, ZIGZAG OFF
3 CUTIN, SINGLE EDGE
4 CUTIN, ZIGZAG
(1) Screen explanation When all the necessary outer thread data is entered and the [INPUT END] soft key is pressed, this menu is selected. (2) Explanation of input items K : CUTMETHD Using the soft keys [AMNT SINGLE], [AMNT BOTH], [DEPTH SINGLE], and [DEPTH BOTH], select a threading method. This item must always bespecified. : LEAD Enter a screw lead. This item must always be specified. Enter the same value as that specified using the machining preparation menu screen. : NO. OF THREAD When machining a multiplethread screw, specify the number of threads. When this item is not specified, J=1 is assumed. : THRD HEIGHT Specify the crest height to be produced. This item is automatically determined when the [HEIGHT AUTO] soft key is pressed. : SPARK OUT Specify the number of finishing passes. When this item is not specified, S=1 is assumed. : CHAMFER Using the soft key [ON] or [OFF], turn the chamfering function on or off. YA:START PT. U1 YB:START PT. Z1 YC:END PT. U1 YD:END PT. Z1 @ @ @ Enter the U and Z coordinates of the start and end points of the figure to be produced. Data for up to three figures can be specified. These items must be specified for the first figure.
S C
368
B63294EN/02 2.12.2.8 Inner thread (ZU08)
PROGRAM
O0010(UAXIS
DEND)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

MAX NUM.OF TOOLS10

T U
(R,Z) X
V UAXS MACHIN :THREAD PREP. GROUP COPY :YB= UNUSED COORDINATES : W= * WK SURFACE :YA= CUT DEPTH : V=
UDIRC. DIA. : X= FINISHU : U= LEAD : I= CUTSPINSPD:YF=
TOOL ID NO. : T= 0. CUT SPEED

O0010(UAXIS
DEMO)
PAGE :01/ CREATING

CUTTING DATA1/1 PROCESS3 156. T= Q=INNTHREAD PROCESS B= * H OFFSET NO. H= 156. D OFS./DIA. D= 156. CUT PT. U/R R= * CUT PT. Z/Z Z= * DWELL E= * COOLANT M= COOLNT M7 CUT/SPINSPD S= 100. FEED RATE F= * CUTDPTH K= 4. SDRCT. YD= NORMAL
UAXS MACHIN :THREAD GROUP COPY :YB= COORDIANTES : W= WK SURFACE :YA= CUT DEPTH : V=
UNUSED * 0. 30.
UDIRC. DIA. : X= FINISHU : U= LEAD : I= CUT/SPINSPD:YF=
50. TOOL ID NO. : T= 0. 8. CUT SPEED
156.

1 YB W YF GROUP COPY COORDINATES SURFACE SPEED/ ROTATIONAL SPEED PROCESS COOLANT DIRECTION OF ROTATION UNUSED UNUSED SURFACE SPEED
2 AGROUP WORK CO 1 ROTATIONAL SPEED
3 BGROUP WORK CO 2
4 CGROUP WORK CO 3
WORK CO 4
WORK CO 5
WORK CO 6
B M YD
HOLE MACHINING COOLANT M7 FORWARD COOLANT M8 REVERSE NONE
(1) Screen explanation This menu is always selected first when inner threading of an arbitrary figure is to be performed using the contour function. Input the Zdirection position data necessary for the contour program and the data related to the tool. When a tool ID No. (T) is input, the machining process is automatically determined with the previous tool. There is one machining process, that is, hole machining.
369

(2) Explanation of input items X
B63294EN/02
: UDIRC. DIA. When hole preparation is not required (when a preparatory hole has already been drilled), enter the diameter of the hole. If this item is not specified, hole preparation is assumed to be necessary. : CUT PT. U/R CUT PT. U (Uaxis machining) Specify the U coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of the cutting start point by entering a radius value. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. U = [Hole diameter/2] [cutting condition No. 793] As the hole diameter, the diameter specified for a prepared hole or the maximum nominal diameter of the tools used for hole preparation is to be used. R (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of a cutting feed start point for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined when the [F.S. AUTO] soft key is pressed.
: CUT PT. Z/Z CUT PT. Z (Uaxis machining) Enter the Z coordinate (in the workpiece coordinate system) of the cutting start point. When this item is not specified, an automatically calculated point is used for machining. <Automatic calculation> CUT PT. Z = [Workpiece surface Z coordinate] [start point Z coordinate] Z (Hole preparation) This item specifies the Z coordinate of the deepest point to be reached by the tool during cutting feed for hole preparation. This item is automatically determined when the [F.S. AUTO] soft key is pressed.
: DWELL Specify a dwell time (in seconds) to be observed at the bottom of a prepared hole. The dwell time is automatically determined when the [F.S. AUTO] soft key is pressed. For an explanation of other input items, refer to (2) Explanation of input items of Outer groove. For an explanation of inner thread figure data, refer to Outer thread figure data.
Inner thread figure data
370
B63294EN/02 2.12.3 Checking a Uaxis machining program
When [3] is selected from the basic menu screen, the tool path graphic screen appears. First, press the [GRAPH PARAM] soft key to set U AXIS DSP=ON. Then, press the [SET END] soft key to display the tool path graphic for Uaxis machining.
O0010 NO0010
X Y Z U F S T z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0
6.1
MEM **** *** *** 13:55:56

SOLID GRAPH GRAPH PARAM SCALE TOOL POS. ERASE SCALIN SINGLE G OFF OFF DRAW START
Press the [DRAW START] soft key. Then, a machining profile is drawn on the left side of the screen.
O0010 NO0010
X Y Z U F S T z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0 0
30.5
MEM STOP *** *** 14:03:54

SINGLE STOP ON 1BLOCK EXEC.
After the machining profile has been drawn, the tool path is drawn. A tool path for Uaxis machining is drawn on the right side of the screen. This tool path is equivalent to the animated simulation drawn on the ZU plane of a lathe. During Uaxis machining (cutting), z is displayed on the left side of the screen to indicate the point at which Uaxis machining is being performed.
371
B63294EN/02
O0010 NO0010
X Y Z U F S T z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 10.000 100 121
30.5
MEM **** *** *** 14:19:03

WARNING
Even after animated simulation has been used to ensure that the programmed machining operation is satisfactory, if the actually entered data such as the tool offset is not as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece and/or machine (including the jig), possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders. For this reason, before starting actual machining, ensure that the tool will not collide with the workpiece or machine, for example, by executing the machining program at an extremely low feedrate with no workpiece mounted in the machine.
372
B63294EN/02 2.12.4 Uaxis machining program NC statement output
2.12.4.1 NC statement output for G10 commands for animated simulation

In Uaxis machining program NC statement output, many G10 commands, used to define workpiece figures and tool figures, are output. When the output of a G10 command is not required, the block can be deleted, or optional block skip can be specified at the start of the block in NC statement output. The following parameter is used to set the output method for the G10 commands for animated simulation. #7 9133 NC statement output #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 OPO #0 GRO
GRO=0: Outputs G10 commands for animated simulation. GRO=1: Does not output G10 commands for animated simulation. OPO=0: Outputs blocks with optional block delete (/) specified. OPO=1: Does not output blocks with optional block delete (/) specified.
373
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.12.4.2 Lefthanded coordinate system capability

(1) Outline
B63294EN/02
Uaxis machining assumes that, when a machining program is created, a figure is specified using the righthanded coordinate system (ZU plane) and that the machining operation of the machining program is also performed using the same coordinate system. However, some machines use the lefthanded coordinate system. To enable the support of such machines, the system is provided with the capability to convert from the righthanded to the lefthanded coordinate system in NC statement output.
Righthanded coordinate system +U
Lefthanded coordinate system U
+Z
+Z
When a machining program is created, contour data can be specified in the righthanded coordinate system, as usual. Then, by setting the following parameter, the machining program is automatically converted to the lefthanded coordinate system at NC statement output. Accordingly, the actual machining performed by the machine always conforms to the NC format program. #7 9133 NC statement output #6 #5 #4 CVL CVL=0: Does not perform conversion to the lefthanded coordinate system. CVL=1: Performs conversion to the lefthanded coordinate system. (Note that this setting is valid only when GRO=1.) 9236 Smallest tool management number of the tools used in the lefthanded coordinate system Largest tool management number of the tools used in the lefthanded coordinate system #3 #2 #1 #0
9237
(2) Machining program conversion A machining program created in conversational mode is converted to an NC format program as described below. 1) Axis commands in the U direction The signs of all axis commands in the U direction are inverted. 2) G code commands All G codes, related to coordinate planes in a machining program, are converted as follows: G02 G03 G41 G42 G03 G02 G42 G41
374
B63294EN/02
3) G10 commands for animated simulation
Those graphic commands for animated simulation that start with G10 P**** are not converted to an NC format program. (Set GRO of parameter No. 9133 to 1.) Animated simulation of an NC format program that has been converted cannot be performed. (3) Restrictions on conversion 1) Machining programs created in conversational mode using the righthanded coordinate system cannot be executed directly on a machine that uses the lefthanded coordinate system. 2) Animated simulation using a machining program created in conversational mode using the right handed coordinate system can be performed only in the righthanded coordinate system (ZU plane). Animated simulation cannot be performed if such a machining program has already been converted to an NC format program based on the lefthanded coordinate system. NOTE
375
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.12.5 Tool file for Uaxis machining

Press the [TOOL FILE] soft key. Then, the following tool file screen appears.
TOOL FILE : 26 NO. 126 127 128 129 130 TOOL NO. 126 127 126 128 129 130 TOOL NAME INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL REVOLUTD NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL MATERIAL CARBIDE CARBIDE HIGHSPEED HIGHSPEED SPECIAL TCODE 126 127 128 128 130 DCODE 126 127 128 128 130 HCODE 126 127 128 128 130 ANGLE/WIDTH 100.000 100.000 110.000 110.000 100.000 IMGNRY NOSE 2 1 2 1 2 NOSE ANGLE 60.000 60.000 45.000 45.000 60.000 WIDTH/LENGTH 20.000 15.000 15.000 15.000 20.000 COMPENSATION J J J J J CORNERR J J J J J
B63294EN/02
>_
< NO. TOOL SEARCH FIG. DEF. FILE TOOL USED PRE TOOL TOOL FILE TOOL DIVIDE F.S. DRCTRY TOLDIR FILE
The same operations as those for conventional tools apply. Those input items that are added or modified for Uaxis machining are described below. (1) NO. This item indicates the tool serial number. Set the Uaxis machining tool serial numbers (largest and smallest numbers) in the following parameters, specifying multiples of 20 to distinguish Uaxis machining tools from other tools. Parameter No. 9234: Smallest Uaxis machining tool serial number (Specify a multiple of 20.) Parameter No. 9235: Largest Uaxis machining tool serial number (Specify a multiple of 20.) (2) TOOL NAME Make a selection from the soft keys in the same way as for conventional tools. For Uaxis machining, the following eight tool names are available:
INN FACE OUT INN < OUT GENRAL GENRAL GENRAL GROOVE GROOVE
FACE OUT INN GROOVE THREAD THREAD
(3) REVOLUTD Select a spindle rotation direction by pressing the corresponding soft key.
< NORMAL REVERSE
(4) ANGLE/WIDTH ANGLE (AC) Enter the cutting edge angle of a generalpurpose tool. When the cursor is positioned to this item, graphic guidance information is displayed in a window. The corresponding symbol blinks. WIDTH (WN) Enter the cutting edge width of a grooving tool. When the cursor is positioned to this item, graphic guidance information is displayed in a window. The corresponding symbol blinks. (5) IMGNRY NOSE (generalpurpose tool, grooving tool) Enter the position of a virtual tool tip for tooltip radius compensation. This specification determines the positive/negative direction or reference direction of the tool. (See the figure on the right.) 376
B63294EN/02
Example Outside cutting tool = 3 (negative () direction) Outside cutting tool = 4 (positive (+) direction) End face grooving tool = 2 (lefthand reference) End face grooving tool = 3 (righthand reference) 1 5 4
(6) NOSE ANGLE (AN) Enter the tool angle of a generalpurpose or threading tool. When the cursor is positioned to this item, graphic guidance information is displayed in a window. The corresponding symbol blinks. (7) WIDTH/LENGTH WIDTH (TW) Enter the tool width of a generalpurpose or threading tool. The entered value is used to determine the tool figure for drawing. When the cursor is positioned to this item, graphic guidance information is displayed in a window. The corresponding symbol blinks. LENGTH (TL) Enter the effective tool length of the cutting part of a grooving tool. When the cursor is positioned to this item, graphic guidance information is displayed in a window. The corresponding symbol blinks. (8) Graphic guidance When the cursor is positioned to ANGLE/WIDTH, IMGNRY NOSE, NOSE ANGLE, or WIDTH/LENGTH, graphic guidance information is displayed in a window after setting the parameter. #7 9216 #6 #5 #4 UAG On the tool file screen, the guidance information for Uaxis machining is: UAG = 0: Not displayed. = 1: Displayed.
TOOL FILE : 26 NO. 126 127 128 129 130 TOOL NO. 126 127 128 129 130 TOOL NAME INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL REVOLUTD NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL MATERIAL CARBIDE CARBIDE HIGHSPEED HIGHSPEED SPECIAL ANGLE TCODE 126 127 128 129 130 DCODE 126 127 128 129 130 HCODE 126 127 128 129 130 100.000 100.000 110.000 110.000 100.000 ANGLE/WIDTH 100.000 IMANRY NOSE 2 1 2 1 2 NOSE ANGLE 60.000 60.000 45.000 45.000 60.000 WIDTH/LENGTH 20.000 15.000 15.000 15.000 20.000 COMPENSATION J J J J J AC CORNERR J J J J J
#3
#2
#1
#0
>_
377

(9) Tool figure
B63294EN/02
The [TOOL FIG.] soft key is displayed only when a Uaxis machining tool is displayed on the tool file screen. When the [TOOL FIG.] soft key is pressed, the figure corresponding to the tool to which the cursor is positioned is displayed in a window on the screen.
TOOL FILE : 26 NO. 126 127 128 129 130 TOOL NO. 126 127 126 128 129 130 TOOL NAME INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL INNGENRAL REVOLUTD NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL NORMAL MATERIAL CARBIDE CARBIDE HIGHSPEED HIGHSPEED SPECIAL TOOL FIGURE TCODE 126 127 128 129 130 DCODE 126 127 128 129 130 HCODE 126 127 128 129 130 ANGLE/WIDTH 100.000 100.000 110.000 110.000 100.000 IMANRY NOSE 2 1 2 1 2 NOSE ANGLE 60.000 60.000 45.000 45.000 60.000 WIDTH/LENGTH 20.000 15.000 15.000 15.000 20.000 COMPENSATION J J J J J CORNERR J J J J J
>_
378
B63294EN/02 2.12.6 Restrictions imposed on Uaxis machining 2.12.6.1 Coordinate system for Uaxis machining
The direction of the Zaxis in a workpiece coordinate system is opposite to that of a programming coordinate system used with the Uaxis conversational function. (1) In a workpiece coordinate system, the direction of the Zaxis is as follows:
+Z
+U (0,0)
(2) In a programming coordinate system, the direction of the Zaxis is as follows:
+U
(0,0)
+Z
379
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.12.6.2 Uaxis machining operations

(1) Uaxis outer/inner/end face contouring
B63294EN/02
Residual machining of those portions where the tool and workpiece interfere is not performed automatically. If residual machining is specified in the specification of a figure, only those portions that can be cut with the specified tools are cut; any other portions are left as is. (Automatic residual machining is not supported.) Molded material air cut cancel cannot be specified. The override (feedrate) associated with a cut angle is fixed to 100%. In an initial cut, the override (depth of cut) is fixed to 100%. No incremental/decremental percentage can be specified for the depth of cut. (A fixed pitch is used.) Whether to perform semifinish machining is automatically determined by specifying MOTION=NORMAL or HIGHSPEED. (When MOTION=NORMAL, semifinish machining is not performed. When MOTION=HIGHSPEED, semifinish machining is performed.) In finish machining, offset C is applied. Depending on the figure specified, alarm P/S 41 may be issued. In rough machining, NC statements are output which include a calculated virtual tool tip direction. In finish machining, NC statements for which the tool tip center (virtual tool tip direction: No. 0) is specified are output. In rough machining, a figure is produced which includes a finishing allowance (U,Z). The direction of cutting can be specified on a figurebyfigure basis. (2) Uaxis threading Constant surface speed control is disabled. The specifiable cutting methods are: constant amount of cut (singleedge cutting, zigzag cutting), and constant depth of cut (singleedge cutting, zigzag cutting). Only generalpurpose screws are supported. (Two thread figures can be specified.) Multiplethread screws and reverse screws can be specified. Both outer and inner surfaces can be machined. The soft option for threading/synchronous feed is required. The soft option for lookahead control cannot be specified. (3) Uaxis grooving Chamfering and corner R can be specified. Multiple grooves can be cut by specifying a pitch. A groove with a step can be specified. For an initial cut, the override (depth of cut) is fixed to 100%. No incremental/decremental percentage can be specified for the depth of cut. (A fixed pitch is used.) The outer surface, inner surface, and end face can be machined.
380
B63294EN/02 2.12.6.3 Uaxis machining program creation

(1) Contour
Uaxis data can be specified as a radius or diameter. The parameter below can be used to determine which specification to use. Parameter No. 9400 UDI (bit 6) = 0 : Uses a radius for Uaxis data setting. Parameter No. 9400 UDI (bit 6) = 1 : Uses a diameter for Uaxis data setting. Data is to be entered using absolute values. Up to 50 figures can be entered. Uaxis machining contours are specified using the following commands: ZY50 Start point ZY51 Straight line ZY52 Clockwise arc ZY53 Counterclockwise arc ZY54 Clockwise corner R ZY55 Counterclockwise corner R ZY56 Chamfering ZY57 Contour end An arc extending over multiple quadrants is divided automatically. (The definition of a figure extending over three quadrants is impossible.) Corner R/chamfering can be specified immediately after a start point. (2) Automatic preparatory hole machining (only for inner surfaces and end faces) When a tool (such as a drill) for drilling a preparatory hole is specified as a pretool, the drill cycle is executed in Uaxis machining. (When machining condition data is displayed, the tool used for drilling a preparatory hole is distinguished from the Uaxis machining tools.)
381
B63294EN/02
2.13 Setup Guidance Function

2.13.1 Outline
The workpiece coordinate system and cutter compensation/tool length offset values can be set easily in conversation mode. This reduces considerably the time and labor required for setup. There are centering functions and tool setting functions. (1) CENTERING FUNCTION CIRCLE CENTER MEASURING SQUARE CENTER MEASURING CORNER MEASURING Z AXIS REFERENCE POINT MEASURING
(2) TOOL SETTING FUNCTION
TOOL LENGTH MEASURING TOOL DIAMETER MEASURING
NOTE
The machine is assumed to turn the skip signal (PMC address X004#7) ON, when the touch sensor touches the measured part. Therefore, the modification of the macro for the measuring device became necessary.
382
B63294EN/02 2.13.2 Operation
SETUP GUIDANCE is added to 5 on the basic menu screen. When softkey [5] is pressed, the program directory screen is displayed. Select the program to perform setup. To add SETUP GUIDANCE to the basic menu screen, the following parameter must be set: 9138 Number of the main program for setup guidance (1~9999)
PROGRAM DIR.
PAGE :01 PROGRAM NO. USED: MEMORY AREA USED:
SETUP 5 FREE: 480 FREE: 40 27840 SIZE 80 80 80 80 160
NO. 5001 5002 5003 5004 5005
TYPE CAP CAP CONVERT OPTIMUM NC
NAME TEST1 TEST2 TEST1 TEST2
CREATE DATA 940124 12:15 940125 10:05 940125 10:07 940125 15:26
INPUT PROGRAM NO.

PROG. SELECT
>_
LIBRARY
When the softkey [PROG. SELECT] is pressed, the setup guidance main menu is displayed. By using the following parameter, it is possible to directly move to the setup main menu without displaying the program directory screen first. #7 9132 #6 #5 #4 #3 MN5 When softkey [5] is pressed on the menu, the program directory screen is; MN5 = 0: Not displayed. MN5 = 1: Displayed. When the [NUMBER LIST] softkey is pressed, the program directory is displayed. #2 #1 #0
383

When a program is selected, the setup main menu is displayed.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O5002 (TEST2) PAGE :01/ SETUP
B63294EN/02
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 WORK COORDINATE TOOL OFFSET FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING DRILL 15 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< CENTER TOOL ING MEANS. DATA SETING GUIDAN END CE
(1) When the softkey [<] is pressed, the setup function escapes from the main screen. (2) When the softkey [CENTERING] is pressed, the setup function advances to the centering main menu. (3) When the softkey [TOOL MEAS. ] is pressed, the setup function advances to the tool measuring screen. (4) When the softkey [DATA SETING] is pressed, the setting screen to set data for centering and tool measuring is displayed. (5) By pressing the softkey [GUIDANCE] , guidance ON/ OFF can be selected. (6) When the softkey [END] is pressed, the setup function escapes from the setup guidance main screen. (equal to (1))
2.13.2.1 Centering
When the softkey [CENTERING] is pressed at setup guidance main menu, the screen shown below is displayed.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERIN TOOL OFFSET FACINGSQUARE PREP. FACE MILL 71 GWORK COORDICIRCLE CENTER CENTER CORNER Z AXIS REF. NATE FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING DRILL 15 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PROCESS END 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
SELECT SOFTKEY.
< CIRCLE SQUARE CORNER Z AXIS CENTER CENTER REF. END
(1) When the softkey [CIRCLE CENTER] is pressed, the circle center measure screen is displayed. (2) When the softkey [SQUARE CENTER] is pressed, the square center measuring screen is displayed. (3) When the softkey [CORNER] is displayed, the corner measuring screen is displayed. (4) When the softkey [Z AXIS REF. ] is pressed, the Z axis reference point measuring screen is displayed.
384
B63294EN/02
(1) Circle Center Measuring When the softkey [CIRCLE CENTER] is pressed, the circle center measuring screen is displayed.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERINGTOOL OFFSET FACIMGSQUARE PREP. FACE MILL 71 WORK COORDICIRCLE CENTER CENTER CORNER Z AXIS REF. NATE FACING SQUARE BIDIR REF. CENTERING PROCESS CIRCLEEND CENTER MEASURE 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING DRILL 15 CURRENT POSITION MEAS. POINT TAPPING TAP 25 GUIDANCE PT1 X 52.090 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM ABSOLUTE MACHINE Y 30.012 PROCESS END X 2.013 X PT2 X 10.098 004 AUXILIARY END2.013 OF PROG. Y 63.924 Y 63.924
Z 79.001 Z 79.001 PT3 Y X Y 30.012
MEASURE 3 POINTS
SELECT PT.,PRESS [X+,X-,Y+,Y-] TO APPROACH MEASURE POINT WITH TOUCH SENSOR.

< X+ X Y+ Y WORK COORD. END
(1) When the softkey [X+] is pressed, the spindle moves in X+ direction. (2) When the softkey [X- ] is pressed, the spindle moves in X- direction. (3) When the softkey [Y+] is pressed, the spindle moves in Y+ direction. (4) When the softkey [Y- ] is pressed, the spindle moves in Y- direction. (5) When the softkey [WORK COORD. ] is pressed, the setup function advances to the work coordinate setting screen. Operation (1) Select a measuring point with the cursor key. (2) The measuring point can be approached with the touch sensor, by using the hand wheel or JOG operation. Move the touch sensor to a position as shown in the sketch below. The distance between the touch sensor and the workpiece must be less than A. Distance A is called additonal amount and can be set at the data setting screen. (3) Approach the measuring point with the touch sensor, by pressing one of the X+, X- , Y+, Y- softkeys. For example, by pressing softkey [X- ] , the touch sensor approaches the workpiece in X-direction. After the touch sensor touches the workpiece, the measure point coordinates are displayed. At this time the touch sensor separates from the workpiece and moves to return position by the return amount. In case of remeasuring, reselect one of the X+, X- , Y+, Y- softkeys. (4) For measuring the second and third measure point, repeat procedure (2) and (3). Separate the measure points at least by the value of minimum movement. If the distance is below minimum movement, the error message DISTANCE BETWEEN MEASURE POINTS TOO SHORT is displayed, and the coordinate of the measure point can not be set (applies only for circle center measuring). (5) The result of centering is correct, when the X, Y center point is diplayed in the guidance window. Next, press the softkey [WORK COORD. ] and the work coordinate setting screen will be displayed. (6) By pressing softkey [END] or [<] , the setup function returns to the main menu.
Y+
WORKPIECE
X+
A (15.0, 0, 0) (0, 0, 0)
TOUCH SENCOR a CONDITION : RETURN AMOUNT ADDITIONAL AMOUNT FEEDRATE
= 10.000 = 100.000 = 10.000
1. Move touch sensor to position a, by manual operation.
385
B63294EN/02
2. Press softkey [X- ] . G31G91X- 100. F10 is executed. Touch sensor moves to X-100., touches the workpiece, skip signal turns on and the machine stops. NOTE If the additional amount is set as 5. 0, the touch sensor does not touch the work piece and skip signal is not turned on. After that, G0G91X10 is executed and the touch sensor separates from the measure point. 3. Second and third measure point are measured according to the same procedure. (2) Square Center Measuring When the softkey [SQUARE CENTER] is pressed, the square center measuring screen is displayed.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING TOOL OFFSET FACINGSQUARE PREP. FACE MILL 71 WORK COORDICIRCLE CENTER CENTER CORNER Z AXIS REF. NATE FACING SQUARE BIDIR REF. CENTERING PROCESS CIRCLEEND CENTER MEASURE 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING DRILL 15 CURRENT POSITION MEAS. POINT TAPPING TAP 25 GUIDANCE PT1 X 52.090 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM ABSOLUTE MACHINE Y 30.012 PROCESS END X 2.013 X PT2 X 10.098 004 AUXILIARY END2.013 OF PROG. Y 63.924 Y 63.924
Z 79.001 Z 79.001 PT3 PT4 Y X Y X Y 30.012
MEASURE 4 POINTS
SELECT PT.,PRESS [X+,X-,Y+,Y-] TO APPROACH MEASURE POINT WITH TOUCH SENSOR.

< X+ X Y+ Y WORK COORD. END
Refer to chapter (1) Circle Center Measuring for softkey explanation and operation. (3) Corner Measuring When the softkey [CORNER] is pressed, the corner setting screen is displayed.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING TOOL OFFSET FACINGSQUARE PREP. FACE MILL 71 WORK COORDICIRCLE CENTER CENTER CORNER Z AXIS REF. NATE FACING SQUARE BIDIR REF. CENTERING PROCESS CORNEREND MEASURE 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING DRILL 15 CURRENT POSITION MEAS. POINT TAPPING TAP 25 GUIDANCE HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM PT1 X 52.090 1 2 ABSOLUTE MACHINE Y 30.012 PROCESS END 5 6 X 2.013 X 2.013 PT2 X 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG. Y 63.924 Y 63.924
Y Z 79.001 Z 79.001 DIAMETERLUE 4,000
SHIFT VALUE X Y 5.000 5.000
MEASURE 2 POINTS

7 8 3 4
PRESS [X+,X-,Y+,Y-] TO APPROACH MEASURE POINT WITH TOUCH SENSOR.

< X+ X Y+ Y WORK COORD. SELECT SELECT POS. SHIFT END
(1) The corner point which shall be measured can be selected by pressing the softkey [SELECT POS. ]. The selected postion [1, . . , 8] is displayed in reverse mode in the guidance window. When the softkey [SELECT POS. ] is pressed again after measuring, the selected postion changes, also the measured data and the result will be cleared. (2) The axis for the shift value can be selected by pressing the softkey [SELECT SHIFT] . The data is set by inputting any numeric data and pressing the [INPUT] key. The corner reference point can be moved in plus or minus direction of each axis, by setting the desired shift value. To display this data setting screen, the following parameter must be set:
386
B63294EN/02
#7 9139 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2

#1 #0 #0 During corner measurement and Z axis reference plane measurement, the reference point is: Bit 0 = 0: Not shifted. = 1: Shifted.
(4) Z Axis Reference Point Measuring When softkey [Z AXIS REF. ] is pressed, Z Axis Reference screen is displayed.
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING TOOL OFFSET FACINGSQUARE PREP. FACE MILL 71 WORK COORDICIRCLE CENTER CENTER CORNER Z AXIS REF. NATE FACING SQUARE BIDIR REF. CENTERING PROCESS REF. ZEND AXIS MEASURE 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING DRILL 15 CURRENT POSITION MEAS. POINT TAPPING TAP 25 GUIDANCE PT1 Z 52.090 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM ABSOLUTE MACHINE PROCESS END X 2.013 X 004 AUXILIARY END2.013 OF PROG. H COMP. Y 63.924 Y 63.924
Z 79.001 Z 79.001 25,000
SHIFT VALUE Z 3.000

H COMP. MEASURE 1 POINT
PRESS [Z-] TO APPROACH MEASURE POINT WITH TOUCH SENSOR.

< Z WORK COORD. END
(1) When the softkey [Z- ] is pressed, the spindle moves in Z- direction. After a numeric value is entered, the reference shift amount can be set by pressing the INPUT MDI key. Refer to parameter No. 9139. There are two methods to set the Z Axis work coordinate. The applied method is automatically decided according to the compensation setting of the touch sensor (refer to next page). Method 1: The Z Axis work coordinate is set by the distance from the machine zero point to the work piece surface. Method 2: The Z Axis work coordinate is set by the distance from the reference point to the work piece surface. Refer to chapter (1) Circle Center Measuring for explanation and operation of other softkeys.
387
B63294EN/02
Method 1: Machine Zero Point

work coord. 1 work coord. 2 work coord. 3 work coord. 4 work. coord. 5 work coord. 6
Method 2: Machine Zero Point

wrkp. 1 wrkp. 5 work coord. 1 work coord. 2 work coord. 3 work coord. 4 work coord. 5 work coord. 6 workp. 2 workp. 3 workp. 4 workp. 5 workp. 6
workp. 2
workp. 3
workp. 4
workp. 6
Reference Point
(5) Work Coordinate Setting When the softkey [WORK COORD. ] is pressed at each centering screen, the work coordinate setting screen is displayed.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O5002 (TEST2) PAGE: 01/ SETUP
wrkp. 1
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING TOOL OFFSET CONTORSQUARE PREP. FACE MILL 71 WORK COORDICIRCLE CENTER CENTER CORNER Z AXIS REF. NATE FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END REF. CENTERING --- WORK COORDINATE 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING DRILL 15 CUR. POS RESULT WORK COORDINATE TAPPING TAP 25 G54 [G54] [G55] [G56] HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM MACHINE 29.999 X 0.000 X 0.000 PROCESS END X X 2.013 X 29.999 Y 0.000 Y 0.000 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG. Y 76.032
Y Z 63.924 79.001 Y 76.032 Z [G57] X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Z [G58] X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 Z [G59] X Y Z 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SELECT WORK COORDINATE WITH CURSOR KEY AND PRESS < X AXIS Y AXIS SETING SETING RETRY
[X, Y AXIS SETTING]. END
(1) When the softkey [X AXIS SETING] is pressed, the X result is set to the selected X coordinate. (2) When the softkey [Y AXIS SETING] is pressed, the Y result is set to the selceted Y coordinate. (3) When the softkey [RETRY] is pressed, the setup function returns to the previous selected screen. Operation (1) Select a work coordiante with the cursor [G54, . . , G59] .
388
B63294EN/02

(2) To store the data at the selected work coordinate, press softkey [X, Y AXIS SETING] . In case of Z axis reference point measuring, the softkey [Z AXIS SETING] is displayed. (3) To repeat measuring, press the softkey [RETRY] and the setup function returns to the previous screen. (4) When the softkey [END] or [<] is pressed, the setup function returns to the main menu.
2.13.2.2 Tool Measuring

When the softkey [TOOL MEAS.] is pressed at the setup guidance main menu, the following screen is displayed.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING
TOOL MEASURE
O5002 (TEST2)
PAGE:
01/
SETUP
FACING
USED TOOL LIST
003 NO. HOLE TOOL ID

01 73 02 71 03 3 HOLE PATERN 04 15 05 25 004 AUXILIARY
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING TOOL OFFSET CONTOR PREP. FACE MILL 71 WORK COORDINATE SQUARE BIDIR TOOL INFORM: FACE MILL PROCESS END TAPPING DRILL 3 TOOL NAME CENTER NOM.DIA TCODE H/DCODE OFFSET TAPPING 15 FACE MILL DRILL 40.000 71 H 171 120.000 FACE MILL TAP 35.000 D 71 35.000 TAPPING 25 CENTER DRILL 3.000 PARALLELOGRM 15.000 PROCESSDRILL END GUIDANCE TAP 16.000 END OF PROG.
SELECT TOOL, PRESS [TOOL CHANGE] [LENGTH, DIAM. APPROACH].

< LENGTH DIAM. APPRCH APPRCH CUR. POS. END TOOL CHANGE

H OFS.
D OFS.
(1) When the softkey [LENGTH APPRCH] is pressed, the spindle moves to the approach point of tool length measuring (2) When the softkey [DAIM. APPRCH] is pressed, the spindle moves to the approach point of tool diameter measuring (3) When the softkey [CUR. POS. ] is pressed, current position window is switched ON/ OFF. (4) When the softkey [TOOL CHANGE] is pressed, the designated tool will be set. When the softkey [LENGTH APPRCH] is pressed, the follwing screen is displayed.
TOOL MEASURE
O5002 (TEST2)
PAGE:
01/
SETUP
FACING
USED TOOL LIST

01 73 02 71 03 3 HOLE PATERN 04 15 05 25
004 AUXILIARY
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING WORK COORDITOOL OFFSET CONTOR PREP. FACE MILL 71 NATE SQUARE BIDIR TOOL INFORM: FACE MILL PROCESS END TAPPING DRILL 3 TOOL NAME CENTER NOM.DIA TCODE H/DCODE OFFSET TAPPING 15 FACE MILL DRILL 40.000 71 H 171 120.000 FACE MILL TAP 35.000 D 71 35.000 TAPPING 25 CENTER DRILL 3.000 PARALLELOGRM 15.000 PROCESSDRILL END GUIDANCE TAP 16.000 END OF PROG.
PRESS [LENGTH MEAS.] PRESS [SET OFFSET].

< LENGTH SET MEAS. OFFSET CUR. POS.
RESULT= 120.011
H OFS.
END
(5) When the softkey [LENGTH MEAS. ] is pressed, the spindle moves and starts measuring. (6) When the softkey [SET OFFSET] is pressed, the offset data is set. The length compensation is set to the distance from the measuring tool tip to the reference point, when (- ) is selected for the touch sensor compensation. When the softkey [DIAM. APPRCH] is pressed, the following screen is displayed. NOTE
389
B63294EN/02

TOOL MEASURE
O5002 (TEST2)
PAGE:
01/
SETUP
FACING
USED TOOL LIST

01 73 02 71 03 3 HOLE PATERN 04 15 05 25
004 AUXILIARY
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING WORK COORDITOOL OFFSET CONTOR PREP. FACE MILL 71 NATE SQUARE BIDIR TOOL INFORM: FACE MILL PROCESS END TAPPING DRILL 3 TOOL NAME CENTER NOM.DIA TCODE H/DCODE OFFSET TAPPING 15 FACE MILL DRILL 40.000 71 H 171 120.000 FACE MILL TAP 35.000 D 71 35.000 TAPPING 25 CENTER DRILL 3.000 PARALLELOGRM 15.000 PROCESSDRILL END GUIDANCE TAP 16.000 END OF PROG.
PRESS [DIAM. MEAS.] PRESS [SET OFFSET].

< LENGTH SET MEAS. OFFSET CUR. POS.
RESULT= 35.002
D OFS.
END
(7) When the softkey [DIAM. MEAS. ] is pressed, the spindle moves and starts measuring. Operation (1) Select the tool with the cursor key, or enter the tool ID and press [INPUT] . After a numeric value is entered, a tool other than those on the tool list can be selected by pressing the INPUT MDI key. (Selection of a measurement tool is possible from the tool measurement menu screen only.) (2) After selecting the tool, press the softkey [TOOL CHANGE] . Machine moves to the tool change position and the selected tool will be set in the spindle. (3) Press the softkey [LENGTH APPRCH] or [DIAM. APPRCH] , the spindle moves to length approach point or diameter approach point. Set the length/ diameter approach point data at the data setting screen. (4) After the tool was moved to the approach point, spin the tool manualy as shown in the drawing below, that point A (tooth of the tool) contacts the tool setter correctly when measuring. After this, press the softkey [LENGTH MEAS. ] or [DIAM. MEAS. ] . The tool contacts the tool setter and returns to the return position, by the return amount.
tool setter
tool setter
tooth pos. for length meas.
tooth pos. for diameter meas.
(5) In case of remeasuring, select the softkey [LENGTH, DIAM. MEAS]. (6) The data is displayed in the guidance window, when the measuring result is correct. For data setting, press the softkey [SET OFFSET] . (7) When the softkey [CUR. POS. ] is pressed, the current position is displayd. (8) By pressing softkey [END] or [<] , the setup function returns to the main menu. NOTE D The T- Code of the spindle tool must be set in the PMC address area D701 - D704 in order to compare the spindle tool T- Code with the T- Code of the tool which was selected by cursor. D With the LENGTH/DIAM. APPRCH, the spindle approaches the position shifted from the tool change position by the length compensation and the nominal diameter/2. For this reason, set an approximate tool length and an approximate nominal diameter beforehand. The tool length is set from the tool list or the tool offset setting screen of the NC. The nominal diameter is set from the tool file. D When measuring the tool diameter, the spindle moves in X direction. D When using offset type B or C, the measuring result is set to the geometric compensation.
390
B63294EN/02 2.13.2.3 Data Setting
When the softkey [DATA SETING] is pressed at the setup guidance main menu, the screen shown below is displayed.
PROGRAM NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING O5002 (TEST2) PAGE: 01/ SETUP
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED SPINDL INITAL SETING TOOL MEASURE FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 CENTERING TOOL OFFSET CONTOR PREP. FACE 71 WORK COORDIPREPARE DATAMILL 1/2 NATE FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END SETTING ITEM 1/2 GUIDANCE 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 35.000 H COMPENSATION = __ TAPPING DRILL DIAMETER = 15 5.000 TAPPING TAP SHIFT X = 25 0.001 Y = 0.002 HOLE PATERN PARALLELOGRM +COMP. RETURN AMOUNT = 3.000 PROCESS END MIN. MOVEMENT = 5.000 004 AUXILIARY END OF PROG.
OVER RUN X Y Z ADDITIONAL MOVE MEASURING FEED = = = = = 2.502 2.503 0.501 30.000 10.000
>
END
COMP.
INPUT TOUCH SENSOR COMPENSATION.

<
Operation (1) Select setting item with the cursor key. Change page with page up/ down key. (2) Set items with softkey, or numerical input data and [INPUT] key. (3) By pressing softkey [END] or [<] , the setup function returns to the main menu. 1) TOUCH LENGTH COMPENSATION GUIDANCE Contents Touch sensor length compensation setting. +COMP.
-COMP.

2) TOUCH SENSOR DIAMETER GUIDANCE Contents Touch sen sordiame tersetting.
Diam.
391

3) SHIFT X, SHIFT Y GUIDANCE Contents
B63294EN/02
Shift value between touch sensor center and spindle center.
(X,Y)
4) RETURN AMOUNT GUIDANCE Contents After touching the measure point, the touch sensor separates from this point by the return amount. Setting of the return distance.
RET. AMOUNT
5) MINIMUM MOVEMENT GUIDANCE MIN. MOVEMENT Contents Sett in gofmini mumdista ncebetw eenmeas urepoint s. O nly forcir clecen termeasuring.
392
B63294EN/02
6) OVER RUN GUIDANCE Contents
Over rundistance , w hento uchsen sortouc hesthe meas urepoint.

OVER RUN 7) ADDITIONAL MOVEMENT GUIDANCE Contents At first, the touch sensor is moved to the measuring start position by manual operation. From this point, the touch sensor infeeds auto-matically to the measure point. The setting distance for additional movement has to be longer than the actual distance between measuring start point and measure point. If not, the touch sensor stops before reaching the measure point.

GUIDANCE
ADD. MOVE.
8) MEASURING FEEDRATE
Contents Measuring feedrate setting of touch sensor.
393

9) DISTANCE X, DISTANCE Z GUIDANCE Contents Z+ X+ X
B63294EN/02
Setting of distance between machine reference point and touch point at tool setter. Input positive or negative direction (+ or - ).

10)LENGTH APPROACH X, Y, Z GUIDANCE Contents Setting of distance between machine reference point and measuring tool approach point.

11) DIAMETER APPROACH X, Y, Z GUIDANCE
(X, Y, Z)
Contents Setting of distance between machine reference point and measuring tool approach point.
(X, Y, Z)
394
B63294EN/02
12)ADDITIONAL MOVEMENT GUIDANCE Contents
At first, the tool is moved to the measuring start position. From this point, the tool infeeds automatically to the tool setter touch point. The setting distance for additional movement has to be longer than the actual distance between measuring start point and touch point.
ADD. MOVE.
13)FEEDING DIRECTION GUIDANCE Contents Input feeding direction, by selecting one of the below shwon softkeys.
X+
< X+
14)MEASURING FEEDRATE GUIDANCE Contents
Measuring feedrate setting when tool approaches touch point at tool setter. F
395

15)RETURN AMOUNT GUIDANCE Contents
B63294EN/02
After touching the tool setter, the tool separates from the touch point by the return amount. Setting of the return distance.
RETURN AMOUNT
16)REFERENCE POINT DISTANCE GUIDANCE Contents Setting of the distance from the reference point to the actual measure point (plus/ minus).
Reference PT. Dist.
396
B63294EN/02 2.13.3 Appendix 2.13.3.1 Ladder Program
The following ladder program is necessary for the setup operation guidance function.
D700. 0 MODE1 MODE2 D700.0 MD2 MD1
Switch to MEM mode.
MODE3
D700.0
MD4
D700.2
ERS Sett ingw henmachin in gmacro is finished.
ST.M D700.0 D700.1
ST Cycle Start ON/OFF
#7 D700
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2 ERS
#1 ST
#0 MEM
MEM mode selection in macro. Macro cycle start selection in macro. Macro reset selection in macro. The mode can be changed and cycle start can be applied, by using the above ladder program and switching D700 ON/ OFF in the macro program. D700. 2 is controlled by an auxiliary macro.
2.13.3.2 Shift Amount calculation Apply the following described method to calculate the touch sensor shift amount for centering.
397

(1) Mount touch sensor in spindle.
B63294EN/02
(2) Move the touch sensor with exactly the same feedrate as applied for measuring to the measure point and memorize the touch point coordinates. (3) Turn the spindle by 180_ , repeat the procedure as described in (2) and memorize the touch point coordinates. (4) Calculate the shift amount with the coordinates obtained in (2) and (3) as follows.
B 180 rotated
SHIFT =
(B coordinate A coordinate) / 2
(5) Add plus/ minus sign for positive or negative measuring position.

A + + + +
As shown on the drawing on the left, the shift amount becomes negative. Note) Dontt spin the spindle during measauring.
2.13.3.3 Over Run calculation

Apply the following described method to calculate the touch sensor over run. (1) Mount touch sensor in spindle. (2) Measure the diameter of an accurate ring gage with exactly the same feedrate as applied for centering. With the result, the over run can be calculated as follows.
D : diameter ring gage. D : measuring result. d : touch sensor diamter. OVER RUN = {(D+d) D} / 2
Do nots pin thetouchsensor.
398
B63294EN/02
(3) Z axis over run calculation.
(4) Measure the length of an accurate block gage with exactly the same feedrate as applied for Z reference point measuring. With the result the Z axis over run can be calculated as follows.
A : diameter ring gage. B : measuring result. d : touch sensor diamter. A B OVER RUN = A B
399
B63294EN/02
2.14 Direct Operation of C.A.P. Program

2.14.1 General
The menu called 6 PROGRAM EXEC is added to the basic menu screen. Created machining program can be executed directly from the conversational screen of this menu.
To add PROGRAM EXEC to the basic menu screen, the following parameter must be set: #7 9120 #6 #5 EXM The PROGRAM EXEC menu is: EXM = 0: Not displayed. = 1: Displayed. #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2.14.2 Screen configuration

(1) ABSOLUTE POSITION DISPLAY When the [ABS COOD] soft key is pressed on the PROGRAM EXEC screen, the following screen is displayed.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE HOLE PATERN 004 HOLE HOLE PATRON PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END DRILLING CENTER 73 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 ARC SAME SP F 0 BOLT HOL CIR S 0 PROCESS END T3 0 SIDE PREP. END MI D 0 H SIDE PREP. END MI 15 SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END
EXECUTION NDIA FEED SPINDL
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000
005 SIDE CUTTING SIDE CUTTING
0
ALL COOD
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

< NEXT NC MODAL BLOCK FORMAT DEST TO GO ABS COOD REL COOD
Screen Explanation (a) Program Number Display A program number, a sequence number, and a comment data are displayed.
400
B63294EN/02
(b) Process Table Display
The operating program is displayed on the screen. The cursor indicates operating process. (c) Current Position Display The position data can be displayed for up to 5 axes. (The position data more than 6th axis are displayed by pushing the soft key [ABS COOD] again.) (d) Command Value Display The command values (Mcode, feed rate F, spindle rate S, Tcode, Dcode, and Hcode) being executed are displayed. (e) Actual Feed Rare Display The actual feed rate per minute of machine can be displayed. And the actual spindle rate can be displayed too by setting parameter No.9135 ACS. #7 9135 In actual cutting feedrate display, ASC = 0: Only the feedrate is displayed with sextuple characters. = 1: The feedrate and the spindle speed are displayed. (f) Status Display 1. Display of mode selection MDI : Manual data input MEM : Automatic operation RMT : Automatic operation (Tape operation, or suchlike) EDIT : Memory editing HND : Manual handle feed JOG : Manual continuous feed TJOG : Teach in jog THND: Teach in handle INC : Manual incremental feed REF : Manual reference position return 2. Display of automatic operation state **** : Reset STOP : Automatic operation stop HOLD: Automatic operation hold STRT : Automatic operation startup 3. Display of axis move/dwell MTN : Indicates that the axis is moving. DWL : Indicates the dwell state. **** FIN **** : Indicates a state other than the above. : Indicates the state in which an auxiliary function is executed. : Indicates a state other than the above. 4. Display of FIN standby #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ASC #0
5. Alarm Display ALM : Indicates that an alarm is issued. Motion of Cursor After the program starts, the cursor indicating the executing process moves downward for up to the 3rd block on the screen. Then the cursor stops moving, and the process table starts to scroll upward.
NOTE
401

(2) RELATIVE POSITION DISPLAY
B63294EN/02
The relative position is displayed by pushing the soft key [REL COOD] on the operating screen.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE HOLE PATRON 004 HOLE HOLE PATRON PROCESS TOOL NAME (REL TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END DRILLING CENTER 73 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 ARC SAME SP F 0 BOLT HOL CIR S 0 PROCESS END T3 0 SIDE PREP. END MI D 0 H SIDE PREP. END MI 15 SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000
0
ALL COOD
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

(3) OVERALL DISPLAY The current position in the following coordinate system is displayed simultaneously by pushing the soft key [ALL COOD] on the operating screen.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE HOLE PATRON 004 HOLE HOLE PATRON
EXECUTION FEED SPINDL (ABS COOD) X 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000
PROCESS TOOL NAME (REL TOOL NO NDIA COOD) INITIAL SETTING X 0.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL Y 73 0.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL Z 71 0.000 SQUARE BIDIR U 0.000 PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL(MACHINE) 3 TAPPING TAP 25 X 0.000 PARALLELOGRAM Y 0.000 PROCESS END Z 0.000 DRILLING CENTER 73 U 0.000 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 ARC SAME SP F 0 BOLT HOL CIR S 0 PROCESS END T 0 SIDE PREP. END MI D3 0 H 0 SIDE PREP. END MI 15 SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

< NEXT NC MODAL BLOCK FORMAT DEST TO GO ABS COOD REL COOD ALL COOD
(4) COMMAND VALUES BEING EXECUTED OR TO BE EXECUTED NEXT DISPLAY The following screen is displayed by pushing the soft key [NEXT BLOCK] on the operating screen.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATRON PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER 73 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 CURRENT NEXT F 0 G00 X 12345.678 G00 X 12345.678 S 0 PROCESS END Y 0.000 Y 0.000 T 0 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 D 0 H U 0.000 U 0.000 SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000
F
ABS COOD REL COOD ALL COOD
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

< NEXT NC MODAL BLOCK FORMAT DEST TO GO
The position data can be displayed for up to 5 axes. G00, G01, G02, G03 are displayed on this screen.
402
B63294EN/02
(5) MODAL VALUES DISPLAY
The following screen is displayed by pushing the soft key [MODAL] on the operating screen.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATRON PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER 73 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 MODAL F 0 G01 G40 G54 G17 G49 G64 G91 S 0 PROCESS END G67 G80 G69 G22 G98 G15 G21 T 0 G94 G50 G25 D 0 H SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000
F
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

(6) RESIDUAL MOVEMENT AMOUNT DISPLAY The following screen is displayed by pushing the soft key [DEST TO GO] on the operating screen.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATRON PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER 73 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 DISTANCE F 0 X 12345.678 S 0 PROCESS END Y 0.000 T 0 Z 0.000 D 0 H U 0.000 SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000
0
ALL COOD
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

403

(7) NC FORMAT DISPLAY
B63294EN/02
The following screen is displayed by pushing the soft key [NC FORMAT] on the operating screen.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATRON PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER 73 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 NC DISP F 0 S 0 SUB PROGRAM 09100 PROCESS N0010 END T 0 CURRENT G00 X0. Y0. Z0. ; D 0 H NEXT G54 ; SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE G00 X28.3 ; PROCESS END
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000
0
ALL COOD
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

The executing block is displayed in reverse video. The two windows to display the operating pogram can be displayed on the left side of the screen.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING FACING 003 HOLE MODAL G01 G40 G67 G80 G94 G50 CURRENT G54 G69 G25 PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 G17 G22 G49 G98 G64 G15 G91 G21
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000

M F S T D 46 0 0 0 0 H
NEXT
G00 X 12345.678 G00 X 12345.678 PROCESS END Y 0.000 Y 0.000 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 U 0.000 U 0.000 SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END
F
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

Using parameter No. 9136, it is possible to specify the screen to be displayed when the PROGRAM EXEC screen is displayed for the first time after the power is turned on. #7 9136 NXB #6 GCD #5 MDL #4 DTG #3 ABS #2 REL #1 OVA #0
When the PROGRAM EXEC screen is displayed for the first time after the power is turned on, NXB = = GCD = = MDL = = DTG = = ABS = = 0 : The current block/next block display screen is not displayed. 1 : The current block/next block display screen is displayed. 0 : The NC statement display screen is not displayed. 1 : The NC statement display screen is displayed. 0 : The modal information display screen is not displayed. 1 : The modal information display screen is displayed. 0 : The residual movement amount display screen is not displayed. 1 : The residual movement amount display screen is displayed. 0 : The absolute coordinate display screen is not displayed. 1 : The absolute coordinate display screen is displayed.
404
B63294EN/02
REL = = OVA = =

0 : The relative coordinate display screen is not displayed. 1 : The relative coordinate display screen is displayed. 0 : The overall coordinate display screen is not displayed. 1 : The overall coordinate display screen is not displayed.
If ABS, REL, and OVA are all set to 0, the absolute coordinates are displayed. If two or more of these parameters are set to 1, the coordinates are displayed according to the following priorities: ABS > REL > OVA Example When parameter No. 9136 = 00000110, the relative coordinates are displayed. (8) LOAD METER DISPLAY Using parameter No. 9135, the load meter can be displayed on the PROGRAM EXEC screen, as shown below. #7 9135 The load meter is: LDM = 0 : Not displayed. = 1 : Displayed. The following screen is displayed by setting parameter No.3111 OPM to 1.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATRON PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER 73 DRILLING DRILL 71 M 46 CURRENT NEXT F 0 G00 X 12345.678 G00 X 12345.678 S 0 PROCESS END Y 0.000 Y 0.000 T 0 Z 0.000 Z 0.000 D 0 H U 0.000 U 0.000 SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING EXECUTION NDIA FEED SPINDL
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0 LDM
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000 U 0. 000

LOAD MTR. X: Y: Z: S: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 0% 0% 0% 0%
0
ALL COOD
(MM/MIN)
MEM STOP ***** ***** *****

S The reading on the load meter can be displayed for up to three servo axes. S The bar graph of the load meter shows load in the renge from 0% to 200%. NOTE 1 To select servo axes, specify the axis numbers in parameter No.3151 to No.3153. If 0 is specified in all of parameters No.3151 to No.3153, the loadmeter for the reference axis is displayed. NOTE 2 The rated load of the motor corresponding to each load meter is necessary to be set in parameter No.3160. NOTE 3 If the value of a load meter exceeds 100%, the bar graph turns purple.
405
2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS 2.14.3 Program restart
B63294EN/02
The machining operation can be restarted, when a tool is broken down or when it is desired to restart machining operation after the power off. When you stop NC execution, the block number which is executed by that time is displayed on the upper right of the screen. The operator appoints the block number, which is desired to restart, by reference of the above block number. NOTE This function needs the PROGRAM RESTART option of NC system.
The flow of Program Restart is the following procedure. Retract the tool and replace it with a new one by using MDI or JOG operation. When necessary, change the offset amount on Tool Used List screen. Turn the program restart switch ON and press [RESET]. Set the block number with pressing the softkey [BLOCK SET]. Press the softkey [RESTART]. The block number is searched for. Turn the program restart switch OFF. Check the screen for M,S,T and B codes. Enter the MDI mode, then execute M,S,T and B functions. And Restore the MEM mode. If a possibility of collision exists, move the tool manually. Press the cycle start button. The tool moves the machining start position at the dry run feedrate. Then machining is restarted. If the tool collides with the workpiece before the machining restart position, move the tool manually.
406
B63294EN/02
Operation
Select 6. PROGRAM EXEC on the basic menu screen. (1) Retract the tool and replace it with a new one on the screen of MDI or handle operation. When you select the MDI mode, the following screen is displayed. Input G or M code from CRT/MDI panel and then press the cycle start button in order to change the tool.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING EXE BLOCK: 123EXECUTION FEED SPINDL 00 *** Z 50.000
PROCESS TOOL NAME PROGRAM TOOL NO (MDI) NDIA INITIAL SETTING G 90 17 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 X 0.000 Y 0.000 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 FACING SQUARE BIDIR M 06 S 0 PROCESS END T 12 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 B TAPPING TAP 250 D 0 HOLE PATTERN PARALLELOGRAM H 0 PROCESS END 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER DRILLING DRILL HOLE PATTERN ARC SAME SP BOLT HOL CIR PROCESS END 005 SIDE CUTTING SIDE PREP. END MI SIDE PREP. END MI SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE PROCESS END 73 (MODAL) 71 M 3 F 0 S 0 HD.T 30 NX.T D 150 H 0 B 0
MDI STOP ***** *****

< NEXT NC MODAL BLOCK FORMAT DEST TO GO ABS COOD REL COOD ALL COOD
Using parameter No. 3108, the display of the modal T code can be changed. #7 3108 The modal T code is displayed as: PCT = 0 : T. = 1 : HD.T and NX.T. HD.T : Tool on the spindle NX.T : Tool for the next process HD.T and NX.T is specified by PMC with WINDW function (COMMAND 150H). (2) When necessary, change the offset amount on Tool Used List screen which you select 8. CAP DATA menu. If Listing is necessary, select the EDIT mode and press the softkey [LISTING]. (3) Then, restore the screen of CAP program execution and restore the MEM mode. (4) Turn on the program restart switch on the machine operators panel.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING EXE BLOCK: 123RESTART SPINDL
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2 PCT
#1
#0
PROCESS TOOL NAME (ABS TOOL NO NDIA FEED COOD) INITIAL SETTING FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATTERN PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER 73 M 3 LOAD DRILLING DRILL 71 F 0 HOLE PATTERN ARC SAME SP X: * * * S 0 BOLT HOL CIR Y: * * * HD.T 0 PROCESS END Z: * * * D 0 005 SIDE CUTTING SIDE PREP. END MI 3 S: * * * H 0 SIDE PREP. END MI 15 F 0 MM/MIN SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE S 0 PROCESS END MEM ***** ***** *****
< RE START BLOCK SET
X 12345. 678 Y 0. 000 Z 0. 000

* * * * * * * * 0% 0% 0% 0%
(*4)
(5) Press [RESET] on the CRT/MDI panel.
407
B63294EN/02
(6) Press the softkey [BLOCK SET]. Then, the following window is displayed on the screen.
PROG RESTART BLOCK NUMBER :
124
The operator can specify the number of the block from which the program is to be restarted, by referencing the number displayed on the CRT. When the CNC is stopped, the number of executed blocks is displayed on the program screen or program restart screen as EXE BLOCK. The displayed number of EXE BLOCK indicates the number of the block that was executed most recently. The displayed number of BLOCK NUMBER indicates the number of the EXE BLOCK + 1. Therefore, if you want to restart the program from the block at which execution stopped, you can use the displayed number without changing it. This BLOCK NUMBER can be increased and decreased by pressing the [+] and [] softkeys. To use the function for restarting a program using a block number, parameter No. 9137 must be set. #7 9137 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 BLK Determines whether to enable program restart using a block number. BLK = 0 : Disabled. = 1 : Enabled. #0
408
B63294EN/02

(7) Press the softkey [RESTART]. Then, the block number is searched for, and the program start screen appears on the CRT display as follows.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING EXE BLOCK: 123RESTART
PROCESS TOOL NAME TOOL NO NDIA FEED GO) SPINDL (DESTINAT.) (DIST.TO INITIAL SETTING 1X 57.096 X 23.123 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 2Y 56.877 Y 5.767 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 3Z 56.943 Z 43.567 FACING SQUARE BIDIR PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATTERN PARALLELOGRAM M 3 9 7 6 *** PROCESS END *** 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER 73 *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** *** DRILLING DRILL 71 0 S HOLE PATTERN ARC SAME SP T 0 0 BOLT HOL CIR B 0 PROCESS END 005 SIDE CUTTING SIDE PREP. END MI 3 (MODAL) SIDE PREP. END MI 15 M 3 HD.T NX.T SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE S B PROCESS END OFF[PROGRAM
<
RESTART]
DEST TO GO
MEM STOP ***** *****

NEXT NC MODAL BLOCK FORMAT
(DESTINAT) shows the position at which machining is to restart. (DIST.TO GO) shows the distance from the current tool position to the position where machining is to restart. The figure at the left side of the axis name shows the order when the tool moves to the restart position. This order is referred to the parameter No.7310. 7310 Order assumed when the tool moves to the program restart position Set the axis order assumed when the tool moves to the restart position with dry run after the program is restarted. The coordinates and amount of travel for restarting the program can be displayed for up to four axes. M: Fourteen most recently specified M codes S: Most recently specified S code T: Two Most recently specified T codes B: Most recently specified B code Codes are displayed in the order in which they are specified. Each code is cleared with a program restart command and with a cycle start in the reset state. NOTE When the parameter No.9137#7 is set to 1 and Tcode of HD.T is differ from searched Tcode of the second, the warning message is displayed as Tcode differs from HD.T. #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 9137 CHT
If the Tcode of HD.T differs from the searched Tcode of the second, a message is: CHT = 0 : Not displayed. = 1 : Displayed.
409

(8) Turn off the program restart switch on the machine operators panel.
PROGRAM O1000 N00001 (TEST PROGRAM) NO. CYCLE 001 AUXILIARY 002 FACING EXE BLOCK: 123RESTART
B63294EN/02
PROCESS TOOL NAME PROGRAM TOOL NO (MDI) NDIA FEED SPINDL INITIAL SETTING M 3 FACING PREP. FACE MILL 73 S FACING PREP. FACE MILL 71 T FACING SQUARE BIDIR B PROCESS END 003 HOLE TAPPING CENTER DRILL 3 TAPPING TAP 25 HOLE PATTERN PARALLELOGRAM PROCESS END 9 7 6 *** 004 HOLE DRILLING CENTER M 73 3 *** *** *** *** *** DRILLING DRILL 71 *** *** *** *** *** HOLE PATTERN ARC SAME SP S 0 BOLT HOL CIR T 0 0 PROCESS END B 0 005 SIDE CUTTING SIDE PREP. END MI 3 (MODAL) SIDE PREP. END MI 15 M 3 HD.T NX.T SIDE CUTTING SQUARE OSIDE S B PROCESS END MDI STOP ***** *****
< NEXT NC MODAL BLOCK FORMAT DEST TO GO ABS COOD REL COOD ALL COOD SELECT
(9) Check the screen, and if M,S,T and B code should be output, select the MDI mode, and output M,S,T or B code from MDI. The above code such as M,S,T is inputted by pressing the softkey [SELECT] and moving the cursor then pressing [INPUT] on the CRT/MDI panel. The following MDI input screen needs the parameter No.9137 MPG(#0). #7 9137 The MDI input screen is: MPG = 0 : Not displayed. = 1 : Displayed. NOTE The operator can not specify M6 code on this MDI screen. When M6 is inputted from MDI, the warning message is displayed as CAN NOT INPUT M6 . (10)After select the MEM mode, check whether the distance of (DIST.TO GO) is correct, and the tool does not hit against the workpiece and others. If it is about to collide with an obstacle, move the tool manually to the location where it does not collide, then press Cycle Start button. At this time, the tool moves to the machining restart position in the dry run mode by one axis in the order set to the parameters No.7310, thus restarting machining operation in succession. #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 MPG
410
B63294EN/02
4. Limitations D Restart
Under any of the following conditions, restart cannot be performed: S When automatic operation has not been performed since the power was turned on S When automatic operation has not been performed since an emergency stop was released S When automatic operation has not been performed since the coordinate system was changed or shifted (change in an external offset from the workpiece reference point) D Restart Block The block to be restarted need not be the block which was interrupted; operation can restart with any block. But the restart block must use the same coordinate system as when operation was interrupted. D Single block When single block operation is ON during movement to the restart position, operation stops every time the tool completes movement along axes. When operation is stopped in the single block mode, MDI intervention cannot be performed. D Manual intervention During movement to the restart position, manual intervention can be used to perform a return operation for axis if it has not yet been performed for the axis. A return operation cannot be done further on axes for which a return has already been completed. And move command cannot be specified from the MDI panel during a restart operation. D Reset Never reset during the time from the start of a search at restart until machining is restarted. Otherwise, restart must be performed again from the first step. D Manual absolute Regardless of whether machining has started or not, manual operation must be performed when the manual absolute mode is on. D Reference position return If no absoluteposition detector (absolute pulse coder) is provided, be sure to perform reference position return after turning on the power and before performing restart. D Moving the axis on MDI mode after searching the block number After searching the block number, it is impossible to move the axis on MDI mode such like Macro Call Command with M/T/Gcode or Axis Control by PMC function. It is possible to move the axis with manual handle or Jog operation only. If the operator wants to move the axis on MDI mode, please move it before searching the block number surely. Be sure to set the following parameter No. 3407. #7 3407 #6 C14 By resetting on the CRT/MDI panel, the G code of group number 14 is: C14 = = 0 : Cleared. 1 : Not cleared. #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Be sure to set 1.
411
B63294EN/02
WARNING
As a rule, the tool cannot be returned to a correct position under the following conditions. Special care must be taken in the following cases since none of them cause an alarm: S Manual operation is performed when the manual absolute mode is OFF. S Manual operation is performed when the machine is locked. S When the mirror image is used. S When axis movement is performed in MDI mode after a block number search. S When manual operation is performed in the course of axis movement for returning operation. S When the program restart is commanded for a block between the block for skip cutting and subsequent absolute command block.
412
III. PARAMETERS AND ALARMS
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
1. PARAMETERS
WARNING Always use the parameters set by the machine tool builder. If you change the setting of a parameter, the machining program may not operate as intended. If the machining program does not operate as intended, the tool may collide with the workpiece, and the machine may be forced to perform machining that exceeds its physical capabilities, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, or even injury to the user or bystanders.
1.1 Parameters Related to Graphic Display

#7 6500 DPO = 0 1 #6 #5 DPO #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
00100000
: The current position is not displayed on the screens used for displaying animation drawings (solid) and tool path drawings. : The current position is displayed on the screens used for displaying solid drawings (machining profiles) and tool path drawings. #6 #5 CSR #4 FIM #3 RID #2 3PL #1 TLC #0 ORG
#7 6501 ORG = = TLC 3PL RID FIM CSR = = = = = = = = = 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
00000000
: When the coordinate system is updated during tool path drawing. : Drawing is continued, applying the new coordinate system to the current position. : Drawing is continued, without changing the coordinate system. : Tool length compensation is not performed during animation drawing. : Tool length compensation is performed during animation drawing. : A triplane drawing is created by means of first angle projection during animation drawing. : A triplane drawing is created by means of third angle projection during animation drawing. : A top view is created without edge lines during animation drawing. : A top view is created with edge lines during animation drawing. : A machining profile is displayed in rough mode during animation drawing. : A machining profile is displayed in fine mode during animation drawing. : The graphic cursor becomes a square when the screen is enlarged during tool path drawing. : The graphic cursor becomes an x when the screen is enlarged.
6511
Right margin for solid drawing
6512
Left margin for solid drawing
6513
Top margin for solid drawing
32
6514
Bottom margin for solid drawing
10
415
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
Set the position where a animation will be drawn by specifying margins on the CRT screen. The units are dots. Parameter No. 6511 6512 6513 6514 Margin Right Left Top Bottom Standard setting When DP0 = 0 0 0 32 10 When DP0 = 1 100 0 32 10
DP0 is bit 5 of parameter No. 6500.

6515
Shift of the cross section for triplane drawing
10
Specify the cross section shift applied when the soft key is held down during triplane drawing. When 0 is specified, 1 is assumed.
416
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
1.2 Macro Executor

#7 9000 SQN = = NDP STP = = = = EXS = = RSC = = MKG = = L2R = = L2R 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 #6 #5 MKG #4 RSC #3 EXS #2 STP #1 NDP #0 SQD
00001000
: Does not display the sequence number, (Does not output the sequence number of convert NC format.) : Displays the sequence number.(Output the sequence number of convert NC format.) : Does not display local variables and common variables for a PCODE program. : Displays local variables and common variables for a PCODE program. : Executes a conversational macro program. : Stops the execution of a conversational macro program. (The break function automatically sets 1.) : After feed hold is applied, execution of macro statements stops immediately. : After feed hold is applied, execution of macro statements continues until the next NC statement. : Common variables #100 to #149 are not cleared to null when the NC is reset. : Common variables #100 to #149 are cleared to null when the NC is reset. : Displays a graphic screen. : Does not display a graphic screen. : Enables conversational/auxiliary macros and screen display during operation by execution macros. : Disables conversational/auxiliary macros and screen display during operation by execution macros.
9001
Reserved
9002
Program number for conversational macro break
9003
Sequence number for conversational macro break
417
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
1.3 CAP Control

9101
Program number of the input end check macro
9927
9102
Number of the machining menu containing the initial settings
Number of the machining menu containing the initial settings specified by the TT instruction. The machining menu number specified by the TT instruction is used for subsequent operations.
9103
Number of the detailed menu containing the initial settings
9104
Number of the machining menu containing the end settings
9105
Number of the detailed menu containing the end settings
#7 9106 SGM = = AWK = = MSJ MDL SCL = = UMC = = 0 1 0 1 #7 9107 = = = = UMC 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
#6 SCL
#5
#4
#3 MDL
#2 MSJ
#1 AWK
#0 SGM
01000000
: FANUC standard macros are used. : Macros partially modified are used. : In animated simulation, the workpiece coordinate system is disabled. : In animated simulation, the workpiece coordinate system is enabled. : Modes are displayed in English, as are messages. : Modes are displayed in Japanese, as are messages. : Modal calling (G66) can be specified. : Modal calling (G66) cannot be specified. : When control is in the graphic screen : Scaling is always turned off. : Scaling is turned on only when the specified program number differs from the program number subject to previous scaling. : Tool change macros and end setting macros do not call user programs. : Tool change macros and end setting macros call user programs. #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 AT2 #0 AT1
11100000
Next tool control number embedding AT1 AT2 = = = = 0 1 0 1 : Embedding is not performed when control is returned from menu 1. : Embedding is performed when control is returned from menu 1. : Embedding is not performed when control is returned from menu 2. : Embedding is performed when control is returned from menu 2.
418
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
9108
Z axis approach/escape amount with a regular figure
9109
Program number of the initial value setting macro
9974
9110
Machining menu number for drilling
9111
Machining menu number for NC language
9112
Machining menu number for miscellaneous functions
9113
Machining menu 1, for which the start menu is not automatically changed to the figure menu
Sets the number of a machining menu consisting of only start menus (for other than the drilling menu).
9114
Machining menu 2, for which the start menu is not automatically changed to the figure menu Machining menu 3, for which the start menu is not automatically changed to the figure menu
9115
9116
Machining menu number of the NC language start menu
9117
Detailed menu number of the NC language start menu
Sets a start menu such as the FANUC standard NC language start menu, which specifies a certain operation by itself.
9118
Un used
0 Not supported 0 Not supported
9119
Un used
#7 9120 FRM
#6
#5 EXM
#4 DCY
#3 RSP
#2 ASP
#1 CEM
#0 FRM
00000000
: Determines whether the horizontal line of window C is displayed. 0 : Displayed 1 : Not displayed
419
1. PARAMETERS
CEM : The system 0 : has not CEMarking hard key 1 : has CEMarking hard key ASP : When an alarm is issued during editing,
B63294EN/02
0 : The system switches to the alarm screen after editing is completed. 1 : The system switches to the alarm screen by interrupting editing. RSP : When the RESET key is pressed during editing, editing is: 0 : Not interrupted 1 : Interrupted DCY : Determines whether canned cycles are used for hole machining. 0 : Not used 1 : Used EXM : Determines whether the conversational program direct operation screen is displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
9121
First M code No.
(Machining time display)
9122
Execution time of first M code (in increments of 10 milliseconds) (Machining time display)
9123
Second M code No.
9124
Execution time of second M code (in increments of 10 milliseconds) (Machining time display)
9125
Third M code No.
9126
Execution time of third M code (in increments of 10 milliseconds) (Machining time display) Average execution time of other M codes (Machining time display)
9127
9128
Average execution time of S codes
9129
Average execution time of T codes
9130
O number of the user macro to be called by an end setting macro
9131
O number of the user macro to be called by a tool change macro
420
B63294EN/02
#7 9132 Program list MN2 #6 #5 #4 #3 MN5 #2 MN4 #1 MN3 #0 MN2
1. PARAMETERS
00000000
: Determines whether the program list is displayed when menu 2 is selected. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
MN3
MN4
MN5
: Determines whether the program list is displayed when menu 5 is selected. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed #7 #6 #5 CSB #4 CVL #3 CMH #2 CDD #1 OPO #0 GRO
9133 NC statement output GRO
00100100
: Sets whether the G10 command for Uaxis machining is output. 0 : Output 1 : Not output
OPO
: Determines whether the G10 command is output with the optional block delete symbol (/). 0 : Output without the optional block delete symbol (/) 1 : Output with the optional block delete symbol (/)
NOTE CDD
OPO is valid only when GRO is set to 0. : Determines whether an expanded program is displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
CMH
: Determines whether address H is used as an argument for M code calling. 0 : Not used 1 : Used
CVL
: Determines whether NC statements conforming to the reverse JIS code are output. 0 : Not output 1 : Output
NOTE CSB
CVL is valid only when GRO is set to 1. Parameters 9236 and 9237 must also be set. : Determines whether to enable the single block output function for NC statement output. 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
421
1. PARAMETERS
#7 9135 Screen display for machining program operation LDM : Determines whether the load meter is displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed ACS : Determines the actual speed display format. #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 ACS #0 LDM
B63294EN/02
00000000
0 : Only the actual feedrate is displayed, using x6size characters 1 : Both the actual feedrate and spindle speed are displayed. #7 9136 NXB #6 GCD #5 MDL #4 CTM #3 ABS #2 REL #1 OVA #0
00000000
Initial display format of the machining program operating screen after poweron OVA : Determines whether the overall coordinates are displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed REL : Determines whether the relative coordinates are displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed ABS : Determines whether the absolute coordinates are displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed CTM : Determines whether the residual movement amount is displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed MDL : Determines whether the modal values are displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed GCD : Determines whether the NC statement data is displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed NXB : Determines whether the blocks currently being executed and to be executed next are displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed * If ABS, REL, and OVA are all set to 0, the absolute coordinates are displayed. If two or more of these parameters are set to 1, the coordinates are displayed according to the following priorities: ABS > REL > OVA Example When parameter No. 9136 = 00000110, the relative coordinates are displayed.
422
B63294EN/02
#7 9137 MPG #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 BLK #0 MPG
1. PARAMETERS
00000000
: Determines whether the MDI program screen is displayed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
BLK
: Determines whether the block specification function is used when a program is restarted. 0 : Not used 1 : Used
9138
Main program number of operation guidance macro
6000
Set 0 if the setup guidance function macro is not to be linked. #7 9139 #0 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 #0 00000000
: Determines whether the reference point is shifted during the measurement of a corner or Zaxis reference plane. 0 : Not shifted 1 : Shifted
The amount of shift is set on each measurement screen. #7 9140 NCC #6 #5 #4 #3 NCC #2 #1 #0
00000000
: Determines whether processes are to be output with comments attached during NC program conversion. 0 : Not output 1 : Output
423
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
1.4 CAP File

(30 byte) #6 T23
#7 9200 T24
#5 T22
#4 T21
#3 T14
#2 T13
#1 T12
#0 T11
00110111
9201
T44
T43
T42
T41
T34
T33
T32
T31
01110110
9202
T64
T63
T62
T61
T54
T53
T52
T51
01110111
9203
T84
T83
T82
T81
T74
T73
T72
T71
00010101
9204
TA4
TA3
TA2
TA1
T94
T93
T92
T91
00000000
9205
TC4
TC3
TC2
TC1
TB4
TB3
TB2
TB1
00000000
9206
TE4
TE3
TE2
TE1
TD4
TD3
TD2
TD1
00000000
9207
T04
T03
T02
T01
TF4
TF3
TF2
TF1
00000000
Tn1 to Tn4
: Sets whether the cursor skips items SDIA., NO. OF TOOTH, ANGL, and LENGTH OF CUT when moved to the nth tool among 16 tools. Tn4 Tn3 Tn2 Tn1 DIA
LENGTH ANGL NO.OF OF CUT TOOTH 0 : Does not skip. 1 : Skips. #7 9208 T2D #6 T2C #5 T2B #4 T2A #3 T1D
#2 T1C
#1 T1B
#0 T1A
00000000
9209
T4D
T4C
T4B
T4A
T3D
T3C
T3B
T3A
00000000
9210
T6D
T6C
T6B
T6A
T5D
T5C
T5B
T5A
00000000
9211
T8D
T8C
T8B
T8A
T7D
T7C
T7B
T7A
00010000
424
B63294EN/02
#7 9212 TAD #6 TAC #5 TAB #4 TAA #3 T9D #2 T9C #1 T9B #0 T9A
1. PARAMETERS
00000000
9213
TCD
TCC
TCB
TCA
TBD
TBC
TBB
TBA
00000000
9214
TED
TEC
TEB
TEA
TDD
TDC
TDB
TDA
00010000
9215
T0D
T0C
T0B
T0A
TFD
TFC
TFB
TFA
00000000
TnA to TnD
: Sets whether the cursor skips the four additional items when moved to the nth tool among 16 tools. TnD TnC TnB TnA
AdditionalAdditionalAdditionalAdditional item 4 item 3 item 2 item 1 0 : Does not skip. 1 : Skips. #7 9216 TDI TND #6 DHS #5 UDH #4 UAG #3 TG3 #2 GTD #1 UVR #0 TDI
11000001
: The display formats of 9th and 11th items in the tool file. 0 : Displays as SDIA. and ANGL. 1 : Displays as SDIA./PITCH and ANGL/DPTH SET.
UVR
: Determines which tool list is to be created. 0 : Conversational program only 1 : Conversational/NC program
GTD
: Determines which tool diameter variable is used during linear drawing. 0 : #6992 1 : #6015
TG3
: Tool file G code 0 : New specification 1 : Old specification
UAG
: Determines whether the graphical guidance for the Uaxis tool (Uaxis function) is displayed on the tool file screen. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed
UDH
: Determines the positions to which the cursor can be moved on the tool list screen. 0 : D and H codes only 1 : All items
DHS
: Determines which D and H codes are to be displayed when a tool list is created. 0 : D and H codes registered in a tool file 1 : D and H codes specified in a machining program
425
1. PARAMETERS
TND : Number of digits of a tool ID number 0: 8 1: 4
B63294EN/02
9217
Item displayed for variable item A in the tool list screen for each tool
9218
Item displayed for variable item B in the tool list screen for each tool
9219
Item displayed for variable item C in the tool list screen for each tool
9220
Item displayed for variable item D in the tool list screen for each tool
#7 9221 #1 #7
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2 #2
#1 #1
#0
00000000
: Determines whether the drill cycles of ZH03 to ZH08 are made peck cycles in modal cycles. 0 : Not made deep hole cycles 1 : Made deep hole cycles
#2
: Determines which is used to escape reamer machining during reaming (ZH07). 0 : Rapid traverse 1 : Cutting feed
#7
: Determines when to perform a cutter compensation check. 0 : Before a tool change (M6) 1 : After a tool change (M6)
9222
Depth of a single cut made while preparing a hole for peck drilling
20000
9223
Peck depth when preparing a hole for peck drilling
5000
9224
Retract depth when preparing a hole for peck drilling
30000
9225
Dwell when preparing a hole for peck drilling
Of parameters Nos. 9222 to 9225, parameters Nos. 9222 to 9224 are used during hole machining for hole machining (ZH03 to ZH08) if a modal cycle is specified (DCY (bit 4 of parameter No. 9120) = 0). They are not used in a canned cycle (DCY (bit 4 of parameter No. 9120) = 1). During hole machining for pocketing/grooving, parameters Nos. 9222 to 9225 are used if a modal cycle is specified; parameter No. 9222 is used in canned cycles.
426
B63294EN/02
#7 9226 U24 #6 U23 #5 U22 #4 U21 #3 U14 #2 U13 #1 U12 #0 U11
1. PARAMETERS
00000000
9227
U44
U43
U42
U41
U34
U33
U32
U31
01000000
9228
U64
U63
U62
U61
U54
U53
U52
U51
01000100
9229
U84
U83
U82
U81
U74
U73
U72
U71
00110011
Un1 to Un4
: Determine whether the cursor skips items SDIA, NO. OF TOOTH, ANGL, and LENGTH OF CUT when the cursor is positioned to the nth tool of the eight U axis tools. Un4 Un3 Un2 Un1 DIA
LENGTH ANGL NO.OF OF CUT TOOTH 0 : Does not skip. 1 : Skips. #7 9230 U2D #6 U2C #5 U2B #4 U2A #3 U1D
#2 U1C
#1 U1B
#0 U1A
11111111
9231
U4D
U4C
U4B
U4A
U3D
U3C
U3B
U3A
11111111
9232
U6D
U6C
U6B
U6A
U5D
U5C
U5B
U5A
11111111
9233
U8D
U8C
U8B
U8A
U7D
U7C
U7B
U7A
11111111
UnA to UnD
: Determine whether the cursor skips the four additional items when the cursor is positioned to the nth tool of the eight Uaxis tools. UnD UnC UnB UnA
AdditionalAdditionalAdditionalAdditional item 4 item 3 item 2 item 1 0 : Does not skip. 1 : Skips.
427
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
9234
Serial number (minimum) for which a Uaxis tool can be set on the tool file screen Multiple of 20
120
9235
Serial number (maximum) for which a Uaxis tool can be set on the tool file screen Multiple of 20
160
9236
Tool ID number (minimum) for executing Uaxis machining in the lefthanded coordinate system Tool ID number (maximum) for executing Uaxis machining in the lefthanded coordinate system
9237
Parameter Nos. 9226 to 9237 are valid when the Uaxis machining options are set to 1. #7 9238 SFL OWT #6 OWP #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 WOF #0 SFL
11000000
: Determines which format is used in the cutting condition file. 0 : Super CAPi M format 1 : CAP I format
WOF
: Determines whether the function for offsetting for each product is used in all copy patterns. 0 : Not used 1 : Used
OWP
: Determines whether the tool file is enabled or disabled when conversational setting data that was output from the CAP I system is read during data input from an external device. 0 : Disabled 1 : Enabled
OWT
: Determines whether the tool file is read when conversational setting data that was output from the CAP I system is read during data input from an external device. 0 : Not read 1 : Read
428
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
1.5 Menu Control

(60 byte) #6 ED7
#7 9300 ED8
#5 ED6
#4 ED5
#3 ED4
#2 ED3
#1 ED2
#0 ED1
00111100
9301
E16
E15
E14
E13
E12
E11
E10
ED9
00000000
9304
Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 1st TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 2nd TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 3rd TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 4th TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 5th TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 6th TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 7th TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 8th TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 9th TT instruction is entered
9305
9306
9307
9308
9309
9310
9311
9312 : :
9319
Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 16th TT instruction is entered Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 1st MN instruction is entered (only for drilling) Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 2nd MN instruction is entered (only for drilling)
9320
9321
429
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
9322
Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 3rd MN instruction is entered (only for drilling) Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 4th MN instruction is entered (only for drilling) Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 5th MN instruction is entered (only for drilling) Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 6th MN instruction is entered (only for drilling) Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 7th MN instruction is entered (only for drilling) Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 8th MN instruction is entered (only for drilling)
9323
9324
9325
9326
9327 : : : : :
9343
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 Type of tool displayed when the address T code of the 24th MN instruction is entered (only for drilling)
#0
9344
Type of tool used for contouring outer surface
17
9345
Type of tool used for contouring inner surface
18
9346
Type of tool used for contouring end face
19
9347
Type of tool used for grooving outer surface
20
9348
Type of tool used for grooving inner surface
21
430
B63294EN/02
#7 9349 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1. PARAMETERS
Type of tool used for grooving end face
22
9350
Type of tool used for threading (outer surface)
23
9351
Type of tool used for threading (inner surface)
24
Parameters Nos. 9344 to 9351 are effective when the Uaxis machining option is 1.
431
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
1.6 Contour
#7 9400 PCK CMF #6 UDI #5 PBD #4 CGO #3 #2 #1 CUT #0 PCK
00000000
: Sets whether the interference between the tool and the island or wall of the contour pocket machining is checked. 0 : Checked 1 : Not checked
CUT
: Sets whether infeed is performed in contour side, pocketing A, and grooving. 0 : Uniformly 1 : Not uniformly
CGO
: Sets whether the contour is drawn when the cursor moves to the contour block in the program screen. 0 : Drawn 1 : Not drawn
PBD
: Determines whether multiple pending drawing is executed. 0 : Executed 1 : Not executed
UDI
: Determines whether values in the Uaxis direction are specified as a radius or diameter. 0 : Radius 1 : Diameter
CMF
: Sets whether islands are to be chamfered during contour pocket cutting A, if chamfering is specified, depending on whether the height of the island is different from that of the wall. 0 : Only those islands whose height is the same as that of the wall are chamfered. 1 : All islands are chamfered.
9401
Amount of approach and retraction along the Xaxis and Yaxis in oneway contour pocket cutting A (0 to 100%) Feedrate override for rough cutting of the cotour pocket cutting A wall or island wall (0 to 100%) Specification of the speed of the return operation during twoway cutting of contour pocket cutting A (1 to 5), multiple of the cutting speed Cutter offset number used for cutting the contour pocket cutting A wall and island wall Zaxis cutin speed during approach operation for contour pocket cutting A and B (when bit 7 of parameter 9462 = 0) Zaxis cutin speed ratio (%) during approach operation for contour pocket cutting A and B and contour grooving
9402
50
9403
9404
9406
100 100
The purpose of this parameter differs depending on parameter No. 9462. 9407 Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour menu (CONTOUR side 1) 4
432
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
9408
Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour menu (CONTOUR side 1) Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour side 2 Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour side 2 Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour pocket 1 Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour pocket 1 Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour pocket 2 Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour pocket 2 Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour menu (groove 1) Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour menu (groove 1) Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour menu (groove 2) Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour menu (groove 2) Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour menu (reserve 1) Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour menu (reserve 1) Number of a machining menu which automatically changes the contour menu (reserve 2) Number of a detailed menu which automatically changes the contour menu (reserve 2)
9409
9410
9411
9412
9413
9414
9415
9416
9417
9418
9419
9420
9421
9422
9424
Default value of the type of approach
433
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
9425
Default value of the type of retraction
9426
Default value of the tangential distance for approach
10000
9427
Default value of the tangential distance for retraction
10000
9428
Default value of the normal distance for approach
10000
9429
Default value of the normal distance for retraction
10000
9430
Default value of the arc radius for approach
30000
9431
Default value of the arc radius for retraction
30000
9432
Default value of the feedrate for approach along the Zaxis
20000
9433
Default value of the feedrate for retraction along the Zaxis (side face only)
30000
9434
Distance X from the auxiliary approach point to the approach point
500
9435
Distance Y from the auxiliary approach point to the approach point
500
9436
Blank magnification registered in animated simulation
9437
Initial U component of clearance in contouring (rough)
2000
9438
Initial Z component of clearance in contouring (rough)
2000
#7 9439 UEXE
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2
#1
#0 UEXE
00000000
: Semifinish machining in grooving (rough) 0 : is executed 1 : is not executed
434
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
9442
Chamfering amount for threading
9443
Machining menu number for Uaxis machining
10
9444
Detailed menu number to be changed to Uaxis contour (outer surface)
9445
Detailed menu number to be changed to Uaxis contour (inner surface)
9446
Detailed menu number to be changed to Uaxis contour (end face)
9447
Detailed menu number to be changed to Uaxis groove (outer surface)
9448
Detailed menu number to be changed to Uaxis groove (inner surface)
9449
Detailed menu number to be changed to Uaxis groove (end face)
9450
Detailed menu number for threading preparation
9451
Surface roughness corresponding to code 1 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 2 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 3 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 4 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 5 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 6 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 7 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch)
600
9452
400
9453
300
9454
250
9455
200
9456
150
9457
100
435
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
9458
Surface roughness corresponding to code 8 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 9 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Surface roughness corresponding to code 10 (0.0001mm/0.00001inch) Default value for surface roughness displayed in Uaxis contouring preparation menu
70
9459
40
9460
30
9461
Parameters Nos. 9436 to 9461 are effective when the Uaxis machining option is 1. #7 9462 DTA ZFDR #6 #6 #5 #4 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 DTA
00000000
: Determines which is referred to for the approach/escape amount during contour pocketing A. 0 : Value set for parameter No. 9464 1 : Tool diameter
#4
: Determines to which point the tool escapes when cutting an area during contour pocketing A. 0 : Point R 1 : Start or end point Start point = Z depth + pitch + clearance End point = Z depth + clearance
#6
: Determines with which code the tool escapes when cutting an outer periphery during contour pocketing A. 0 : G01 1 : G00
ZFDR
: The Zaxis cutin speed during the approach operation for contour pocketing A and B and contour grooving is specified as: 0 : Speed 1 : Speed ratio (%) at which cutting is performed in the X and Yaxes The setting of parameter No. 9406 must be changed depending on the setting of this parameter.
9463
Clearance amount assumed during contour pocketing A
3000
9464
Approach/escape amount assumed during contour pocketing A (when bit 0 of parameter No. 9462 = 0) Zaxis feedrate assumed during the escape operation in contour pocketing A
10000
9465
30000
436
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
9470
Hole cutin angle assumed during contour pocketing B (deg)
9471
Feedrate assumed during movement in the tool diameter direction in contour pocketing B (rapid traverse if 0) Feedrate assumed during movement in the tool axis direction in contour pocketing B (rapid traverse if 0) Clearance amount in the tool diameter direction during contour pocketing B
9472
9473
3000
9474
Clearance amount in the tool axis direction during contour pocketing B
1000
#7 9475 ILA CHK
#6
#5
#4
#3
#2 CNR
#1 MOV
#0 ILA
00000000
: Specify whether to machine the top of islands during contour pocketing B. 0 : Machines the top by controlling the depth of cut. 1 : Does not machine the top.
MOV
: During contour pocketing B, the movement during infeed is performed with: 0 : Surface + parameter No. 9474 1 : Machining surface + parameter No. 9474
CNR
: Specify the cutting method at corners during contour pocketing B. 0 : Interpolates corners with arcs. 1 : Interpolates corners with straight lines.
CHK
: Specify whether to check pocketing to see if there are uncut portions during contour pocketing B. 0 : Does not perform the check. 1 : Performs the check.
9476
Argument representing the input item CUTTING DRCT. on the contour pocketing preparation screen
85
As character codes, set the decimal equivalents of ASCII codes. Set 85 to use FANUC standard macros.
9477
Argument representing the input data SPIRAL on the contour pocketing preparation screen
Set 3 to use FANUC standard macros.
437
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
1.7 Workpiece Material Name

#7 9500 WKN = = 0 1 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 WKN
00000000
: Display the material name of the workpiece by reference the editing macro program. : Display the material name of the workpiece by reference the parameters No.9503 No.9599. 0
9503
Number n of the item [WORKPIECE MATERIAL] on the initial setting menu
Specify that the nth data input item on the data input screen is to be used as the item for entering a workpiece material name. Set 1 to use standard macros. 9504 The 1st string code of the material name of the workpiece 1 0
As character codes, set the decimal equivalents of ASCII codes. : : : 9515 The 12th string code of the material name of the workpiece 1 0
9516
The 1st string code of the material name of the workpiece 2 : : :
9527
The 12th string code of the material name of the workpiece 2
9528
9539
9540
9551
438
B63294EN/02
1. PARAMETERS
9552
9563
9564
9575
9576
9587
9588
9599
439
1. PARAMETERS
B63294EN/02
1.8 VGA Display

#7 9700 SBC FWC #6 GSF #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 NBC #0 SBC
00000000
: Determines the color of the characters on selected window bars. 0 : White 1 : Black
NBC
: Determines the color of the characters on unselected window bars. 0 : White 1 : Black
GSF
: Determines whether to shift graphical representations of macros executed in conversational mode (except the setup macros). 0 : Shifted by an amount equal to three characters (48 dots) along the Y axis in the + direction 1 : Not shifted
FWC
: Determines whether the contour figure is displayed when the figure window is closed. 0 : Not displayed 1 : Displayed overlapping the current screen
9701
Standard color data of graphic color number 1 : : :
9715
Standard color data of graphic color number 15
9716
Standard color data of character color number 1 : : :
9715
Standard color data of character color number 15
These parameters need not be set because they are automatically set through display color memory operation on the coloring setting screen. Unit of data: 6digit number of ff 55nn (ff : data for red, 55 : data for green, nn : data for blue) If the number is less than six digits, the missing highorder digits are all handled as zero. Valid data range: 00 to 15 for each color (same values as those of the hue levels on the animation drawing parameter page 2 screen.) If a value of 16 or greater is specified, it is assumed to be 15.
440
B63294EN/02
2. ALARMS
2. ALARMS
When a machining program created conversationally is executed, errors in the program cause the alarms listed below to be issued. If an alarm not listed below is issued, refer to the operators manual of the NC.
2.1 Alarms Related to Machining Other than Contouring

All alarms related to machining other than contouring are displayed with alarm number 3175. Message INPUT VALUE IS ERRONEOUS COPIED DOUBLE DEFINITION ERROR IN COPY TOTAL Description Necessary data is not entered. Entered data is invalid. A copy already set is set again. The total number of copies is invalid. The number of entered items is less than the total number. The workpiece coordinate system is used in each menu when all/group copy is specified. The specified tool cannot be used. The X or Y coordinate is missing when both are needed. The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0 or less. The tool interferes with the opposite surface. The chamfering tool interferes with the bottom surface (Z point) in chamfering. The chamfering tool is placed at an angle less than the taper angle in taper machining on a side surface. The offset data corresponding to the specified D code is 0. Corner R machining cannot be performed because the cutter diameter is larger than corner R. The cutting allowance on the bottom surface is not sufficient in topsurface taper machining because the taper angle is too large. Because the taper angle is too large, the side faces whose insides should be cut intersect each other so that the bottom face is lost. A menu copy is specified before the hole position group menu. The tool interferes with the opposite edge because the length of approach is too long. The distance the tool moves at one time is less than 0.00001 mm because the cutting width is too small. Machining is impossible because the cutter diameter is too large. The T code is null or invalid. The angle at which the chamfering tool is placed is not specified in the tool file. Related operations All menus Copy Copy (random)
WORK COORD. SELLING COM. UNAPPLI. TOOL WAS SETTED DATA IS LACKING OFFSET VALUE IS UNDER 0 INTERFERE WITH WORK (RING) CHAMF. TOOL EXCEDS Z POINT CHAMF. TOOL ANGLE IS SMALL
All menus Drilling Copy (random) Point group Facing Ring machining Side machining Pocket cutting Side machining
OFFSET VALUE IS 0 DIA. IS BIGGER THAN R.
Side machining Pocket cutting Side machining Pocket cutting Side machining
TAPER IS INSUFFICIENT
TAPER ANGLE IS TOO BIG
Side machining
MENU COPY IS SPECIFIED APPROACH AMOUNT IS BIG CUT WIDTH IS TOO SMALL
Hole position group Side machining Pocket cutting Pocket cutting
TOOL IS TOO BIG TCODE IS NOT CORRECT CHAMF.TOOL ANGLE IS LACK.
Side machining Pocket cutting All menus Side machining Pocket cutting
441
2. ALARMS
B63294EN/02
2.2 Alarms Related to Contouring

The alarm numbers of the displayed alarms related to contouring are classified as follows: (1) Contour side cutting 3190 (2) Contour pocketing 3191 (3) Contour grooving 3192 Message LACKING BOTTOM REMOV LACKING Z POINT LACKING SIDE REMOV LACKING RGH. TOOL ID NO. LACKING FIN. TOOL ID NO. LACKING CHM. TOOL ID NO. LACKING RGH. SPINDLE SPEED LACKING FIN. SPINDLE SPEED LACKING CHM. SPINDLE SPEED UNABLE TO EXECUTE TOOL TRACE CLOSE TO OUTER AND ISLAND TOOL IS TOO SMALL UNABLEBIDIRECTIONAL CUTTING TO T. ISLAND GT 6 EFFICTIVE CUTTING WIDTH IS 0 TOOL OFF SET MEASUREMENT IS 0 BOTTOM REMOV. LT BOTTOM FIN. SIDE REMOV. LT SIDE FINSH LACKING RGH. HCODE NO. LACKING FIN. HCODE NO. LACKING CHM. HCODE NO. LACKING RGH. DCODE NO. LACKING FIN. DCODE NO. LACKING CHM. DCODE NO. INCORRECT OFFSET DIRECTION INCORRECT CUTTING DIRECTION INCORRECT END OF ISLAND Description The cutting allowance is 0. The Z coordinate is not entered. The cutting allowance is 0. The tool ID number is not entered. The tool ID number is not entered. The tool ID number is not entered. The spindle speed is not entered. The spindle speed is not entered. The spindle speed is not entered. The machining paths for the pocket wall and island wall interfere. There is a conflict in a mesh search. Related operations (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (2) (2)
The start point of the tool path for outer wall ma- (2) chining does not coincide with the end point. Twoway cutting is possible only for a simple figure without an island. More than six islands cannot be specified. The valid cutting width is 0. The offset is not set. The cutting allowance on the bottom surface is less than the finishing allowance. The cutting allowance on a side surface is less than the finishing allowance. The tool length compensation number is not entered. The tool length compensation number is not entered. The tool length compensation number is not entered. The tool length compensation number is not entered. The tool length compensation number is not entered. The tool length compensation number is not entered. No data is entered. No data is entered. Subsequent data for the pocket island is not entered. (2) (2) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) (1), (2), (3) Pocket wall Pocket island (2) (2)
442
IV. GLOSSARY
B63294EN/02
1. GLOSSARY
1. GLOSSARY
This glossary lists the terms specific to Super CAPi M. For an explanation of CNCspecific terms, refer to the glossary of the CNC operators manual. Name All copy Animated simulation Approach Meaning A method of specifying the same processes as those of a machining program more than once. In machining simulation, a function that draws how cutting by a tool is performed. In contour side cutting, the operation of the tool to reach the contour figure from the machining start point. Usually, the tool approaches the machining surface so that no cutter mark is applied and the tool comes in contact with the contour figure. In a conversational editing function, a function that, when a tool is selected, automatically selects the cutting conditions for that tool. In a conversational editing function, a function that, when the final tool to be used is selected, automatically selects the tool to be machined with that final tool from the pretool list. A function that, when machining is in progress using a machining program, draws another machining program. Any of the functions that create and edit machining programs and perform machining simulation in conversational mode. An automatic programming function that allows creation and modification of conversational format programs. A machining program entered in conversational mode. Usually, a conversational format program does not use CNCspecific command codes such as G codes. Automatically expanding or reducing a process path or machining profile so that it fits in the screen. In a variety of machining types, a block of data relating to a single figure. A method of specifying the same machining pattern as that in a certain process of a machining program more than once. One method of specifying the contour figure repetition function. In the entry of a conversational editing function, it is used to copy a certain contour in parallel to the X or Yaxis. A program used for machining. It can refer to either a conversational program or an NC format program. Any of the keys on the MDI on which alphanumeric characters and symbols are stamped. The term is used to distinguish these keys from the keys displayed on the screen (soft keys). One method of specifying the contour figure repetition function. In the entry of a conversational editing function, it is used to copy a certain contour figure symmetrically with respect to any linear axis. A machining program created in NC format, using CNCspecific command codes such as G codes. The number of tool offset sets. (For its meaning, see the meaning of Number of tool offset data.) Total number of tool offset data sets for a machining center. For example, tool length compensations (figure compensation and wear compensation), cutter compensations (figure compensation and wear compensation), and other items are stored as a single set with a single offset number. A function that automatically reorders machining processes to reduce the number of tool changes. It is possible to reorder processes manually. Memory area used to store machining programs.
Automatic cutting condition selection Automatic tool selection function
Background drawing Conversational automatic programming function Conversational editing function Conversational format program
Drawing scaling Figure block Group copy Linear movement
Machining program MDI key
Mirror transformation
NC format program Number of tool offset data Number of tool offset data
Optimum process editing
Part program storage area
445
1. GLOSSARY
Name Path number Meaning
B63294EN/02
In contour pocketing, the number used by the system to identify the type of a figure block. A path number is automatically set when a figure block is input. Serial number of data in the pretool list. Figure block in which the coordinates of the end point are not known. There are cases in which the coordinates of the end point in a pending block can be calculated using the subsequently entered figure block. Memory area used to store the ID numbers of the series of tools used in a single machining process. One method of specifying the contour figure repetition function. In the entry of a conversational editing function, it is used to rotate or copy a certain contour figure about any coordinates. Coordinates at which the tool does not interfere with the workpiece, jig, and other objects no matter where the tool moves on the XY plane. Memory area used to store data relating to the tool to be used with a conversational editing function. The number used to manage a tool registered with the tool file. In a conversational program, the number is used to specify the tool. In machining simulation, the screen on which the path of the tool is drawn, as well as the machining profile and the tool figure.
Pattern number Pending block
Pretool list Rotation
Safety point Z
Tool file Tool ID number Tool path figure
446
B63294EN/02
Index
[Numbers]
Changing the screen display colors, 66 Checking a Uaxis Machining Program, 371 Circle BiDir (ZF05), 170 Circle Inside (ZS05), 196 Circle Outside Cutting (ZS04), 195 Circle Pocket (ZP03), 215 Circle UniDir (ZF04), 169 Circular Surface (Ring) (ZF07), 173 Cont Pocket Prep (ZP08), 225 Contour, 432 Contour Alarms, 335 Contour Cutting Programming, 277 Contour Editing, 332 Contour Figure Window Function, 333 Contour Grooving Preparation (ZP09), 231 Contour Prepare (ZS09), 202 Contour Repetition Function (Option), 326 Contour Side Cutting, 277 Conversational Data Setting and Reference [Basic Menu 8], 74 Coolant (ZN06), 241 Coordinate System for Uaxis Machining, 379 Copy (Pattern) (ZC07), 276 Copy (Pattern) (ZF09), 173 Copy (Pattern) (ZL10), 157
2 + 1/2 Concave Cut, 261 2 + 1/2 Concave Cut Prep. (ZC01), 262 2 + 1/2 Convex Cut, 244 2 + 1/2 Convex Cut Prep. (ZV01), 245
[A]
Alarms, 441 Alarms Raised During NC Statement Output, 72 Alarms Related to Contouring, 442 Alarms Related to Machining Other than Contouring, 441 All Copy (Pattern) (ZI06), 114 All Copy (Random) (ZI05), 112 All Copy Mirror (ZI10), 121 Animated Simulation, 57 Appendix, 397 Arc (Differ Space) (ZL08), 155 Arc (Same Space) (ZL07), 154 Arc (ZN03), 238 Arithmetic Functions, 100
[B]
B Axis Rotation (ZI03), 109 Backboring (ZH05), 137 Background Drawing (Optional), 63 Background Editing, 7 Bolt Hole Circle (ZL06), 153 Boring (ZH03), 133
Copy (Pattern) (ZP11), 234 Copy (Pattern) (ZS11), 203 Copy (Pattern) (ZV07), 260 Copy (random) (ZC06), 276 Copy (Random) (ZF08), 173 Copy (Random) (ZL09), 156 Copy (Random) (ZP10), 234 Copy (Random) (ZS10), 203 Copy (Random) (ZV06), 260
[C]
Calculating a Contour Figure, 308 CAP Control, 418 CAP File, 424 Categorized Tool Directories, 84 CCV Half CYL L (ZC04), 275 CCV Hemisphere (ZC03), 274 CCV HLF CYL Ring (ZC05), 276 CCV QUAD PR (ZC02), 269 Centering, 384 i1
Copy Function, 37 Creating a Machining Program [Basic Menu 1], 12 Creating and Editing a Uaxis Machining Program, 345 Cutting Condition File A, 85 Cutting Condition File B, 86 CVX Half CYL L (ZV04), 258 CVX Hemisphere (ZV03), 256 CVX HLF CYL Ring (ZV05), 260 CVX QUAD PR (ZV02), 249
Index
B63294EN/02
[D]
Data I/O, 76 Data Setting, 391 Delete Function, 40 Direct Operation of C.A.P. Program, 400 Drilling (ZH01), 126
Initial Value File, 78 Inner Contour, 351 Inner Groove, 360 Inner Thread, 369 Input Data, 7 Insert Function, 32
[E]
Editing a Machining Program [Basic Menu 1], 29 Embedding Tool Management Numbers, 101 End Face Contour, 353 End Face Groove, 362 End of Program (ZI02), 108
[L]
Lefthanded Coordinate System Capability, 374 Line (Differ SPC) (ZL03), 150 Line (Same Space) (ZL02), 148 Line (ZN02), 237
[M] [F]
Facing, 159 Facing Prepare (ZF01), 160 Feed Rate (ZN05), 240 Fine Boring (ZH04), 135 Machining Menu Descriptions, 102 Machining Program Check [Basic Menu 3], 50 Machining Program Optimization [Basic Menu 2], 42 Machining Time Display, 62 Macro Executor, 417 Manual Overview, 3 Menu Control, 429
[G]
General Procedure from Programming to Execution, 5 Glossary, 445 Grid (ZL04), 151 Grooving (ZP07), 222 Group Copy (Pattern) (ZI08), 117 Group Copy (Random) (ZI07), 116 Group Copy (Turn) (ZI09), 119 Group Copy Mirror (ZI11), 123 Group of Points (ZL01), 147
Modify Function, 30 Move Function, 34
[N]
NC Language, 235 NC Language (ZN08), 243 NC Language Preparation (ZI04), 110 NC Statement Output for G10 Commands for Animated Simulation, 373 NC Statement Output Function, 69 NC Statement Output Function [Basic Menu 4], 69 Notes on Drawing, 68
[H]
Hole Machining, 125 Hole Pattern, 145
[O]
Offset File for Multi Workpieces, 93
[I]
Initial Setting (ZI01), 106 Initial Setting, etc., 104 i2
One Side (ZS08), 199 Operating Precautions, 7 Operation, 383 Optimal Process Editing Algorithm, 46
B63294EN/02
Index
Side Preparation (ZS01), 176 Spindle (ZN07), 242 Spot Facing (Circle Cut) (ZH08), 143 Square (Ring) (ZF06), 171 Square (UniDir) (ZF02), 164 Square BiDir (ZF03), 167 Square Inside (ZS03), 193 Square Outside (ZS02), 185 Square Pocket (ZP02), 212 Symbols, 4
Optimal Process Editing Function (Automatic Alteration), 44 Optimal Process Editing Function (Manual Alteration), 48 Other Functions, 96 Outer Contour, 345 Outer Groove, 356 Outer Thread, 366 Outline, 382 Overview of Fanuc Super Capi M, 11
[P]
Parallelogram (ZL05), 152 Parameters, 7, 415 Parameters Related to Graphic Display, 415 Peck Drilling (ZH02), 131 Pocketing, 204 Pocketting Prep. (ZP01), 206 Polygonal Pocket (ZP05), 217 Polygonal Pokt (with Radius) (ZP06), 221 Positioning (ZN01), 236 Pretool List, 80 Program List, 96 Program Restart, 406 Program Stop/End (ZN04), 239 Tapping (ZH06), 139 Tool Directory, 83 Tool File, 81
[T]
Tool File for Uaxis Machining, 376 Tool List, 79 Tool Measuring, 389 Tool Offset Number, 7 Tool Path Drawing, 50 Track Inside (ZS07), 198 Track Outside (ZS06), 197 Track Pocket (ZP04), 216 Types of Machining Menus, 102
[R]
Reaming (ZH07), 141 Restrictions and Rules on Calculating the Contour, 337 Restrictions Imposed on Uaxis Machining, 379
[U]
Uaxis Machining (Option), 343 Uaxis Machining Menu Items, 343 Uaxis Machining Operations, 380 Uaxis Machining Program Creation, 381 Uaxis Machining Program NC Statement Output, 373
[S]
Screen Configuration, 400 Screen Display Colors, 440 Settings Related to the Reader/Punch Interface, 73 Setup Guidance Function, 382 Side Cutting, 174
[W]
Work Overview, 11 Workpiece Material Name, 438
i3
Revision Record FANUC Super CAPi M OPERATORS MANUAL (B63294EN)
02
Feb., 2001
Applied to 16iMB, 18iMB, and 21iMB
01
Sep., 2000
Edition
Date
Contents
Edition
Date
Contents
EUROPEAN HEADQUARTERS GRAND-DUCHE DE LUXEMBOURG GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. Zone Industrielle L-6468 Echternach (+352) 727979 - 1 (+352) 727979 214
www.gefanuc-europe.com
BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. - Netherlands Branch Postbus 7230 - NL-4800 GE Breda Minervum 1603A - NL-4817 ZL Breda (+31) 76-5783 201 (CNC) (+31) 76-5783 212 (PLC) (+31) 76-5870 181 CZECH REPUBLIC GE Fanuc Automation CR s.r.o. U studanky 3 CZ-170 00 Praha 7 (+420) 2 333 72 502 (CNC) (+420) 2 333 72 503 (PLC) (+420) 2 333 70 821 FRANCE GE Fanuc Automation France S.A. 39, rue du Saule Trapu, BP 219 F-91882 Massy Cedex (+33) 1 69 75 86 39 (CNC) (+33) 1 69 75 86 20 (PLC) (+33) 1 69 75 86 49
www.gefanuc.cz
GERMANY GE Fanuc Eberle Automation GmbH Ernst-Weyden-Str. 7 D-51105 Kln (Cologne) (+49) 221-83904-53 (+49) 221-83904-55
www.gefanuc.fr
GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Elberfelderstr. 45 D-40724 Hilden (+49) 2103 247410 (Laser/CNC) (+49) 2103 247420 (Laser/CNC)
www.gefanuc.nl
GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Bernhuser Strae 22 D-73765 Neuhausen a.d.F (+49) 7158 187 400 (+49) 7158 187 455 (CNC) (+49) 7158 187 466 (PLC)
www.gefanuc.de
GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Obere Hauptstr. 72 D-09244 Lichtenau (+49) 37208 695 20(CNC) (+49) 37208 695 30 (PLC) (+49) 37208 695 55
www.gefanuc.de
GERMANY GE Fanuc Eberle Automation GmbH Sdwestpark 48 D-90449 Nrnberg (+49) 911 9672 100 (PLC) (+49) 911 9672 200 (PLC)
www.gefanuc.de
GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland GmbH Bensheimer Str. 61 D-65428 Rsselsheim (+49) 6142 357600 (+49) 6142 357611
www.gefanuc.de
ITALY GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a Via Tortona 27 I-20144 Milano (+39) 02 4242 280 (PLC) (+39) 02 4242 511 (PLC)
www.gefanuc.de
GERMANY GE Fanuc Eberle Automation GmbH Reichenbergerstr. 6 D-33605 Bielefeld (+49) 521 92445 0 (PLC) (+49) 521 92445 30 (PLC)
www.gefanuc.de
ITALY GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.l. Piazza Tirana 24/4B I-20147 Milano (+39) 02 413 81 41 (CNC) (+39) 02 419 669 (CNC)
www.gefanuc.de
POLAND GE Fanuc Automation Polska Sp. z o.o. ul. Czerwinskiego 6 40-123 Katowice - Poland (+48) 32 258 5077 (+48) 32 258 5077 SWEDEN GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB Hammarbacken 4 S-19149 Sollentuna (+46) 8 444 5520 (+46) 8 444 5521
www.gefanuc.it
SPAIN GE Fanuc Automation Espaa S.A. Polgono Industrial Olaso Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11 E-20870 Elgoibar (+34) 943 74 82 90 (CNC) (+34) 943 74 44 21 (CNC)
www.gefanuc.it
SPAIN GE Power Controls Ibrica S.L. Calle Marqus de Comillas, 1 E-08225 Terrassa (Barcelona) (+34) 93 736 58 28 (PLC) (+34) 93 788 24 03 (PLC)
www.gefanuc.es
UNITED KINGDOM GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd. Unit 1 - Mill Square Featherstone Road Wolverton Mill South Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ (+44) 1908 84 4000 (+44) 1908 84 4001
www.gefanuc.es
SWITZERLAND GE Fanuc Automation Filiale Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz Erlenstrasse 35a CH-2555 Brgg b. Biel (+41) 32 366 63 63 (CNC) (+41) 32 366 63 33 (PLC) (+41) 32 366 63 64 (CNC) (+41) 32 366 63 34 (PLC)
www.gefanuc.se
www.gefanuceur.co.uk
www.gefanuc.ch
4/01
Printed at GE Fanuc Automation S.A. , Luxembourg
February 2001

Fanuc Super Cap I M Operator

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fanuc Super Cap I M Operator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GE Fanuc Automation Europe

Computer Numerical Controls

TECHNOLOGY AND MORE

WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

II. Super CAPi M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machining Program Optimization [Basic Menu 2] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Machining Program Check [Basic Menu 3] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NC Statement Output Function [Basic Menu 4] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conversational Data Setting and Reference [Basic Menu 8] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2. MACHINING MENU DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

2 + 1/2 Convex Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.10 2 + 1/2 Concave Cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.11 Contour Cutting Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.12 Uaxis Machining (Option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.13 Setup Guidance Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.14 Direct Operation of C.A.P. Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

III. PARAMETERS AND ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

IV. GLOSSARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

3. GENERAL PROCEDURE FROM PROGRAMMING TO EXECUTION

Creation and editing of a program by the conversational automatic programming function

Optimization of the machining program

Program check by drawing

See Section 1.5 of Chapter II. (MEMORY mode)

See Section 1.6 of Chapter II. (MEMORY mode)

4.2 Background Editing

4.3 Tool Offset Number

II. Super CAPi M

1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M

1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M

The following sections describe each menu with examples.

1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M

1.2 Creating a Machining Program [Basic Menu 1]

> INPUT PROGRAM NO. Program creation screen Automatic

Enter a program name.

Selection of a machining menu

FACING SIDE POCKET NC CUTING /GROOV LANGUAGE

2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY

Specification of the machining data

2+1/2 2+1/2 AUXCVX CCV ILIARY

1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M

Facing start menu

Corresponding facing menu This step can be repeated.

. Side cutting start menu

Corresponding side cutting menu This step can be repeated.

. Contouring start menu

Corresponding contouring menu

. Pocketing start menu

Corresponding pocket cutting menu This step can be repeated.

Contour pocket / grooving start menu

Corresponding contouring menu

Corresponding 2 +1/2 menu This step can be repeated.

1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M

Ten soft keys Return key Next key

1. OVERVIEW OF Super CAPi M

7 FREE: 560 FREE:

DEMO SUS304 FCD45 SKD11 SUS41 ALUME SPECIAL

INPUT PROGRAM NO.

8 FREE: 640 FREE:

DEMO SUS304 FCD45 SKD11 SUS41 ALUME SPECIAL

TITLE INPUT : 1 PROG. TITLE : =MANUAL1_